Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Installation Guide en US

Red Hat Engineering Cont ent ServicesRdiger Landmann
Jack Reed Pet r Boko Tom apek

David Cant rell Hans De Goede Jon Mast ers
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6
Installation Guide
Inst alling Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 6.6 for all archit ect ures
Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 6 Inst allat ion Guide
Inst alling Red Hat Ent erprise Linux 6.6 for all archit ect ures
Rdiger Landmann
Red Hat Engineering Content Services
[email protected]
Jack Reed
[email protected]
Petr Boko
[email protected]
Tom apek
[email protected]
David Cantrell
[email protected]
VNC installation
Hans De Goede
[email protected]
iSCSI
Jon Masters
[email protected]
Driver updates
Edited by
Rdiger Landmann
[email protected]
Jack Reed
[email protected]
Petr Boko
[email protected]
Legal Notice
Copyright 2014 Red Hat, Inc. and others.
This document is licensed by Red Hat under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0
Unported License. If you distribute this document, or a modified version of it, you must provide
attribution to Red Hat, Inc. and provide a link to the original. If the document is modified, all Red
Hat trademarks must be removed.
Red Hat, as the licensor of this document, waives the right to enforce, and agrees not to assert,
Section 4d of CC-BY-SA to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law.
Red Hat, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, the Shadowman logo, JBoss, MetaMatrix, Fedora, the Infinity
Logo, and RHCE are trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., registered in the United States and other
countries.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
XFS is a trademark of Silicon Graphics International Corp. or its subsidiaries in the United
States and/or other countries.
MySQL is a registered trademark of MySQL AB in the United States, the European Union and
other countries.
Node.js is an official trademark of Joyent. Red Hat Software Collections is not formally
related to or endorsed by the official Joyent Node.js open source or commercial project.
The OpenStack Word Mark and OpenStack Logo are either registered trademarks/service
marks or trademarks/service marks of the OpenStack Foundation, in the United States and other
countries and are used with the OpenStack Foundation' s permission. We are not affiliated with,
endorsed or sponsored by the OpenStack Foundation, or the OpenStack community.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Abstract
This manual explains how to boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 installation program
(anaconda) and to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 on 32-bit and 64-bit x86 systems, 64-bit
Power Systems servers, and IBM System z. It also covers advanced installation methods such
as kickstart installations, PXE installations, and installations over VNC. Finally, it describes
common post-installation tasks and explains how to troubleshoot installation problems.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Chapt er 1. Obt aining Red Hat Ent erprise Linux
Chapt er 2. Making Media
2.1. Maki ng an Instal l ati on DVD
2.2. Maki ng Mi ni mal Boot Medi a
2.2.1. Mi ni mal USB Boot Medi a for BIOS-based Systems
2.2.2. Mi ni mal USB Boot Medi a for UEFI-based Systems
Part I. x86, AMD64, and Int el 64 Inst allat ion and Boot ing
Chapt er 3. Planning for Inst allat ion on t he x86 Archit ect ure
3.1. Upgrade or Instal l ?
3.2. Is Your Hardware Compati bl e?
3.3. Supported Instal l ati on Hardware
3.4. RAID and Other Di sk Devi ces
3.4.1. Hardware RAID
3.4.2. Software RAID
3.4.3. Fi reWi re and USB Di sks
3.5. Notes on UEFI Support
3.5.1. Feature Support
3.5.2. Di sk Dri ves wi th MBR on UEFI Systems
3.6. Do You Have Enough Di sk Space?
3.7. Sel ecti ng an Instal l ati on Method
3.8. Choose a Boot Method
Chapt er 4. Preparing for Inst allat ion
4.1. Prepari ng for a Network Instal l ati on
4.1.1. Prepari ng for FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS Instal l ati on
4.1.2. Prepari ng for an NFS Instal l ati on
4.2. Prepari ng for a Hard Dri ve Instal l ati on
Chapt er 5. Syst em Specificat ions List
Chapt er 6. Updat ing Drivers During Inst allat ion on Int el and AMD Syst ems
6.1. Li mi tati ons of Dri ver Updates Duri ng Instal l ati on
6.2. Prepari ng for a Dri ver Update Duri ng Instal l ati on
6.2.1. Prepari ng to Use a Dri ver Update Image Fi l e
6.2.1.1. Prepari ng to use an i mage fi l e on l ocal storage
6.2.2. Prepari ng a Dri ver Di sc
6.2.2.1. Creati ng a dri ver update di sc on CD or DVD
6.2.3. Prepari ng an Ini ti al RAM Di sk Update
6.3. Performi ng a Dri ver Update Duri ng Instal l ati on
6.3.1. Let the Instal l er Fi nd a Dri ver Update Di sk Automati cal l y
6.3.2. Let the Instal l er Prompt You for a Dri ver Update
6.3.3. Use a Boot Opti on to Speci fy a Dri ver Update Di sk
6.3.4. Sel ect a PXE Target that Incl udes a Dri ver Update
6.4. Speci fyi ng the Locati on of a Dri ver Update Image Fi l e or a Dri ver Update Di sk
Chapt er 7. Boot ing t he Inst aller
7.1. Starti ng the Instal l ati on Program
7.1.1. Booti ng the Instal l ati on Program on x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Systems
7.1.2. The Boot Menu
7.1.3. Addi ti onal Boot Opti ons
7.1.3.1. Kernel Opti ons
14
16
16
17
17
18
20
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
25
27
27
28
28
29
32
34
34
35
35
35
36
36
39
40
40
40
41
42
42
45
46
46
47
48
50
T able of Cont ent s
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3.1. Kernel Opti ons
7.2. Instal l i ng from a Di fferent Source
7.3. Booti ng from the Network Usi ng PXE
Chapt er 8. Configuring Language and Inst allat ion Source
8.1. The Text Mode Instal l ati on Program User Interface
8.1.1. Usi ng the Keyboard to Navi gate
8.2. Language Sel ecti on
8.3. Instal l ati on Method
8.3.1. Instal l i ng from a DVD
8.3.2. Instal l i ng from a Hard Dri ve
8.3.3. Performi ng a Network Instal l ati on
8.3.4. Instal l i ng vi a NFS
8.3.5. Instal l i ng vi a FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
8.4. Veri fyi ng Medi a
Chapt er 9. Inst alling Using Anaconda
9.2. The Graphi cal Instal l ati on Program User Interface
9.2.1. Screenshots Duri ng Instal l ati on
9.2.2. A Note About Vi rtual Consol es
9.3. Wel come to Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux
9.5. Keyboard Confi gurati on
9.6. Storage Devi ces
9.6.1. The Storage Devi ces Sel ecti on Screen
9.6.1.1. Advanced Storage Opti ons
9.6.1.1.1. Sel ect and confi gure a network i nterface
9.6.1.1.2. Confi gure i SCSI parameters
9.6.1.1.3. Confi gure FCoE Parameters
9.7. Setti ng the Hostname
9.7.1. Edi ti ng Network Connecti ons
9.7.1.1. Opti ons common to al l types of connecti on
9.7.1.2. The Wi red tab
9.7.1.3. The 802.1x Securi ty tab
9.7.1.4. The IPv4 Setti ngs tab
9.7.1.4.1. Edi ti ng IPv4 routes
9.7.1.6. Restart a network devi ce
9.8. Ti me Zone Confi gurati on
9.9. Set the Root Password
9.10. Assi gn Storage Devi ces
9.11. Ini ti al i zi ng the Hard Di sk
9.12. Upgradi ng an Exi sti ng System
9.12.1. The Upgrade Di al og
9.12.2. Upgradi ng Usi ng the Instal l er
9.12.3. Updati ng the Boot Loader Confi gurati on
9.13. Di sk Parti ti oni ng Setup
9.14. Choosi ng a Di sk Encrypti on Passphrase
9.15. Creati ng a Custom Layout or Modi fyi ng the Defaul t Layout
9.15.1. Create Storage
9.15.2. Addi ng Parti ti ons
9.15.2.1. Fi l e System Types
9.15.3. Create Software RAID
50
50
51
52
52
54
54
55
56
56
58
61
61
62
64
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
68
69
72
73
74
80
81
82
84
84
85
87
89
90
92
93
94
95
97
98
99
100
101
101
102
105
106
108
110
111
113
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.15.4. Create LVM Logi cal Vol ume
9.15.5. Recommended Parti ti oni ng Scheme
9.15.5.1. x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 systems
9.15.5.1.1. Advi ce on Parti ti ons
9.16. Wri te Changes to Di sk
9.17. Package Group Sel ecti on
9.17.1. Instal l i ng from Addi ti onal Reposi tori es
9.17.2. Customi zi ng the Software Sel ecti on
9.17.2.1. Core Network Servi ces
9.18. x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Confi gurati on
9.18.1. Advanced Boot Loader Confi gurati on
9.18.2. Rescue Mode
9.18.3. Al ternati ve Boot Loaders
9.19. Instal l i ng Packages
9.20. Instal l ati on Compl ete
Chapt er 10. T roubleshoot ing Inst allat ion on an Int el or AMD Syst em
10.1. You Are Unabl e to Boot Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux
10.1.1. Are You Unabl e to Boot Wi th Your RAID Card?
10.1.2. Is Your System Di spl ayi ng Si gnal 11 Errors?
10.2. Troubl e Begi nni ng the Instal l ati on
10.2.1. Probl ems wi th Booti ng i nto the Graphi cal Instal l ati on
10.3. Troubl e Duri ng the Instal l ati on
10.3.1. The " No devi ces found to i nstal l Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux" Error Message
10.3.2. Savi ng Traceback Messages
10.3.3. Troubl e wi th Parti ti on Tabl es
10.3.4. Usi ng Remai ni ng Space
10.3.5. The " dri ve must have a GPT di sk l abel " Error Message
10.3.6. Other Parti ti oni ng Probl ems
10.4. Probl ems After Instal l ati on
10.4.1. Troubl e Wi th the Graphi cal GRUB Screen on an x86-based System?
10.4.2. Booti ng i nto a Graphi cal Envi ronment
10.4.3. Probl ems wi th the X Wi ndow System (GUI)
10.4.4. Probl ems wi th the X Server Crashi ng and Non-Root Users
10.4.5. Probl ems When You Try to Log In
10.4.6. Is Your RAM Not Bei ng Recogni zed?
10.4.7. Your Pri nter Does Not Work
10.4.8. Apache HTTP Server or Sendmai l Stops Respondi ng Duri ng Startup
Part II. IBM Power Syst ems Inst allat ion and Boot ing
Chapt er 11. Planning for Inst allat ion on Power Syst ems Servers
11.1. Upgrade or Instal l ?
11.2. Supported Instal l ati on Hardware
11.3. Instal l ati on Tool s
11.4. Preparati on for IBM Power Systems servers
11.5. RAID and Other Di sk Devi ces
11.5.2. Software RAID
11.5.3. Fi reWi re and USB Di sks
11.6. Do You Have Enough Di sk Space?
11.7. Choose a Boot Method
113
115
118
118
121
123
123
125
128
129
130
133
134
135
135
136
137
137
137
137
138
138
139
139
139
146
146
146
146
147
147
147
148
148
149
149
150
150
151
152
152
152
152
153
153
154
154
154
154
155
156
3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapt er 13. Updat ing Drivers During Inst allat ion on IBM Power Syst ems Servers
13.1. Li mi tati ons of Dri ver Updates Duri ng Instal l ati on
13.2. Prepari ng for a Dri ver Update Duri ng Instal l ati on
13.2.1. Prepari ng to Use a Dri ver Update Image Fi l e
13.2.1.1. Prepari ng to use an i mage fi l e on l ocal storage
13.2.2. Prepari ng a Dri ver Di sc
13.2.2.1. Creati ng a dri ver update di sc on CD or DVD
13.2.3. Prepari ng an Ini ti al RAM Di sk Update
13.3. Performi ng a Dri ver Update Duri ng Instal l ati on
13.3.1. Let the Instal l er Fi nd a Dri ver Update Di sk Automati cal l y
13.3.2. Let the Instal l er Prompt You for a Dri ver Update
13.3.3. Use a Boot Opti on to Speci fy a Dri ver Update Di sk
13.3.4. Sel ect an Instal l ati on Server Target That Incl udes a Dri ver Update
13.4. Speci fyi ng the Locati on of a Dri ver Update Image Fi l e or a Dri ver Update Di sk
14.1. The Boot Menu
14.2. Instal l i ng from a Di fferent Source
14.3. Booti ng from the Network Usi ng a yaboot Instal l ati on Server
15.3.1. Begi nni ng Instal l ati on
15.3.1.1. Instal l i ng from a DVD
16.3. A Note About Li nux Vi rtual Consol es
16.4. Usi ng the HMC vterm
16.7. Keyboard Confi gurati on
16.8.1.1.1. Sel ect and confi gure a network i nterface
16.8.1.1.3. Confi gure FCoE Parameters
156
156
157
157
159
162
162
163
163
163
164
164
167
168
168
168
169
170
170
173
174
175
175
177
177
179
179
180
181
181
181
182
185
186
187
188
188
188
189
190
190
190
191
192
193
196
197
198
204
205
206
4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.14.1. The Upgrade Di al og
Chapt er 17. T roubleshoot ing Inst allat ion on an IBM Power Syst ems server
17.2. Troubl e Begi nni ng the Instal l ati on
17.2.1. Probl ems wi th Booti ng i nto the Graphi cal Instal l ati on
17.3.3. Troubl e wi th Parti ti on Tabl es
17.3.4. Other Parti ti oni ng Probl ems for IBM Power Systems Users
17.4.1. Unabl e to IPL from *NWSSTG
17.4.2. Booti ng i nto a Graphi cal Envi ronment
17.4.3. Probl ems wi th the X Wi ndow System (GUI)
17.4.4. Probl ems wi th the X Server Crashi ng and Non-Root Users
Part III. IBM Syst em z Archit ect ure - Inst allat ion and Boot ing
Chapt er 18. Planning for Inst allat ion on Syst em z
206
208
208
209
211
213
214
216
217
218
219
220
222
222
223
224
224
228
229
231
232
234
235
238
241
243
244
246
248
250
251
251
253
253
253
254
254
254
254
255
262
262
262
262
263
263
264
264
264
265
266
267
5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.1. Pre-Instal l ati on
18.2. Overvi ew of the System z Instal l ati on Procedure
18.2.1. Booti ng (IPL) the Instal l er
18.2.2. Instal l ati on Phase 1
18.3. Graphi cal User Interface wi th X11 or VNC
18.3.1. Instal l ati on usi ng X11 forwardi ng
18.3.2. Instal l ati on usi ng X11
18.3.3. Instal l ati on usi ng VNC
18.3.4. Instal l ati on usi ng a VNC l i stener
18.3.5. Automati ng the Instal l ati on wi th Ki ckstart
18.3.5.1. Every Instal l ati on Produces a Ki ckstart Fi l e
19.2.1. Accessi ng Instal l ati on Phase 3 and the Package Reposi tory on a Hard Dri ve
19.2.1.1. Prepari ng for Booti ng the Instal l er from a Hard Dri ve
Chapt er 20. Boot ing (IPL) t he Inst aller
20.1. Instal l i ng Under z/VM
20.1.1. Usi ng the z/VM Reader
20.1.2. Usi ng a Prepared DASD
20.1.3. Usi ng a Prepared FCP-attached SCSI Di sk
20.1.4. Usi ng an FCP-attached SCSI DVD Dri ve
20.2. Instal l i ng i n an LPAR
20.2.1. Usi ng an FTP Server
20.2.2. Usi ng the HMC or SE DVD Dri ve
20.2.3. Usi ng a Prepared DASD
20.2.4. Usi ng a Prepared FCP-attached SCSI Di sk
20.2.5. Usi ng an FCP-attached SCSI DVD Dri ve
Chapt er 21. Inst allat ion Phase 1: Configuring a Net work Device
21.1. A Note on Termi nal s
Chapt er 22. Inst allat ion Phase 2: Configuring Language and Inst allat ion Source
22.1. Non-i nteracti ve Li ne-Mode Instal l ati on
22.4.1. Instal l i ng from a DVD
22.6. Retri evi ng Phase 3 of the Instal l ati on Program
Chapt er 23. Inst allat ion Phase 3: Inst alling Using Anaconda
23.1. The Non-i nteracti ve Li ne-Mode Text Instal l ati on Program Output
267
267
267
269
269
269
270
270
271
271
272
272
272
272
274
274
274
275
276
276
278
280
280
281
282
282
283
283
284
284
284
284
285
286
289
291
291
291
293
293
294
295
295
296
296
297
298
298
300
300
300
6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.4. Confi gure the Instal l Termi nal
23.6.1.1. DASD l ow-l evel formatti ng
23.6.1.2.2. FCP Devi ces
23.19.1. IPL Under z/VM
23.19.2. IPL on an LPAR
23.19.3. Conti nui ng After Reboot (re-IPL)
Chapt er 24. T roubleshoot ing Inst allat ion on IBM Syst em z
24.2.3. Other Parti ti oni ng Probl ems
300
300
300
301
302
303
306
306
307
313
315
315
317
317
318
320
322
323
325
326
327
328
329
330
332
332
333
336
337
339
340
342
343
346
349
349
350
352
354
356
357
357
358
358
358
360
360
360
360
360
361
368
368
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.1. Remote Graphi cal Desktops and XDMCP
Chapt er 25. Configuring an Inst alled Linux on Syst em z Inst ance
25.1. Addi ng DASDs
25.1.1. Dynami cal l y Setti ng DASDs Onl i ne
25.1.2. Persi stentl y setti ng DASDs onl i ne
25.1.2.1. DASDs Whi ch Are Part of the Root Fi l e System
25.1.3. DASDs Whi ch Are Not Part of the Root Fi l e System
25.1.4. Prepari ng a New DASD wi th Low-l evel Formatti ng
25.1.5. Expandi ng Exi sti ng LVM Vol umes to New Storage Devi ces
25.2. Addi ng FCP-Attached Logi cal Uni ts (LUNs)
25.2.1. Dynami cal l y Acti vati ng an FCP LUN
25.2.2. Persi stentl y Acti vati ng FCP LUNs
25.2.2.1. FCP LUNs That Are Part of the Root Fi l e System
25.2.2.2. FCP LUNs That Are Not Part of the Root Fi l e System
25.3. Addi ng a Network Devi ce
25.3.1. Addi ng a qeth Devi ce
25.3.1.1. Dynami cal l y Addi ng a qeth Devi ce
25.3.1.2. Dynami cal l y Removi ng a qeth Devi ce
25.3.1.3. Persi stentl y Addi ng a qeth Devi ce
25.3.2. Addi ng an LCS Devi ce
25.3.2.1. Dynami cal l y Addi ng an LCS Devi ce
25.3.2.2. Persi stentl y Addi ng an LCS Devi ce
25.3.3. Mappi ng Subchannel s and Network Devi ce Names
25.3.4. Confi guri ng a System z Network Devi ce for Network Root Fi l e System
Chapt er 26. Paramet er and Configurat ion Files
26.1. Requi red Parameters
26.2. The z/VM Confi gurati on Fi l e
26.3. Instal l ati on Network Parameters
26.4. VNC and X11 Parameters
26.5. Loader Parameters
26.6. Parameters for Ki ckstart Instal l ati ons
26.7. Mi scel l aneous Parameters
26.8. Sampl e Parameter Fi l e and CMS Confi gurati on Fi l e
Chapt er 27. IBM Syst em z References
27.1. IBM System z Publ i cati ons
27.2. IBM Redbooks Publ i cati ons for System z
27.3. Onl i ne Resources
Part IV. Advanced Inst allat ion Opt ions
Chapt er 28. Boot Opt ions
28.1. Confi guri ng the Instal l ati on System at the Boot Menu
28.1.1. Speci fyi ng the Language
28.1.2. Confi guri ng the Interface
28.1.3. Updati ng anaconda
28.1.4. Speci fyi ng the Instal l ati on Method
28.1.5. Speci fyi ng the Network Setti ngs
28.1.5.1. Confi guri ng a Bonded Interface
28.2. Enabl i ng Remote Access to the Instal l ati on System
368
368
369
369
369
370
370
370
371
371
373
374
375
377
377
378
378
380
380
381
381
384
384
387
387
388
389
390
391
391
392
392
396
396
397
397
398
400
400
400
401
403
404
404
404
404
405
405
406
406
407
8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.2. Enabl i ng Remote Access to the Instal l ati on System
28.2.1. Enabl i ng Remote Access wi th VNC
28.2.2. Connecti ng the Instal l ati on System to a VNC Li stener
28.2.3. Enabl i ng Remote Access wi th ssh
28.2.4. Enabl i ng Remote Access wi th Tel net
28.3. Loggi ng to a Remote System Duri ng the Instal l ati on
28.3.1. Confi guri ng a Log Server
28.4. Automati ng the Instal l ati on wi th Ki ckstart
28.5. Enhanci ng Hardware Support
28.5.1. Overri di ng Automati c Hardware Detecti on
28.6. Usi ng the Mai ntenance Boot Modes
28.6.1. Veri fyi ng Boot Medi a
28.6.2. Booti ng Your Computer wi th the Rescue Mode
28.6.3. Upgradi ng Your Computer
Chapt er 29. Inst alling Wit hout Media
29.1. Retri evi ng Boot Fi l es
29.2. Edi ti ng the GRUB Confi gurati on
29.3. Booti ng to Instal l ati on
Chapt er 30. Set t ing Up an Inst allat ion Server
30.1. Setti ng Up the Network Server
30.2. Network Boot Confi gurati on
30.2.1. Confi guri ng PXE Boot for BIOS
30.2.2. Confi guri ng PXE Boot for EFI
30.2.3. Confi guri ng for Power Systems Servers
30.3. Starti ng the tftp Server
30.4. Addi ng a Custom Boot Message
30.5. Performi ng the Instal l ati on
Chapt er 31. Inst alling T hrough VNC
31.1. VNC Vi ewer
31.2. VNC Modes i n Anaconda
31.2.1. Di rect Mode
31.2.2. Connect Mode
31.3. Instal l ati on Usi ng VNC
31.3.1. Instal l ati on Exampl e
31.3.2. Ki ckstart Consi derati ons
31.3.3. Fi rewal l Consi derati ons
31.4. References
Chapt er 32. Kickst art Inst allat ions
32.1. What are Ki ckstart Instal l ati ons?
32.2. How Do You Perform a Ki ckstart Instal l ati on?
32.3. Creati ng the Ki ckstart Fi l e
32.4. Ki ckstart Opti ons
32.4.1. Advanced Parti ti oni ng Exampl e
32.5. Package Sel ecti on
32.6. Pre-i nstal l ati on Scri pt
32.6.1. Exampl e Pre-i nstal l ati on Scri pt
32.7. Post-i nstal l ati on Scri pt
32.7.1. Exampl es
32.7.1.1. Regi steri ng and Then Mounti ng an NFS Share
32.7.1.2. Regi steri ng a System i n RHN Cl assi c
32.7.1.3. Runni ng subscri pti on-manager as a Post-Instal l Scri pt
407
407
408
408
408
409
409
410
411
411
412
412
413
413
414
414
414
415
416
416
416
416
418
420
421
421
421
423
423
423
423
424
424
424
425
426
426
427
427
427
427
428
460
461
463
463
464
465
465
466
466
9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.7.1.3. Runni ng subscri pti on-manager as a Post-Instal l Scri pt
32.8. Maki ng the Ki ckstart Fi l e Avai l abl e
32.8.1. Creati ng Ki ckstart Boot Medi a
32.8.2. Maki ng the Ki ckstart Fi l e Avai l abl e on the Network
32.9. Maki ng the Instal l ati on Tree Avai l abl e
32.10. Starti ng a Ki ckstart Instal l ati on
Chapt er 33. Kickst art Configurat or
33.1. Basi c Confi gurati on
33.3. Boot Loader Opti ons
33.4. Parti ti on Informati on
33.4.1. Creati ng Parti ti ons
33.4.1.1. Creati ng Software RAID Parti ti ons
33.5. Network Confi gurati on
33.6. Authenti cati on
33.7. Fi rewal l Confi gurati on
33.7.1. SELi nux Confi gurati on
33.8. Di spl ay Confi gurati on
33.9. Package Sel ecti on
33.10. Pre-Instal l ati on Scri pt
33.11. Post-Instal l ati on Scri pt
33.11.1. Chroot Envi ronment
33.11.2. Use an Interpreter
33.12. Savi ng the Fi l e
Part V. Aft er Inst allat ion
Chapt er 34. First boot
34.1. Li cense Informati on
34.2. Confi guri ng the Subscri pti on Servi ce
34.2.1. Set Up Software Updates
34.2.2. Choose Servi ce
34.2.3. Subscri pti on Management Regi strati on
34.3. Create User
34.3.1. Authenti cati on Confi gurati on
34.4. Date and Ti me
34.5. Kdump
Chapt er 35. Your Next St eps
35.1. Updati ng Your System
35.1.1. Dri ver Update rpm Packages
35.2. Fi ni shi ng an Upgrade
35.3. Swi tchi ng to a Graphi cal Logi n
35.3.1. Enabl i ng Access to Software Reposi tori es from the Command Li ne
35.3.1.1. Enabl i ng Access to Software Reposi tori es Through the Internet
35.3.1.2. Usi ng a Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux Instal l ati on DVD as a Software Reposi tory
35.4. Instal l i ng Packages Wi th yum
Chapt er 36. Basic Syst em Recovery
36.1. Rescue Mode
36.1.1. Common Probl ems
36.1.1.1. Unabl e to Boot i nto Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux
36.1.1.2. Hardware/Software Probl ems
36.1.1.3. Root Password
466
466
467
467
468
468
477
477
478
479
480
481
482
484
485
486
486
487
487
488
489
491
491
491
493
494
494
495
495
496
497
502
504
505
506
509
509
509
511
511
512
513
513
515
516
516
516
516
516
516
10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.1.2. Booti ng i nto Rescue Mode
36.1.2.1. Rei nstal l i ng the Boot Loader
36.1.3. Booti ng i nto Si ngl e-User Mode
36.1.4. Booti ng i nto Emergency Mode
36.2. Rescue Mode on Power Systems servers
36.2.1. Speci al Consi derati ons for Accessi ng the SCSI Uti l i ti es from Rescue Mode
36.3. Usi ng Rescue Mode to Fi x or Work Around Dri ver Probl ems
36.3.1. Usi ng RPM to Add, Remove, or Repl ace a Dri ver
36.3.2. Bl ackl i sti ng a Dri ver
Chapt er 37. Upgrading Your Current Syst em
Chapt er 38. Unregist ering from Red Hat Subscript ion Management Services
38.1. Systems Regi stered wi th Red Hat Subscri pti on Management
38.2. Systems Regi stered wi th RHN Cl assi c
38.3. Systems Regi stered wi th Satel l i te
Chapt er 39. Removing Red Hat Ent erprise Linux From x86- based Syst ems
39.1. Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux i s the Onl y Operati ng System on the Computer
39.2. Your Computer Dual -boots Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux and Another Operati ng System
39.2.1. Your Computer Dual -boots Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux and a Mi crosoft Wi ndows Operati ng
System
39.2.1.1. Wi ndows 2000, Wi ndows Server 2000, Wi ndows XP, and Wi ndows Server 2003
39.2.1.2. Wi ndows Vi sta and Wi ndows Server 2008
39.2.2. Your computer dual -boots Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux and a di fferent Li nux di stri buti on
39.3. Repl aci ng Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux wi th MS-DOS or Legacy Versi ons of Mi crosoft Wi ndows
Chapt er 40. Removing Red Hat Ent erprise Linux from IBM Syst em z
40.1. Runni ng a Di fferent Operati ng System on your z/VM Guest or LPAR
Part VI. T echnical Appendices
An Int roduct ion t o Disk Part it ions
A.1. Hard Di sk Basi c Concepts
A.1.1. It i s Not What You Wri te, i t i s How You Wri te It
A.1.2. Parti ti ons: Turni ng One Dri ve Into Many
A.1.3. Parti ti ons Wi thi n Parti ti ons An Overvi ew of Extended Parti ti ons
A.1.4. GUID Parti ti on Tabl e (GPT)
A.1.5. Maki ng Room For Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux
A.1.5.1. Usi ng Unparti ti oned Free Space
A.1.5.2. Usi ng Space from an Unused Parti ti on
A.1.5.3. Usi ng Free Space from an Acti ve Parti ti on
A.1.5.3.1. Compress exi sti ng data
A.1.5.3.2. Resi ze the exi sti ng parti ti on
A.1.5.3.3. Create new parti ti on(s)
A.1.6. Parti ti on Nami ng Scheme
A.1.7. Di sk Parti ti ons and Other Operati ng Systems
A.1.8. Di sk Parti ti ons and Mount Poi nts
A.1.9. How Many Parti ti ons?
iSCSI Disks
B.1. i SCSI Di sks i n anaconda
B.2. i SCSI Di sks Duri ng Start Up
516
519
519
519
519
520
520
521
521
523
524
524
524
524
526
526
527
527
527
530
532
535
538
538
539
540
540
540
542
544
544
545
545
546
546
548
548
548
549
550
550
551
552
552
552
11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Encrypt ion
C.1. What i s Bl ock Devi ce Encrypti on?
C.2. Encrypti ng Bl ock Devi ces Usi ng dm-crypt/LUKS6ti t
C.2.1. Overvi ew of LUKS
C.2.2. How Wi l l I Access the Encrypted Devi ces After Instal l ati on? (System Startup)
C.2.3. Choosi ng a Good Passphrase
C.3. Creati ng Encrypted Bl ock Devi ces i n Anaconda
C.3.1. What Ki nds of Bl ock Devi ces Can Be Encrypted?
C.3.2. Savi ng Passphrases
C.3.3. Creati ng and Savi ng Backup Passphrases
C.4. Creati ng Encrypted Bl ock Devi ces on the Instal l ed System After Instal l ati on
C.4.1. Create the Bl ock Devi ces
C.4.2. Opti onal : Fi l l the Devi ce wi th Random Data
C.4.3. Format the Devi ce as a dm-crypt/LUKS Encrypted Devi ce
C.4.4. Create a Mappi ng to Al l ow Access to the Devi ce' s Decrypted Contents
C.4.5. Create Fi l e Systems on the Mapped Devi ce or Conti nue to Bui l d Compl ex Storage
Structures Usi ng the Mapped Devi ce
C.4.6. Add the Mappi ng Informati on to /etc/crypttab
C.4.7. Add an Entry to /etc/fstab
C.5. Common Post-Instal l ati on Tasks
C.5.1. Set a Randoml y Generated Key as an Addi ti onal Way to Access an Encrypted Bl ock Devi ce
C.5.1.1. Generate a Key
C.5.1.2. Add the Key to an Avai l abl e Keysl ot on the Encrypted Devi ce
C.5.2. Add a New Passphrase to an Exi sti ng Devi ce
C.5.3. Remove a Passphrase or Key from a Devi ce
Underst anding LVM
T he GRUB Boot Loader
E.1. Boot Loaders and System Archi tecture
E.2. GRUB
E.2.1. GRUB and the Boot Process on BIOS-based x86 Systems
E.2.2. GRUB and the Boot Process on UEFI-based x86 Systems
E.2.3. Features of GRUB
E.3. Instal l i ng GRUB
E.3.1. Instal l i ng GRUB on BIOS Systems
E.3.2. Instal l i ng GRUB on UEFI Systems
E.4. GRUB Termi nol ogy
E.4.1. Devi ce Names
E.4.2. Fi l e Names and Bl ockl i sts
E.4.3. The Root Fi l e System and GRUB
E.5. GRUB Interfaces
E.5.1. Interfaces Load Order
E.6. GRUB Commands
E.7. GRUB Menu Confi gurati on Fi l e
E.7.1. Confi gurati on Fi l e Structure
E.7.2. Confi gurati on Fi l e Di recti ves
E.8. Changi ng Runl evel s at Boot Ti me
E.9. Addi ti onal Resources
E.9.1. Instal l ed Documentati on
E.9.2. Useful Websi tes
Boot Process, Init , and Shut down
F.1. The Boot Process
554
554
554
554
555
555
555
556
556
556
556
556
556
557
557
558
558
558
559
559
559
559
559
559
560
561
561
561
561
562
563
563
564
564
565
565
566
566
567
568
568
569
569
570
572
572
572
572
574
574
12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.2. A Detai l ed Look at the Boot Process
F.2.1. The Fi rmware Interface
F.2.1.1. BIOS-based x86 Systems
F.2.1.2. UEFI-based x86 Systems
F.2.2. The Boot Loader
F.2.2.1. The GRUB boot l oader for x86 systems
F.2.2.2. Boot Loaders for Other Archi tectures
F.2.3. The Kernel
F.2.4. The /sbi n/i ni t Program
F.2.5. Job Defi ni ti ons
F.3. Runni ng Addi ti onal Programs at Boot Ti me
F.4. SysV Ini t Runl evel s
F.4.1. Runl evel s
F.4.2. Runl evel Uti l i ti es
F.5. Shutti ng Down
Alt ernat ives t o busybox commands
Ot her T echnical Document at ion
Revision Hist ory
Index
574
574
574
575
575
575
576
576
576
579
580
580
581
582
582
583
591
593
601
13
Chapter 1. Obtaining Red Hat Enterprise Linux
If you have a Red Hat subscription, you can download ISO image files of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
6.6 installation DVD from the Software & Download Center that is part of the Red Hat Customer
Portal. If you do not already have a subscription, either purchase one or obtain a free evaluation
subscription from the Software & Download Center at https://access.redhat.com/downloads.
If you have a subscription or evaluation subscription, follow these steps to obtain the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6.6 ISO image files:
1. Visit the Customer Portal at https://access.redhat.com/login and enter your Login and
Password.
2. Click Downloads to visit the Software & Download Center.
3. In the Red Hat Enterprise Linux area, click the Download Software link to obtain a list of
all currently supported Red Hat Enterprise Linux products.
4. Select a release of Red Hat Enterprise Linux and click on the link to that release. Note that you
only need to select the most current version of the product; each release is a complete,
functional version of the operating system and does not require previous releases. Ensure
that you select the appropriate release for your installation target: Client, Workstation,
Server, or Compute Node. Choose between 32-bit and 64-bit versions. IBM Power Systems
and IBM System z versions are also available for the Server release.
5. Each version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux is available as an ISO image file for a single DVD,
around 3 GB 4 GB in size.
Fi gure 1. 1. Sel ect i ng I SO I mage Fi l es
This same page contains links to ISO image files for the source code for Red Hat Enterprise
Linux. You do not need to download the source code to install the operating system.
14
The page also contains a link to boot.iso. Click on this link to download an ISO image named
rhel-variant-version-architecture-boot.iso which is around 200 MB in size.
You can use this image file to produce minimal boot media bootable CDs, DVDs, or USB
devices with which you can boot a system when you plan to complete the installation from an
installation source available on a hard disk or over a network connection. Refer to
Section 2.2, Making Minimal Boot Media for information on how to use the
rhel-variant-version-architecture-boot.iso file.
Note that the link to every image file is accompanied by MD5 and SHA-256 checksums. After
your download completes, use a checksum tool such as md5sum or sha256 sum to
generate a checksum on your local copy of the file. If the value that you generate locally
matches the value published on the website, you know that the image file is genuine and
uncorrupted.
After you download an ISO image file of the installation DVD from the Red Hat Customer Portal, you
can:
burn it to a physical DVD (refer to Section 2.1, Making an Installation DVD ).
use it to prepare minimal boot media (refer to Section 2.2, Making Minimal Boot Media ).
place it on a server to prepare for installations over a network (refer to Section 4.1, Preparing for
a Network Installation for x86 architectures, Section 12.1, Preparing for a Network Installation
for Power Systems servers or Section 19.1, Preparing for a Network Installation for IBM
System z).
place it on a hard drive to prepare for installation to use the hard drive as an installation source
(refer to Section 4.2, Preparing for a Hard Drive Installation for x86 architectures, Section 12.2,
Preparing for a Hard Drive Installation for Power Systems servers or Section 19.2, Preparing
for a Hard Drive Installation for IBM System z).
place it on a pre-boot execution environment (PXE) server to prepare for installations using PXE
boot (refer to Chapter 30, Setting Up an Installation Server).
Chapt er 1. Obt aining Red Hat Ent erprise Linux
15
Chapter 2. Making Media
Use the methods described in this section to create the following types of installation and boot media:
an installation DVD
a minimal boot CD or DVD that can boot the installer
a USB flash drive to boot the installer
The following table indicates the types of boot and installation media available for different
architectures and notes the image file that you need to produce the media.
Tabl e 2. 1. Boot and i nst al l at i on medi a
Archi t ect ure I nst al l at i on DVD Boot CD or boot
DVD
Boot USB f l ash
dri ve
Where variant i s t he vari ant of Red Hat Ent erpri se Li nux ( f or exampl e, server or
workstation) and version i s t he l at est versi on number ( f or exampl e, 6 . 5) .
BIOS-based 32-bit
x86
x86 DVD ISO image
file
rhel-variant-vers
ion-i386-
boot.iso
rhel-variant-vers
ion-i386-
boot.iso
UEFI-based 32-bit x86 Not available
BIOS-based AMD64
and Intel 64
x86_64 DVD ISO
image file (to install 64-
bit operating system)
or x86 DVD ISO image
file (to install 32-bit
operating system)
rhel-variant-vers
ion-
x86_64boot.iso
orrhel-variant-ver
sion-i386-
boot.iso
rhel-variant-vers
ion-
x86_64boot.iso or
rhel-variant-vers
ion-i386-
boot.iso
UEFI-based AMD64
and Intel 64
x86_64 DVD ISO
image file
rhel-variant-vers
ion-x86_64-
boot.iso
efidisk.img (from
x86_64 DVD ISO
image file)
POWER (64-bit only) ppc DVD ISO image
file
rhel-
server-version-
ppc64-boot.iso
Not available
System z s390 DVD ISO image
file
Not available Not available
2.1. Making an Inst allat ion DVD
You can make an installation DVD using the CD or DVD burning software on your computer.
Make sure that your disc burning software is capable of burning discs from image files. Although this
is true of most disc burning software, exceptions exist. In particular, note that the disc burning feature
built into Windows XP and Windows Vista cannot burn DVDs; and that earlier Windows operating
systems did not have any disc burning capability installed by default at all. Therefore, if your
computer has a Windows operating system prior to Windows 7 installed on it, you need separate
software for this task. Examples of popular disc burning software for Windows that you might already
have on your computer include Nero Burni ng ROM and Roxi o Creat or.
Most widely used disc burning software for Linux, such as Brasero and K3b has the built-in ability
to burn discs from ISO image files.
16
The exact series of steps that produces a DVD from an ISO image file varies greatly from computer to
computer, depending on the operating system and disc burning software installed. Consult your disc
burning software' s documentation for detailed information on burning DVDs.
2.2. Making Minimal Boot Media
A piece of minimal boot media is a CD, DVD, or USB flash drive that contains the software to boot the
system and launch the installation program, but which does not contain the software that must be
transferred to the system to create a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.
Use minimal boot media:
to boot the system to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux over a network
to boot the system to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a hard drive
to use a kickstart file during installation (refer to Section 32.8.1, Creating Kickstart Boot Media
to commence a network or hard-drive installation or to use an anaconda update or a kickstart
file with a DVD installation.
You can use minimal boot media to start the installation process on 32-bit x86 systems, AMD64 or
Intel 64 systems, and Power Systems servers. The process by which you create minimal boot media
for systems of these various types is identical except in the case of AMD64 and Intel 64 systems with
UEFI firmware interfaces refer to Section 2.2.2, Minimal USB Boot Media for UEFI-based Systems .
To make minimal boot media for 32-bit x86 systems, BIOS-based AMD64 or Intel 64 systems, and
Power Systems servers:
1. Download the ISO image file named rhel-variant-version-architecture-boot.iso
that is available at the same location as the images of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6
installation DVD refer to Chapter 1, Obtaining Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
2. Burn the .iso file to a blank CD or DVD using the same procedure detailed in Section 2.1,
Making an Installation DVD for the installation disc.
Alternatively, transfer the .iso file to a USB device with the dd command. As the .iso file is only
around 200 MB in size, you do not need an especially large USB flash drive.
2.2.1. Minimal USB Boot Media for BIOS-based Syst ems
Important
In a few cases with oddly formatted or partitioned USB media, image writing may fail.
Warning These instructions could destroy data
When you perform this procedure any data on the USB flash drive is destroyed with no
warning. Make sure that you specify the correct USB flash drive, and make sure that this flash
drive does not contain any data that you want to keep.
1. Plug in your USB flash drive.
17
2. Find the flash drive' s device name. If the media has a volume name, use it to look up the
device name in /dev/disk/by-label, or use the findfs command:
findfs LABEL=MyLabel
If the media does not have a volume name or you do not know it, you can also use the dmesg
command shortly after connecting the media to your computer. After running the command,
the device name (such as sdb or sdc) should appear in several lines towards the end of the
output.
3. Become root:
su -
4. Use the dd command to transfer the boot ISO image to the USB device:
# dd if=path/image_name.iso of=/dev/device
where path/image_name.iso is the boot ISO image file that you downloaded and device is the
device name for the USB flash drive. Ensure you specify the device name (such as sdc), not
the partition name (such as sdc1). For example:
# dd if=~/Downloads/RHEL6.6-Server-x86_64-boot.iso of=/dev/sdc
2.2.2. Minimal USB Boot Media for UEFI-based Syst ems
To creater minimal USB boot media for Red Hat Enterprise Linux, use the efidisk.img file in the
images/ directory on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 installation DVD:
1. Download an ISO image file of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 installation DVD as
described in Chapter 1, Obtaining Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
2. Become root:
su -
3. Create a mount point for the ISO image file:
# mkdir /mnt/dvdiso
4. Mount the image file:
# mount DVD.iso /mnt/dvdiso -o loop
Where DVD.iso is the name of the ISO image file, for example RHEL6.6-Server-x86_64-
DVD.iso.
5. Transfer efidisk.img from the ISO image file to your USB flash drive:
# dd if=/mnt/dvdiso/images/efidisk.img of=/dev/device_name
For example:
18
# dd if=/mnt/dvdiso/images/efidisk.img of=/dev/sdc
Note
Use the dd command to write the image file directly to the device. Using cp to copy the
file or transferring the file using a file manager will make the device bootable.
6. Unmount the ISO image file:
# umount /mnt/dvdiso
19
Part I. x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Installation and Booting
This part of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide for Intel and AMD 32-bit and 64-bit systems
discusses the installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux and some basic post-installation
troubleshooting.
For advanced installation options, refer to Part IV, Advanced Installation Options .
20
Chapter 3. Planning for Installation on the x86 Architecture
3.1. Upgrade or Inst all?
There are two procedures available for upgrading your current system to the next major version of
Red Hat Enterprise Linux. To decide which procedure is the right one for your system, read the
following descriptions:
Cl ean I nst al l
A clean install is performed by backing up all data from the system, formatting disk
partitions, performing an installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 from installation media,
and then restoring any user data.
Note
This is the recommended method for upgrading between major versions of Red Hat
Enterprise Linux.
I n- Pl ace Upgrade
An in-place upgrade is a way of upgrading your system without removing the older version
first. The procedure requires installing the migration utilities available for your system and
running them as any other software. In Red Hat Enterprise Linux, the Preupgrade
Assi st ant assesses your current system and identifies potential problems you might
encounter during and/or after the upgrade. It also performs minor fixes and modifications to
the system. The Red Hat Upgrade Tool utility downloads the packages and performs the
actual upgrade. An in-place upgrade requires a lot of troubleshooting and planning and
should only be done if there is no other choice. For more information on the Preupgrade
Assi st ant , see Chapter 37, Upgrading Your Current System.
Warning
Never perform an in-place upgrade on a production system without first testing it on
a cloned backup copy of the system.
3.2. Is Your Hardware Compat ible?
Hardware compatibility is particularly important if you have an older system or a system that you built
yourself. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 should be compatible with most hardware in systems that were
factory built within the last two years.
However, hardware specifications change almost daily, so it is difficult to guarantee that your
hardware is 100% compatible.
One consistent requirement is your processor. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 supports, at minimum, all
32-bit and 64-bit implementations of Intel microarchitecture from P6 and onwards and AMD
microarchitecture from Athlon and onwards.
The most recent list of supported hardware can be found at:
21
https://hardware.redhat.com/
3.3. Support ed Inst allat ion Hardware
For installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux on x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 systems, Red Hat supports
the following installation targets:
Hard drives connected by a standard internal interface, such as SCSI, SATA, or SAS
BIOS/firmware RAID devices
Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters and multipath devices are also supported. Vendor-provided
drivers may be required for certain hardware.
Red Hat does not support installation to USB drives or SD memory cards.
Red Hat also supports installations that use the following virtualization technologies:
Xen block devices on Intel processors in Xen virtual machines.
VirtIO block devices on Intel processors in KVM virtual machines.
3.4. RAID and Ot her Disk Devices
Important Systems with Intel BIOS RAID sets
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 uses mdrai d instead of dmrai d for installation onto Intel BIOS
RAID sets. These sets are detected automatically, and devices with Intel ISW metadata are
recognized as mdraid instead of dmraid. Note that the device node names of any such devices
under mdrai d are different from their device node names under dmrai d. Therefore, special
precautions are necessary when you migrate systems with Intel BIOS RAID sets.
Local modifications to /etc/fstab, /etc/crypttab or other configuration files which refer to
devices by their device node names will not work in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6. Before
migrating these files, you must therefore edit them to replace device node paths with device
UUIDs instead. You can find the UUIDs of devices with the blkid command.
RAID, or Redundant Array of Independent Disks, allows a group, or array, of drives to act as a single
device. Configure any RAID functions provided by the mainboard of your computer, or attached
controller cards, before you begin the installation process. Each active RAID array appears as one
drive within Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
On systems with more than one hard drive you may configure Red Hat Enterprise Linux to operate
several of the drives as a Linux RAID array without requiring any additional hardware.
3.4.2. Soft ware RAID
You can use the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program to create Linux software RAID arrays,
where RAID functions are controlled by the operating system rather than dedicated hardware. These
functions are explained in detail in Section 9.15, Creating a Custom Layout or Modifying the Default
22
Layout .
3.4.3. FireWire and USB Disks
Some FireWire and USB hard disks may not be recognized by the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
installation system. If configuration of these disks at installation time is not vital, disconnect them to
avoid any confusion.
Post-installation Usage
You can connect and configure external FireWire and USB hard disks after installation. Most
such devices are automatically recognized and available for use once connected.
3.5. Not es on UEFI Support
3.5.1. Feat ure Support
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 supports both BIOS and UEFI firmware on AMD64 and Intel 64 systems
(x86_64). UEFI-based systems are supported with the following limitations:
The system must support UEFI Specification 2.0 or later. Earlier revisions are not supported.
The Secure Boot technology is not supported, and will prevent Red Hat Enterprise Linux from
being installed. Systems using UEFI Specification 2.2 or later must have Secure Boot disabled in
order to install and run Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6.
Systems using UEFI 2.0 later with Secure Boot disabled (if present) can install and boot Red Hat
Enterprise Linux without issues, although not all features in the relevant UEFI specification are
supported.
For more information about UEFI specifications, see http://www.uefi.org/specifications.
3.5.2. Disk Drives wit h MBR on UEFI Syst ems
Systems with UEFI firmware require a disk with a GUID Partition Table (GPT). When installing Red
Hat Enterprise Linux on a disk with a Master Boot Record (MBR; sometimes also called msdos) label,
the disk must be relabeled. This means you can not reuse existing partitions on a MBR-partitioned
disk, and all data on the disk will be lost. Make sure to back up all data on the drive before installing
Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
A GUID Partition Table is only required on the system' s boot drive - the disk where the boot loader is
installed. Other drives can be labeled with a Master Boot Record and their partition layout can be
reused.
There are several ways to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on an UEFI system and use a drive which
has a Master Boot Record. You can:
Attach the drive to an existing Linux system and use an utility such as parted or fdisk to create
a GPT label on the drive. For example, to create a GPT label on disk /dev/sdc using parted,
use the following command:
# parted /dev/sdc mklabel gpt
23
Warning
Make sure you specify the correct drive. Relabeling a disk will destroy all data on it, and
parted will not ask you for a confirmation.
Perform an automated Kickstart installation, and use the clearpart and zerombr commands. If
your system uses UEFI firmware, using these commands on the boot drive will relabel it with a
GPT.
During a manual installation in the graphical user interface, when you get to the partitioning
screen. Select an option other than custom partitioning (for example Use All Space). Make sure
to check the Review and modify partitioning layout check box, and click Next.
On the following screen, modify the automatically created layout so it suits your needs. After you
finish and click Next, Anaconda will use your layout and relabel the drive automatically.
3.6. Do You Have Enough Disk Space?
Nearly every modern-day operating system (OS) uses disk partitions, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux is
no exception. When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you may have to work with disk partitions. If
you have not worked with disk partitions before (or need a quick review of the basic concepts), refer
to Appendix A, An Introduction to Disk Partitions before proceeding.
The disk space used by Red Hat Enterprise Linux must be separate from the disk space used by other
OSes you may have installed on your system, such as Windows, OS/2, or even a different version of
Linux. For x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 systems, at least two partitions (/ and swap) must be dedicated
to Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
Before you start the installation process, you must
have enough unpartitioned disk space for the installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, or
have one or more partitions that may be deleted, thereby freeing up enough disk space to install
To gain a better sense of how much space you really need, refer to the recommended partitioning
sizes discussed in Section 9.15.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme .
If you are not sure that you meet these conditions, or if you want to know how to create free disk
space for your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation, refer to Appendix A, An Introduction to Disk
Partitions.
3.7. Select ing an Inst allat ion Met hod
What type of installation method do you wish to use? The following installation methods are
available:
DVD
If you have a DVD drive and the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD you can use this method.
Refer to Section 8.3.1, Installing from a DVD , for DVD installation instructions.
[1]
24
If you booted the installation from a piece of media other than the installation DVD, you can
specify the DVD as the installation source with the linux askmethod or linux
repo=cdrom:device:/device boot option, or by selecting Local CD/DVD on the
I nst al l at i on Met hod menu (refer to Section 8.3, Installation Method ).
Hard Dri ve
If you have copied the Red Hat Enterprise Linux ISO images to a local hard drive, you can
use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod or linux
repo=hd:device:/path boot option), or by selecting Hard dri ve on the I nst al l at i on
Met hod menu (refer to Section 8.3, Installation Method ). Refer to Section 8.3.2,
Installing from a Hard Drive , for hard drive installation instructions.
NFS
If you are installing from an NFS server using ISO images or a mirror image of Red Hat
Enterprise Linux, you can use this method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux
askmethod or linux repo=nfs:server :options:/path boot option, or the NFS
di rect ory option on the I nst al l at i on Met hod menu described in Section 8.3,
Installation Method ). Refer to Section 8.3.4, Installing via NFS for network installation
instructions. Note that NFS installations may also be performed in GUI mode.
URL
If you are installing directly from an HTTP or HTTPS (Web) server or an FTP server, use this
method. You need a boot CD-ROM (use the linux askmethod, linux
repo=ftp://user:password@host/path, or linux repo=http://host/path boot
option, or linux repo=https://host/path boot option,or the URL option on the
I nst al l at i on Met hod menu described in Section 8.3, Installation Method ). Refer to
Section 8.3.5, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS , for FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS
installation instructions.
If you booted the distribution DVD and did not use the alternate installation source option
askmethod, the next stage loads automatically from the DVD. Proceed to Section 8.2, Language
Selection .
DVD Activity
If you boot from a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD, the installation program loads its
next stage from that disc. This happens regardless of which installation method you choose,
unless you eject the disc before you proceed. The installation program still downloads
package data from the source you choose.
3.8. Choose a Boot Met hod
You can use several methods to boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
Installing from a DVD requires that you have purchased a Red Hat Enterprise Linux product, you
have a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 DVD, and you have a DVD drive on a system that supports
booting from it. Refer to Chapter 2, Making Media for instructions to make an installation DVD.
Your BIOS may need to be changed to allow booting from your DVD/CD-ROM drive. For more
information about changing your BIOS, refer to Section 7.1.1, Booting the Installation Program on
x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Systems .
25
Other than booting from an installation DVD, you can also boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
installation program from minimal boot media in the form of a bootable CD or USB flash drive. After you
boot the system with a piece of minimal boot media, you complete the installation from a different
installation source, such as a local hard drive or a location on a network. Refer to Section 2.2,
Making Minimal Boot Media for instructions on making boot CDs and USB flash drives.
Finally, you can boot the installer over the network from a preboot execution environment (PXE) server.
Refer to Chapter 30, Setting Up an Installation Server. Again, after you boot the system, you complete
the installation from a different installation source, such as a local hard drive or a location on a
network.
[1] Unparti ti oned di sk space means that avai l abl e di sk space on the hard dri ves you are i nstal l i ng to has
not been di vi ded i nto secti ons for data. When you parti ti on a di sk, each parti ti on behaves l i ke a
separate di sk dri ve.
26
Chapter 4. Preparing for Installation
4.1. Preparing for a Net work Inst allat ion
Note
Make sure no installation DVD (or any other type of DVD or CD) is in your system' s CD or
DVD drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a DVD or CD in the drive
might cause unexpected errors.
Ensure that you have boot media available on CD, DVD, or a USB storage device such as a flash
drive.
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation medium must be available for either a network installation
(via NFS, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS) or installation via local storage. Use the following steps if you are
performing an NFS, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS installation.
The NFS, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server to be used for installation over the network must be a
separate, network-accessible server. It must provide the complete contents of the installation DVD-
ROM.
Note
anaconda has the ability to test the integrity of the installation media. It works with the DVD,
hard drive ISO, and NFS ISO installation methods. We recommend that you test all installation
media before starting the installation process, and before reporting any installation-related
bugs (many of the bugs reported are actually due to improperly-burned DVDs). To use this
test, type the following command at the boot: prompt:
linux mediacheck
Note
The public directory used to access the installation files over FTP, NFS, HTTP, or HTTPS is
mapped to local storage on the network server. For example, the local directory
/var/www/inst/rhel6.6 on the network server can be accessed as
http://network.server.com/inst/rhel6.6.
In the following examples, the directory on the installation staging server that will contain the
installation files will be specified as /location/of/disk/space. The directory that will be
made publicly available via FTP, NFS, HTTP, or HTTPS will be specified as
/publicly_available_directory. For example, /location/of/disk/space may be a directory
you create called /var/isos. /publicly_available_directory might be
/var/www/html/rhel6.6, for an HTTP install.
In the following, you will require an ISO image. An ISO image is a file containing an exact copy of the
content of a DVD. To create an ISO image from a DVD use the following command:
27
dd if=/dev/dvd of=/path_to_image/name_of_image.iso
where dvd is your DVD drive device, name_of_image is the name you give to the resulting ISO image
file, and path_to_image is the path to the location on your system where the resulting ISO image will be
stored.
To copy the files from the installation DVD to a Linux instance, which acts as an installation staging
server, continue with either Section 4.1.1, Preparing for FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS Installation or
Section 4.1.2, Preparing for an NFS Installation .
4.1.1. Preparing for FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS Inst allat ion
Extract the files from the ISO image of the installation DVD and place them in a directory that is
shared over FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS.
Next, make sure that the directory is shared via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS, and verify client access. Test
to see whether the directory is accessible from the server itself, and then from another machine on the
same subnet to which you will be installing.
4.1.2. Preparing for an NFS Inst allat ion
For NFS installation it is not necessary to extract all the files from the ISO image. It is sufficient to
make the ISO image itself, the install.img file, and optionally the product.img file available on
the network server via NFS.
1. Transfer the ISO image to the NFS exported directory. On a Linux system, run:
mv /path_to_image/name_of_image.iso /publicly_available_directory/
where path_to_image is the path to the ISO image file, name_of_image is the name of the ISO
image file, and publicly_available_directory is a directory that is available over NFS or that you
intend to make available over NFS.
2. Use a SHA256 checksum program to verify that the ISO image that you copied is intact. Many
SHA256 checksum programs are available for various operating systems. On a Linux system,
run:
$ sha256sum name_of_image.iso
where name_of_image is the name of the ISO image file. The SHA256 checksum program
displays a string of 64 characters called a hash. Compare this hash to the hash displayed for
this particular image on the Downloads page in the Red Hat Customer Portal (refer to
Chapter 1, Obtaining Red Hat Enterprise Linux). The two hashes should be identical.
3. Copy the images/ directory from inside the ISO image to the same directory in which you
stored the ISO image file itself. Enter the following commands:
mount -t iso9660 /path_to_image/name_of_image.iso /mount_point -o
loop,ro
cp -pr /mount_point/images /publicly_available_directory/
umount /mount_point
where path_to_image is the path to the ISO image file, name_of_image is the name of the
ISO image file, and mount_point is a mount point on which to mount the image while you
copy files from the image. For example:
28
mount -t iso9660 /var/isos/RHEL6.iso /mnt/tmp -o loop,ro
cp -pr /mnt/tmp/images /var/isos/
umount /mnt/tmp
The ISO image file and an images/ directory are now present, side-by-side, in the same
directory.
4. Verify that the images/ directory contains at least the install.img file, without which
installation cannot proceed. Optionally, the images/ directory should contain the
product.img file, without which only the packages for a Minimal installation will be
available during the package group selection stage (refer to Section 9.17, Package Group
Selection ).
Important content of the images/ directory
install.img and product.img must be the only files in the images/ directory.
5. Ensure that an entry for the publicly available directory exists in the /etc/exports file on
the network server so that the directory is available via NFS.
To export a directory read-only to a specific system, use:
/publicly_available_directory client.ip.address (ro)
To export a directory read-only to all systems, use:
/publicly_available_directory * (ro)
6. On the network server, start the NFS daemon (on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system, use
/sbin/service nfs start). If NFS is already running, reload the configuration file (on a
Red Hat Enterprise Linux system use /sbin/service nfs reload).
7. Be sure to test the NFS share following the directions in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
Deployment Guide. Refer to your NFS documentation for details on starting and stopping the
NFS server.
Note
linux mediacheck
4.2. Preparing for a Hard Drive Inst allat ion
29
Note Not all file systems supported
Hard drive installations only work from ext2, ext3, ext4, or FAT file systems. You cannot use a
hard drives formatted for any other file system as an installation source for Red Hat Enterprise
Linux.
To check the file system of a hard drive partition on a Windows operating system, use the Di sk
Management tool. To check the file system of a hard drive partition on a Linux operating
system, use the f di sk tool.
Cannot Install from LVM Partitions
You cannot use ISO files on partitions controlled by LVM (Logical Volume Management).
Use this option to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on systems without a DVD drive or network
connection.
Hard drive installations use the following files:
an ISO image of the installation DVD. An ISO image is a file that contains an exact copy of the
content of a DVD.
an install.img file extracted from the ISO image.
optionally, a product.img file extracted from the ISO image.
With these files present on a hard drive, you can choose Hard dri ve as the installation source when
you boot the installation program (refer to Section 8.3, Installation Method ).
drive.
To prepare a hard drive as an installation source, follow these steps:
1. Obtain an ISO image of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD (refer to Chapter 1,
Obtaining Red Hat Enterprise Linux). Alternatively, if you have the DVD on physical media, you
can create an image of it with the following command on a Linux system:
where dvd is your DVD drive device, name_of_image is the name you give to the resulting ISO
image file, and path_to_image is the path to the location on your system where the resulting
ISO image will be stored.
2. Transfer the ISO image to the hard drive.
The ISO image must be located on a hard drive that is either internal to the computer on
which you will install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, or on a hard drive that is attached to that
computer by USB.
run:
30
loop,ro
umount /mount_point
umount /mnt/tmp
directory.
Selection ).
Note
linux mediacheck
31
Chapter 5. System Specifications List
The most recent list of supported hardware can be found at https://hardware.redhat.com/.
The installation program automatically detects and installs your computer' s hardware. Although you
should make sure that your hardware meets the minimum requirements to install Red Hat Enterprise
Linux (refer to Section 3.2, Is Your Hardware Compatible? ) you do not usually need to supply the
installation program with any specific details about your system.
However, when performing certain types of installation, some specific details might be useful or even
essential.
If you plan to use a customized partition layout, record:
The model numbers, sizes, types, and interfaces of the hard drives attached to the system. For
example, Seagate ST3320613AS 320 GB on SATA0, Western Digital WD7500AAKS 750 GB
on SATA1. This will allow you to identify specific hard drives during the partitioning process.
If you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux as an additional operating system on an existing
system, record:
The mount points of the existing partitions on the system. For example, /boot on sda1, / on
sda2, and /home on sdb1. This will allow you to identify specific partitions during the
partitioning process.
If you plan to install from an image on a local hard drive:
The hard drive and directory that holds the image.
If you plan to install from a network location, or install on an iSCSI target:
The make and model numbers of the network adapters on your system. For example, Netgear
GA311. This will allow you to identify adapters when manually configuring the network.
IP, DHCP, and BOOTP addresses
Netmask
Gateway IP address
One or more name server IP addresses (DNS)
If any of these networking requirements or terms are unfamiliar to you, contact your network
administrator for assistance.
If you plan to install from a network location:
The location of the image on an FTP server, HTTP (web) server, HTTPS (web) server, or NFS
server see Section 8.3.5, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS and Section 8.3.4, Installing
via NFS for examples.
If you plan to install on an iSCSI target:
The location of the iSCSI target. Depending on your network, you might also need a CHAP
username and password, and perhaps a reverse CHAP username and password see
Section 9.6.1.1, Advanced Storage Options .
If you are installing using Intel iSCSI Remote Boot:
32
All attached iSCSI storage devices must be disabled, otherwise the installation will succeed
but the installed system will not boot.
If your computer is part of a domain:
You should verify that the domain name will be supplied by the DHCP server. If not, you will
need to input the domain name manually during installation.
Chapt er 5. Syst em Specificat ions List
33
Chapter 6. Updating Drivers During Installation on Intel and AMD
Systems
In most cases, Red Hat Enterprise Linux already includes drivers for the devices that make up your
system. However, if your system contains hardware that has been released very recently, drivers for
this hardware might not yet be included. Sometimes, a driver update that provides support for a new
device might be available from Red Hat or your hardware vendor on a driver disc that contains rpm
packages. Typically, the driver disc is available for download as an ISO image file.
Often, you do not need the new hardware during the installation process. For example, if you use a
DVD to install to a local hard drive, the installation will succeed even if drivers for your network card
are not available. In situations like this, complete the installation and add support for the piece of
hardware afterward refer to Section 35.1.1, Driver Update rpm Packages for details of adding
this support.
In other situations, you might want to add drivers for a device during the installation process to
support a particular configuration. For example, you might want to install drivers for a network device
or a storage adapter card to give the installer access to the storage devices that your system uses.
You can use a driver disc to add this support during installation in one of two ways:
1. place the ISO image file of the driver disc in a location accessible to the installer:
a. on a local hard drive
b. a USB flash drive
2. create a driver disc by extracting the image file onto:
a. a CD
b. a DVD
Refer to the instructions for making installation discs in Section 2.1, Making an Installation
DVD for more information on burning ISO image files to CD or DVD.
If Red Hat, your hardware vendor, or a trusted third party told you that you will require a driver
update during the installation process, choose a method to supply the update from the methods
described in this chapter and test it before beginning the installation. Conversely, do not perform a
driver update during installation unless you are certain that your system requires it. Although
installing an unnecessary driver update will not cause harm, the presence of a driver on a system for
which it was not intended can complicate support.
6.1. Limit at ions of Driver Updat es During Inst allat ion
Unfortunately, some situations persist in which you cannot use a driver update to provide drivers
during installation:
Devi ces al ready i n use
You cannot use a driver update to replace drivers that the installation program has already
loaded. Instead, you must complete the installation with the drivers that the installation
program loaded and update to the new drivers after installation, or, if you need the new
drivers for the installation process, consider performing an initial RAM disk driver update
refer to Section 6.2.3, Preparing an Initial RAM Disk Update .
Devi ces wi t h an equi val ent devi ce avai l abl e
34
Because all devices of the same type are initialized together, you cannot update drivers for
a device if the installation program has loaded drivers for a similar device. For example,
consider a system that has two different network adapters, one of which has a driver update
available. The installation program will initialize both adapters at the same time, and
therefore, you will not be able to use this driver update. Again, complete the installation with
the drivers loaded by the installation program and update to the new drivers after
installation, or use an initial RAM disk driver update.
6.2. Preparing for a Driver Updat e During Inst allat ion
If a driver update is necessary and available for your hardware, Red Hat or a trusted third party such
as the hardware vendor will typically provide it in the form of an image file in ISO format. Some
methods of performing a driver update require you to make the image file available to the installation
program, while others require you to use the image file to make a driver update disk:
Met hods t hat use t he i mage f i l e i t sel f
local hard drive
USB flash drive
Met hods t hat use a dri ver updat e di sk produced f rom an i mage f i l e
CD
DVD
Choose a method to provide the driver update, and refer to Section 6.2.1, Preparing to Use a Driver
Update Image File , Section 6.2.2, Preparing a Driver Disc or Section 6.2.3, Preparing an Initial
RAM Disk Update . Note that you can use a USB storage device either to provide an image file, or as
a driver update disk.
6.2.1. Preparing t o Use a Driver Updat e Image File
6.2.1.1. Preparing t o use an image file on local st orage
To make the ISO image file available on local storage, such as a hard drive or USB flash drive, you
must first determine whether you want to install the updates automatically or select them manually.
For manual installations, copy the file onto the storage device. You can rename the file if you find it
helpful to do so, but you must not change the filename extension, which must remain .iso. In the
following example, the file is named dd.iso:
35
Fi gure 6 . 1. Cont ent of a USB f l ash dri ve hol di ng a dri ver updat e i mage f i l e
Note that if you use this method, the storage device will contain only a single file. This differs from
driver discs on formats such as CD and DVD, which contain many files. The ISO image file contains
all of the files that would normally be on a driver disc.
Refer to Section 6.3.2, Let the Installer Prompt You for a Driver Update and Section 6.3.3, Use a
Boot Option to Specify a Driver Update Disk to learn how to select the driver update manually
during installation.
For automatic installations, you will need to extract the ISO to the root directory of the storage device
rather than copy it. Copying the ISO is only effective for manual installations. You must also change
the file system label of the device to OEMDRV.
The installation program will then automatically examine the extracted ISO for driver updates and
load any that it detects. This behavior is controlled by the dlabel=on boot option, which is enabled
by default. Refer to Section 6.3.1, Let the Installer Find a Driver Update Disk Automatically .
6.2.2. Preparing a Driver Disc
You can create a driver update disc on CD or DVD.
6.2.2.1. Creat ing a driver updat e disc on CD or DVD
36
These instructions assume that you use the GNOME desktop
CD/DVD Creat or is part of the GNOME desktop. If you use a different Linux desktop, or a
different operating system altogether, you will need to use another piece of software to create
the CD or DVD. The steps will be generally similar.
Make sure that the software that you choose can create CDs or DVDs from image files. While
this is true of most CD and DVD burning software, exceptions exist. Look for a button or menu
entry labeled burn from image or similar. If your software lacks this feature, or you do not
select it, the resulting disc will hold only the image file itself, instead of the contents of the
image file.
1. Use the desktop file manager to locate the ISO image file of the driver disc, supplied to you by
Red Hat or your hardware vendor.
Fi gure 6 . 2. A t ypi cal . i so f i l e di spl ayed i n a f i l e manager wi ndow
2. Right-click on this file and choose Write to disc. You will see a window similar to the
following:
37
Fi gure 6 . 3. CD/DVD Creat or' s Wri t e t o Di sc di al og
3. Click the Write button. If a blank disc is not already in the drive, CD/DVD Creat or will
prompt you to insert one.
After you burn a driver update disc CD or DVD, verify that the disc was created successfully by
inserting it into your system and browsing to it using the file manager. You should see a single file
named rhdd3 and a directory named rpms:
Fi gure 6 . 4 . Cont ent s of a t ypi cal dri ver updat e di sc on CD or DVD
38
If you see only a single file ending in .iso, then you have not created the disc correctly and should
try again. Ensure that you choose an option similar to burn from image if you use a Linux
desktop other than GNOME or if you use a different operating system.
Boot Option to Specify a Driver Update Disk to learn how to use the driver update disc during
installation.
6.2.3. Preparing an Init ial RAM Disk Updat e
Advanced procedure
This is an advanced procedure that you should consider only if you cannot perform a driver
update with any other method.
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program can load updates for itself early in the installation
process from a RAM disk an area of your computer' s memory that temporarily behaves as if it were
a disk. You can use this same capability to load driver updates. To perform a driver update during
installation, your computer must be able to boot from a preboot execution environment (PXE) server,
and you must have a PXE server available on your network. Refer to Chapter 30, Setting Up an
Installation Server for instructions on using PXE during installation.
To make the driver update available on your PXE server:
1. Place the driver update image file on your installation server. Usually, you would do this by
downloading it to the server from a location on the Internet specified by Red Hat or your
hardware vendor. Names of driver update image files end in .iso.
2. Copy the driver update image file into the /tmp/initrd_update directory.
3. Rename the driver update image file to dd.img.
4. At the command line, change into the /tmp/initrd_update directory, type the following
command, and press Enter:
find . | cpio --quiet -o -H newc | gzip -9 >/tmp/initrd_update.img
5. Copy the file /tmp/initrd_update.img into the directory the holds the target that you
want to use for installation. This directory is placed under the
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/ directory. For example,
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/rhel6/ might hold the PXE target for Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 6.
6. Edit the /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.cfg/default file to include an
entry that includes the initial RAM disk update that you just created, in the following format:
label target-dd
kernel target/vmlinuz
append initrd=target/initrd.img,target/dd.img
Where target is the target that you want to use for installation.
Refer to Section 6.3.4, Select a PXE Target that Includes a Driver Update to learn how to use an
initial RAM disk update during installation.
39
Exampl e 6 . 1. Prepari ng an i ni t i al RAM di sk updat e f rom a dri ver updat e i mage f i l e
In this example, driver_update.iso is a driver update image file that you downloaded from the
Internet to a directory on your PXE server. The target that you want to PXE boot from is located in
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/rhel6/
At the command line, change to the directory that holds the file and enter the following commands:
$ cp driver_update.iso /tmp/initrd_update/dd.img
$ cd /tmp/initrd_update
$ find . | cpio --quiet -c -o -H newc | gzip -9
>/tmp/initrd_update.img
$ cp /tmp/initrd_update.img /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/rhel6/dd.img
Edit the /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.cfg/default file and include the
following entry:
label rhel6-dd
kernel rhel6/vmlinuz
append initrd=rhe6/initrd.img,rhel6/dd.img
6.3. Performing a Driver Updat e During Inst allat ion
You can perform a driver update during installation in the following ways:
let the installer automatically find a driver update disk.
let the installer prompt you for a driver update.
use a boot option to specify a driver update disk.
6.3.1. Let t he Inst aller Find a Driver Updat e Disk Aut omat ically
Attach a block device with the filesystem label OEMDRV before starting the installation process. The
installer will automatically examine the device and load any driver updates that it detects and will not
prompt you during the process. Refer to Section 6.2.1.1, Preparing to use an image file on local
storage to prepare a storage device for the installer to find.
6.3.2. Let t he Inst aller Prompt You for a Driver Updat e
1. Begin the installation normally for whatever method you have chosen. If the installer cannot
load drivers for a piece of hardware that is essential for the installation process (for example,
if it cannot detect any network or storage controllers), it prompts you to insert a driver update
disk:
40
Fi gure 6 . 5. The no dri ver f ound di al og
2. Select Use a driver disk and refer to Section 6.4, Specifying the Location of a Driver
Update Image File or a Driver Update Disk .
6.3.3. Use a Boot Opt ion t o Specify a Driver Updat e Disk
Choose this method only for completely new drivers
This method only works to introduce completely new drivers, not to update existing drivers.
1. Type linux dd at the boot prompt at the start of the installation process and press Enter.
The installer prompts you to confirm that you have a driver disk:
Fi gure 6 . 6 . The dri ver di sk prompt
2. Insert the driver update disk that you created on CD, DVD, or USB flash drive and select Yes.
The installer examines the storage devices that it can detect. If there is only one possible
location that could hold a driver disk (for example, the installer detects the presence of a DVD
drive, but no other storage devices) it will automatically load any driver updates that it finds
at this location.
41
If the installer finds more than one location that could hold a driver update, it prompts you to
specify the location of the update. See Section 6.4, Specifying the Location of a Driver
6.3.4. Select a PXE Target t hat Includes a Driver Updat e
1. Select network boot in your computer' s BIOS or boot menu. The procedure to specify this
option varies widely among different computers. Consult your hardware documentation or the
hardware vendor for specifics relevant to your computer.
2. In the preboot execution environment (PXE), choose the boot target that you prepared on your
PXE server. For example, if you labeled this environment rhel6-dd in the
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.cfg/default file on your PXE server, type
rhel6-dd at the prompt and press Enter.
Refer to Section 6.2.3, Preparing an Initial RAM Disk Update and Chapter 30, Setting Up an
Installation Server for instructions on using PXE to perform an update during installation. Note that
this is an advanced procedure do not attempt it unless other methods of performing a driver
update fail.
6.4. Specifying t he Locat ion of a Driver Updat e Image File or a Driver
Updat e Disk
If the installer detects more than one possible device that could hold a driver update, it prompts you
to select the correct device. If you are not sure which option represents the device on which the driver
update is stored, try the various options in order until you find the correct one.
Fi gure 6 . 7. Sel ect i ng a dri ver di sk source
42
If the device that you choose contains no suitable update media, the installer will prompt you to make
another choice.
If you made a driver update disk on CD, DVD, or USB flash drive, the installer now loads the driver
update. However, if the device that you selected is a type of device that could contain more than one
partition (whether the device currently has more than one partition or not), the installer might prompt
you to select the partition that holds the driver update.
Fi gure 6 . 8. Sel ect i ng a dri ver di sk part i t i on
The installer prompts you to specify which file contains the driver update:
43
Fi gure 6 . 9 . Sel ect i ng an I SO i mage
Expect to see these screens if you stored the driver update on an internal hard drive or on a USB
storage device. You should not see them if the driver update is on a CD or DVD.
Regardless of whether you are providing a driver update in the form of an image file or with a driver
update disk, the installer now copies the appropriate update files into a temporary storage area
(located in system RAM and not on disk). The installer might ask whether you would like to use
additional driver updates. If you select Yes, you can load additional updates in turn. When you have
no further driver updates to load, select No. If you stored the driver update on removable media, you
can now safely eject or disconnect the disk or device. The installer no longer requires the driver
update, and you can re-use the media for other purposes.
44
Chapter 7. Booting the Installer
Important
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 does not support UEFI for 32-bit x86 systems.
On 64-bit systems, boot configurations of UEFI and BIOS differ significantly from each other.
Therefore, the installed system must boot using the same firmware that was used during
installation. You cannot install the operating system on a system that uses BIOS and then
boot this installation on a system that uses UEFI.
To start the installation program from a Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD or from minimal boot media,
follow this procedure:
1. Disconnect any external FireWire or USB disks that you do not need for installation. Refer to
Section 3.4.3, FireWire and USB Disks for more information.
2. Power on your computer system.
3. Insert the media in your computer.
4. Power off your computer with the boot media still inside.
5. Power on your computer system.
You might need to press a specific key or combination of keys to boot from the media. On most
computers, a message appears briefly on the screen very soon after you turn on the computer.
Typically, it is worded something like Press F10 to select boot device, although the
specific wording and the key that you must press varies widely from computer to computer. Consult
the documentation for your computer or motherboard, or seek support from the hardware
manufacturer or vendor.
If your computer does not allow you to select a boot device as it starts up, you might need to
configure your system' s Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) to boot from the media.
To change your BIOS settings on an x86, AMD64, or Intel 64 system, watch the instructions provided
on your display when your computer first boots. A line of text appears, telling you which key to press
to enter the BIOS settings.
Once you have entered your BIOS setup program, find the section where you can alter your boot
sequence. The default is often C, A or A, C (depending on whether you boot from your hard drive [C]
or a diskette drive [A]). Change this sequence so that the DVD is first in your boot order and that C or
A (whichever is your typical boot default) is second. This instructs the computer to first look at the
DVD drive for bootable media; if it does not find bootable media on the DVD drive, it then checks
your hard drive or diskette drive.
Save your changes before exiting the BIOS. For more information, refer to the documentation that
came with your system.
45
Note Aborting the Installation
To abort the installation, either press Ctrl+Alt+Del or power off your computer with the
power switch. You may abort the installation process without consequence at any time prior to
selecting Write changes to disk on the Write partitioning to disk screen. Red
Hat Enterprise Linux makes no permanent changes to your computer until that point. Please
be aware that stopping the installation after partitioning has begun can leave your computer
unusable.
7.1. St art ing t he Inst allat ion Program
Important
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 does not support UEFI for 32-bit x86 systems.
On 64-bit systems, boot configurations of UEFI and BIOS differ significantly from each other.
Therefore, the installed system must boot using the same firmware that was used during
installation. You cannot install the operating system on a system that uses BIOS and then
boot this installation on a system that uses UEFI.
To start, first make sure that you have all necessary resources for the installation. If you have already
read through Chapter 3, Planning for Installation on the x86 Architecture, and followed the instructions,
you should be ready to start the installation process. When you have verified that you are ready to
begin, boot the installation program using the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD or any boot media that
you have created.
Note
Occasionally, some hardware components require a driver update during the installation. A
driver update adds support for hardware that is not otherwise supported by the installation
program. Refer to Chapter 6, Updating Drivers During Installation on Intel and AMD Systems for
more information.
7.1.1. Boot ing t he Inst allat ion Program on x86, AMD64, and Int el 64 Syst ems
You can boot the installation program using any one of the following media (depending upon what
your system can support):
Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD Your machine supports a bootable DVD drive and you have the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD.
Boot CD-ROM Your machine supports a bootable CD-ROM drive and you want to perform
network or hard drive installation.
USB flash drive Your machine supports booting from a USB device.
46
PXE boot via network Your machine supports booting from the network. This is an advanced
installation path. Refer to Chapter 30, Setting Up an Installation Server for additional information on
this method.
To create a boot CD-ROM or to prepare your USB flash drive for booting or installation, refer to
Section 2.2, Making Minimal Boot Media .
Insert the boot media and reboot the system.
You might need to press a specific key or combination of keys to boot from the media. On most
computers, a message appears briefly on the screen very soon after you turn on the computer.
Typically, it is worded something like Press F10 to select boot device, although the
specific wording and the key that you must press varies widely from computer to computer. Consult
the documentation for your computer or motherboard, or seek support from the hardware
manufacturer or vendor.
If your computer does not allow you to select a boot device as it starts up, you might need to
configure your system' s Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) to boot from the media.
To change your BIOS settings on an x86, AMD64, or Intel 64 system, watch the instructions provided
on your display when your computer first boots. A line of text appears, telling you which key to press
to enter the BIOS settings.
Once you have entered your BIOS setup program, find the section where you can alter your boot
sequence. The default is often C, A or A, C (depending on whether you boot from your hard drive [C]
or a diskette drive [A]). Change this sequence so that the DVD is first in your boot order and that C or
A (whichever is your typical boot default) is second. This instructs the computer to first look at the
DVD drive for bootable media; if it does not find bootable media on the DVD drive, it then checks
your hard drive or diskette drive.
Save your changes before exiting the BIOS. For more information, refer to the documentation that
came with your system.
After a short delay, the graphical boot screen appears, which contains information on a variety of
boot options. Installation program automatically begins if you take no action within the first minute.
For a description of the options available on this screen, refer to Section 7.1.2, The Boot Menu .
Alternatively, press the Esc key to access the boot: prompt, at which you can enter additional boot
options as described in Section 7.1.3, Additional Boot Options .
7.1.2. The Boot Menu
The boot media displays a graphical boot menu with several options. If no key is hit within 60
seconds, the default boot option runs. To choose the default, either wait for the timer to run out or hit
Enter on the keyboard. To select a different option than the default, use the arrow keys on your
keyboard, and hit Enter when the correct option is highlighted. If you want to customize the boot
options for a particular option, press the Tab key. To access the boot: prompt at which you can
specify custom boot options, press the Esc key and refer to Section 7.1.3, Additional Boot Options .
47
Fi gure 7. 1. The boot screen
For a listing and explanation of common boot options, refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options.
The boot menu options are:
I nst al l or upgrade an exi st i ng syst em
This option is the default. Choose this option to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux onto your
computer system using the graphical installation program.
I nst al l syst em wi t h basi c vi deo dri ver
This option allows you to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux in graphical mode even if the
installation program is unable to load the correct driver for your video card. If your screen
appears distorted or goes blank when using the Install or upgrade an existing
system option, restart your computer and try this option instead.
Rescue i nst al l ed syst em
Choose this option to repair a problem with your installed Red Hat Enterprise Linux system
that prevents you from booting normally. Although Red Hat Enterprise Linux is an
exceptionally stable computing platform, it is still possible for occasional problems to occur
that prevent booting. The rescue environment contains utility programs that allow you fix a
wide variety of these problems.
Boot f rom l ocal dri ve
This option boots the system from the first installed disk. If you booted this disc
accidentally, use this option to boot from the hard disk immediately without starting the
installer.
7.1.3. Addit ional Boot Opt ions
48
7.1.3. Addit ional Boot Opt ions
While it is easiest to boot using a DVD and perform a graphical installation, sometimes there are
installation scenarios where booting in a different manner may be needed. This section discusses
additional boot options available for Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
To pass options to the boot loader on an x86, AMD64, or Intel 64 system, press the Esc key at boot
time. The boot: prompt appears, at which you can use the boot loader options described below.
Note
Refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options for additional boot options not covered in this section.
To perform a text mode installation, at the installation boot prompt, type:
linux text
To specify an installation source, use the linux repo= option. For example:
linux repo=cdrom:device
linux repo=ftp://username:password@URL
linux repo=http://URL
linux repo=hd:device
linux repo=nfs:options:server:/path
linux repo=nfsiso:options:server:/path
In these examples, cdrom refers to a CD or DVD drive, ftp refers to a location accessible by FTP,
http refers to a location accessible by HTTP, hd refers to an ISO image file accessible on a hard
drive partition, nfs refers to an expanded tree of installation files accessible by NFS, and nfsiso
refers to an ISO image file accessible by NFS.
ISO images have an SHA256 checksum embedded in them. To test the checksum integrity of an
ISO image, at the installation boot prompt, type:
linux mediacheck
The installation program prompts you to insert a DVD or select an ISO image to test, and select
OK to perform the checksum operation. This checksum operation can be performed on any Red
Hat Enterprise Linux DVD. It is strongly recommended to perform this operation on any Red Hat
Enterprise Linux DVD that was created from downloaded ISO images. This command works with
the DVD, hard drive ISO, and NFS ISO installation methods.
If you need to perform the installation in serial mode, type the following command:
linux console=<device>
49
For text mode installations, use:
linux text console=<device>
In the above command, <device> should be the device you are using (such as ttyS0 or ttyS1). For
example, linux text console=ttyS0.
Text mode installations using a serial terminal work best when the terminal supports UTF-8. Under
UNIX and Linux, Kermit supports UTF-8. For Windows, Kermit ' 95 works well. Non-UTF-8 capable
terminals works as long as only English is used during the installation process. An enhanced
serial display can be used by passing the utf8 command as a boot-time option to the installation
program. For example:
linux console=ttyS0 utf8
7.1.3.1. Kernel Opt ions
Options can also be passed to the kernel. For example, to apply updates for the anaconda
installation program from a USB storage device enter:
linux updates
For text mode installations, use:
linux text updates
This command results in a prompt for the path to the device that contains updates for anaconda. It
is not needed if you are performing a network installation and have already placed the updates
image contents in rhupdates/ on the server.
After entering any options, press Enter to boot using those options.
If you need to specify boot options to identify your hardware, please write them down. The boot
options are needed during the boot loader configuration portion of the installation (refer to
Section 9.18, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Configuration for more information).
For more information on kernel options refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options.
7.2. Inst alling from a Different Source
You can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the ISO images stored on hard disk, or from a network
using NFS, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS methods. Experienced users frequently use one of these methods
because it is often faster to read data from a hard disk or network server than from a DVD.
The following table summarizes the different boot methods and recommended installation methods to
use with each:
Tabl e 7. 1. Boot met hods and i nst al l at i on sources
Boot met hod I nst al l at i on source
Installation DVD DVD, network, or hard disk
Installation USB flash drive Installation DVD, network, or hard disk
Minimal boot CD or USB, rescue CD Network or hard disk
50
Refer to Section 3.7, Selecting an Installation Method for information about installing from
locations other than the media with which you booted the system.
7.3. Boot ing from t he Net work Using PXE
To boot with PXE, you need a properly configured server, and a network interface in your computer
that supports PXE. For information on how to configure a PXE server, refer to Chapter 30, Setting Up
an Installation Server.
Configure the computer to boot from the network interface. This option is in the BIOS, and may be
labeled Network Boot or Boot Services. Once you properly configure PXE booting, the
computer can boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation system without any other media.
To boot a computer from a PXE server:
1. Ensure that the network cable is attached. The link indicator light on the network socket
should be lit, even if the computer is not switched on.
2. Switch on the computer.
3. A menu screen appears. Press the number key that corresponds to the desired option.
If your PC does not boot from the netboot server, ensure that the BIOS is configured to boot first from
the correct network interface. Some BIOS systems specify the network interface as a possible boot
device, but do not support the PXE standard. Refer to your hardware documentation for more
information.
Note Multiple NICs and PXE installation
Some servers with multiple network interfaces might not assign eth0 to the first network
interface as the firmware interface knows it, which can cause the installer to try to use a
different network interface from the one that was used by PXE. To change this behavior, use
the following in pxelinux.cfg/* config files:
IPAPPEND 2
APPEND ksdevice=bootif
These configuration options above cause the installer to use the same network interface the
firmware interface and PXE use. You can also use the following option:
ksdevice=link
This option causes the installer to use the first network device it finds that is linked to a
network switch.
51
Chapter 8. Configuring Language and Installation Source
Before the graphical installation program starts, you need to configure the language and installation
source.
8.1. The Text Mode Inst allat ion Program User Int erface
Important Graphical installation recommended
We recommend that you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux using the graphical interface. If you
are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux on a system that lacks a graphical display, consider
performing the installation over a VNC connection see Chapter 31, Installing Through VNC. If
anaconda detects that you are installing in text mode on a system where installation over a
VNC connection might be possible, anaconda asks you to verify your decision to install in
text mode even though your options during installation are limited.
If your system has a graphical display, but graphical installation fails, try booting with the
xdriver=vesa option refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options
Both the loader and later anaconda use a screen-based interface that includes most of the on-
screen widgets commonly found on graphical user interfaces. Figure 8.1, Installation Program
Widgets as seen in URL Setup , and Figure 8.2, Installation Program Widgets as seen in Choose
a Language , illustrate widgets that appear on screens during the installation process.
Note
Not every language supported in graphical installation mode is also supported in text mode.
Specifically, languages written with a character set other than the Latin or Cyrillic alphabets
are not available in text mode. If you choose a language written with a character set that is not
supported in text mode, the installation program will present you with the English versions of
the screens.
52
Fi gure 8. 1. I nst al l at i on Program Wi dget s as seen i n URL Setup
Fi gure 8. 2. I nst al l at i on Program Wi dget s as seen i n Choose a Language
The widgets include:
Window Windows (usually referred to as dialogs in this manual) appear on your screen
throughout the installation process. At times, one window may overlay another; in these cases,
you can only interact with the window on top. When you are finished in that window, it
disappears, allowing you to continue working in the window underneath.
53
Checkbox Checkboxes allow you to select or deselect a feature. The box displays either an
asterisk (selected) or a space (unselected). When the cursor is within a checkbox, press Space to
select or deselect a feature.
Text Input Text input lines are regions where you can enter information required by the
installation program. When the cursor rests on a text input line, you may enter and/or edit
information on that line.
Text Widget Text widgets are regions of the screen for the display of text. At times, text widgets
may also contain other widgets, such as checkboxes. If a text widget contains more information
than can be displayed in the space reserved for it, a scroll bar appears; if you position the cursor
within the text widget, you can then use the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through all the
information available. Your current position is shown on the scroll bar by a # character, which
moves up and down the scroll bar as you scroll.
Scroll Bar Scroll bars appear on the side or bottom of a window to control which part of a list
or document is currently in the window' s frame. The scroll bar makes it easy to move to any part of
a file.
Button Widget Button widgets are the primary method of interacting with the installation
program. You progress through the windows of the installation program by navigating these
buttons, using the Tab and Enter keys. Buttons can be selected when they are highlighted.
Cursor Although not a widget, the cursor is used to select (and interact with) a particular
widget. As the cursor is moved from widget to widget, it may cause the widget to change color, or
the cursor itself may only appear positioned in or next to the widget. In Figure 8.1, Installation
Program Widgets as seen in URL Setup , the cursor is positioned on the Enable HTTP proxy
checkbox. Figure 8.2, Installation Program Widgets as seen in Choose a Language , shows
the cursor on the OK button.
8.1.1. Using t he Keyboard t o Navigat e
Navigation through the installation dialogs is performed through a simple set of keystrokes. To move
the cursor, use the Left, Right, Up, and Down arrow keys. Use Tab, and Shift-Tab to cycle
forward or backward through each widget on the screen. Along the bottom, most screens display a
summary of available cursor positioning keys.
To "press" a button, position the cursor over the button (using Tab, for example) and press Space or
Enter. To select an item from a list of items, move the cursor to the item you wish to select and press
Enter. To select an item with a checkbox, move the cursor to the checkbox and press Space to select
an item. To deselect, press Space a second time.
Pressing F12 accepts the current values and proceeds to the next dialog; it is equivalent to pressing
the OK button.
Warning
Unless a dialog box is waiting for your input, do not press any keys during the installation
process (doing so may result in unpredictable behavior).
8.2. Language Select ion
54
Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to select a language to use during the installation process
(refer to Figure 8.3, Language Selection ). With your selected language highlighted, press the Tab
key to move to the OK button and press the Enter key to confirm your choice.
The language you select here will become the default language for the operating system once it is
installed. Selecting the appropriate language also helps target your time zone configuration later in
the installation. The installation program tries to define the appropriate time zone based on what you
specify on this screen.
To add support for additional languages, customize the installation at the package selection stage.
For more information, refer to Section 9.17.2, Customizing the Software Selection .
Fi gure 8. 3. Language Sel ect i on
Once you select the appropriate language, click Next to continue.
8.3. Inst allat ion Met hod
If you booted the installation from minimal boot media or with the askmethod boot option, use the
arrow keys on your keyboard to select an installation method (refer to Figure 8.4, Installation
Method ). With your selected method highlighted, press the Tab key to move to the OK button and
press the Enter key to confirm your choice.
55
Fi gure 8. 4 . I nst al l at i on Met hod
8.3.1. Inst alling from a DVD
To install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD, place the DVD your DVD drive and boot your system
from the DVD. Even if you booted from alternative media, you can still install Red Hat Enterprise Linux
from DVD media.
The installation program then probes your system and attempts to identify your DVD drive. It starts by
looking for an IDE (also known as an ATAPI) DVD drive.
Note
To abort the installation process at this time, reboot your machine and then eject the boot
media. You can safely cancel the installation at any point before the Write changes to
disk screen. Refer to Section 9.16, Write Changes to Disk for more information.
If your DVD drive is not detected, and it is a SCSI DVD, the installation program prompts you to
choose a SCSI driver. Choose the driver that most closely resembles your adapter. You may specify
options for the driver if necessary; however, most drivers detect your SCSI adapter automatically.
If the DVD drive is found and the driver loaded, the installer will present you with the option to
perform a media check on the DVD. This will take some time, and you may opt to skip over this step.
However, if you later encounter problems with the installer, you should reboot and perform the media
check before calling for support. From the media check dialog, continue to the next stage of the
installation process (refer to Section 9.3, Welcome to Red Hat Enterprise Linux ).
8.3.2. Inst alling from a Hard Drive
56
The Select Partition screen applies only if you are installing from a disk partition (that is, you
selected Hard Dri ve in the Installation Method dialog). This dialog allows you to name the
disk partition and directory from which you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux. If you used the
repo=hd boot option, you already specified a partition.
Fi gure 8. 5. Sel ect i ng Part i t i on Di al og f or Hard Dri ve I nst al l at i on
Select the partition containing the ISO files from the list of available partitions. Internal IDE, SATA,
SCSI, and USB drive device names begin with /dev/sd. Each individual drive has its own letter, for
example /dev/sda. Each partition on a drive is numbered, for example /dev/sda1.
Also specify the Directory holding images. Enter the full directory path from the drive that
contains the ISO image files. The following table shows some examples of how to enter this
information:
Tabl e 8. 1. Locat i on of I SO i mages f or di f f erent part i t i on t ypes
Part i t i on t ype Vol ume Ori gi nal pat h t o
f i l es
Di rect ory t o use
VFAT D:\ D:\Downloads\RHEL6.
6
/Downloads/RHEL6.6
ext2, ext3, ext4 /home /home/user1/RHEL6.6 /user1/RHEL6.6
If the ISO images are in the root (top-level) directory of a partition, enter a /. If the ISO images are
located in a subdirectory of a mounted partition, enter the name of the directory holding the ISO
images within that partition. For example, if the partition on which the ISO images is normally
mounted as /home/, and the images are in /home/new/, you would enter /new/.
Use a leading slash
An entry without a leading slash may cause the installation to fail.
Select OK to continue. Proceed with Chapter 9, Installing Using Anaconda.
57
8.3.3. Performing a Net work Inst allat ion
When you start an installation with the askmethod or repo= options, you can install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux from a network server using FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, or NFS protocols. Anaconda uses
the same network connection to consult additional software repositories later in the installation
process.
If your system has more than one network device, anaconda presents you with a list of all available
devices and prompts you to select one to use during installation. If your system only has a single
network device, anaconda automatically selects it and does not present this dialog.
Fi gure 8. 6 . Net worki ng Devi ce
If you are not sure which device in the list corresponds to which physical socket on the system, select
a device in the list then press the Identify button. The Identify NIC dialog appears.
Fi gure 8. 7. I dent i f y NI C
58
The sockets of most network devices feature an activity light (also called a link light) an LED that
flashes to indicate that data is flowing through the socket. Anaconda can flash the activity light of
the network device that you selected in the Networking Device dialog for up to 30 seconds. Enter
the number of seconds that you require, then press OK. When anaconda finishes flashing the light, it
returns you to the Networking Device dialog.
When you select a network device, anaconda prompts you to choose how to configure TCP/IP:
I Pv4 opt i ons
Dynami c I P conf i gurat i on ( DHCP)
Anaconda uses DHCP running on the network to supply the network configuration
automatically.
Manual conf i gurat i on
Anaconda prompts you to enter the network configuration manually, including the IP
address for this system, the netmask, the gateway address, and the DNS address.
I Pv6 opt i ons
Aut omat i c
Anaconda uses router advertisement (RA) and DHCP for automatic configuration, based on
the network environment. (Equivalent to the Automatic option in Net workManager)
Aut omat i c, DHCP onl y
Anaconda does not use RA, but requests information from DHCPv6 directly to create a
stateful configuration. (Equivalent to the Automatic, DHCP only option in
Net workManager)
Anaconda supports the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. However, if you configure an interface to use both
IPv4 and IPv6, the IPv4 connection must succeed or the interface will not work, even if the IPv6
connection succeeds.
59
Fi gure 8. 8. Conf i gure TCP/I P
By default, anaconda uses DHCP to provide network settings automatically for IPv4 and automatic
configuration to provide network settings for IPv6. If you choose to configure TCP/IP manually,
anaconda prompts you to provide the details in the Manual TCP/IP Configuration dialog:
Fi gure 8. 9 . Manual TCP/I P Conf i gurat i on
The dialog provides fields for IPv4 and IPv6 addresses and prefixes, depending on the protocols
that you chose to configure manually, together with fields for the network gateway and name server.
Enter the details for your network, then press OK.
When the installation process completes, it will transfer these settings to your system.
If you are installing via NFS, proceed to Section 8.3.4, Installing via NFS .
60
If you are installing via Web or FTP, proceed to Section 8.3.5, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or
HTTPS .
8.3.4. Inst alling via NFS
The NFS dialog applies only if you selected NFS I mage in the Installation Method dialog. If
you used the repo=nfs boot option, you already specified a server and path.
Fi gure 8. 10. NFS Set up Di al og
1. Enter the domain name or IP address of your NFS server in the NFS server name field. For
example, if you are installing from a host named eastcoast in the domain example.com,
enter eastcoast.example.com.
2. Enter the name of the exported directory in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6
directory field:
If the NFS server is exporting a mirror of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation tree,
enter the directory which contains the root of the installation tree. If everything was
specified properly, a message appears indicating that the installation program for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux is running.
If the NFS server is exporting the ISO image of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD, enter the
directory which contains the ISO image.
If you followed the setup described in Section 4.1.2, Preparing for an NFS Installation , the
exported directory is the one that you specified as publicly_available_directory.
3. Specify any NFS mount options that you require in the NFS mount options field. Refer to
the man pages for mount and nf s for a comprehensive list of options. If you do not require
any mount options, leave the field empty.
4. Proceed with Chapter 9, Installing Using Anaconda.
8.3.5. Inst alling via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
Important you must specify the protocol
When you provide a URL to an installation source, you must explicitly specify http:// or
https:// or ftp:// as the protocol.
61
The URL dialog applies only if you are installing from a FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server (if you selected
URL in the Installation Method dialog). This dialog prompts you for information about the
FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server from which you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux. If you used the
repo=ftp or repo=http boot options, you already specified a server and path.
Enter the name or IP address of the FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS site from which you are installing, and the
name of the directory that contains the /images directory for your architecture. For example:
/mirrors/redhat/rhel-6.6/Server/i386/
To install via a secure HTTPS connection, specify https:// as the protocol.
Specify the address of a proxy server, and if necessary, provide a port number, username, and
password. If everything was specified properly, a message box appears indicating that files are
being retrieved from the server.
If your FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server requires user authentication, specify user and password as part
of the URL as follows:
{ftp|http|https}://<user>:<password>@<hostname>[:<port>]/<directory>/
For example:
http://install:[email protected]/mirrors/redhat/rhel-
6.6/Server/i386/
Fi gure 8. 11. URL Set up Di al og
Proceed with Chapter 9, Installing Using Anaconda.
8.4. Verifying Media
62
The DVD offers an option to verify the integrity of the media. Recording errors sometimes occur while
producing DVD media. An error in the data for package chosen in the installation program can
cause the installation to abort. To minimize the chances of data errors affecting the installation, verify
the media before installing.
If the verification succeeds, the installation process proceeds normally. If the process fails, create a
new DVD using the ISO image you downloaded earlier.
63
Chapter 9. Installing Using Anaconda
This chapter describes an installation using the graphical user interface of anaconda.
Important Graphical Interface on the Installed System
Installing in text mode does not prevent you from using a graphical interface on your system
once it is installed.
Apart from the graphical installer, anaconda also includes a text-based installer.
If one of the following situations occurs, the installation program uses text mode:
The installation system fails to identify the display hardware on your computer
You choose the text mode installation from the boot menu
While text mode installations are not explicitly documented, those using the text mode installation
program can easily follow the GUI installation instructions. However, because text mode presents you
with a simpler, more streamlined installation process, certain options that are available in graphical
mode are not also available in text mode. These differences are noted in the description of the
installation process in this guide, and include:
configuring advanced storage methods such as LVM, RAID, FCoE, zFCP, and iSCSI.
customizing the partition layout
customizing the bootloader layout
selecting packages during installation
configuring the installed system with f i rst boot
If you choose to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux in text mode, you can still configure your system to
use a graphical interface after installation. Refer to Section 35.3, Switching to a Graphical Login
for instructions.
To configure options not available in text mode, consider using a boot option. For example, the
linux ip option can be used to configure network settings. Refer to Section 28.1, Configuring the
Installation System at the Boot Menu for instructions.
9.2. The Graphical Inst allat ion Program User Int erface
If you have used a graphical user interface (GUI) before, you are already familiar with this process; use
your mouse to navigate the screens, click buttons, or enter text fields.
You can also navigate through the installation using the keyboard. The Tab key allows you to move
around the screen, the Up and Down arrow keys to scroll through lists, + and - keys expand and
collapse lists, while Space and Enter selects or removes from selection a highlighted item. You can
also use the Alt+X key command combination as a way of clicking on buttons or making other
screen selections, where X is replaced with any underlined letter appearing within that screen.
64
Note
If you are using an x86, AMD64, or Intel 64 system, and you do not wish to use the GUI
installation program, the text mode installation program is also available. To start the text
mode installation program, use the following command at the boot: prompt:
linux text
Refer to Section 7.1.2, The Boot Menu for a description of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot
menu and to Section 8.1, The Text Mode Installation Program User Interface for a brief
overview of text mode installation instructions.
It is highly recommended that installs be performed using the GUI installation program. The
GUI installation program offers the full functionality of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation
program, including LVM configuration which is not available during a text mode installation.
Users who must use the text mode installation program can follow the GUI installation
instructions and obtain all needed information.
9.2.1. Screenshot s During Inst allat ion
Anaconda allows you to take screenshots during the installation process. At any time during
installation, press Shift+Print Screen and anaconda will save a screenshot to
/root/anaconda-screenshots.
If you are performing a Kickstart installation, use the autostep --autoscreenshot option to
generate a screenshot of each step of the installation automatically. Refer to Section 32.3, Creating
the Kickstart File for details of configuring a Kickstart file.
9.2.2. A Not e About Virt ual Consoles
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program offers more than the dialog boxes of the
installation process. Several kinds of diagnostic messages are available to you, as well as a way to
enter commands from a shell prompt. The installation program displays these messages on five
virtual consoles, among which you can switch using a single keystroke combination.
A virtual console is a shell prompt in a non-graphical environment, accessed from the physical
machine, not remotely. Multiple virtual consoles can be accessed simultaneously.
These virtual consoles can be helpful if you encounter a problem while installing Red Hat Enterprise
Linux. Messages displayed on the installation or system consoles can help pinpoint a problem. Refer
to Table 9.1, Console, Keystrokes, and Contents for a listing of the virtual consoles, keystrokes
used to switch to them, and their contents.
Generally, there is no reason to leave the default console (virtual console #6) for graphical
installations unless you are attempting to diagnose installation problems.
Tabl e 9 . 1. Consol e, Keyst rokes, and Cont ent s
consol e keyst rokes cont ent s
1 ctrl+alt+f1 graphical display
2 ctrl+alt+f2 shell prompt
65
3 ctrl+alt+f3 install log (messages from
installation program)
4 ctrl+alt+f4 system-related messages
5 ctrl+alt+f5 other messages
9.3. Welcome t o Red Hat Ent erprise Linux
The Welcome screen does not prompt you for any input.
Fi gure 9 . 1. The Wel come screen
Click on the Next button to continue.
Using your mouse, select the language (for example, U.S. English) you would prefer to use for the
installation and as the system default (refer to the figure below).
Once you have made your selection, click Next to continue.
66
Fi gure 9 . 2. Language Conf i gurat i on
9.5. Keyboard Configurat ion
Using your mouse, select the correct layout type (for example, U.S. English) for the keyboard you
would prefer to use for the installation and as the system default (refer to the figure below).
Fi gure 9 . 3. Keyboard Conf i gurat i on
67
Red Hat Enterprise Linux includes support for more than one keyboard layout for many languages.
In particular, most European languages include a latin1 option, which uses dead keys to access
certain characters, such as those with diacritical marks. When you press a dead key, nothing will
appear on your screen until you press another key to "complete" the character. For example, to type
on a latin1 keyboard layout, you would press (and release) the ' key, and then press the E key. By
contrast, you access this character on some other keyboards by pressing and holding down a key
(such as Alt-Gr) while you press the E key. Other keyboards might have a dedicated key for this
character.
Note
To change your keyboard layout type after you have completed the installation, use the
Keyboard Conf i gurat i on Tool .
Type the system-config-keyboard command in a shell prompt to launch the Keyboard
Conf i gurat i on Tool . If you are not root, it prompts you for the root password to continue.
9.6. St orage Devices
You can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on a large variety of storage devices. This screen allows
you to select either basic or specialized storage devices.
Fi gure 9 . 4 . St orage devi ces
Basi c St orage Devi ces
Select Basi c St orage Devi ces to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on the following storage
devices:
68
hard drives or solid-state drives connected directly to the local system.
Speci al i zed St orage Devi ces
Select Speci al i zed St orage Devi ces to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on the following
storage devices:
Storage area networks (SANs)
Direct access storage devices (DASDs)
Firmware RAID devices
Multipath devices
Use the Speci al i zed St orage Devi ces option to configure Internet Small Computer System
Interface (iSCSI) and FCoE (Fiber Channel over Ethernet) connections.
If you select Basi c St orage Devi ces, anaconda automatically detects the local storage attached
to the system and does not require further input from you. Proceed to Section 9.7, Setting the
Hostname .
Note
Monitoring of LVM and software RAID devices by the mdeventd daemon is not performed
9.6.1. The St orage Devices Select ion Screen
The storage devices selection screen displays all storage devices to which anaconda has access.
Fi gure 9 . 5. Sel ect st orage devi ces Basi c devi ces
69
Fi gure 9 . 6 . Sel ect st orage devi ces Mul t i pat h Devi ces
Fi gure 9 . 7. Sel ect st orage devi ces Ot her SAN Devi ces
Devices are grouped under the following tabs:
Basi c Devi ces
Basic storage devices directly connected to the local system, such as hard disk drives and
solid-state drives.
70
Fi rmware RAI D
Storage devices attached to a firmware RAID controller.
Mul t i pat h Devi ces
Storage devices accessible through more than one path, such as through multiple SCSI
controllers or Fiber Channel ports on the same system.
Important device serial numbers must be 16 or 32
characters
The installer only detects multipath storage devices with serial numbers that are 16
or 32 characters in length.
Ot her SAN Devi ces
Any other devices available on a storage area network (SAN).
If you do need to configure iSCSI or FCoE storage, click Add Advanced Target and refer to
The storage devices selection screen also contains a Search tab that allows you to filter storage
devices either by their World Wide Identifier (WWID) or by the port, target, or logical unit number (LUN) at
which they are accessed.
Fi gure 9 . 8. The St orage Devi ces Search Tab
The tab contains a drop-down menu to select searching by port, target, WWID, or LUN (with
corresponding text boxes for these values). Searching by WWID or LUN requires additional values in
the corresponding text box.
Each tab presents a list of devices detected by anaconda, with information about the device to help
you to identify it. A small drop-down menu marked with an icon is located to the right of the column
headings. This menu allows you to select the types of data presented on each device. For example,
the menu on the Multipath Devices tab allows you to specify any of WWI D, Capaci t y, Vendor,
I nt erconnect , and Pat hs to include among the details presented for each device. Reducing or
expanding the amount of information presented might help you to identify particular devices.
Fi gure 9 . 9 . Sel ect i ng Col umns
71
Each device is presented on a separate row, with a checkbox to its left. Click the checkbox to make a
device available during the installation process, or click the radio button at the left of the column
headings to select or deselect all the devices listed in a particular screen. Later in the installation
process, you can choose to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux onto any of the devices selected here,
and can choose to automatically mount any of the other devices selected here as part of the installed
system.
Note that the devices that you select here are not automatically erased by the installation process.
Selecting a device on this screen does not, in itself, place data stored on the device at risk. Note also
that any devices that you do not select here to form part of the installed system can be added to the
system after installation by modifying the /etc/fstab file.
Important chain loading
Any storage devices that you do not select on this screen are hidden from anaconda entirely.
To chain load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot loader from a different boot loader, select all
the devices presented in this screen.
when you have selected the storage devices to make available during installation, click Next and
proceed to Section 9.11, Initializing the Hard Disk
9.6.1.1. Advanced St orage Opt ions
From this screen you can configure an iSCSI (SCSI over TCP/IP) target or FCoE (Fibre channel over
ethernet) SAN (storage area network). Refer to Appendix B, iSCSI Disks for an introduction to iSCSI.
Fi gure 9 . 10. Advanced St orage Opt i ons
72
Select Add iSCSI target or Add FCoE SAN and click Add drive. If adding an iSCSI target,
optionally check the box labeled Bind targets to network interfaces.
9 . 6 . 1. 1. 1. Sel ect and conf i gure a net work i nt erf ace
The Advanced Storage Options screen lists the active network interfaces anaconda has found
on your system. If none are found, anaconda must activate an interface through which to connect to
the storage devices.
Click Configure Network on the Advanced Storage Options screen to configure and
activate one using Net workManager to use during installation. Alternatively, anaconda will
prompt you with the Select network interface dialog after you click Add drive.
Fi gure 9 . 11. Sel ect net work i nt erf ace
1. Select an interface from the drop-down menu.
2. Click OK.
Anaconda then starts Net workManager to allow you to configure the interface.
73
Fi gure 9 . 12. Net work Connect i ons
For details of how to use Net workManager, refer to Section 9.7, Setting the Hostname
9 . 6 . 1. 1. 2. Conf i gure i SCSI paramet ers
To add an iSCSI target, select Add iSCSI target and click Add drive.
To use iSCSI storage devices for the installation, anaconda must be able to discover them as iSCSI
targets and be able to create an iSCSI session to access them. Each of these steps might require a
username and password for CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) authentication.
Additionally, you can configure an iSCSI target to authenticate the iSCSI initiator on the system to
which the target is attached (reverse CHAP), both for discovery and for the session. Used together,
CHAP and reverse CHAP are called mutual CHAP or two-way CHAP. Mutual CHAP provides the
greatest level of security for iSCSI connections, particularly if the username and password are
different for CHAP authentication and reverse CHAP authentication.
Repeat the iSCSI discovery and iSCSI login steps as many times as necessary to add all required
iSCSI storage. However, you cannot change the name of the iSCSI initiator after you attempt
discovery for the first time. To change the iSCSI initiator name, you must restart the installation.
Procedure 9 . 1. i SCSI di scovery
Use the iSCSI Discovery Details dialog to provide anaconda with the information that it
needs to discover the iSCSI target.
74
Fi gure 9 . 13. The i SCSI Di scovery Det ai l s di al og
1. Enter the IP address of the iSCSI target in the Target IP Address field.
2. Provide a name in the iSCSI Initiator Name field for the iSCSI initiator in iSCSI qualified
name (IQN) format.
A valid IQN contains:
the string iqn. (note the period)
a date code that specifies the year and month in which your organization' s Internet
domain or subdomain name was registered, represented as four digits for the year, a
dash, and two digits for the month, followed by a period. For example, represent
September 2010 as 2010-09.
your organization' s Internet domain or subdomain name, presented in reverse order with
the top-level domain first. For example, represent the subdomain
storage.example.com as com.example.storage
a colon followed by a string that uniquely identifies this particular iSCSI initiator within
your domain or subdomain. For example, :diskarrays-sn-a8675309.
A complete IQN therefore resembles: iqn.2010-
09.storage.example.com:diskarrays-sn-a8675309, and anaconda pre-
populates the iSCSI Initiator Name field with a name in this format to help you with the
structure.
For more information on IQNs, refer to 3.2.6. iSCSI Names in RFC 3720 - Internet Small Computer
Systems Interface (iSCSI) available from http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3720#section-3.2.6 and 1.
iSCSI Names and Addresses in RFC 3721 - Internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI)
Naming and Discovery available from http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3721#section-1.
3. Use the drop-down menu to specify the type of authentication to use for iSCSI discovery:
75
Fi gure 9 . 14 . i SCSI di scovery aut hent i cat i on
no credent i al s
CHAP pai r
CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r
4. A. If you selected CHAP pai r as the authentication type, provide the username and
password for the iSCSI target in the CHAP Username and CHAP Password fields.
Fi gure 9 . 15. CHAP pai r
76
B. If you selected CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r as the authentication type, provide the
username and password for the iSCSI target in the CHAP Username and CHAP
Password field and the username and password for the iSCSI initiator in the Reverse
CHAP Username and Reverse CHAP Password fields.
Fi gure 9 . 16 . CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r
5. Click Start Discovery. Anaconda attempts to discover an iSCSI target based on the
information that you provided. If discovery succeeds, the iSCSI Discovered Nodes
dialog presents you with a list of all the iSCSI nodes discovered on the target.
6. Each node is presented with a checkbox beside it. Click the checkboxes to select the nodes to
use for installation.
77
Fi gure 9 . 17. The i SCSI Di scovered Nodes di al og
7. Click Login to initiate an iSCSI session.
Procedure 9 . 2. St art i ng an i SCSI sessi on
Use the iSCSI Nodes Login dialog to provide anaconda with the information that it needs to log
into the nodes on the iSCSI target and start an iSCSI session.
Fi gure 9 . 18. The i SCSI Nodes Logi n di al og
1. Use the drop-down menu to specify the type of authentication to use for the iSCSI session:
78
Fi gure 9 . 19 . i SCSI sessi on aut hent i cat i on
no credent i al s
CHAP pai r
Use t he credent i al s f rom t he di scovery st ep
If your environment uses the same type of authentication and same username and password
for iSCSI discovery and for the iSCSI session, select Use t he credent i al s f rom t he
di scovery st ep to reuse these credentials.
Password fields and the username and password for the iSCSI initiator in the Reverse
79
Fi gure 9 . 21. CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r
3. Click Login. Anaconda attempts to log into the nodes on the iSCSI target based on the
information that you provided. The iSCSI Login Results dialog presents you with the
results.
Fi gure 9 . 22. The i SCSI Logi n Resul t s di al og
4. Click OK to continue.
9 . 6 . 1. 1. 3. Conf i gure FCoE Paramet ers
To configure an FCoE SAN, select Add FCoE SAN and click Add Drive.
In the next dialog box that appears after you click Add drive, select the network interface that is
connected to your FCoE switch and click Add FCoE Disk(s).
80
Fi gure 9 . 23. Conf i gure FCoE Paramet ers
Data Center Bridging (DCB) is a set of enhancements to the Ethernet protocols designed to increase
the efficiency of Ethernet connections in storage networks and clusters. Enable or disable the
installer' s awareness of DCB with the checkbox in this dialog. This should only be set for networking
interfaces that require a host-based DCBX client. Configurations on interfaces that implement a
hardware DCBX client should leave this checkbox empty.
Auto VLAN indicates whether VLAN discovery should be performed. If this box is checked, then the FIP
VLAN discovery protocol will run on the Ethernet interface once the link configuration has been
validated. If they are not already configured, network interfaces for any discovered FCoE VLANs will
be automatically created and FCoE instances will be created on the VLAN interfaces.
9.7. Set t ing t he Host name
Setup prompts you to supply a host name for this computer, either as a fully-qualified domain name
(FQDN) in the format hostname.domainname or as a short host name in the format hostname. Many
networks have a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) service that automatically supplies
connected systems with a domain name. To allow the DHCP service to assign the domain name to
this machine, specify the short host name only.
Valid Hostnames
You may give your system any name provided that the full hostname is unique. The hostname
may include letters, numbers and hyphens.
81
Fi gure 9 . 24 . Set t i ng t he host name
If your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system is connected directly to the Internet, you must pay attention to
additional considerations to avoid service interruptions or risk action by your upstream service
provider. A full discussion of these issues is beyond the scope of this document.
Modem Configuration
The installation program does not configure modems. Configure these devices after
installation with the Net work utility. The settings for your modem are specific to your
particular Internet Service Provider (ISP).
9.7.1. Edit ing Net work Connect ions
Important Manual configuration is often needed
When a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 installation boots for the first time, it activates any
network interfaces that you configured during the installation process. However, the installer
does not prompt you to configure network interfaces on some common installation paths, for
example, when you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD to a local hard drive.
When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a local installation source to a local storage
device, be sure to configure at least one network interface manually if you require network
access when the system boots for the first time. You will need to select the Connect
automatically option manually when editing the connection.
82
Note
To change your network configuration after you have completed the installation, use the
Net work Admi ni st rat i on Tool .
Type the system-config-network command in a shell prompt to launch the Net work
Admi ni st rat i on Tool . If you are not root, it prompts you for the root password to continue.
The Net work Admi ni st rat i on Tool is now deprecated and will be replaced by
Net workManager during the lifetime of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
To configure a network connection manually, click the button Configure Network. The Network
Connections dialog appears that allows you to configure wired, wireless, mobile broadband,
InfiniBand, VPN, DSL, VLAN, and bonded connections for the system using the Net workManager
tool. A full description of all configurations possible with Net workManager is beyond the scope of
this guide. This section only details the most typical scenario of how to configure wired connections
during installation. Configuration of other types of network is broadly similar, although the specific
parameters that you must configure are necessarily different.
To add a new connection, click Add and select a connection type from the menu. To modify an
existing connection, select it in the list and click Edit. In either case, a dialog box appears with a set
of tabs that is appropriate to the particular connection type, as described below. To remove a
connection, select it in the list and click Delete.
83
When you have finished editing network settings, click Apply to save the new configuration. If you
reconfigured a device that was already active during installation, you must restart the device to use
the new configuration refer to Section 9.7.1.6, Restart a network device .
9.7.1.1. Opt ions common t o all t ypes of connect ion
Certain configuration options are common to all connection types.
Specify a name for the connection in the Connection name name field.
Select Connect automatically to start the connection automatically when the system boots.
When Net workManager runs on an installed system, the Available to all users option
controls whether a network configuration is available system-wide or not. During installation, ensure
that Available to all users remains selected for any network interface that you configure.
9.7.1.2. The Wired t ab
Use the Wired tab to specify or change the media access control (MAC) address for the network
adapter, and either set the maximum transmission unit (MTU, in bytes) that can pass through the
interface.
84
Fi gure 9 . 26 . The Wi red t ab
9.7.1.3. The 802.1x Securit y t ab
Use the 802.1x Security tab to configure 802.1X port-based network access control (PNAC). Select
Use 802.1X security for this connection to enable access control, then specify details of
your network. The configuration options include:
Authentication
Choose one of the following methods of authentication:
TLS for Transport Layer Security
Tunneled TLS for Tunneled Transport Layer Security, otherwise known as TTLS, or
EAP-TTLS
85
Protected EAP (PEAP) for Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol
Identity
Provide the identity of this server.
User certificate
Browse to a personal X.509 certificate file encoded with Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER)
or Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM).
CA certificate
Browse to a X.509 certificate authority certificate file encoded with Distinguished Encoding
Rules (DER) or Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM).
Private key
Browse to a private key file encoded with Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER), Privacy
Enhanced Mail (PEM), or the Personal Information Exchange Syntax Standard (PKCS#12).
Private key password
The password for the private key specified in the Private key field. Select Show
password to make the password visible as you type it.
86
Fi gure 9 . 27. The 802. 1x Securi t y t ab
9.7.1.4. The IPv4 Set t ings t ab
Use the IPv4 Settings tab tab to configure the IPv4 parameters for the previously selected
network connection.
Use the Method drop-down menu to specify which settings the system should attempt to obtain from
a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) service running on the network. Choose from the
following options:
Automatic (DHCP)
IPv4 parameters are configured by the DHCP service on the network.
Automatic (DHCP) addresses only
87
The IPv4 address, netmask, and gateway address are configured by the DHCP service on
the network, but DNS servers and search domains must be configured manually.
Manual
IPv4 parameters are configured manually for a static configuration.
Link-Local Only
A link-local address in the 169.254/16 range is assigned to the interface.
Shared to other computers
The system is configured to provide network access to other computers. The interface is
assigned an address in the 10.42.x.1/24 range, a DHCP server and DNS server are started,
and the interface is connected to the default network connection on the system with network
address translation (NAT).
Disabled
IPv4 is disabled for this connection.
If you selected a method that requires you to supply manual parameters, enter details of the IP
address for this interface, the netmask, and the gateway in the Addresses field. Use the Add and
Delete buttons to add or remove addresses. Enter a comma-separated list of DNS servers in the
DNS servers field, and a comma-separated list of domains in the Search domains field for any
domains that you want to include in name server lookups.
Optionally, enter a name for this network connection in the DHCP client ID field. This name must
be unique on the subnet. When you assign a meaningful DHCP client ID to a connection, it is easy to
identify this connection when troubleshooting network problems.
Deselect the Require IPv4 addressing for this connection to complete check box
to allow the system to make this connection on an IPv6-enabled network if IPv4 configuration fails
but IPv6 configuration succeeds.
88
Fi gure 9 . 28. The I Pv4 Set t i ngs t ab
9 . 7. 1. 4 . 1. Edi t i ng I Pv4 rout es
Red Hat Enterprise Linux configures a number of routes automatically based on the IP addresses of
a device. To edit additional routes, click the Routes button. The Editing IPv4 routes dialog
appears.
89
Fi gure 9 . 29 . The Edi t i ng I Pv4 Rout es di al og
Click Add to add the IP address, netmask, gateway address, and metric for a new static route.
Select Ignore automatically obtained routes to make the interface use only the routes
specified for it here.
Select Use this connection only for resources on its network to restrict connections
only to the local network.
network connection.
following options:
Ignore
IPv6 is ignored for this connection.
Automatic
Net workManager uses router advertisement (RA) to create an automatic, stateless
configuration.
Automatic, addresses only
Net workManager uses RA to create an automatic, stateless configuration, but DNS
servers and search domains are ignored and must be configured manually.
Automatic, DHCP only
Net workManager does not use RA, but requests information from DHCPv6 directly to
create a stateful configuration.
90
Manual
Link-Local Only
A link-local address with the fe80::/10 prefix is assigned to the interface.
91
9 . 7. 1. 5. 1. Edi t i ng I Pv6 rout es
appears.
92
Fi gure 9 . 31. The Edi t i ng I Pv6 Rout es di al og
9.7.1.6. Rest art a net work device
If you reconfigured a network that was already in use during installation, you must disconnect and
reconnect the device in anaconda for the changes to take effect. Anaconda uses interface
configuration (ifcfg) files to communicate with Net workManager. A device becomes disconnected
when its ifcfg file is removed, and becomes reconnected when its ifcfg file is restored, as long as
ONBOOT=yes is set. Refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 Deployment Guide available from
https://access.redhat.com/site/documentation/ for more information about interface configuration
files.
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+F2 to switch to virtual terminal tty2.
2. Move the interface configuration file to a temporary location:
mv /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-device_name /tmp
where device_name is the device that you just reconfigured. For example, ifcfg-eth0 is the
ifcfg file for eth0.
The device is now disconnected in anaconda.
3. Open the interface configuration file in the vi editor:
vi /tmp/ifcfg-device_name
4. Verify that the interface configuration file contains the line ONBOOT=yes. If the file does not
already contain the line, add it now and save the file.
5. Exit the vi editor.
93
6. Move the interface configuration file back to the /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/
directory:
mv /tmp/ifcfg-device_name /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/
The device is now reconnected in anaconda.
7. Press Ctrl+Alt+F6 to return to anaconda.
9.8. Time Zone Configurat ion
Set your time zone by selecting the city closest to your computer' s physical location. Click on the
map to zoom in to a particular geographical region of the world.
Specify a time zone even if you plan to use NTP (Network Time Protocol) to maintain the accuracy of
the system clock.
From here there are two ways for you to select your time zone:
Using your mouse, click on the interactive map to select a specific city (represented by a yellow
dot). A red X appears indicating your selection.
You can also scroll through the list at the bottom of the screen to select your time zone. Using
your mouse, click on a location to highlight your selection.
Fi gure 9 . 32. Conf i guri ng t he Ti me Zone
If Red Hat Enterprise Linux is the only operating system on your computer, select System clock
uses UTC. The system clock is a piece of hardware on your computer system. Red Hat Enterprise
Linux uses the timezone setting to determine the offset between the local time and UTC on the system
clock. This behavior is standard for systems that use UNIX, Linux, and similar operating systems.
Click Next to proceed.
94
Windows and the System Clock
Do not enable the System clock uses UTC option if your machine also runs Microsoft
Windows. Microsoft operating systems change the BIOS clock to match local time rather than
UTC. This may cause unexpected behavior under Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
Note
To change your time zone configuration after you have completed the installation, use the
Ti me and Dat e Propert i es Tool .
Type the system-config-date command in a shell prompt to launch the Ti me and Dat e
Propert i es Tool . If you are not root, it prompts you for the root password to continue.
To run the Ti me and Dat e Propert i es Tool as a text-based application, use the command
timeconfig.
9.9. Set t he Root Password
Setting up a root account and password is one of the most important steps during your installation.
The root account is used to install packages, upgrade RPMs, and perform most system maintenance.
Logging in as root gives you complete control over your system.
Note
The root user (also known as the superuser) has complete access to the entire system; for this
reason, logging in as the root user is best done only to perform system maintenance or
administration.
95
Fi gure 9 . 33. Root Password
Use the root account only for system administration. Create a non-root account for your general use
and use the su command to change to root only when you need to perform tasks that require
superuser authorization. These basic rules minimize the chances of a typo or an incorrect command
doing damage to your system.
Note
To become root, type su - at the shell prompt in a terminal window and then press Enter.
Then, enter the root password and press Enter.
The installation program prompts you to set a root password for your system. . You cannot
proceed to the next stage of the installation process without entering a root password.
The root password must be at least six characters long; the password you type is not echoed to the
screen. You must enter the password twice; if the two passwords do not match, the installation
program asks you to enter them again.
You should make the root password something you can remember, but not something that is easy for
someone else to guess. Your name, your phone number, qwerty, password, root, 123456, and anteater
are all examples of bad passwords. Good passwords mix numerals with upper and lower case letters
and do not contain dictionary words: Aard387vark or 420BMttNT, for example. Remember that the
password is case-sensitive. If you write down your password, keep it in a secure place. However, it is
recommended that you do not write down this or any password you create.
Choose your own password
Do not use one of the example passwords offered in this manual. Using one of these
passwords could be considered a security risk.
[2]
96
To change your root password after you have completed the installation, use the Root Password
Tool .
Type the system-config-users command in a shell prompt to launch the User Manager, a
powerful user management and configuration tool. If you are not root, it prompts you for the root
password to continue.
Enter the root password into the Root Password field. Red Hat Enterprise Linux displays the
characters as asterisks for security. Type the same password into the Confirm field to ensure it is
set correctly. After you set the root password, select Next to proceed.
9.10. Assign St orage Devices
If you selected more than one storage device on the storage devices selection screen (refer to
Section 9.6, Storage Devices ), anaconda asks you to select which of these devices should be
available for installation of the operating system, and which should only be attached to the file
system for data storage. If you selected only one storage device, anaconda does not present you
with this screen.
During installation, the devices that you identify here as being for data storage only are mounted as
part of the file system, but are not partitioned or formatted.
Fi gure 9 . 34 . Assi gn st orage devi ces
The screen is split into two panes. The left pane contains a list of devices to be used for data storage
only. The right pane contains a list of devices that are to be available for installation of the operating
system.
Each list contains information about the devices to help you to identify them. A small drop-down
menu marked with an icon is located to the right of the column headings. This menu allows you to
select the types of data presented on each device. Reducing or expanding the amount of information
presented might help you to identify particular devices.
97
Move a device from one list to the other by clicking on the device, then clicking either the button
labeled with a left-pointing arrow to move it to the list of data storage devices or the button labeled
with a right-pointing arrow to move it to the list of devices available for installation of the operating
system.
The list of devices available as installation targets also includes a radio button beside each device.
Use this radio button to specify the device that you want to use as the boot device for the system.
If any storage device contains a boot loader that will chain load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
boot loader, include that storage device among the Install Target Devices. Storage
devices that you identify as Install Target Devices remain visible to anaconda during
boot loader configuration.
Storage devices that you identify as Install Target Devices on this screen are not
automatically erased by the installation process unless you selected the Use All Space
option on the partitioning screen (refer to Section 9.13, Disk Partitioning Setup ).
When you have finished identifying devices to be used for installation, click Next to continue.
9.11. Init ializing t he Hard Disk
If no readable partition tables are found on existing hard disks, the installation program asks to
initialize the hard disk. This operation makes any existing data on the hard disk unreadable. If your
system has a brand new hard disk with no operating system installed, or you have removed all
partitions on the hard disk, click Re-initialize drive.
The installation program presents you with a separate dialog for each disk on which it cannot read a
valid partition table. Click the Ignore all button or Re-initialize all button to apply the
same answer to all devices.
98
Fi gure 9 . 35. Warni ng screen i ni t i al i zi ng hard dri ve
Certain RAID systems or other nonstandard configurations may be unreadable to the installation
program and the prompt to initialize the hard disk may appear. The installation program responds to
the physical disk structures it is able to detect.
To enable automatic initializing of hard disks for which it turns out to be necessary, use the kickstart
command zerombr (refer to Chapter 32, Kickstart Installations). This command is required when
performing an unattended installation on a system with previously initialized disks.
Detach Unneeded Disks
If you have a nonstandard disk configuration that can be detached during installation and
detected and configured afterward, power off the system, detach it, and restart the installation.
9.12. Upgrading an Exist ing Syst em
99
Important
The following sections only apply to upgrading Red Hat Enterprise Linux between minor
versions, for example, upgrading Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.4 to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.5
or higher. This approach is not supported for upgrades between major versions, for example,
upgrading Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.
In-place upgrades between major versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux can be done, with
certain limitations, using the Red Hat Upgrade Tool and Preupgrade Assi st ant tools.
See Chapter 37, Upgrading Your Current System for more information.
The installation system automatically detects any existing installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
The upgrade process updates the existing system software with new versions, but does not remove
any data from users' home directories. The existing partition structure on your hard drives does not
change. Your system configuration changes only if a package upgrade demands it. Most package
upgrades do not change system configuration, but rather install an additional configuration file for
you to examine later.
Note that the installation medium that you are using might not contain all the software packages that
you need to upgrade your computer.
9.12.1. The Upgrade Dialog
If your system contains a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation, a dialog appears asking whether you
want to upgrade that installation. To perform an upgrade of an existing system, choose the
appropriate installation from the drop-down list and select Next.
Fi gure 9 . 36 . The Upgrade Di al og
100
Manually Installed Software
Software you have installed manually on your existing Red Hat Enterprise Linux system may
behave differently after an upgrade. You may need to manually reinstall or recompile this
software after an upgrade to ensure it performs correctly on the updated system.
9.12.2. Upgrading Using t he Inst aller
Installations are Recommended
In general, Red Hat recommends that you keep user data on a separate /home partition and
perform a fresh installation. For more information on partitions and how to set them up, refer to
Section 9.13, Disk Partitioning Setup .
If you choose to upgrade your system using the installation program, any software not provided by
Red Hat Enterprise Linux that conflicts with Red Hat Enterprise Linux software is overwritten. Before
you begin an upgrade this way, make a list of your system' s current packages for later reference:
rpm -qa --qf '%{NAME} %{VERSION}-%{RELEASE} %{ARCH}\n' > ~/old-
pkglist.txt
After installation, consult this list to discover which packages you may need to rebuild or retrieve from
sources other than Red Hat.
Next, make a backup of any system configuration data:
su -c 'tar czf /tmp/etc-`date +%F`.tar.gz /etc'
su -c 'mv /tmp/etc-*.tar.gz /home'
Make a complete backup of any important data before performing an upgrade. Important data may
include the contents of your entire /home directory as well as content from services such as an
Apache, FTP, or SQL server, or a source code management system. Although upgrades are not
destructive, if you perform one improperly there is a small possibility of data loss.
Storing Backups
Note that the above examples store backup materials in a /home directory. If your /home
directory is not a separate partition, you should not follow these examples verbatim! Store your
backups on another device such as CD or DVD discs or an external hard disk.
For more information on completing the upgrade process later, refer to Section 35.2, Finishing an
Upgrade .
9.12.3. Updat ing t he Boot Loader Configurat ion
Your completed Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation must be registered in the boot loader to boot
properly. A boot loader is software on your machine that locates and starts the operating system.
Refer to Appendix E, The GRUB Boot Loader for more information about boot loaders.
101
Fi gure 9 . 37. The Upgrade Boot Loader Di al og
If the existing boot loader was installed by a Linux distribution, the installation system can modify it
to load the new Red Hat Enterprise Linux system. To update the existing Linux boot loader, select
Update boot loader configuration. This is the default behavior when you upgrade an
existing Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.
GRUB is the standard boot loader for Red Hat Enterprise Linux on 32-bit and 64-bit x86
architectures. If your machine uses another boot loader, such as BootMagic, System Commander, or
the loader installed by Microsoft Windows, then the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation system
cannot update it. In this case, select Skip boot loader updating. When the installation
process completes, refer to the documentation for your product for assistance.
Install a new boot loader as part of an upgrade process only if you are certain you want to replace
the existing boot loader. If you install a new boot loader, you may not be able to boot other operating
systems on the same machine until you have configured the new boot loader. Select Create new
boot loader configuration to remove the existing boot loader and install GRUB.
After you make your selection, click Next to continue. If you selected the Create new boot
loader configuration option, refer to Section 9.18, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader
Configuration . If you chose to update or skip boot loader configuration, installation continues
without further input from you.
9.13. Disk Part it ioning Set up
Warning Back up your data
It is always a good idea to back up any data that you have on your systems. For example, if
you are upgrading or creating a dual-boot system, you should back up any data you wish to
keep on your storage devices. Mistakes do happen and can result in the loss of all your data.
102
Important Installing in text mode
If you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux in text mode, you can only use the default partitioning
schemes described in this section. You cannot add or remove partitions or file systems beyond
those that the installer automatically adds or removes. If you require a customized layout at
installation time, you should perform a graphical installation over a VNC connection or a
kickstart installation.
Furthermore, advanced options such as LVM, encrypted filesystems, and resizable filesystems
are available only in graphical mode and kickstart.
Important Booting from RAIDs
If you have a RAID card, be aware that some BIOS types do not support booting from the RAID
card. In cases such as these, the /boot/ partition must be created on a partition outside of
the RAID array, such as on a separate hard drive. An internal hard drive is necessary to use
for partition creation with problematic RAID cards.
A /boot/ partition is also necessary for software RAID setups.
If you have chosen to automatically partition your system, you should select Review and
manually edit your /boot/ partition.
Partitioning allows you to divide your hard drive into isolated sections, where each section behaves
as its own hard drive. Partitioning is particularly useful if you run multiple operating systems. If you
are not sure how you want your system to be partitioned, read Appendix A, An Introduction to Disk
Partitions for more information.
Fi gure 9 . 38. Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up
103
On this screen you can choose to create the default partition layout in one of four different ways, or
choose to partition storage devices manually to create a custom layout.
The first four options allow you to perform an automated installation without having to partition your
storage devices yourself. If you do not feel comfortable with partitioning your system, choose one of
these options and let the installation program partition the storage devices for you. Depending on
the option that you choose, you can still control what data (if any) is removed from the system.
Your options are:
Use Al l Space
Select this option to remove all partitions on your hard drives (this includes partitions
created by other operating systems such as Windows VFAT or NTFS partitions).
Warning
If you select this option, all data on the selected hard drives is removed by the
installation program. Do not select this option if you have information that you want
to keep on the hard drives where you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
In particular, do not select this option when you configure a system to chain load the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot loader from another boot loader.
Repl ace Exi st i ng Li nux Syst em( s)
Select this option to remove only partitions created by a previous Linux installation. This
does not remove other partitions you may have on your hard drives (such as VFAT or
FAT32 partitions).
Shri nk Current Syst em
Select this option to resize your current data and partitions manually and install a default
Red Hat Enterprise Linux layout in the space that is freed.
Warning
If you shrink partitions on which other operating systems are installed, you might not
be able to use those operating systems. Although this partitioning option does not
destroy data, operating systems typically require some free space in their partitions.
Before you resize a partition that holds an operating system that you might want to
use again, find out how much space you need to leave free.
Use Free Space
Select this option to retain your current data and partitions and install Red Hat Enterprise
Linux in the unused space available on the storage drives. Ensure that there is sufficient
space available on the storage drives before you select this option refer to Section 3.6,
Do You Have Enough Disk Space? .
104
Warning
If your 64-bit x86 system uses UEFI instead of BIOS, you will need to manually create
a /boot partition. This partition must have an ext3 file system. If you choose to
partition automatically, your system will not boot.
Creat e Cust om Layout
Select this option to partition storage devices manually and create customized layouts.
Refer to Section 9.15, Creating a Custom Layout or Modifying the Default Layout
Choose your preferred partitioning method by clicking the radio button to the left of its description in
the dialog box.
Select Encrypt system to encrypt all partitions except the /boot partition. Refer to Appendix C,
Disk Encryption for information on encryption.
To review and make any necessary changes to the partitions created by automatic partitioning,
select the Review option. After selecting Review and clicking Next to move forward, the partitions
created for you by anaconda appear. You can make modifications to these partitions if they do not
meet your needs.
To configure the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot loader to chain load from a different boot loader,
you must specify the boot drive manually. If you chose any of the automatic partitioning
options, you must now select the Review and modify partitioning layout option
before you click Next or you cannot specify the correct boot drive.
Important Mixing multipath and non-multipath devices
When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 on a system with multipath and non-multipath
storage devices, the automatic partitioning layout in the installer might create volume groups
that contain a mix of multipath and non-multipath devices. This defeats the purpose of
multipath storage.
We advise that you select only multipath or only non-multipath devices on the disk selection
screen that appears after selecting automatic partitioning. Alternatively, select custom
partitioning.
Click Next once you have made your selections to proceed.
9.14. Choosing a Disk Encrypt ion Passphrase
If you selected the Encrypt System option, the installer prompts you for a passphrase with which to
encrypt the partitions on the system.
105
Partitions are encrypted using the Linux Unified Key Setup refer to Appendix C, Disk Encryption for
more information.
Fi gure 9 . 39 . Ent er passphrase f or encrypt ed part i t i on
Choose a passphrase and type it into each of the two fields in the dialog box. You must provide this
passphrase every time that the system boots.
Warning Do not lose this passphrase
If you lose this passphrase, any encrypted partitions and the data on them will become
completely inaccessible. There is no way to recover a lost passphrase.
Note that if you perform a kickstart installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you can save
encryption passphrases and create backup encryption passphrases during installation. Refer
to Section C.3.2, Saving Passphrases and Section C.3.3, Creating and Saving Backup
Passphrases .
9.15. Creat ing a Cust om Layout or Modifying t he Default Layout
If you chose one of the four automatic partitioning options and did not select Review, skip ahead to
Section 9.17, Package Group Selection .
If you chose one of the automatic partitioning options and selected Review, you can either accept
the current partition settings (click Next), or modify the setup manually in the partitioning screen.
If you chose to create a custom layout, you must tell the installation program where to install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux. This is done by defining mount points for one or more disk partitions in which Red
Hat Enterprise Linux is installed. You may also need to create and/or delete partitions at this time.
Warning
If your 64-bit x86 system uses UEFI instead of BIOS, you will need to manually create a /boot
partition. This partition must have an ext3 file system. If you choose to partition automatically,
your system will not boot.
106
Important
On systems using UEFI firmware, the boot drive (the disk where the boot loader will be
installed) must contain a special partition (EFI System Partition) at least 50 MB in size with a
mount point of /boot/efi.
The boot drive must also have a GUID Partition Table (GPT) label. If you want to reuse a disk
with existing partitions and a Master Boot Record (MBR) label, the disk must be relabeled. All
existing data on the disk will be lost.
To relabel a disk to GPT in the graphical installer, first go back to Section 9.13, Disk
Partitioning Setup , and choose an automatic partitioning option such as Use All Space.
Check the Review and modify partitioning layout check box, and click Next. On
the next screen, modify the automatically created layout as needed.
This workaround is always necessary when reusing a MBR-labeled drive. If you choose
Create a Custom Layout at the start of the partitioning process, the disk will not be
relabeled and you will not be able to proceed.
If you have not yet planned how to set up your partitions, refer to Appendix A, An Introduction to Disk
Partitions and Section 9.15.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme . At a bare minimum, you need an
appropriately-sized root partition, and usually a swap partition appropriate to the amount of RAM
you have on the system.
Anaconda can handle the partitioning requirements for a typical installation.
Fi gure 9 . 4 0. Part i t i oni ng on x86 , AMD6 4 , and I nt el 6 4 Syst ems
The partitioning screen contains two panes. The top pane contains a graphical representation of the
hard drive, logical volume, or RAID device selected in the lower pane.
107
Above the graphical representation of the device, you can review the name of the drive (such as
/dev/sda or LogVol00), its size (in MB), and its model as detected by the installation program.
Using your mouse, click once to highlight a particular field in the graphical display. Double-click to
edit an existing partition or to create a partition out of existing free space.
The lower pane contains a list of all drives, logical volumes, and RAID devices to be used during
installation, as specified earlier in the installation process refer to Section 9.10, Assign Storage
Devices
Devices are grouped by type. Click on the small triangles to the left of each device type to view or
hide devices of that type.
Anaconda displays several details for each device listed:
Devi ce
the name of the device, logical volume, or partition
Si ze ( MB)
the size of the device, logical volume, or partition (in MB)
Mount Poi nt /RAI D/Vol ume
the mount point (location within a file system) on which a partition is to be mounted, or the
name of the RAID or logical volume group of which it is a part
Type
the type of partition. If the partition is a standard partition, this field displays the type of file
system on the partition (for example, ext4). Otherwise, it indicates that the partition is a
physical volume (LVM), or part of a software RAID
Format
A check mark in this column indicates that the partition will be formatted during installation.
Beneath the lower pane are four buttons: Create, Edit, Delete, and Reset.
Select a device or partition by clicking on it in either the graphical representation in the upper pane
of in the list in the lower pane, then click one of the four buttons to carry out the following actions:
Creat e
create a new partition, logical volume, or software RAID
Edi t
change an existing partition, logical volume, or software RAID. Note that you can only
shrink partitions with the Resize button, not enlarge partitions.
Del et e
remove a partition, logical volume, or software RAID
Reset
undo all changes made in this screen
9.15.1. Creat e St orage
108
The Create Storage dialog allows you to create new storage partitions, logical volumes, and
software RAIDs. Anaconda presents options as available or unavailable depending on the storage
already present on the system or configured to transfer to the system.
Fi gure 9 . 4 1. Creat i ng St orage
Options are grouped under Create Partition, Create Software RAID and Create LVM as
follows:
Creat e Part i t i on
Refer to Section 9.15.2, Adding Partitions for details of the Add Partition dialog.
Standard Partition create a standard disk partition (as described in Appendix A, An
Introduction to Disk Partitions) in unallocated space.
Creat e Sof t ware RAI D
Refer to Section 9.15.3, Create Software RAID for more detail.
RAID Partition create a partition in unallocated space to form part of a software RAID
device. To form a software RAID device, two or more RAID partitions must be available on the
system.
109
RAID Device combine two or more RAID partitions into a software RAID device. When you
choose this option, you can specify the type of RAID device to create (the RAID level). This option
is only available when two or more RAID partitions are available on the system.
Creat e LVM Logi cal Vol ume
Refer to Section 9.15.4, Create LVM Logical Volume for more detail.
LVM Physical Volume create a physical volume in unallocated space.
LVM Volume Group create a volume group from one or more physical volumes. This option is
only available when at least one physical volume is available on the system.
LVM Logical Volume create a logical volume on a volume group. This option is only
available when at least one volume group is available on the system.
9.15.2. Adding Part it ions
To add a new partition, select the Create button. A dialog box appears (refer to Figure 9.42,
Creating a New Partition ).
Note
You must dedicate at least one partition for this installation, and optionally more. For more
information, refer to Appendix A, An Introduction to Disk Partitions.
110
Fi gure 9 . 4 2. Creat i ng a New Part i t i on
Mount Point: Enter the partition' s mount point. For example, if this partition should be the root
partition, enter /; enter /boot for the /boot partition, and so on. You can also use the pull-down
menu to choose the correct mount point for your partition. For a swap partition the mount point
should not be set setting the filesystem type to swap is sufficient.
File System Type: Using the pull-down menu, select the appropriate file system type for this
partition. For more information on file system types, refer to Section 9.15.2.1, File System Types .
Allowable Drives: This field contains a list of the hard disks installed on your system. If a
hard disk' s box is highlighted, then a desired partition can be created on that hard disk. If the box
is not checked, then the partition will never be created on that hard disk. By using different
checkbox settings, you can have anaconda place partitions where you need them, or let
anaconda decide where partitions should go.
Size (MB): Enter the size (in megabytes) of the partition. Note, this field starts with 200 MB;
unless changed, only a 200 MB partition will be created.
Additional Size Options: Choose whether to keep this partition at a fixed size, to allow it to
"grow" (fill up the available hard drive space) to a certain point, or to allow it to grow to fill any
remaining hard drive space available.
If you choose Fill all space up to (MB), you must give size constraints in the field to the
right of this option. This allows you to keep a certain amount of space free on your hard drive for
future use.
Force to be a primary partition: Select whether the partition you are creating should be
one of the first four partitions on the hard drive. If unselected, the partition is created as a logical
partition. Refer to Section A.1.3, Partitions Within Partitions An Overview of Extended
Partitions , for more information.
Encrypt: Choose whether to encrypt the partition so that the data stored on it cannot be
accessed without a passphrase, even if the storage device is connected to another system. Refer
to Appendix C, Disk Encryption for information on encryption of storage devices. If you select this
option, the installer prompts you to provide a passphrase before it writes the partition to the disk.
OK: Select OK once you are satisfied with the settings and wish to create the partition.
Cancel: Select Cancel if you do not want to create the partition.
9.15.2.1. File Syst em Types
Red Hat Enterprise Linux allows you to create different partition types and file systems. The following
is a brief description of the different partition types and file systems available, and how they can be
used.
Part i t i on t ypes
standard partition A standard partition can contain a file system or swap space, or it can
provide a container for software RAID or an LVM physical volume.
swap Swap partitions are used to support virtual memory. In other words, data is written to a
swap partition when there is not enough RAM to store the data your system is processing. Refer to
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide for additional information.
111
software RAID Creating two or more software RAID partitions allows you to create a RAID
device. For more information regarding RAID, refer to the chapter RAID (Redundant Array of
Independent Disks) in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide.
physical volume (LVM) Creating one or more physical volume (LVM) partitions allows you
to create an LVM logical volume. LVM can improve performance when using physical disks. For
more information regarding LVM, refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide.
Fi l e syst ems
ext4 The ext4 file system is based on the ext3 file system and features a number of
improvements. These include support for larger file systems and larger files, faster and more
efficient allocation of disk space, no limit on the number of subdirectories within a directory, faster
file system checking, and more robust journaling. A maximum file system size of 16TB is
supported for ext4. The ext4 file system is selected by default and is highly recommended.
ext3 The ext3 file system is based on the ext2 file system and has one main advantage
journaling. Using a journaling file system reduces time spent recovering a file system after a crash
as there is no need to fsck the file system. A maximum file system size of 16TB is supported
for ext3.
ext2 An ext2 file system supports standard Unix file types (regular files, directories, symbolic
links, etc). It provides the ability to assign long file names, up to 255 characters.
xfs XFS is a highly scalable, high-performance file system that supports filesystems up to 16
exabytes (approximately 16 million terabytes), files up to 8 exabytes (approximately 8 million
terabytes) and directory structures containing tens of millions of entries. XFS supports metadata
journaling, which facilitates quicker crash recovery. The XFS file system can also be
defragmented and resized while mounted and active.
Note
The maximum size of an XFS partition the installer can create is 100 TB.
vfat The VFAT file system is a Linux file system that is compatible with Microsoft Windows long
filenames on the FAT file system.
Btrfs Btrfs is under development as a file system capable of addressing and managing more
files, larger files, and larger volumes than the ext2, ext3, and ext4 file systems. Btrfs is designed to
make the file system tolerant of errors, and to facilitate the detection and repair of errors when they
occur. It uses checksums to ensure the validity of data and metadata, and maintains snapshots of
the file system that can be used for backup or repair.
Because Btrfs is still experimental and under development, the installation program does not offer
it by default. If you want to create a Btrfs partition on a drive, you must commence the installation
process with the boot option btrfs. Refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options for instructions.
Btrfs is still experimental
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 includes Btrfs as a technology preview to allow you to
experiment with this file system. You should not choose Btrfs for partitions that will contain
valuable data or that are essential for the operation of important systems.
[3]
112
9.15.3. Creat e Soft ware RAID
Redundant arrays of independent disks (RAIDs) are constructed from multiple storage devices that are
arranged to provide increased performance and in some configurations greater fault tolerance.
Refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide for a description of different kinds of RAIDs.
To make a RAID device, you must first create software RAID partitions. Once you have created two or
more software RAID partitions, select RAID to join the software RAID partitions into a RAID device.
RAI D Part i t i on
Choose this option to configure a partition for software RAID. This option is the only choice
available if your disk contains no software RAID partitions. This is the same dialog that
appears when you add a standard partition refer to Section 9.15.2, Adding Partitions
for a description of the available options. Note, however, that File System Type must be
set to software RAID
Fi gure 9 . 4 3. Creat e a sof t ware RAI D part i t i on
RAID Device
Choose this option to construct a RAID device from two or more existing software RAID
partitions. This option is available if two or more software RAID partitions have been
configured.
113
Fi gure 9 . 4 4 . Creat e a RAI D devi ce
Select the file system type as for a standard partition.
Anaconda automatically suggests a name for the RAID device, but you can manually
select names from md0 to md15.
Click the checkboxes beside individual storage devices to include or remove them from this
RAID.
The RAID Level corresponds to a particular type of RAID. Choose from the following
options:
RAID 0 distributes data across multiple storage devices. Level 0 RAIDs offer
increased performance over standard partitions, and can be used to pool the storage of
multiple devices into one large virtual device. Note that Level 0 RAIDS offer no
redundancy and that the failure of one device in the array destroys the entire array.
RAID 0 requires at least two RAID partitions.
RAID 1 mirrors the data on one storage device onto one or more other storage
devices. Additional devices in the array provide increasing levels of redundancy. RAID 1
requires at least two RAID partitions.
RAID 4 distributes data across multiple storage devices, but uses one device in the
array to store parity information that safeguards the array in case any device within the
array fails. Because all parity information is stored on the one device, access to this
device creates a bottleneck in the performance of the array. RAID 4 requires at least three
RAID partitions.
114
RAID 5 distributes data and parity information across multiple storage devices.
Level 5 RAIDs therefore offer the performance advantages of distributing data across
multiple devices, but do not share the performance bottleneck of level 4 RAIDs because
the parity information is also distributed through the array. RAID 5 requires at least three
RAID partitions.
RAID 6 level 6 RAIDs are similar to level 5 RAIDs, but instead of storing only one set
of parity data, they store two sets. RAID 6 requires at least four RAID partitions.
RAID 10 level 10 RAIDs are nested RAIDs or hybrid RAIDs. Level 10 RAIDs are
constructed by distributing data over mirrored sets of storage devices. For example, a
level 10 RAID constructed from four RAID partitions consists of two pairs of partitions in
which one partition mirrors the other. Data is then distributed across both pairs of
storage devices, as in a level 0 RAID. RAID 10 requires at least four RAID partitions.
9.15.4. Creat e LVM Logical Volume
Important LVM Unavailable in Text-Mode Installations
LVM initial set up is not available during text-mode installation. If you need to create an LVM
configuration from scratch, press Alt+F2 to use a different virtual console, and run the lvm
command. To return to the text-mode installation, press Alt+F1.
Logical Volume Management (LVM) presents a simple logical view of underlying physical storage
space, such as a hard drives or LUNs. Partitions on physical storage are represented as physical
volumes that can be grouped together into volume groups. Each volume group can be divided into
multiple logical volumes, each of which is analogous to a standard disk partition. Therefore, LVM
logical volumes function as partitions that can span multiple physical disks.
To read more about LVM, refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide. Note, LVM is only
available in the graphical installation program.
LVM Physi cal Vol ume
Choose this option to configure a partition or device as an LVM physical volume. This
option is the only choice available if your storage does not already contain LVM Volume
Groups. This is the same dialog that appears when you add a standard partition refer to
Section 9.15.2, Adding Partitions for a description of the available options. Note,
however, that File System Type must be set to physical volume (LVM)
115
Fi gure 9 . 4 5. Creat e an LVM Physi cal Vol ume
Make LVM Volume Group
Choose this option to create LVM volume groups from the available LVM physical volumes,
or to add existing logical volumes to a volume group.
116
Fi gure 9 . 4 6 . Make LVM Vol ume Group
To assign one or more physical volumes to a volume group, first name the volume group.
Then select the physical volumes to be used in the volume group. Finally, configure logical
volumes on any volume groups using the Add, Edit and Delete options.
You may not remove a physical volume from a volume group if doing so would leave
insufficient space for that group' s logical volumes. Take for example a volume group made
up of two 5 GB LVM physical volume partitions, which contains an 8 GB logical volume.
The installer would not allow you to remove either of the component physical volumes,
since that would leave only 5 GB in the group for an 8 GB logical volume. If you reduce the
total size of any logical volumes appropriately, you may then remove a physical volume
from the volume group. In the example, reducing the size of the logical volume to 4 GB
would allow you to remove one of the 5 GB physical volumes.
Make Logical Volume
Choose this option to create an LVM logical volume. Select a mount point, file system type,
and size (in MB) just as if it were a standard disk partition. You can also choose a name for
the logical volume and specify the volume group to which it will belong.
117
Fi gure 9 . 4 7. Make Logi cal Vol ume
9.15.5. Recommended Part it ioning Scheme
9.15.5.1. x86, AMD64, and Int el 64 syst ems
We recommend that you create the following partitions for x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 systems:
A swap partition
A /boot partition
A / partition
A home partition
A /boot/efi partition (EFI System Partition) - only on systems with UEFI firmware
A swap partition (at least 256 MB) Swap partitions support virtual memory: data is written to a
swap partition when there is not enough RAM to store the data your system is processing.
In years past, the recommended amount of swap space increased linearly with the amount of RAM
in the system. Modern systems often include hundreds of gigabytes of RAM, however. As a
consequence, recommended swap space is considered a function of system memory workload,
not system memory.
The following table provides the recommended size of a swap partition depending on the amount
of RAM in your system and whether you want sufficient memory for your system to hibernate. The
recommended swap partition size is established automatically during installation. To allow for
hibernation, however, you will need to edit the swap space in the custom partitioning stage.
Tabl e 9 . 2. Recommended Syst em Swap Space
Amount of RAM i n t he
syst em
Recommended swap
space
Recommended swap
space i f al l owi ng f or
hi bernat i on
2GB 2 times the amount of RAM 3 times the amount of RAM
118
> 2GB 8GB Equal to the amount of RAM 2 times the amount of RAM
> 8GB 64GB At least 4 GB 1.5 times the amount of RAM
> 64GB At least 4 GB Hibernation not recommended
syst em
Recommended swap
space
Recommended swap
hi bernat i on
At the border between each range listed above (for example, a system with 2GB, 8GB, or 64GB of
system RAM), discretion can be exercised with regard to chosen swap space and hibernation
support. If your system resources allow for it, increasing the swap space may lead to better
performance.
Note that distributing swap space over multiple storage devices particularly on systems with
fast drives, controllers and interfaces also improves swap space performance.
Note
Swap space size recommendations issued for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.0, 6.1, and 6.2
differed from the current recommendations, which were first issued with the release of Red
Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3 in June 2012 and did not account for hibernation space.
Automatic installations of these earlier versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 still generate
a swap space in line with these superseded recommendations. However, manually
selecting a swap space size in line with the newer recommendations issued for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6.3 is advisable for optimal performance.
A /boot/ part i t i on ( 250 MB)
The partition mounted on /boot/ contains the operating system kernel (which allows your
system to boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux), along with files used during the bootstrap process. For
most users, a 250 MB boot partition is sufficient.
Important Supported file systems
The /boot and / (root) partition in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 can only use the ext2,
ext3, and ext4 (recommended) file systems. You cannot use any other file system for this
partition, such as Btrfs, XFS, or VFAT. Other partitions, such as /home, can use any
supported file system, including Btrfs and XFS (if available). See the following article on the
Red Hat Customer Portal for additional information:
https://access.redhat.com/solutions/667273.
Warning
Note that normally the /boot partition is created automatically by the installer. However, if
the / (root) partition is larger than 2 TB and (U)EFI is used for booting, you need to create
a separate /boot partition that is smaller than 2 TB to boot the machine successfully.
119
Note
If your hard drive is more than 1024 cylinders (and your system was manufactured more
than two years ago), you may need to create a /boot/ partition if you want the / (root)
partition to use all of the remaining space on your hard drive.
Note
If you have a RAID card, be aware that some BIOS types do not support booting from the
RAID card. In cases such as these, the /boot/ partition must be created on a partition
outside of the RAID array, such as on a separate hard drive.
A root partition (3.0 GB - 5.0 GB) this is where "/" (the root directory) is located. In this setup,
all files (except those stored in /boot) are on the root partition.
A 3.0 GB partition allows you to install a minimal installation, while a 5.0 GB root partition lets
you perform a full installation, choosing all package groups.
Root and /root
The / (or root) partition is the top of the directory structure. The /root directory (sometimes
pronounced "slash-root") is the home directory of the user account for system
administration.
A home part i t i on ( at l east 100 MB)
To store user data separately from system data, create a dedicated partition within a volume
group for the /home directory. This will enable you to upgrade or reinstall Red Hat Enterprise
Linux without erasing user data files.
Many systems have more partitions than the minimum listed above. Choose partitions based on your
particular system needs. Refer to Section 9.15.5.1.1, Advice on Partitions for more information.
If you create many partitions instead of one large / partition, upgrades become easier. Refer to the
description of the Edit option in Section 9.15, Creating a Custom Layout or Modifying the Default
Layout for more information.
120
The following table summarizes minimum partition sizes for the partitions containing the listed
directories. You do not have to make a separate partition for each of these directories. For instance, if
the partition containing /foo must be at least 500 MB, and you do not make a separate /foo
partition, then the / (root) partition must be at least 500 MB.
Tabl e 9 . 3. Mi ni mum part i t i on si zes
Di rect ory Mi ni mum si ze
/ 250 MB
/usr 250 MB, but avoid placing this on a separate
partition
/tmp 50 MB
/var 384 MB
/home 100 MB
/boot 250 MB
Leave Excess Capacity Unallocated
Only assign storage capacity to those partitions you require immediately. You may allocate
free space at any time, to meet needs as they occur. To learn about a more flexible method for
storage management, refer to Appendix D, Understanding LVM.
If you are not sure how best to configure the partitions for your computer, accept the default partition
layout.
9 . 15. 5. 1. 1. Advi ce on Part i t i ons
Optimal partition setup depends on the usage for the Linux system in question. The following tips
may help you decide how to allocate your disk space.
Consider encrypting any partitions that might contain sensitive data. Encryption prevents
unauthorized people from accessing the data on the partitions, even if they have access to the
physical storage device. In most cases, you should at least encrypt the /home partition.
Each kernel installed on your system requires approximately 10 MB on the /boot partition.
Unless you plan to install a great many kernels, the default partition size of 250 MB for /boot
should suffice.
The /var directory holds content for a number of applications, including the Apache web server.
It also is used to store downloaded update packages on a temporary basis. Ensure that the
partition containing the /var directory has enough space to download pending updates and
hold your other content.
121
Warning
The PackageKi t update software downloads updated packages to /var/cache/yum/ by
default. If you partition the system manually, and create a separate /var/ partition, be sure
to create the partition large enough (3.0 GB or more) to download package updates.
The /usr directory holds the majority of software content on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system.
For an installation of the default set of software, allocate at least 4 GB of space. If you are a
software developer or plan to use your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system to learn software
development skills, you may want to at least double this allocation.
Do not place /usr on a separate partition
If /usr is partitioned separately from the rest of the root volume, the boot process becomes
much more complex because /usr contains boot-critical components. In some situations,
such as when installing on an iSCSI drive, the system will not boot.
Consider leaving a portion of the space in an LVM volume group unallocated. This unallocated
space gives you flexibility if your space requirements change but you do not wish to remove data
from other partitions to reallocate storage.
If you separate subdirectories into partitions, you can retain content in those subdirectories if you
decide to install a new version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux over your current system. For instance,
if you intend to run a MySQL database in /var/lib/mysql, make a separate partition for that
directory in case you need to reinstall later.
UEFI systems should contain a 50-150MB /boot/efi partition with an EFI System Partition
filesystem.
The following table is a possible partition setup for a system with a single, new 80 GB hard disk and
1 GB of RAM. Note that approximately 10 GB of the volume group is unallocated to allow for future
growth.
Example Usage
This setup is not optimal for all use cases.
Exampl e 9 . 1. Exampl e part i t i on set up
Tabl e 9 . 4 . Exampl e part i t i on set up
Part i t i on Si ze and t ype
/boot 250 MB ext3 partition
swap 2 GB swap
LVM physical volume Remaining space, as one LVM volume group
The physical volume is assigned to the default volume group and divided into the following
logical volumes:
122
Tabl e 9 . 5. Exampl e part i t i on set up: LVM physi cal vol ume
Part i t i on Si ze and t ype
/ 13 GB ext4
/var 4 GB ext4
/home 50 GB ext4
9.16. Writ e Changes t o Disk
The installer prompts you to confirm the partitioning options that you selected. Click Write
changes to disk to allow the installer to partition your hard drive and install Red Hat Enterprise
Linux.
Fi gure 9 . 4 8. Wri t i ng st orage conf i gurat i on t o di sk
If you are certain that you want to proceed, click Write changes to disk.
Last chance to cancel safely
Up to this point in the installation process, the installer has made no lasting changes to your
computer. When you click Write changes to disk, the installer will allocate space on
your hard drive and start to transfer Red Hat Enterprise Linux into this space. Depending on
the partitioning option that you chose, this process might include erasing data that already
exists on your computer.
To revise any of the choices that you made up to this point, click Go back. To cancel
installation completely, switch off your computer. To switch off most computers at this stage,
press the power button and hold it down for a few seconds.
After you click Write changes to disk, allow the installation process to complete. If the
process is interrupted (for example, by you switching off or resetting the computer, or by a
power outage) you will probably not be able to use your computer until you restart and
complete the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation process, or install a different operating
system.
9.17. Package Group Select ion
123
Now that you have made most of the choices for your installation, you are ready to confirm the
default package selection or customize packages for your system.
The Package Installation Defaults screen appears and details the default package set for
your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation. This screen varies depending on the version of Red Hat
Enterprise Linux you are installing.
Installing in text mode
If you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux in text mode, you cannot make package selections. The
installer automatically selects packages only from the base and core groups. These packages
are sufficient to ensure that the system is operational at the end of the installation process,
ready to install updates and new packages. To change the package selection, complete the
installation, then use the Add/Remove Sof t ware application to make desired changes.
Fi gure 9 . 4 9 . Package Group Sel ect i on
By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation process loads a selection of software that is
suitable for a system deployed as a basic server. Note that this installation does not include a
graphical environment. To include a selection of software suitable for other roles, click the radio
button that corresponds to one of the following options:
Basi c Server
This option provides a basic installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux for use on a server.
Dat abase Server
This option provides the MySQL and Post greSQL databases.
124
Web server
This option provides the Apache web server.
Ent erpri se I dent i t y Server Base
This option provides OpenLDAP and Ent erpri se I dent i t y Management (IPA) to create
an identity and authentication server.
Vi rt ual Host
This option provides the KVM and Vi rt ual Machi ne Manager tools to create a host for
virtual machines.
Deskt op
This option provides the OpenOf f i ce. org productivity suite, graphical tools such as the
GI MP, and multimedia applications.
Sof t ware Devel opment Workst at i on
This option provides the necessary tools to compile software on your Red Hat Enterprise
Linux system.
Mi ni mal
This option provides only the packages essential to run Red Hat Enterprise Linux. A
minimal installation provides the basis for a single-purpose server or desktop appliance
and maximizes performance and security on such an installation.
If you choose to accept the current package list, skip ahead to Section 9.19, Installing Packages .
To select a component, click on the checkbox beside it (refer to Figure 9.49, Package Group
Selection ).
To customize your package set further, select the Customize now option on the screen. Clicking
Next takes you to the Package Group Selection screen.
9.17.1. Inst alling from Addit ional Reposit ories
You can define additional repositories to increase the software available to your system during
installation. A repository is a network location that stores software packages along with metadata that
describes them. Many of the software packages used in Red Hat Enterprise Linux require other
software to be installed. The installer uses the metadata to ensure that these requirements are met for
every piece of software you select for installation.
The basic options are:
The High Availability repository includes packages for high-availability clustering (also
known as failover clustering) using the Red Hat High-availability Service Management component.
The Load Balancer repository includes packages for load-balancing clustering using Linux
Virtual Server (LVS).
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux repository is automatically selected for you. It contains the
complete collection of software that was released as Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6, with the various
pieces of software in their versions that were current at the time of release.
The Resilient Storage repository includes packages for storage clustering using the Red
Hat global file system (GFS).
125
For more information about clustering with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6, refer to the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6.6 High Availability Add-On Overview, available from
https://access.redhat.com/site/documentation/Red_Hat_Enterprise_Linux/.
Fi gure 9 . 50. Addi ng a sof t ware reposi t ory
To include software from extra repositories, select Add additional software repositories
and provide the location of the repository.
To edit an existing software repository location, select the repository in the list and then select
Modify repository.
If you change the repository information during a non-network installation, such as from a Red Hat
Enterprise Linux DVD, the installer prompts you for network configuration information.
126
2. Click OK.
If you select Add additional software repositories, the Edit repository dialog
appears. Provide a Repository name and the Repository URL for its location.
Once you have located a mirror, to determine the URL to use, find the directory on the mirror that
contains a directory named repodata.
Once you provide information for an additional repository, the installer reads the package metadata
over the network. Software that is specially marked is then included in the package group selection
system.
127
Backtracking Removes Repository Metadata
If you choose Back from the package selection screen, any extra repository data you may
have entered is lost. This allows you to effectively cancel extra repositories. Currently there is
no way to cancel only a single repository once entered.
9.17.2. Cust omizing t he Soft ware Select ion
Additional Language Support
Your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system automatically supports the language that you selected
at the start of the installation process. To include support for additional languages, select the
package group for those languages from the Languages category.
Select Customize now to specify the software packages for your final system in more detail. This
option causes the installation process to display an additional customization screen when you
select Next.
Fi gure 9 . 53. Package Group Det ai l s
Red Hat Enterprise Linux divides the included software into package groups. For ease of use, the
package selection screen displays these groups as categories.
You can select package groups, which group components together according to function (for
example, X Window System and Editors), individual packages, or a combination of the two.
To view the package groups for a category, select the category from the list on the left. The list on the
right displays the package groups for the currently selected category.
128
To specify a package group for installation, select the check box next to the group. The box at the
bottom of the screen displays the details of the package group that is currently highlighted. None of
the packages from a group will be installed unless the check box for that group is selected.
If you select a package group, Red Hat Enterprise Linux automatically installs the base and
mandatory packages for that group. To change which optional packages within a selected group will
be installed, select the Optional Packages button under the description of the group. Then use
the check box next to an individual package name to change its selection.
In the package selection list on the right, you can use the context menu as a shortcut to select or de-
select base and mandatory packages or all optional packages.
Fi gure 9 . 54 . Package Sel ect i on Li st Cont ext Menu
After you choose the desired packages, select Next to proceed. The installer checks your selection,
and automatically adds any extra packages required to use the software you selected. When you
have finished selecting packages, click Close to save your optional package selections and return
to the main package selection screen.
The packages that you select are not permanent. After you boot your system, use the Add/Remove
Sof t ware tool to either install new software or remove installed packages. To run this tool, from the
main menu, select Syst em Admi ni st rat i on Add/Remove Sof t ware. The Red Hat Enterprise
Linux software management system downloads the latest packages from network servers, rather than
using those on the installation discs.
9.17.2.1. Core Net work Services
All Red Hat Enterprise Linux installations include the following network services:
centralized logging through syslog
email through SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
network file sharing through NFS (Network File System)
remote access through SSH (Secure SHell)
resource advertising through mDNS (multicast DNS)
The default installation also provides:
network file transfer through HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
printing through CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System)
129
remote desktop access through VNC (Virtual Network Computing)
Some automated processes on your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system use the email service to send
reports and messages to the system administrator. By default, the email, logging, and printing
services do not accept connections from other systems. Red Hat Enterprise Linux installs the NFS
sharing, HTTP, and VNC components without enabling those services.
You may configure your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system after installation to offer email, file sharing,
logging, printing and remote desktop access services. The SSH service is enabled by default. You
may use NFS to access files on other systems without enabling the NFS sharing service.
9.18. x86, AMD64, and Int el 64 Boot Loader Configurat ion
To boot the system without boot media, you usually need to install a boot loader. A boot loader is the
first software program that runs when a computer starts. It is responsible for loading and transferring
control to the operating system kernel software. The kernel, in turn, initializes the rest of the operating
system.
If you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux in text mode, the installer configures the bootloader
automatically and you cannot customize bootloader settings during the installation process.
GRUB (GRand Unified Bootloader), which is installed by default, is a very powerful boot loader.
GRUB can load a variety of free operating systems, as well as proprietary operating systems with
chain-loading (the mechanism for loading unsupported operating systems, such as Windows, by
loading another boot loader). Note that the version of GRUB in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 is an old
and stable version now known as "GRUB Legacy" since upstream development moved to GRUB 2.
Red Hat remains committed to maintaining the version of GRUB that we ship with Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6, just as we do with all packages that we ship.
The GRUB boot menu
The GRUB menu defaults to being hidden, except on dual-boot systems. To show the GRUB
menu during system boot, press and hold the Shift key before the kernel is loaded. (Any
other key works as well but the Shift key is the safest to use.)
[4]
130
Fi gure 9 . 55. Boot Loader Conf i gurat i on
If there are no other operating systems on your computer, or you are completely removing any other
operating systems the installation program will install GRUB as your boot loader without any
intervention. In that case you may continue on to Section 9.17, Package Group Selection .
You may have a boot loader installed on your system already. An operating system may install its
own preferred boot loader, or you may have installed a third-party boot loader.If your boot loader
does not recognize Linux partitions, you may not be able to boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Use
GRUB as your boot loader to boot Linux and most other operating systems. Follow the directions in
this chapter to install GRUB.
Installing GRUB
If you install GRUB, it may overwrite your existing boot loader.
By default, the installation program installs GRUB in the master boot record or MBR, of the device for
the root file system. To decline installation of a new boot loader, unselect Install boot loader
on /dev/sda.
Warning
If you choose not to install GRUB for any reason, you will not be able to boot the system
directly, and you must use another boot method (such as a commercial boot loader
application). Use this option only if you are sure you have another way of booting the system!
If you have other operating systems already installed, Red Hat Enterprise Linux attempts to
automatically detect and configure GRUB to boot them. You may manually configure any additional
operating systems if GRUB does not detect them.
To add, remove, or change the detected operating system settings, use the options provided.
131
Add
Select Add to include an additional operating system in GRUB.
Select the disk partition which contains the bootable operating system from the drop-down
list and give the entry a label. GRUB displays this label in its boot menu.
Edit
To change an entry in the GRUB boot menu, select the entry and then select Edit.
Delete
To remove an entry from the GRUB boot menu, select the entry and then select Delete.
Select Default beside the preferred boot partition to choose your default bootable OS. You cannot
move forward in the installation unless you choose a default boot image.
Note
The Label column lists what you must enter at the boot prompt, in non-graphical boot
loaders, in order to boot the desired operating system.
Once you have loaded the GRUB boot screen, use the arrow keys to choose a boot label or
type e for edit. You are presented with a list of items in the configuration file for the boot label
you have selected.
Boot loader passwords provide a security mechanism in an environment where physical access to
your server is available.
If you are installing a boot loader, you should create a password to protect your system. Without a
boot loader password, users with access to your system can pass options to the kernel which can
compromise your system security. With a boot loader password in place, the password must first be
entered before selecting any non-standard boot options. However, it is still possible for someone with
physical access to the machine to boot from a diskette, CD-ROM, DVD, or USB media if the BIOS
supports it. Security plans which include boot loader passwords should also address alternate boot
methods.
GRUB Passwords Not Required
You may not require a GRUB password if your system only has trusted operators, or is
physically secured with controlled console access. However, if an untrusted person can get
physical access to your computer' s keyboard and monitor, that person can reboot the system
and access GRUB. A password is helpful in this case.
If you choose to use a boot loader password to enhance your system security, be sure to select the
checkbox labeled Use a boot loader password.
Once selected, enter a password and confirm it.
132
GRUB stores the password in encrypted form, so it cannot be read or recovered. If you forget the boot
password, boot the system normally and then change the password entry in the
/boot/grub/grub.conf file. If you cannot boot, you may be able to use the "rescue" mode on the
first Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation disc to reset the GRUB password.
If you do need to change the GRUB password, use the grub-md5-crypt utility. For information on
using this utility, use the command man grub-md5-crypt in a terminal window to read the manual
pages.
GRUB recognizes only the QWERTY keyboard layout
When selecting a GRUB password, be aware that GRUB recognizes only the QWERTY
keyboard layout, regardless of the keyboard actually attached to the system. If you use a
keyboard with a significantly different layout, it might be more effective to memorize a pattern of
keystrokes rather than the word that the pattern produces.
To configure more advanced boot loader options, such as changing the drive order or passing
options to the kernel, be sure Configure advanced boot loader options is selected before
clicking Next.
9.18.1. Advanced Boot Loader Configurat ion
Now that you have chosen which boot loader to install, you can also determine where you want the
boot loader to be installed. You may install the boot loader in one of two places:
The Master Boot Record (MBR) This is the recommended place to install a boot loader on
systems with BIOS firmware, unless the MBR already starts another operating system loader, such
as System Commander. The MBR is a special area on your hard drive that is automatically
loaded by your computer' s BIOS, and is the earliest point at which the boot loader can take
control of the boot process. If you install it in the MBR, when your machine boots, GRUB presents
a boot prompt. You can then boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux or any other operating system that
you have configured the boot loader to boot.
The EFI System Partition Systems with UEFI firmware require a special partition for installing
the boot loader. This should be a physical (non-LVM) partition of the efi type at least 50 MB in
size; the recommended size is 200 MB. The drive containing this partition must be labeled with a
GUID Partition Table (GPT) instead of a Master Boot Record. If you are installing Red Hat
Enterprise Linux on a drive with a MBR, the drive must be relabeled; all data on the drive will be
lost in the process.
The first sector of your boot partition This is recommended if you are already using another
boot loader on your system. In this case, your other boot loader takes control first. You can then
configure that boot loader to start GRUB, which then boots Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
GRUB as a Secondary Boot Loader
If you install GRUB as a secondary boot loader, you must reconfigure your primary boot
loader whenever you install and boot from a new kernel. The kernel of an operating system
such as Microsoft Windows does not boot in the same fashion. Most users therefore use
GRUB as the primary boot loader on dual-boot systems.
133
Fi gure 9 . 56 . Boot Loader I nst al l at i on
Note
card. In cases such as these, the boot loader should not be installed on the MBR of the RAID
array. Rather, the boot loader should be installed on the MBR of the same drive as the /boot/
partition was created.
If your system only uses Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you should choose the MBR.
Click the Change Drive Order button if you would like to rearrange the drive order or if your BIOS
does not return the correct drive order. Changing the drive order may be useful if you have multiple
SCSI adapters, or both SCSI and IDE adapters, and you want to boot from the SCSI device.
Note
While partitioning your hard drive, keep in mind that the BIOS in some older systems cannot
access more than the first 1024 cylinders on a hard drive. If this is the case, leave enough
room for the /boot Linux partition on the first 1024 cylinders of your hard drive to boot Linux.
The other Linux partitions can be after cylinder 1024.
In parted, 1024 cylinders equals 528MB. For more information, refer to:
http://www.pcguide.com/ref/hdd/bios/sizeMB504-c.html
9.18.2. Rescue Mode
Rescue mode provides the ability to boot a small Red Hat Enterprise Linux environment entirely from
boot media or some other boot method instead of the system' s hard drive. There may be times when
you are unable to get Red Hat Enterprise Linux running completely enough to access files on your
system' s hard drive. Using rescue mode, you can access the files stored on your system' s hard drive,
134
even if you cannot actually run Red Hat Enterprise Linux from that hard drive. If you need to use
rescue mode, try the following method:
Boot an x86, AMD64, or Intel 64 system from any installation medium, such as CD, DVD, USB, or
PXE, and type linux rescue at the installation boot prompt. Refer to Chapter 36, Basic System
Recovery for a more complete description of rescue mode.
For additional information, refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide.
9.18.3. Alt ernat ive Boot Loaders
GRUB is the default bootloader for Red Hat Enterprise Linux, but is not the only choice. A variety of
open-source and proprietary alternatives to GRUB are available to load Red Hat Enterprise Linux,
including LI LO, SYSLI NUX, and Acroni s Di sk Di rect or Sui t e.
Important
Red Hat does not provide customer support for third-party boot loaders.
9.19. Inst alling Packages
At this point there is nothing left for you to do until all the packages have been installed. How quickly
this happens depends on the number of packages you have selected and your computer' s speed.
Depending on the available resources, you might see the following progress bar while the installer
resolves dependencies of the packages you selected for installation:
Fi gure 9 . 57. St art i ng i nst al l at i on
Red Hat Enterprise Linux reports the installation progress on the screen as it writes the selected
packages to your system.
135
Fi gure 9 . 58. Packages compl et ed
For your reference, a complete log of your installation can be found in /root/install.log once
you reboot your system.
After installation completes, select Reboot to restart your computer. Red Hat Enterprise Linux ejects
any loaded discs before the computer reboots.
9.20. Inst allat ion Complet e
Congratulations! Your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation is now complete!
The installation program prompts you to prepare your system for reboot. Remember to remove any
installation media if it is not ejected automatically upon reboot.
After your computer' s normal power-up sequence has completed, Red Hat Enterprise Linux loads and
starts. By default, the start process is hidden behind a graphical screen that displays a progress bar.
Eventually, a login: prompt or a GUI login screen (if you installed the X Window System and
chose to start X automatically) appears.
The first time you start your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system in run level 5 (the graphical run level),
the Fi rst Boot tool appears, which guides you through the Red Hat Enterprise Linux configuration.
Using this tool, you can set your system time and date, install software, register your machine with
Red Hat Network, and more. Fi rst Boot lets you configure your environment at the beginning, so that
you can get started using your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system quickly.
Chapter 34, Firstboot will guide you through the configuration process.
[2] A root password i s the admi ni strati ve password for your Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux system. You
shoul d onl y l og i n as root when needed for system mai ntenance. The root account does not operate
wi thi n the restri cti ons pl aced on normal user accounts, so changes made as root can have i mpl i cati ons
for your enti re system.
[3] The fsck appl i cati on i s used to check the fi l e system for metadata consi stency and opti onal l y repai r
one or more Li nux fi l e systems.
[4] http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/grub-l egacy.html
136
Chapter 10. Troubleshooting Installation on an Intel or AMD
System
This section discusses some common installation problems and their solutions.
For debugging purposes, anaconda logs installation actions into files in the /tmp directory. These
files include:
/tmp/anaconda.log
general anaconda messages
/tmp/program.log
all external programs run by anaconda
/tmp/storage.log
extensive storage module information
/tmp/yum.log
yum package installation messages
/tmp/syslog
hardware-related system messages
If the installation fails, the messages from these files are consolidated into /tmp/anaconda-
tb-identifier, where identifier is a random string.
All of the files above reside in the installer' s ramdisk and are thus volatile. To make a permanent
copy, copy those files to another system on the network using scp on the installation image (not the
other way round).
10.1. You Are Unable t o Boot Red Hat Ent erprise Linux
10.1.1. Are You Unable t o Boot Wit h Your RAID Card?
If you have performed an installation and cannot boot your system properly, you may need to
reinstall and create your partitions differently.
Some BIOS types do not support booting from RAID cards. At the end of an installation, a text-based
screen showing the boot loader prompt (for example, GRUB: ) and a flashing cursor may be all that
appears. If this is the case, you must repartition your system.
Whether you choose automatic or manual partitioning, you must install your /boot partition outside
of the RAID array, such as on a separate hard drive. An internal hard drive is necessary to use for
partition creation with problematic RAID cards.
You must also install your preferred boot loader (GRUB or LILO) on the MBR of a drive that is outside
of the RAID array. This should be the same drive that hosts the /boot/ partition.
Once these changes have been made, you should be able to finish your installation and boot the
system properly.
10.1.2. Is Your Syst em Displaying Signal 11 Errors?
137
A signal 11 error, commonly known as a segmentation fault, means that the program accessed a
memory location that was not assigned to it. A signal 11 error may be due to a bug in one of the
software programs that is installed, or faulty hardware.
If you receive a fatal signal 11 error during your installation, it is probably due to a hardware error in
memory on your system' s bus. Like other operating systems, Red Hat Enterprise Linux places its own
demands on your system' s hardware. Some of this hardware may not be able to meet those
demands, even if they work properly under another OS.
Ensure that you have the latest installation updates and images. Review the online errata to see if
newer versions are available. If the latest images still fail, it may be due to a problem with your
hardware. Commonly, these errors are in your memory or CPU-cache. A possible solution for this
error is turning off the CPU-cache in the BIOS, if your system supports this. You could also try to
swap your memory around in the motherboard slots to check if the problem is either slot or memory
related.
Another option is to perform a media check on your installation DVD. Anaconda, the installation
program, has the ability to test the integrity of the installation media. It works with the DVD, hard drive
ISO, and NFS ISO installation methods. Red Hat recommends that you test all installation media
before starting the installation process, and before reporting any installation-related bugs (many of
the bugs reported are actually due to improperly-burned DVDs). To use this test, type the following
command at the boot: or yaboot: prompt:
linux mediacheck
For more information concerning signal 11 errors, refer to:
http://www.bitwizard.nl/sig11/
10.2. Trouble Beginning t he Inst allat ion
10.2.1. Problems wit h Boot ing int o t he Graphical Inst allat ion
There are some video cards that have trouble booting into the graphical installation program. If the
installation program does not run using its default settings, it tries to run in a lower resolution mode.
If that still fails, the installation program attempts to run in text mode.
One possible solution is to use only a basic video driver during installation. You can do this either
by selecting Install system with basic video driver on the boot menu, or using the
xdriver=vesa boot option at the boot prompt. Alternatively, you can force the installer to use a
specific screen resolution with the resolution= boot option. This option may be most helpful for
laptop users. Another solution to try is the driver= option to specify the driver that should be
loaded for your video card. If this works, you should report it as a bug, because the installer failed to
detect your video card automatically. Refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options for more information on boot
options.
Note
To disable frame buffer support and allow the installation program to run in text mode, try
using the nofb boot option. This command may be necessary for accessibility with some
screen reading hardware.
138
10.3. Trouble During t he Inst allat ion
10.3.1. The "No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux" Error
Message
If you receive an error message stating No devices found to install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux, there is probably a SCSI controller that is not being recognized by the
installation program.
Check your hardware vendor' s website to determine if a driver update is available that fixes your
problem. For more general information on driver updates, refer to Chapter 6, Updating Drivers During
Installation on Intel and AMD Systems.
You can also refer to the Red Hat Hardware Compatibility List, available online at:
10.3.2. Saving Traceback Messages
If anaconda encounters an error during the graphical installation process, it presents you with a
crash reporting dialog box:
Fi gure 10. 1. The Crash Report i ng Di al og Box
Det ai l s
shows you the details of the error:
139
Fi gure 10. 2. Det ai l s of t he Crash
Save
saves details of the error locally or remotely:
Exi t
exits the installation process.
If you select Save from the main dialog, you can choose from the following options:
140
Fi gure 10. 3. Sel ect report er
Logger
saves details of the error as a log file to the local hard drive at a specified location.
Red Hat Cust omer Support
submits the crash report to Customer Support for assistance.
Report upl oader
uploads a compressed version of the crash report to Bugzilla or a URL of your choice.
Before submitting the report, click Preferences to specify a destination or provide authentication
details. Select the reporting method you need to configure and click Configure Event.
141
Fi gure 10. 4 . Conf i gure report er pref erences
Logger
Specify a path and a filename for the log file. Check Append if you are adding to an
existing log file.
Fi gure 10. 5. Speci f y l ocal pat h f or l og f i l e
142
Enter your Red Hat Network username and password so your report reaches Customer
Support and is linked with your account. The URL is prefilled and Verify SSL is checked
by default.
Fi gure 10. 6 . Ent er Red Hat Net work aut hent i cat i on det ai l s
Report upl oader
Specify a URL for uploading a compressed version of the crash report.
Fi gure 10. 7. Ent er URL f or upl oadi ng crash report
Bugzi l l a
Enter your Bugzilla username and password to lodge a bug with Red Hat' s bug-tracking
system using the crash report. The URL is prefilled and Verify SSL is checked by default.
143
Fi gure 10. 8. Ent er Bugzi l l a aut hent i cat i on det ai l s
Once you have entered your preferences, click OK to return to the report selection dialog. Select how
you would like to report the problem and then click Forward.
Fi gure 10. 9 . Conf i rm report dat a
144
You can now customize the report by checking and unchecking the issues that will be included.
When finished, click Apply.
Fi gure 10. 10. Report i n progress
This screen displays the outcome of the report, including any errors in sending or saving the log.
Click Forward to proceed.
Fi gure 10. 11. Report i ng done
145
Reporting is now complete. Click Forward to return to the report selection dialog. You can now make
another report, or click Close to exit the reporting utility and then Exit to close the installation
process.
10.3.3. Trouble wit h Part it ion Tables
If you receive an error after the Disk Partitioning Setup (Section 9.13, Disk Partitioning
Setup ) phase of the installation saying something similar to
The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be
initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive.
you may not have a partition table on that drive or the partition table on the drive may not be
recognizable by the partitioning software used in the installation program.
Users who have used programs such as EZ- BI OS have experienced similar problems, causing data
to be lost (assuming the data was not backed up before the installation began) that could not be
recovered.
No matter what type of installation you are performing, backups of the existing data on your systems
should always be made.
10.3.4. Using Remaining Space
You have a swap and a / (root) partition created, and you have selected the root partition to use the
remaining space, but it does not fill the hard drive.
If your hard drive is more than 1024 cylinders, you must create a /boot partition if you want the /
(root) partition to use all of the remaining space on your hard drive.
10.3.5. The "drive must have a GPT disk label" Error Message
When installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux on a system with UEFI system and using a disk with an
existing partitioning layout as the boot drive (the drive where the boot loader is installed), you may
encounter the following error message during custom partitioning:
sda must have a GPT disk label
This happens because the boot drive (in this case, sda) has a Master Boot Record (MBR) label, but
UEFI systems require a GUID Partition Table (GPT) label. Therefore you can not reuse an existing
partitioning layout on a MBR-labeled drive; the disk must be relabeled, which means you will have to
create a new partition layout and lose all existing data.
To work around this problem, go back to the screen where you select your partitioning strategy.
Select an option other than custom partitioning (for example Use All Space). Make sure to check
the Review and modify partitioning layout check box, and click Next.
On the following screen, modify the automatically created layout so it suits your needs. After you
finish and click Next, Anaconda will use your layout and relabel the drive automatically.
You can also solve this issue by using a Kickstart file or by relabeling the disk using a different
system before you begin the installation. See Section 3.5.2, Disk Drives with MBR on UEFI Systems
for details. Also see Section A.1.2, Partitions: Turning One Drive Into Many for additional
information about MBR and GPT.
10.3.6. Ot her Part it ioning Problems
146
If you create partitions manually, but cannot move to the next screen, you probably have not created
all the partitions necessary for installation to proceed.
You must have the following partitions as a bare minimum:
A / (root) partition
A <swap> partition of type swap
Refer to Section 9.15.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme for more information.
Note
When defining a partition' s type as swap, do not assign it a mount point. Anaconda
automatically assigns the mount point for you.
10.4. Problems Aft er Inst allat ion
10.4.1. Trouble Wit h t he Graphical GRUB Screen on an x86-based Syst em?
If you are experiencing problems with GRUB, you may need to disable the graphical boot screen. To
do this, become the root user and edit the /boot/grub/grub.conf file.
Within the grub.conf file, comment out the line which begins with splashimage by inserting the #
character at the beginning of the line.
Press Enter to exit the editing mode.
Once the boot loader screen has returned, type b to boot the system.
Once you reboot, the grub.conf file is reread and any changes you have made take effect.
You may re-enable the graphical boot screen by uncommenting (or adding) the above line back into
the grub.conf file.
10.4.2. Boot ing int o a Graphical Environment
If you have installed the X Window System but are not seeing a graphical desktop environment once
you log into your system, you can start the X Window System graphical interface using the command
startx.
Once you enter this command and press Enter, the graphical desktop environment is displayed.
Note, however, that this is just a one-time fix and does not change the log in process for future log
ins.
To set up your system so that you can log in at a graphical login screen, you must edit one file,
/etc/inittab, by changing just one number in the runlevel section. When you are finished, reboot
the computer. The next time you log in, you are presented with a graphical login prompt.
Open a shell prompt. If you are in your user account, become root by typing the su command.
Now, type the following to edit the file with gedi t .
gedit /etc/inittab
147
The file /etc/inittab opens. Within the first screen, a section of the file which looks like the
following appears:
# Default runlevel. The runlevels used are:
# 0 - halt (Do NOT set initdefault to this)
# 1 - Single user mode
# 2 - Multiuser, without NFS (The same as 3, if you do not have
networking)
# 3 - Full multiuser mode
# 4 - unused
# 5 - X11
# 6 - reboot (Do NOT set initdefault to this)
#
id:3:initdefault:
To change from a console to a graphical login, you should change the number in the line
id:3:initdefault: from a 3 to a 5.
Warning
Change only the number of the default runlevel from 3 to 5.
Your changed line should look like the following:
id:5:initdefault:
When you are satisfied with your change, save and exit the file using the Ctrl+Q keys. A window
appears and asks if you would like to save the changes. Click Save.
The next time you log in after rebooting your system, you are presented with a graphical login
prompt.
10.4.3. Problems wit h t he X Window Syst em (GUI)
If you are having trouble getting X (the X Window System) to start, you may not have installed it
during your installation.
If you want X, you can either install the packages from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation
media or perform an upgrade.
If you elect to upgrade, select the X Window System packages, and choose GNOME, KDE, or both,
during the upgrade package selection process.
Refer to Section 35.3, Switching to a Graphical Login for more detail on installing a desktop
environment.
10.4.4. Problems wit h t he X Server Crashing and Non-Root Users
If you are having trouble with the X server crashing when anyone logs in, you may have a full file
system (or, a lack of available hard drive space).
To verify that this is the problem you are experiencing, run the following command:
148
df -h
The df command should help you diagnose which partition is full. For additional information about
df and an explanation of the options available (such as the -h option used in this example), refer to
the df man page by typing man df at a shell prompt.
A key indicator is 100% full or a percentage above 90% or 95% on a partition. The /home/ and
/tmp/ partitions can sometimes fill up quickly with user files. You can make some room on that
partition by removing old files. After you free up some disk space, try running X as the user that was
unsuccessful before.
10.4.5. Problems When You Try t o Log In
If you did not create a user account in the f i rst boot screens, switch to a console by pressing
Ctrl+Alt+F2, log in as root and use the password you assigned to root.
If you cannot remember your root password, boot your system as linux single.
If you are using an x86-based system and GRUB is your installed boot loader, type e for edit when
the GRUB boot screen has loaded. You are presented with a list of items in the configuration file for
the boot label you have selected.
Choose the line that starts with kernel and type e to edit this boot entry.
At the end of the kernel line, add:
single
Press Enter to exit edit mode.
Once you have booted into single user mode and have access to the # prompt, you must type
passwd root, which allows you to enter a new password for root. At this point you can type
shutdown -r now to reboot the system with the new root password.
If you cannot remember your user account password, you must become root. To become root, type
su - and enter your root password when prompted. Then, type passwd <username>. This allows
you to enter a new password for the specified user account.
If the graphical login screen does not appear, check your hardware for compatibility issues. The
Hardware Compatibility List can be found at:
10.4.6. Is Your RAM Not Being Recognized?
Sometimes, the kernel does not recognize all of your memory (RAM). You can check this with the cat
/proc/meminfo command.
Verify that the displayed quantity is the same as the known amount of RAM in your system. If they are
not equal, add the following line to the /boot/grub/grub.conf:
mem=xxM
Replace xx with the amount of RAM you have in megabytes.
149
In /boot/grub/grub.conf, the above example would look similar to the following:
# NOTICE: You have a /boot partition. This means that
# all kernel paths are relative to /boot/
default=0
timeout=30
splashimage=(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Client (2.6.32.130.el6.i686)
root (hd0,1)
kernel /vmlinuz-(2.6.32.130.el6.i686 ro root=UUID=04a07c13-e6bf-6d5a-
b207-002689545705 mem=1024M
initrd /initrd-(2.6.32.130.el6.i686.img
Once you reboot, the changes made to grub.conf are reflected on your system.
Once you have loaded the GRUB boot screen, type e for edit. You are presented with a list of items in
the configuration file for the boot label you have selected.
Choose the line that starts with kernel and type e to edit this boot entry.
At the end of the kernel line, add
mem=xxM
where xx equals the amount of RAM in your system.
Press Enter to exit edit mode.
Remember to replace xx with the amount of RAM in your system. Press Enter to boot.
10.4.7. Your Print er Does Not Work
If you are not sure how to set up your printer or are having trouble getting it to work properly, try
using the Pri nt er Conf i gurat i on Tool .
Type the system-config-printer command at a shell prompt to launch the Pri nt er
10.4.8. Apache HTTP Server or Sendmail St ops Responding During St art up
If Apache HTTP Server (ht t pd) or Sendmai l stops responding during startup, make sure the
following line is in the /etc/hosts file:
127.0.0.1 localhost.localdomain localhost
150
Part II. IBM Power Systems Installation and Booting
This part of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide includes information about installation and
basic post-installation troubleshooting for IBM Power Systems servers. IBM Power Systems servers
include IBM PowerLinux servers and POWER7 and POWER6 Power Systems servers running Linux.
For advanced installation options, refer to Part IV, Advanced Installation Options .
Important only 64-bit Power Systems servers are supported
Previous releases of Red Hat Enterprise Linux supported 32-bit and 64-bit Power Systems
servers (ppc and ppc64 respectively). Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 supports only 64-bit
Power Systems servers (ppc64).
Part II. IBM Power Syst ems Inst allat ion and Boot ing
151
Chapter 11. Planning for Installation on Power Systems Servers
11.1. Upgrade or Inst all?
While automated in-place upgrades are now supported, the support is currently limited to AMD64
and Intel 64 systems. If you have an existing installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux on an IBM
Power Systems server, you must perform a clean install to migrate to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7. A
clean install is performed by backing up all data from the system, formatting disk partitions,
performing an installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7 from installation media, and then restoring
any user data.
11.2. Support ed Inst allat ion Hardware
For installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux on IBM Power Systems servers, Red Hat supports hard
drives connected by a standard internal interface, such as SCSI, SATA, or SAS.
Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters and multipath devices are supported. Vendor-provided drivers may
be required for certain hardware.
Virtualized installation on Power Systems servers is also supported when using Virtual SCSI (vSCSI)
adapters in virtual client LPARs.
Note that Red Hat does not support installation to USB drives or SD memory cards.
11.3. Inst allat ion Tools
I BM I nst al l at i on Tool ki t is an optional tool that speeds up the installation of Linux and is
especially helpful for those unfamiliar with Linux. Use the I BM I nst al l at i on Tool ki t for the
following actions:
Install and configure Linux on a non-virtualized Power Systems server.
Install and configure Linux on servers with previously-configured logical partitions (LPARs, also
known as virtualized servers).
Install IBM service and productivity tools on a new or previously installed Linux system. The IBM
service and productivity tools include dynamic logical partition (DLPAR) utilities.
Upgrade system firmware level on Power Systems servers.
Perform diagnostics or maintenance operations on previously installed systems.
Migrate a LAMP server (software stack) and application data from a System x to a System p
system. A LAMP server is a bundle of open source software. LAMP is an acronym for Linux,
Apache HTTP Server, MySQL relational database, and PHP (Perl or Python) scripting
language.
Documentation for the I BM I nst al l at i on Tool ki t for PowerLinux is available in the Linux
Information Center at http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/lnxinfo/v3r0m0/index.jsp?
topic=%2Fliaan%2Fpowerpack.htm
PowerLinux service and productivity tools is an optional set of tools that include hardware service
diagnostic aids, productivity tools, and installation aids for Linux operating systems on IBM servers
based on POWER7, POWER6, POWER5, and POWER4 technology.
[5]
152
Documentation for the service and productivity tools is available in the Linux Information Center at
http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/lnxinfo/v3r0m0/index.jsp?topic=%2Fliaau%2Fliaauraskickoff.htm
11.4. Preparat ion for IBM Power Syst ems servers
Important Check the real-base boot parameter
Ensure that the real-base boot parameter is set to c00000, otherwise you might see errors
such as:
DEFAULT CATCH!, exception-handler=fff00300
IBM Power Systems servers offer many options for partitioning, virtual or native devices, and
consoles.
If you are using a non-partitioned system, you do not need any pre-installation setup. For systems
using the HVSI serial console, hook up your console to the T2 serial port.
If using a partitioned system the steps to create the partition and start the installation are largely the
same. You should create the partition at the HMC and assign some CPU and memory resources, as
well as SCSI and Ethernet resources, which can be either virtual or native. The HMC create partition
wizard steps you through the creation.
For more information on creating the partition, refer to the Partitioning for Linux with an HMC PDF in the
IBM Systems Hardware Information Center at:
http://pic.dhe.ibm.com/infocenter/powersys/v3r1m5/topic/iphbi_p5/iphbibook.pdf
If you are using virtual SCSI resources, rather than native SCSI, you must configure a ' link' to the
virtual SCSI serving partition, and then configure the virtual SCSI serving partition itself. You create a
' link' between the virtual SCSI client and server slots using the HMC. You can configure a virtual
SCSI server on either Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) or IBM i, depending on which model and options you
have.
If you are installing using Intel iSCSI Remote Boot, all attached iSCSI storage devices must be
disabled. Otherwise, the installation will succeed but the installed system will not boot.
For more information on using virtual devices, see the IBM Redbooks publication Virtualizing an
Infrastructure with System p and Linux at: http://publib-b.boulder.ibm.com/abstracts/sg247499.html
Once you have your system configured, you need to Activate from the HMC or power it on. Depending
on what type of install you are doing, you may need to configure SMS to correctly boot the system
into the installation program.
11.5. RAID and Ot her Disk Devices
153
Important Systems with Intel BIOS RAID sets
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 uses mdrai d instead of dmrai d for installation onto Intel BIOS
RAID sets. These sets are detected automatically, and devices with Intel ISW metadata are
recognized as mdraid instead of dmraid. Note that the device node names of any such devices
under mdrai d are different from their device node names under dmrai d. Therefore, special
precautions are necessary when you migrate systems with Intel BIOS RAID sets.
Local modifications to /etc/fstab, /etc/crypttab or other configuration files which refer to
devices by their device node names will not work in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6. Before
migrating these files, you must therefore edit them to replace device node paths with device
UUIDs instead. You can find the UUIDs of devices with the blkid command.
RAID, or Redundant Array of Independent Disks, allows a group, or array, of drives to act as a single
device. Configure any RAID functions provided by the mainboard of your computer, or attached
controller cards, before you begin the installation process. Each active RAID array appears as one
drive within Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
On systems with more than one hard drive you may configure Red Hat Enterprise Linux to operate
several of the drives as a Linux RAID array without requiring any additional hardware.
11.5.2. Soft ware RAID
You can use the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program to create Linux software RAID arrays,
where RAID functions are controlled by the operating system rather than dedicated hardware. These
functions are explained in detail in Section 16.17, Creating a Custom Layout or Modifying the
Default Layout .
11.5.3. FireWire and USB Disks
Some FireWire and USB hard disks may not be recognized by the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
installation system. If configuration of these disks at installation time is not vital, disconnect them to
avoid any confusion.
Post-installation Usage
You can connect and configure external FireWire and USB hard disks after installation. Most
such devices are automatically recognized and available for use once connected.
11.6. Do You Have Enough Disk Space?
Nearly every modern-day operating system (OS) uses disk partitions, and Red Hat Enterprise Linux is
no exception. When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you may have to work with disk partitions. If
you have not worked with disk partitions before (or need a quick review of the basic concepts), refer
to Appendix A, An Introduction to Disk Partitions before proceeding.
154
The disk space used by Red Hat Enterprise Linux must be separate from the disk space used by other
OSes you may have installed on your system.
Before you start the installation process, you must
have enough unpartitioned disk space for the installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, or
have one or more partitions that may be deleted, thereby freeing up enough disk space to install
To gain a better sense of how much space you really need, refer to the recommended partitioning
sizes discussed in Section 16.17.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme .
11.7. Choose a Boot Met hod
Installing from a DVD requires that you have purchased a Red Hat Enterprise Linux product, you
have a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 DVD, and you have a DVD drive on a system that supports
booting from it. Refer to Chapter 2, Making Media for instructions to make an installation DVD.
Other than booting from an installation DVD, you can also boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
installation program from minimal boot media in the form of a bootable CD. After you boot the system
with boot CD, you complete the installation from a different installation source, such as a local hard
drive or a location on a network. Refer to Section 2.2, Making Minimal Boot Media for instructions
on making boot CDs.
[6]
[5] Parts of thi s secti on were previ ousl y publ i shed at IBM' s Linux information for IBM systems resource at
http://pi c.dhe.i bm.com/i nfocenter/l nxi nfo/v3r0m0/i ndex.j sp?topi c=%2Fl i aay%2Ftool s_overvi ew.htm
[6] Unparti ti oned di sk space means that avai l abl e di sk space on the hard dri ves you are i nstal l i ng to
has not been di vi ded i nto secti ons for data. When you parti ti on a di sk, each parti ti on behaves l i ke a
separate di sk dri ve.
155
Important eHEA does not work with huge pages
The eHEA module fails to initialize if 16 GB huge pages are assigned to a system or partition
and the kernel command line does not contain the huge page parameters. Therefore, when
you perform a network installation through an IBM eHEA ethernet adapter, you cannot assign
huge pages to the system or partition during the installation. Large pages should work.
Note
Make sure no installation DVD (or any other type of DVD or CD) is in your system' s CD or
DVD drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a DVD or CD in the drive
drive.
separate, network-accessible server. It must provide the complete contents of the installation DVD-
ROM.
Note
hard drive ISO, and NFS ISO installation methods. Red Hat recommends that you test all
installation media before starting the installation process, and before reporting any
installation-related bugs (many of the bugs reported are actually due to improperly-burned
DVDs). To use this test, type the following command at the yaboot: prompt:
linux mediacheck
156
Note
stored.
run:
157
loop,ro
umount /mount_point
umount /mnt/tmp
directory.
Selection ).
158
NFS server.
Note
linux mediacheck
Note Not all file systems supported
Hard drive installations only work from ext2, ext3, ext4, or FAT file systems. You cannot use a
hard drives formatted for any other file system as an installation source for Red Hat Enterprise
Linux.
To check the file system of a hard drive partition on a Windows operating system, use the Di sk
Management tool. To check the file system of a hard drive partition on a Linux operating
system, use the f di sk tool.
Cannot Install from LVM Partitions
You cannot use ISO files on partitions controlled by LVM (Logical Volume Management).
Use this option to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on systems without a DVD drive or network
connection.
content of a DVD.
drive.
To prepare a hard drive as an installation source, follow these steps:
159
2. Transfer the ISO image to the hard drive.
The ISO image must be located on a hard drive that is either internal to the computer on
which you will install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, or on a hard drive that is attached to that
computer by USB.
run:
loop,ro
umount /mount_point
umount /mnt/tmp
directory.
Selection ).
160
Note
linux mediacheck
161
Chapter 13. Updating Drivers During Installation on IBM
Power Systems Servers
In most cases, Red Hat Enterprise Linux already includes drivers for the devices that make up your
system. However, if your system contains hardware that has been released very recently, drivers for
this hardware might not yet be included. Sometimes, a driver update that provides support for a new
device might be available from Red Hat or your hardware vendor on a driver disc that contains rpm
packages. Typically, the driver disc is available for download as an ISO image file.
Often, you do not need the new hardware during the installation process. For example, if you use a
DVD to install to a local hard drive, the installation will succeed even if drivers for your network card
are not available. In situations like this, complete the installation and add support for the piece of
hardware afterward refer to Section 35.1.1, Driver Update rpm Packages for details of adding
this support.
In other situations, you might want to add drivers for a device during the installation process to
support a particular configuration. For example, you might want to install drivers for a network device
or a storage adapter card to give the installer access to the storage devices that your system uses.
You can use a driver disc to add this support during installation in one of two ways:
1. place the ISO image file of the driver disc in a location accessible to the installer:
a. on a local hard drive
b. a USB flash drive
2. create a driver disc by extracting the image file onto:
a. a CD
b. a DVD
Refer to the instructions for making installation discs in Section 2.1, Making an Installation
DVD for more information on burning ISO image files to CD or DVD.
If Red Hat, your hardware vendor, or a trusted third party told you that you will require a driver
update during the installation process, choose a method to supply the update from the methods
described in this chapter and test it before beginning the installation. Conversely, do not perform a
driver update during installation unless you are certain that your system requires it. Although
installing an unnecessary driver update will not cause harm, the presence of a driver on a system for
which it was not intended can complicate support.
13.1. Limit at ions of Driver Updat es During Inst allat ion
Unfortunately, some situations persist in which you cannot use a driver update to provide drivers
during installation:
Devi ces al ready i n use
You cannot use a driver update to replace drivers that the installation program has already
loaded. Instead, you must complete the installation with the drivers that the installation
program loaded and update to the new drivers after installation, or, if you need the new
drivers for the installation process, consider performing an initial RAM disk driver update
refer to Section 13.2.3, Preparing an Initial RAM Disk Update .
Devi ces wi t h an equi val ent devi ce avai l abl e
162
Because all devices of the same type are initialized together, you cannot update drivers for
a device if the installation program has loaded drivers for a similar device. For example,
consider a system that has two different network adapters, one of which has a driver update
available. The installation program will initialize both adapters at the same time, and
therefore, you will not be able to use this driver update. Again, complete the installation with
the drivers loaded by the installation program and update to the new drivers after
installation, or use an initial RAM disk driver update.
13.2. Preparing for a Driver Updat e During Inst allat ion
If a driver update is necessary and available for your hardware, Red Hat or a trusted third party such
as the hardware vendor will typically provide it in the form of an image file in ISO format. Some
methods of performing a driver update require you to make the image file available to the installation
program, while others require you to use the image file to make a driver update disk:
Met hods t hat use t he i mage f i l e i t sel f
local hard drive
USB flash drive
Met hods t hat use a dri ver updat e di sk produced f rom an i mage f i l e
CD
DVD
Choose a method to provide the driver update, and refer to Section 13.2.1, Preparing to Use a Driver
Update Image File , Section 13.2.2, Preparing a Driver Disc , or Section 13.2.3, Preparing an
Initial RAM Disk Update . Note that you can use a USB storage device either to provide an image file,
or as a driver update disk.
13.2.1. Preparing t o Use a Driver Updat e Image File
13.2.1.1. Preparing t o use an image file on local st orage
To make the ISO image file available on local storage, such as a hard drive or USB flash drive, you
must first determine whether you want to install the updates automatically or select them manually.
For manual installations, copy the file onto the storage device. You can rename the file if you find it
helpful to do so, but you must not change the filename extension, which must remain .iso. In the
following example, the file is named dd.iso:
163
Fi gure 13. 1. Cont ent of a USB f l ash dri ve hol di ng a dri ver updat e i mage f i l e
Note that if you use this method, the storage device will contain only a single file. This differs from
driver discs on formats such as CD and DVD, which contain many files. The ISO image file contains
all of the files that would normally be on a driver disc.
Boot Option to Specify a Driver Update Disk to learn how to select the driver update manually
For automatic installations, you will need to extract the ISO to the root directory of the storage device
rather than simply copy it. Copying the ISO is only effective for manual installations. You must also
change the file system label of the device to OEMDRV.
The installation program will then automatically examine it for driver updates and load any that it
detects. This behavior is controlled by the dlabel=on boot option, which is enabled by default.
Refer to Section 6.3.1, Let the Installer Find a Driver Update Disk Automatically .
13.2.2. Preparing a Driver Disc
You can create a driver update disc on CD or DVD.
13.2.2.1. Creat ing a driver updat e disc on CD or DVD
164
These instructions assume that you use the GNOME desktop
CD/DVD Creat or is part of the GNOME desktop. If you use a different Linux desktop, or a
different operating system altogether, you will need to use another piece of software to create
the CD or DVD. The steps will be generally similar.
Make sure that the software that you choose can create CDs or DVDs from image files. While
this is true of most CD and DVD burning software, exceptions exist. Look for a button or menu
entry labeled burn from image or similar. If your software lacks this feature, or you do not
select it, the resulting disc will hold only the image file itself, instead of the contents of the
image file.
1. Use the desktop file manager to locate the ISO image file of the driver disc, supplied to you by
Red Hat or your hardware vendor.
Fi gure 13. 2. A t ypi cal . i so f i l e di spl ayed i n a f i l e manager wi ndow
2. Right-click on this file and choose Write to disc. You will see a window similar to the
following:
165
Fi gure 13. 3. CD/DVD Creat or' s Wri t e t o Di sc di al og
3. Click the Write button. If a blank disc is not already in the drive, CD/DVD Creat or will
prompt you to insert one.
After you burn a driver update disc CD or DVD, verify that the disc was created successfully by
inserting it into your system and browsing to it using the file manager. You should see a single file
named rhdd3 and a directory named rpms:
Fi gure 13. 4 . Cont ent s of a t ypi cal dri ver updat e di sc on CD or DVD
166
If you see only a single file ending in .iso, then you have not created the disc correctly and should
try again. Ensure that you choose an option similar to burn from image if you use a Linux
desktop other than GNOME or if you use a different operating system.
Boot Option to Specify a Driver Update Disk to learn how to use the driver update disc during
installation.
13.2.3. Preparing an Init ial RAM Disk Updat e
Advanced procedure
This is an advanced procedure that you should consider only if you cannot perform a driver
update with any other method.
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program can load updates for itself early in the installation
process from a RAM disk an area of your computer' s memory that temporarily behaves as if it were
a disk. You can use this same capability to load driver updates. To perform a driver update during
installation, your computer must be able to boot from a yaboot installation server, and you must
have one available on your network. Refer to Chapter 30, Setting Up an Installation Server for
instructions on using a yaboot installation server.
To make the driver update available on your installation server:
1. Place the driver update image file on your installation server. Usually, you would do this by
downloading it to the server from a location on the Internet specified by Red Hat or your
hardware vendor. Names of driver update image files end in .iso.
2. Copy the driver update image file into the /tmp/initrd_update directory.
3. Rename the driver update image file to dd.img.
4. At the command line, change into the /tmp/initrd_update directory, type the following
command, and press Enter:
find . | cpio --quiet -o -H newc | gzip -9 >/tmp/initrd_update.img
5. Copy the file /tmp/initrd_update.img into the directory the holds the target that you
want to use for installation. This directory is placed under the
/var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/ directory. For example,
/var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/rhel6/ might hold the yaboot installation target for Red
Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
6. Edit the /var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/yaboot.conf file to include an entry that includes
the initial RAM disk update that you just created, in the following format:
image=target/vmlinuz
label=target-dd
initrd=target/initrd.img,target/dd.img
Where target is the target that you want to use for installation.
Refer to Section 13.3.4, Select an Installation Server Target That Includes a Driver Update to learn
how to use an initial RAM disk update during installation.
167
Exampl e 13. 1. Prepari ng an i ni t i al RAM di sk updat e f rom a dri ver updat e i mage f i l e
In this example, driver_update.iso is a driver update image file that you downloaded from the
Internet to a directory on your installation server. The target on your installation server that you
want to boot from is located in /var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/rhel6/
At the command line, change to the directory that holds the file and enter the following commands:
$ cp driver_update.iso /tmp/initrd_update/dd.img
$ cd /tmp/initrd_update
$ find . | cpio --quiet -c -o -H newc | gzip -9
>/tmp/initrd_update.img
$ cp /tmp/initrd_update.img /tftpboot/yaboot/rhel6/dd.img
Edit the /var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/yaboot.conf file and include the following entry:
image=rhel6/vmlinuz
label=rhel6-dd
initrd=rhel6/initrd.img,rhel6/dd.img
13.3. Performing a Driver Updat e During Inst allat ion
You can perform a driver update during installation in the following ways:
let the installer automatically find a driver update disk.
let the installer prompt you for a driver update.
use a boot option to specify a driver update disk.
13.3.1. Let t he Inst aller Find a Driver Updat e Disk Aut omat ically
Attach a block device with the filesystem label OEMDRV before starting the installation process. The
installer will automatically examine the device and load any driver updates that it detects and will not
prompt you during the process. Refer to Section 13.2.1.1, Preparing to use an image file on local
storage to prepare a storage device for the installer to find.
13.3.2. Let t he Inst aller Prompt You for a Driver Updat e
1. Begin the installation normally for whatever method you have chosen. If the installer cannot
load drivers for a piece of hardware that is essential for the installation process (for example,
if it cannot detect any network or storage controllers), it prompts you to insert a driver update
disk:
168
Fi gure 13. 5. The no dri ver f ound di al og
2. Select Use a driver disk and refer to Section 13.4, Specifying the Location of a Driver
13.3.3. Use a Boot Opt ion t o Specify a Driver Updat e Disk
Choose this method only for completely new drivers
This method only works to introduce completely new drivers, not to update existing drivers.
1. Type linux dd at the boot prompt at the start of the installation process and press Enter.
The installer prompts you to confirm that you have a driver disk:
Fi gure 13. 6 . The dri ver di sk prompt
2. Insert the driver update disk that you created on CD, DVD, or USB flash drive and select Yes.
The installer examines the storage devices that it can detect. If there is only one possible
location that could hold a driver disk (for example, the installer detects the presence of a DVD
drive, but no other storage devices) it will automatically load any driver updates that it finds
at this location.
169
If the installer finds more than one location that could hold a driver update, it prompts you to
specify the location of the update. See Section 13.4, Specifying the Location of a Driver
13.3.4. Select an Inst allat ion Server Target That Includes a Driver Updat e
1. Configure the computer to boot from the network interface by selecting Select Boot
Options in the SMS menu, then Select Boot/Install Device. Finally, select your
network device from the list of available devices.
2. In the yaboot installation server environment, choose the boot target that you prepared on
your installation server. For example, if you labeled this environment rhel6-dd in the
/var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/yaboot.conf file on your installation server, type rhel6-
dd at the prompt and press Enter.
Refer to Section 13.2.3, Preparing an Initial RAM Disk Update and Chapter 30, Setting Up an
Installation Server for instructions on using a yaboot installation server to perform an update during
installation. Note that this is an advanced procedure do not attempt it unless other methods of
performing a driver update fail.
13.4. Specifying t he Locat ion of a Driver Updat e Image File or a Driver
Updat e Disk
If the installer detects more than one possible device that could hold a driver update, it prompts you
to select the correct device. If you are not sure which option represents the device on which the driver
update is stored, try the various options in order until you find the correct one.
Fi gure 13. 7. Sel ect i ng a dri ver di sk source
170
If the device that you choose contains no suitable update media, the installer will prompt you to make
another choice.
If you made a driver update disk on CD, DVD, or USB flash drive, the installer now loads the driver
update. However, if the device that you selected is a type of device that could contain more than one
partition (whether the device currently has more than one partition or not), the installer might prompt
you to select the partition that holds the driver update.
Fi gure 13. 8. Sel ect i ng a dri ver di sk part i t i on
The installer prompts you to specify which file contains the driver update:
171
Fi gure 13. 9 . Sel ect i ng an I SO i mage
Expect to see these screens if you stored the driver update on an internal hard drive or on a USB
storage device. You should not see them if the driver update is on a CD or DVD.
Regardless of whether you are providing a driver update in the form of an image file or with a driver
update disk, the installer now copies the appropriate update files into a temporary storage area
(located in system RAM and not on disk). The installer might ask whether you would like to use
additional driver updates. If you select Yes, you can load additional updates in turn. When you have
no further driver updates to load, select No. If you stored the driver update on removable media, you
can now safely eject or disconnect the disk or device. The installer no longer requires the driver
update, and you can re-use the media for other purposes.
172
Chapter 14. Booting the Installer
Graphical installation is recommended
Because Power Systems servers primarily use text consoles, anaconda will not automatically
start a graphical installation. However, the graphical installer offers more features and
customization and is recommended if your system has a graphical display.
To start a graphical installation, pass the vnc boot option (refer to Section 28.2.1, Enabling
Remote Access with VNC ).
Important initrd.img sometimes fails to load
On some machines yaboot may not boot, returning the error message:
Cannot load initrd.img: Claim failed for initrd memory at
02000000 rc=ffffffff
To work around this issue, change real-base to c00000. You can obtain the value of
real-base from the OpenFirmware prompt with the printenv command and set the value
with the setenv command.
To boot an IBM Power Systems server from a DVD, you must specify the install boot device in the
System Management Services (SMS) menu.
To enter the System Management Services GUI, press the 1 key during the boot process when
you hear the chime sound. This brings up a graphical interface similar to the one described in this
section.
On a text console, press 1 when the self test is displaying the banner along with the tested
components:
173
Fi gure 14 . 1. SMS consol e
Once in the SMS menu, select the option for Sel ect Boot Opt i ons. In that menu, specify Select
Install or Boot a Device. There, select CD/DVD, and then the bus type (in most cases SCSI).
If you are uncertain, you can select to view all devices. This scans all available buses for boot
devices, including network adapters and hard drives.
Finally, select the device containing the installation DVD. Yaboot is loaded from this device and you
are presented with a boot: prompt. To begin a graphical installation, pass the vnc boot option
now. Otherwise. press Enter or wait for the timeout to expire for the installation to begin.
Use yaboot with vmlinuz and ramdisk to boot your system over a network. You cannot use the
ppc64.img to boot over a network; the file is too large for TFTP.
14.1. The Boot Menu
The installer displays the boot: prompt. For example:
IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
174
IBM
IBM
/
Elapsed time since release of system processors: 276 mins 49 secs
System has 128 Mbytes in RMA
Config file read, 227 bytes
Welcome to the 64-bit Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.0 installer!
Hit <TAB> for boot options.
Welcome to yaboot version 1.3.14 (Red Hat 1.3.14-35.el6)
Enter "help" to get some basic usage information
boot:
To proceed with installation, type linux and press Enter.
You can also specify boot options at this prompt; refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options for more
information. For example, to use the installer to rescue a previously installed system, type linux
rescue and press Enter.
The following example shows the vnc boot option being passed to begin a graphical installation:
boot:
* linux
boot: linux vnc
Please wait, loading kernel...
14.2. Inst alling from a Different Source
You can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the ISO images stored on hard disk, or from a network
using NFS, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS methods. Experienced users frequently use one of these methods
because it is often faster to read data from a hard disk or network server than from a DVD.
The following table summarizes the different boot methods and recommended installation methods to
use with each:
Tabl e 14 . 1. Boot met hods and i nst al l at i on sources
Boot met hod I nst al l at i on source
Installation DVD DVD, network, or hard disk
Installation USB flash drive Installation DVD, network, or hard disk
Minimal boot CD or USB, rescue CD Network or hard disk
Refer to Section 3.7, Selecting an Installation Method for information about installing from
locations other than the media with which you booted the system.
14.3. Boot ing from t he Net work Using a yaboot Inst allat ion Server
175
To boot with a yaboot installation server, you need a properly configured server, and a network
interface in your computer that can support an installation server. For information on how to
configure an installation server, refer to Chapter 30, Setting Up an Installation Server.
Configure the computer to boot from the network interface by selecting Select Boot Options in
the SMS menu, then Select Boot/Install Device. Finally, select your network device from the
list of available devices.
Once you properly configure booting from an installation server, the computer can boot the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux installation system without any other media.
To boot a computer from a yaboot installation server:
1. Ensure that the network cable is attached. The link indicator light on the network socket
should be lit, even if the computer is not switched on.
2. Switch on the computer.
3. A menu screen appears. Press the number key that corresponds to the desired option.
If your PC does not boot from the network installation server, ensure that the SMS is configured to
boot first from the correct network interface. Refer to your hardware documentation for more
information.
176
Chapter 15. Configuring Language and Installation Source
source.
Important Graphical installation recommended
We recommend that you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux using the graphical interface. If you
are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux on a system that lacks a graphical display, consider
performing the installation over a VNC connection see Chapter 31, Installing Through VNC. If
anaconda detects that you are installing in text mode on a system where installation over a
VNC connection might be possible, anaconda asks you to verify your decision to install in
text mode even though your options during installation are limited.
If your system has a graphical display, but graphical installation fails, try booting with the
xdriver=vesa option refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options
177
The widgets include:
a file.
178
the OK button.
Warning
key to move to the OK button and press the Enter key to confirm your choice.
179
Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to select an installation method (refer to Figure 15.4,
Installation Method ). With your selected method highlighted, press the Tab key to move to the OK
button and press the Enter key to confirm your choice.
180
15.3.1. Beginning Inst allat ion
15.3.1.1. Inst alling from a DVD
To install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD, place the DVD your DVD drive and boot your system
from the DVD. Even if you booted from alternative media, you can still install Red Hat Enterprise Linux
from DVD media.
The installation program then probes your system and attempts to identify your DVD drive. It starts by
looking for an IDE (also known as an ATAPI) DVD drive.
If your DVD drive is not detected, and it is a SCSI DVD, the installation program prompts you to
choose a SCSI driver. Choose the driver that most closely resembles your adapter. You may specify
options for the driver if necessary; however, most drivers detect your SCSI adapter automatically.
If the DVD drive is found and the driver loaded, the installer will present you with the option to
perform a media check on the DVD. This will take some time, and you may opt to skip over this step.
However, if you later encounter problems with the installer, you should reboot and perform the media
check before calling for support. From the media check dialog, continue to the next stage of the
installation process (refer to Section 16.5, Welcome to Red Hat Enterprise Linux ).
Select the partition containing the ISO files from the list of available partitions. Internal IDE, SATA,
SCSI, and USB drive device names begin with /dev/sd. Each individual drive has its own letter, for
example /dev/sda. Each partition on a drive is numbered, for example /dev/sda1.
181
information:
Part i t i on t ype Vol ume Ori gi nal pat h t o
f i l es
Di rect ory t o use
VFAT D:\ D:\Downloads\RHEL6.
6
/Downloads/RHEL6.6
Use a leading slash
Select OK to continue. Proceed with Chapter 16, Installing Using Anaconda.
When you start an installation with the askmethod or repo= options, you can install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux from a network server using FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, or NFS protocols. Anaconda uses
the same network connection to consult additional software repositories later in the installation
process.
If your system has more than one network device, anaconda presents you with a list of all available
devices and prompts you to select one to use during installation. If your system only has a single
network device, anaconda automatically selects it and does not present this dialog.
182
Fi gure 15. 6 . Net worki ng Devi ce
If you are not sure which device in the list corresponds to which physical socket on the system, select
a device in the list then press the Identify button. The Identify NIC dialog appears.
Fi gure 15. 7. I dent i f y NI C
The sockets of most network devices feature an activity light (also called a link light) an LED that
flashes to indicate that data is flowing through the socket. Anaconda can flash the activity light of
the network device that you selected in the Networking Device dialog for up to 30 seconds. Enter
the number of seconds that you require, then press OK. When anaconda finishes flashing the light, it
returns you to the Networking Device dialog.
When you select a network device, anaconda prompts you to choose how to configure TCP/IP:
I Pv4 opt i ons
Dynami c I P conf i gurat i on ( DHCP)
Anaconda uses DHCP running on the network to supply the network configuration
automatically.
I Pv6 opt i ons
Aut omat i c
Anaconda uses router advertisement (RA) and DHCP for automatic configuration, based on
the network environment. (Equivalent to the Automatic option in Net workManager)
Aut omat i c, DHCP onl y
Anaconda does not use RA, but requests information from DHCPv6 directly to create a
stateful configuration. (Equivalent to the Automatic, DHCP only option in
Net workManager)
183
Anaconda supports the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. However, if you configure an interface to use both
IPv4 and IPv6, the IPv4 connection must succeed or the interface will not work, even if the IPv6
connection succeeds.
Fi gure 15. 8. Conf i gure TCP/I P
By default, anaconda uses DHCP to provide network settings automatically for IPv4 and automatic
configuration to provide network settings for IPv6. If you choose to configure TCP/IP manually,
anaconda prompts you to provide the details in the Manual TCP/IP Configuration dialog:
184
Fi gure 15. 9 . Manual TCP/I P Conf i gurat i on
The dialog provides fields for IPv4 and IPv6 addresses and prefixes, depending on the protocols
that you chose to configure manually, together with fields for the network gateway and name server.
Enter the details for your network, then press OK.
When the installation process completes, it will transfer these settings to your system.
HTTPS .
Fi gure 15. 10. NFS Set up Di al og
directory field:
185
4. Proceed with Chapter 16, Installing Using Anaconda.
/mirrors/redhat/rhel-6.6/Server/ppc64/
For example:
6.6/Server/ppc64/
186
Proceed with Chapter 16, Installing Using Anaconda.
187
Chapter 16. Installing Using Anaconda
If you would like to use a graphical installation with a system that does not have that capability, such
as a partitioned system, you can use VNC or display forwarding. Both the VNC and display
forwarding options require an active network during the installation and the use of boot time
arguments. For more information on available boot time options, refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options
188
Note
If you do not wish to use the GUI installation program, the text mode installation program is
also available. To start the text mode installation program, use the following command at the
yaboot: prompt:
linux text
Refer to Section 14.1, The Boot Menu for a description of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot
menu and to Section 15.1, The Text Mode Installation Program User Interface for a brief
overview of text mode installation instructions.
It is highly recommended that installs be performed using the GUI installation program. The
GUI installation program offers the full functionality of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation
program, including LVM configuration which is not available during a text mode installation.
Users who must use the text mode installation program can follow the GUI installation
instructions and obtain all needed information.
16.3. A Not e About Linux Virt ual Consoles
This information only applies to users of non-partitioned System p systems using a video card as
their console. Users of partitioned System p systems should skip to Section 16.4, Using the HMC
vterm .
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program offers more than the dialog boxes of the
installation process. Several kinds of diagnostic messages are available to you, as well as a way to
enter commands from a shell prompt. The installation program displays these messages on five
virtual consoles, among which you can switch using a single keystroke combination.
A virtual console is a shell prompt in a non-graphical environment, accessed from the physical
machine, not remotely. Multiple virtual consoles can be accessed simultaneously.
These virtual consoles can be helpful if you encounter a problem while installing Red Hat Enterprise
Linux. Messages displayed on the installation or system consoles can help pinpoint a problem. Refer
to Table 16.1, Console, Keystrokes, and Contents for a listing of the virtual consoles, keystrokes
used to switch to them, and their contents.
Generally, there is no reason to leave the default console (virtual console #6) for graphical
installations unless you are attempting to diagnose installation problems.
Tabl e 16 . 1. Consol e, Keyst rokes, and Cont ent s
1 ctrl+alt+f1 installation dialog
2 ctrl+alt+f2 shell prompt
3 ctrl+alt+f3 install log (messages from
installation program)
4 ctrl+alt+f4 system-related messages
5 ctrl+alt+f5 other messages
6 ctrl+alt+f6 x graphical display
189
16.4. Using t he HMC vt erm
The HMC vterm is the console for any partitioned IBM System p. This is opened by right clicking on
the partition on the HMC, and then selecting Open Terminal Window. Only a single vterm can be
connected to the console at one time and there is no console access for partitioned system besides
the vterm. This often is referred to as a ' virtual console' , but is different from the virtual consoles in
Section 16.3, A Note About Linux Virtual Consoles .
Fi gure 16 . 1. The Wel come screen
Using your mouse, select the language (for example, U.S. English) you would prefer to use for the
installation and as the system default (refer to the figure below).
190
Fi gure 16 . 2. Language Conf i gurat i on
16.7. Keyboard Configurat ion
Using your mouse, select the correct layout type (for example, U.S. English) for the keyboard you
would prefer to use for the installation and as the system default (refer to Figure 16.3, Keyboard
Configuration ).
191
Fi gure 16 . 3. Keyboard Conf i gurat i on
Note
To change your keyboard layout type after you have completed the installation, use the
Keyboard Conf i gurat i on Tool .
Type the system-config-keyboard command in a shell prompt to launch the Keyboard
You can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on a large variety of storage devices. This screen allows
you to select either basic or specialized storage devices.
Fi gure 16 . 4 . St orage devi ces
Select Basi c St orage Devi ces to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on the following storage
devices:
hard drives or solid-state drives connected directly to the local system.
storage devices:
Storage area networks (SANs)
192
Firmware RAID devices
Multipath devices
Interface (iSCSI) and FCoE (Fiber Channel over Ethernet) connections.
If you select Basi c St orage Devi ces, anaconda automatically detects the local storage attached
to the system and does not require further input from you. Proceed to Section 16.9, Setting the
Hostname .
Note
Fi gure 16 . 5. Sel ect st orage devi ces Basi c devi ces
193
Fi gure 16 . 6 . Sel ect st orage devi ces Mul t i pat h Devi ces
Fi gure 16 . 7. Sel ect st orage devi ces Ot her SAN Devi ces
Basi c Devi ces
solid-state drives.
Fi rmware RAI D
194
Storage devices attached to a firmware RAID controller.
characters
Ot her SAN Devi ces
Any other devices available on a storage area network (SAN).
If you do need to configure iSCSI or FCoE storage, click Add Advanced Target and refer to
Fi gure 16 . 8. The St orage Devi ces Search Tab
Fi gure 16 . 9 . Sel ect i ng Col umns
195
system.
Any storage devices that you do not select on this screen are hidden from anaconda entirely.
To chain load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot loader from a different boot loader, select all
the devices presented in this screen.
proceed to Section 16.13, Initializing the Hard Disk
From this screen you can configure an iSCSI (SCSI over TCP/IP) target or FCoE (Fibre channel over
ethernet) SAN (storage area network). Refer to Appendix B, iSCSI Disks for an introduction to iSCSI.
Fi gure 16 . 10. Advanced St orage Opt i ons
196
Select Add iSCSI target or Add FCoE SAN and click Add drive. If adding an iSCSI target,
optionally check the box labeled Bind targets to network interfaces.
16 . 8. 1. 1. 1. Sel ect and conf i gure a net work i nt erf ace
The Advanced Storage Options screen lists the active network interfaces anaconda has found
on your system. If none are found, anaconda must activate an interface through which to connect to
the storage devices.
Click Configure Network on the Advanced Storage Options screen to configure and
activate one using Net workManager to use during installation. Alternatively, anaconda will
prompt you with the Select network interface dialog after you click Add drive.
2. Click OK.
197
16 . 8. 1. 1. 2. Conf i gure i SCSI paramet ers
To add an iSCSI target, select Add iSCSI target and click Add drive.
Procedure 16 . 1. i SCSI di scovery
198
Fi gure 16 . 13. The i SCSI Di scovery Det ai l s di al og
name (IQN) format.
structure.
199
Fi gure 16 . 14 . i SCSI di scovery aut hent i cat i on
no credent i al s
CHAP pai r
200
Fi gure 16 . 16 . CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r
201
Fi gure 16 . 17. The i SCSI Di scovered Nodes di al og
Procedure 16 . 2. St art i ng an i SCSI sessi on
Fi gure 16 . 18. The i SCSI Nodes Logi n di al og
202
Fi gure 16 . 19 . i SCSI sessi on aut hent i cat i on
no credent i al s
CHAP pai r
203
Fi gure 16 . 21. CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r
results.
Fi gure 16 . 22. The i SCSI Logi n Resul t s di al og
16 . 8. 1. 1. 3. Conf i gure FCoE Paramet ers
To configure an FCoE SAN, select Add FCoE SAN and click Add Drive.
In the next dialog box that appears after you click Add drive, select the network interface that is
connected to your FCoE switch and click Add FCoE Disk(s).
204
Fi gure 16 . 23. Conf i gure FCoE Paramet ers
Data Center Bridging (DCB) is a set of enhancements to the Ethernet protocols designed to increase
the efficiency of Ethernet connections in storage networks and clusters. Enable or disable the
installer' s awareness of DCB with the checkbox in this dialog. This should only be set for networking
interfaces that require a host-based DCBX client. Configurations on interfaces that implement a
hardware DCBX client should leave this checkbox empty.
Auto VLAN indicates whether VLAN discovery should be performed. If this box is checked, then the FIP
VLAN discovery protocol will run on the Ethernet interface once the link configuration has been
validated. If they are not already configured, network interfaces for any discovered FCoE VLANs will
be automatically created and FCoE instances will be created on the VLAN interfaces.
Valid Hostnames
205
Fi gure 16 . 24 . Set t i ng t he host name
If your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system is connected directly to the Internet, you must pay attention to
additional considerations to avoid service interruptions or risk action by your upstream service
provider. A full discussion of these issues is beyond the scope of this document.
Modem Configuration
The installation program does not configure modems. Configure these devices after
installation with the Net work utility. The settings for your modem are specific to your
particular Internet Service Provider (ISP).
Important Manual configuration is often needed
When a Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 installation boots for the first time, it activates any
network interfaces that you configured during the installation process. However, the installer
does not prompt you to configure network interfaces on some common installation paths, for
example, when you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD to a local hard drive.
When you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a local installation source to a local storage
device, be sure to configure at least one network interface manually if you require network
access when the system boots for the first time. You will need to select the Connect
automatically option manually when editing the connection.
206
Note
To configure a network connection manually, click the button Configure Network. The Network
Connections dialog appears that allows you to configure wired, wireless, mobile broadband,
InfiniBand, VPN, DSL, VLAN, and bonded connections for the system using the Net workManager
tool. A full description of all configurations possible with Net workManager is beyond the scope of
this guide. This section only details the most typical scenario of how to configure wired connections
during installation. Configuration of other types of network is broadly similar, although the specific
parameters that you must configure are necessarily different.
To add a new connection, click Add and select a connection type from the menu. To modify an
existing connection, select it in the list and click Edit. In either case, a dialog box appears with a set
of tabs that is appropriate to the particular connection type, as described below. To remove a
connection, select it in the list and click Delete.
207
interface.
208
Fi gure 16 . 26 . The Wi red t ab
Authentication
EAP-TTLS
209
Identity
User certificate
CA certificate
Private key
210
Fi gure 16 . 27. The 802. 1x Securi t y t ab
network connection.
following options:
Automatic (DHCP)
211
Manual
Link-Local Only
Disabled
212
16 . 9 . 1. 4 . 1. Edi t i ng I Pv4 rout es
appears.
213
Fi gure 16 . 29 . The Edi t i ng I Pv4 Rout es di al og
network connection.
following options:
Ignore
Automatic
configuration.
214
Manual
Link-Local Only
215
16 . 9 . 1. 5. 1. Edi t i ng I Pv6 rout es
appears.
216
Fi gure 16 . 31. The Edi t i ng I Pv6 Rout es di al og
files.
217
directory:
Fi gure 16 . 32. Conf i guri ng t he Ti me Zone
If Red Hat Enterprise Linux is the only operating system on your computer, select System clock
uses UTC. The system clock is a piece of hardware on your computer system. Red Hat Enterprise
Linux uses the timezone setting to determine the offset between the local time and UTC on the system
clock. This behavior is standard for systems that use UNIX, Linux, and similar operating systems.
218
Note
timeconfig.
Note
administration.
Fi gure 16 . 33. Root Password
219
Note
Tool .
system for data storage. If you selected only one storage device, anaconda does not present you
with this screen.
[7]
220
Fi gure 16 . 34 . Assi gn st orage devi ces
system.
system.
Use this radio button to specify the device that you want to use as the boot device for the system.
If any storage device contains a boot loader that will chain load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
boot loader, include that storage device among the Install Target Devices. Storage
devices that you identify as Install Target Devices remain visible to anaconda during
boot loader configuration.
Storage devices that you identify as Install Target Devices on this screen are not
automatically erased by the installation process unless you selected the Use All Space
option on the partitioning screen (refer to Section 16.15, Disk Partitioning Setup ).
221
Fi gure 16 . 35. Warni ng screen i ni t i al i zi ng hard dri ve
222
Important
16.14.1. The Upgrade Dialog
If your system contains a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation, a dialog appears asking whether you
want to upgrade that installation. To perform an upgrade of an existing system, choose the
appropriate installation from the drop-down list and select Next.
Fi gure 16 . 36 . The Upgrade Di al og
223
pkglist.txt
Storing Backups
Upgrade .
224
Important Booting from RAIDs
card. In cases such as these, the /boot/ partition must be created on a partition outside of
the RAID array, such as on a separate hard drive. An internal hard drive is necessary to use
for partition creation with problematic RAID cards.
A /boot/ partition is also necessary for software RAID setups.
If you have chosen to automatically partition your system, you should select Review and
manually edit your /boot/ partition.
Partitioning allows you to divide your hard drive into isolated sections, where each section behaves
as its own hard drive. Partitioning is particularly useful if you run multiple operating systems. If you
are not sure how you want your system to be partitioned, read Appendix A, An Introduction to Disk
Partitions for more information.
225
Fi gure 16 . 37. Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up
Your options are:
Use Al l Space
Select this option to remove all partitions on your hard drives (this includes partitions
created by other operating systems such as Windows VFAT or NTFS partitions).
Warning
If you select this option, all data on the selected hard drives is removed by the
installation program. Do not select this option if you have information that you want
to keep on the hard drives where you are installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
In particular, do not select this option when you configure a system to chain load the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot loader from another boot loader.
Select this option to remove only partitions created by a previous Linux installation. This
does not remove other partitions you may have on your hard drives (such as VFAT or
FAT32 partitions).
226
Warning
Use Free Space
Do You Have Enough Disk Space? .
the dialog box.
meet your needs.
To configure the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot loader to chain load from a different boot loader,
you must specify the boot drive manually. If you chose any of the automatic partitioning
options, you must now select the Review and modify partitioning layout option
before you click Next or you cannot specify the correct boot drive.
227
multipath storage.
partitioning.
more information.
Fi gure 16 . 38. Ent er passphrase f or encrypt ed part i t i on
228
Passphrases .
Section 16.18, Write Changes to Disk .
If you chose one of the automatic partitioning options and selected Review, you can either accept
the current partition settings (click Next), or modify the setup manually in the partitioning screen.
Hat Enterprise Linux is installed.
Partitions and Section 16.17.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme . At a bare minimum, you need
an appropriately-sized root (/) partition, a /boot/ partition, PReP boot partition, and usually a
swap partition appropriate to the amount of RAM you have on the system.
Fi gure 16 . 39 . Part i t i oni ng on I BM Syst em p
229
hard drive, logical volume, or RAID device selected in the lower pane.
Above the graphical representation of the device, you can review the name of the drive (such as
/dev/sda or LogVol00), its size (in MB), and its model as detected by the installation program.
The lower pane contains a list of all drives, logical volumes, and RAID devices to be used during
Devices
Devi ce
Si ze ( MB)
Type
Format
Creat e
Edi t
Del et e
Reset
230
Fi gure 16 . 4 0. Creat i ng St orage
follows:
231
system.
Note
232
Fi gure 16 . 4 1. Creat i ng a New Part i t i on
partition. For more information on file system types, refer to Section 16.17.2.1, File System Types .
future use.
233
used.
Fi l e syst ems
for ext3.
[8]
234
Note
The maximum size of an XFS partition the installer can create is 100 TB.
RAI D Part i t i on
235
Fi gure 16 . 4 2. Creat e a sof t ware RAI D part i t i on
RAID Device
configured.
236
Fi gure 16 . 4 3. Creat e a RAI D devi ce
RAID.
options:
RAID partitions.
237
RAID partitions.
configuration from scratch, press Alt+F2 to use a different virtual console, and run the lvm
command. To return to the text-mode installation, press Alt+F1.
238
Fi gure 16 . 4 4 . Creat e an LVM Physi cal Vol ume
239
Fi gure 16 . 4 5. Make LVM Vol ume Group
Make Logical Volume
240
Fi gure 16 . 4 6 . Make Logi cal Vol ume
Unless you have a reason for doing otherwise, we recommend that you create the following
partitions:
A swap partition (at least 256 MB) Swap partitions support virtual memory: data is written to a
swap partition when there is not enough RAM to store the data your system is processing.
In years past, the recommended amount of swap space increased linearly with the amount of RAM
in the system. Modern systems often include hundreds of gigabytes of RAM, however. As a
consequence, recommended swap space is considered a function of system memory workload,
not system memory.
The following table provides the recommended size of a swap partition depending on the amount
of RAM in your system and whether you want sufficient memory for your system to hibernate. The
recommended swap partition size is established automatically during installation. To allow for
hibernation, however, you will need to edit the swap space in the custom partitioning stage.
Tabl e 16 . 2. Recommended Syst em Swap Space
syst em
Recommended swap
space
Recommended swap
hi bernat i on
2GB 2 times the amount of RAM 3 times the amount of RAM
> 2GB 8GB Equal to the amount of RAM 2 times the amount of RAM
> 8GB 64GB At least 4 GB 1.5 times the amount of RAM
> 64GB At least 4 GB Hibernation not recommended
At the border between each range listed above (for example, a system with 2GB, 8GB, or 64GB of
system RAM), discretion can be exercised with regard to chosen swap space and hibernation
support. If your system resources allow for it, increasing the swap space may lead to better
performance.
241
Note that distributing swap space over multiple storage devices particularly on systems with
fast drives, controllers and interfaces also improves swap space performance.
Note
Swap space size recommendations issued for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.0, 6.1, and 6.2
differed from the current recommendations, which were first issued with the release of Red
Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3 in June 2012 and did not account for hibernation space.
Automatic installations of these earlier versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 still generate
a swap space in line with these superseded recommendations. However, manually
selecting a swap space size in line with the newer recommendations issued for Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6.3 is advisable for optimal performance.
A PReP boot partition on the first partition of the hard drive the PReP boot partition contains
the Yaboot boot loader (which allows other Power Systems servers to boot Red Hat Enterprise
Linux). Unless you plan to boot from a network source, you must have a PReP boot partition to
boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
For IBM System p users: The PReP boot partition should be between 4-8 MB, not to exceed 10 MB.
A /boot/ partition (250 MB) the partition mounted on /boot/ contains the operating system
kernel (which allows your system to boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux), along with files used during
the bootstrap process. Due to the limitations of most PC firmware, creating a small partition to
hold these is a good idea. For most users, a 250 MB boot partition is sufficient.
Warning
If you have a RAID card, be aware that Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 does not support
setting up hardware RAID on an IPR card. You can boot the standalone diagnostics CD
prior to installation to create a RAID array and then install to that RAID array.
A root partition (3.0 GB - 5.0 GB) this is where "/" (the root directory) is located. In this setup,
all files (except those stored in /boot) are on the root partition.
A 3.0 GB partition allows you to install a minimal installation, while a 5.0 GB root partition lets
you perform a full installation, choosing all package groups.
242
Root and /root
The / (or root) partition is the top of the directory structure. The /root directory (sometimes
pronounced "slash-root") is the home directory of the user account for system
administration.
Warning
The PackageKi t update software downloads updated packages to /var/cache/yum/ by
default. If you partition the system manually, and create a separate /var/ partition, be sure to
create the partition large enough (3.0 GB or more) to download package updates.
Linux.
Fi gure 16 . 4 7. Wri t i ng st orage conf i gurat i on t o di sk
243
installation completely, switch off your computer.
system.
244
Fi gure 16 . 4 8. Package Group Sel ect i on
Basi c Server
Dat abase Server
Web server
Vi rt ual Host
virtual machines.
Deskt op
245
Linux system.
Mi ni mal
Selection ).
246
Fi gure 16 . 4 9 . Addi ng a sof t ware reposi t ory
Modify repository.
247
2. Click OK.
system.
248
Note 64-bit applications
Users who want support for developing or running 64-bit applications are encouraged to
select the Compatibility Arch Support and Compatibility Arch Development
Support packages to install architecture specific support for their systems.
select Next.
Fi gure 16 . 52. Package Group Det ai l s
249
Fi gure 16 . 53. Package Sel ect i on Li st Cont ext Menu
250
Fi gure 16 . 54 . St art i ng i nst al l at i on
During installation of the selected packages and their dependencies, you see the following progress
bar:
Fi gure 16 . 55. Packages compl et ed
The installation program prompts you to prepare your system for reboot. Remember to remove any
installation media if it is not ejected automatically upon reboot.
251
After your computer' s normal power-up sequence has completed, Red Hat Enterprise Linux loads and
starts. By default, the start process is hidden behind a graphical screen that displays a progress bar.
Eventually, a login: prompt or a GUI login screen (if you installed the X Window System and
chose to start X automatically) appears.
The first time you start your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system in run level 5 (the graphical run level),
the Fi rst Boot tool appears, which guides you through the Red Hat Enterprise Linux configuration.
Using this tool, you can set your system time and date, install software, register your machine with
Red Hat Network, and more. Fi rst Boot lets you configure your environment at the beginning, so that
you can get started using your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system quickly.
[8] The fsck appl i cati on i s used to check the fi l e system for metadata consi stency and opti onal l y
repai r one or more Li nux fi l e systems.
252
Chapter 17. Troubleshooting Installation on an IBM
Power Systems server
files include:
/tmp/anaconda.log
/tmp/program.log
/tmp/storage.log
/tmp/yum.log
/tmp/syslog
You may also find the IBM Online Alert Section for System p useful. It is located at:
http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/lopdiags/info/LinuxAlerts.
html
other way round).
If you receive a fatal signal 11 error during your installation, it is probably due to a hardware error in
memory on your system' s bus. Like other operating systems, Red Hat Enterprise Linux places its own
demands on your system' s hardware. Some of this hardware may not be able to meet those
demands, even if they work properly under another OS.
Ensure that you have the latest installation updates and images. Review the online errata to see if
newer versions are available. If the latest images still fail, it may be due to a problem with your
hardware. Commonly, these errors are in your memory or CPU-cache. A possible solution for this
253
error is turning off the CPU-cache in the BIOS, if your system supports this. You could also try to
swap your memory around in the motherboard slots to check if the problem is either slot or memory
related.
Another option is to perform a media check on your installation DVD. Anaconda, the installation
program, has the ability to test the integrity of the installation media. It works with the DVD, hard drive
ISO, and NFS ISO installation methods. Red Hat recommends that you test all installation media
before starting the installation process, and before reporting any installation-related bugs (many of
the bugs reported are actually due to improperly-burned DVDs). To use this test, type the following
command at the boot: or yaboot: prompt:
linux mediacheck
For more information concerning signal 11 errors, refer to:
http://www.bitwizard.nl/sig11/
17.2. Trouble Beginning t he Inst allat ion
17.2.1. Problems wit h Boot ing int o t he Graphical Inst allat ion
There are some video cards that have trouble booting into the graphical installation program. If the
installation program does not run using its default settings, it tries to run in a lower resolution mode.
If that still fails, the installation program attempts to run in text mode.
One possible solution is to try using the resolution= boot option. Refer to Chapter 28, Boot
Options for more information.
Note
To disable frame buffer support and allow the installation program to run in text mode, try
using the nofb boot option. This command may be necessary for accessibility with some
screen reading hardware.
Message
Enterprise Linux, there is probably a SCSI controller that is not being recognized by the
Check your hardware vendor' s website to determine if a driver disk image is available that fixes your
problem. For more general information on driver disks, refer to Chapter 13, Updating Drivers During
Installation on IBM Power Systems Servers.
You can also refer to the Red Hat Hardware Compatibility List, available online at:
254
Fi gure 17. 1. The Crash Report i ng Di al og Box
Det ai l s
255
Fi gure 17. 2. Det ai l s of t he Crash
Save
Exi t
256
Fi gure 17. 3. Sel ect report er
Logger
Report upl oader
257
Fi gure 17. 4 . Conf i gure report er pref erences
Logger
existing log file.
Fi gure 17. 5. Speci f y l ocal pat h f or l og f i l e
258
by default.
Fi gure 17. 6 . Ent er Red Hat Net work aut hent i cat i on det ai l s
Report upl oader
Fi gure 17. 7. Ent er URL f or upl oadi ng crash report
Bugzi l l a
259
Fi gure 17. 8. Ent er Bugzi l l a aut hent i cat i on det ai l s
Fi gure 17. 9 . Conf i rm report dat a
260
Fi gure 17. 10. Report i n progress
Fi gure 17. 11. Report i ng done
261
process.
IBM System p systems
This information does not apply to users of headless IBM System p systems.
17.3.3. Trouble wit h Part it ion Tables
If you receive an error after the Disk Partitioning Setup (Section 16.15, Disk Partitioning
Setup ) phase of the installation saying something similar to
The partition table on device hda was unreadable. To create new partitions it must be
initialized, causing the loss of ALL DATA on this drive.
you may not have a partition table on that drive or the partition table on the drive may not be
recognizable by the partitioning software used in the installation program.
No matter what type of installation you are performing, backups of the existing data on your systems
should always be made.
17.3.4. Ot her Part it ioning Problems for IBM Power Syst ems Users
A PReP Boot partition.
A /boot/ partition.
Note
17.4.1. Unable t o IPL from *NWSSTG
If you are experiencing difficulties when trying to IPL from *NWSSTG, you may not have created a
PReP Boot partition set as active.
262
17.4.2. Boot ing int o a Graphical Environment
If you have installed the X Window System but are not seeing a graphical desktop environment once
you log into your system, you can start the X Window System graphical interface using the command
startx.
Once you enter this command and press Enter, the graphical desktop environment is displayed.
Note, however, that this is just a one-time fix and does not change the log in process for future log
ins.
To set up your system so that you can log in at a graphical login screen, you must edit one file,
/etc/inittab, by changing just one number in the runlevel section. When you are finished, reboot
the computer. The next time you log in, you are presented with a graphical login prompt.
Open a shell prompt. If you are in your user account, become root by typing the su command.
Now, type the following to edit the file with gedi t .
gedit /etc/inittab
The file /etc/inittab opens. Within the first screen, a section of the file which looks like the
following appears:
# Default runlevel. The runlevels used are:
# 0 - halt (Do NOT set initdefault to this)
# 1 - Single user mode
# 2 - Multiuser, without NFS (The same as 3, if you do not have
networking)
# 3 - Full multiuser mode
# 4 - unused
# 5 - X11
# 6 - reboot (Do NOT set initdefault to this)
#
id:3:initdefault:
To change from a console to a graphical login, you should change the number in the line
id:3:initdefault: from a 3 to a 5.
Warning
Change only the number of the default runlevel from 3 to 5.
Your changed line should look like the following:
id:5:initdefault:
When you are satisfied with your change, save and exit the file using the Ctrl+Q keys. A window
appears and asks if you would like to save the changes. Click Save.
The next time you log in after rebooting your system, you are presented with a graphical login
prompt.
17.4.3. Problems wit h t he X Window Syst em (GUI)
263
If you are having trouble getting X (the X Window System) to start, you may not have installed it
during your installation.
If you want X, you can either install the packages from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation
media or perform an upgrade.
If you elect to upgrade, select the X Window System packages, and choose GNOME, KDE, or both,
during the upgrade package selection process.
Refer to Section 35.3, Switching to a Graphical Login for more detail on installing a desktop
environment.
17.4.4. Problems wit h t he X Server Crashing and Non-Root Users
If you are having trouble with the X server crashing when anyone logs in, you may have a full file
system (or, a lack of available hard drive space).
To verify that this is the problem you are experiencing, run the following command:
df -h
The df command should help you diagnose which partition is full. For additional information about
df and an explanation of the options available (such as the -h option used in this example), refer to
the df man page by typing man df at a shell prompt.
A key indicator is 100% full or a percentage above 90% or 95% on a partition. The /home/ and
/tmp/ partitions can sometimes fill up quickly with user files. You can make some room on that
partition by removing old files. After you free up some disk space, try running X as the user that was
unsuccessful before.
If you cannot remember your root password, boot your system as linux single.
264
265
Part III. IBM System z Architecture - Installation and Booting
This part of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide discusses installation and booting (or initial
program load, IPL) of Red Hat Enterprise Linux on IBM System z.
266
Chapter 18. Planning for Installation on System z
18.1. Pre-Inst allat ion
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 runs on System z9 or later IBM mainframe systems.
The installation process assumes that you are familiar with the IBM System z and can set up logical
partitions (LPARs) and z/VM guest virtual machines. For additional information on System z, refer to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/z.
For installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux on System z, Red Hat supports DASD and FCP storage
devices.
Before you install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you must decide on the following:
Decide whether you want to run the operating system on an LPAR or as a z/VM guest operating
system.
Decide if you need swap space and if so how much. Although it is possible (and recommended)
to assign enough memory to z/VM guest virtual machine and let z/VM do the necessary swapping,
there are cases where the amount of required RAM is hard to predict. Such instances should be
examined on a case-by-case basis. Refer to Section 23.15.5, Recommended Partitioning
Scheme .
Decide on a network configuration. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 for IBM System z supports the
following network devices:
Real and virtual Open Systems Adapter (OSA)
Real and virtual HiperSockets
LAN channel station (LCS) for real OSA
You require the following hardware:
Disk space. Calculate how much disk space you need and allocate sufficient disk space on
DASDs or SCSI disks. You require at least 2 GB for a server installation, and 5 GB if you
want to install all packages. You also require disk space for any application data. After the
installation, more DASD or SCSI disk partitions may be added or deleted as necessary.
The disk space used by the newly installed Red Hat Enterprise Linux system (the Linux instance)
must be separate from the disk space used by other operating systems you may have installed on
your system.
For more information about disks and partition configuration, refer to Section 23.15.5,
Recommended Partitioning Scheme .
RAM. Acquire 1 GB (recommended) for the Linux instance. With some tuning, an instance might
run with as little as 512 MB RAM.
18.2. Overview of t he Syst em z Inst allat ion Procedure
You can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on System z interactively or in unattended mode.
Installation on System z differs from installation on other architectures in that it is typically performed
over a network and not from a local DVD. The installation can be summarized as follows:
[9] [10]
267
1. Boot i ng ( I PL) t he i nst al l er
Connect with the mainframe, then perform an initial program load (IPL), or boot, from the medium
containing the installation program.
2. I nst al l at i on Phase 1
Set up an initial network device. This network device is then used to connect to the
installation system via SSH or VNC. This gets you a full-screen mode terminal or graphical
display to continue installation as on other architectures.
Specify which language to use, and how and where the installation program and the software
packages to be installed from the repository on the Red Hat installation medium can be
found.
Use anaconda (the main part of the Red Hat installation program) to perform the rest of the
installation.
Fi gure 18. 1. The I nst al l at i on Process
268
18.2.1. Boot ing (IPL) t he Inst aller
After establishing a connection with the mainframe, you need to perform an initial program load (IPL),
or boot, from the medium containing the installation program. This document describes the most
common methods of installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 on System z. In general, you can use any
method to boot the Linux installation system, which consists of a kernel (kernel.img) and initial
ramdisk (initrd.img) with at least the parameters in generic.prm. The Linux installation system
is also called the installer in this book.
The control point from where you can start the IPL process depends on the environment where your
Linux is to run. If your Linux is to run as a z/VM guest operating system, the control point is the control
program (CP) of the hosting z/VM. If your Linux is to run in LPAR mode, the control point is the
mainframe' s Support Element (SE) or an attached IBM System z Hardware Management Console (HMC).
You can use the following boot media only if Linux is to run as a guest operating system under z/VM:
z/VM reader refer to Section 20.1.1, Using the z/VM Reader for details.
You can use the following boot media only if Linux is to run in LPAR mode:
SE or HMC through a remote FTP server refer to Section 20.2.1, Using an FTP Server for
details.
SE or HMC DVD refer to Section 20.2.2, Using the HMC or SE DVD Drive for details
You can use the following boot media for both z/VM and LPAR:
DASD refer to Section 20.1.2, Using a Prepared DASD for z/VM or Section 20.2.3, Using a
Prepared DASD for LPAR
SCSI device that is attached through an FCP channel refer to Section 20.1.3, Using a
Prepared FCP-attached SCSI Disk for z/VM or Section 20.2.4, Using a Prepared FCP-attached
SCSI Disk for LPAR
FCP-attached SCSI DVD refer to Section 20.1.4, Using an FCP-attached SCSI DVD Drive for
z/VM or Section 20.2.5, Using an FCP-attached SCSI DVD Drive for LPAR
If you use DASD and FCP-attached SCSI devices (except SCSI DVDs) as boot media, you must have
a configured zipl boot loader. For more information, see the Chapter on zipl in Linux on System z
Device Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
18.2.2. Inst allat ion Phase 1
After the kernel boot, you will configure one network device. This network device is needed to
complete the installation.
The interface you will use in installation phase 1 is the l i nuxrc interface, which is line-mode and text-
based. (Refer to Chapter 21, Installation Phase 1: Configuring a Network Device.)
In installation phase 2, you need to specify what language to use and where phase 3 of the
installation program and the software packages to be installed from the repository on the Red Hat
installation medium can be found. On System z, the installation sources are usually transferred from
the DVD to a network server. Phase 3 of the installation program and the repository can be accessed
in one of the following ways:
269
Over the network using one of the FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, or NFS protocols. A separate network
server (FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, or NFS), which holds all the required installation sources, must be set
up in advance. For details on how to set up a network server, refer to Section 19.1, Preparing for
a Network Installation .
Hard disk (DASD or a SCSI device attached through an FCP channel). You need to set up a disk
that holds the required installation sources in advance. For details, Refer to Section 19.2,
Preparing for a Hard Drive Installation .
Through an FCP-attached SCSI DVD. This is handled automatically if booted from FCP-attached
SCSI DVD.
The interface you will use in installation phase 2 is the loader, which provides a full-screen text-
based interface with a blue background by default. For unattended installations in cmdline mode, the
loader offers line-mode, text-based output. (Refer to Chapter 22, Installation Phase 2: Configuring
Language and Installation Source.)
In installation phase 3 you will use anaconda in graphical, text-based, or cmdline mode:
Graphi cal mode
This can be used through a VNC client (recommended) or through an X11 server. You can use
your mouse and keyboard to navigate through the screens, click buttons, and enter text in fields.
Text - based mode
This interface does not offer all interface elements of the GUI and does not support all settings.
Use this for interactive installations if you cannot use a VNC client or X11 server.
cmdl i ne mode
This is intended for automated installations on System z. (Refer to Section 26.6, Parameters for
Kickstart Installations )
If you have a slow network connection or prefer a text-based installation, do not use X11 forwarding
when logging in over the network and do not set the display= variable in the parameter file (refer to
Section 26.4, VNC and X11 Parameters for details). In Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 the text-based
installation has been reduced to minimize user interaction. Features like installation on FCP-
attached SCSI devices, changing partition layout, or package selection are only available with the
graphical user interface installation. Use the graphical installation whenever possible. (Refer to
Chapter 23, Installation Phase 3: Installing Using Anaconda.)
18.3. Graphical User Int erface wit h X11 or VNC
To run anaconda with the graphical user interface, use a workstation that has either an X Window
System (X11) server or VNC client installed.
You can use X11 forwarding with an SSH client or X11 directly. If the installer on your workstation
fails because the X11 server does not support required X11 extensions you might have to upgrade
the X11 server or use VNC.
270
To use VNC, disable X11 forwarding in your SSH client prior to connecting to the Linux installation
system on the mainframe or specify the vnc parameter in your parameter file. Using VNC is
recommended for slow or long-distance network connections. Refer to Section 28.2, Enabling
Remote Access to the Installation System .
Table 18.1, Parameters and SSH login types shows how the parameters and SSH login type
controls which anaconda user interface is used.
Tabl e 18. 1. Paramet ers and SSH l ogi n t ypes
Paramet er SSH l ogi n User i nt erf ace
none SSH without X11 forwarding VNC or text
vnc SSH with or without X11
forwarding
VNC
none SSH with X11 forwarding X11
display=IP/hostname:dis
play
SSH without X11 forwarding X11
18.3.1. Inst allat ion using X11 forwarding
You can connect a workstation to the Linux installation system on the mainframe and display the
graphical installation program using SSH with X11 forwarding.
You require an SSH client that allows X11 forwarding. To open the connection, first start the X server
on the workstation. Then connect to the Linux installation system. You can enable X11 forwarding in
your SSH client when you connect.
For example, with OpenSSH enter the following in a terminal window on your workstation:
ssh -X [email protected]
Replace linuxvm.example.com with the hostname or IP address of the system you are installing. The -
X option (the capital letter X) enables X11 forwarding.
18.3.2. Inst allat ion using X11
The direct connection from the X11 client to an X11 server on your local workstation requires an IP
connection from your System z to your workstation. If the network and firewalls prevent such
connections, use X11 forwarding or VNC instead.
The graphical installation program requires the DNS and hostname to be set correctly, and the Linux
installation system must be allowed to open applications on your display. You can ensure this by
setting the parameter display=workstationname:0.0 in the parameter file, where
workstationname is the hostname of the client workstation connecting to the Linux image.
Alternatively, you can set the display environment variable and run loader manually after having
logged in with SSH as user root. By default you log in as user install. This starts the loader
automatically and does not allow overriding the display environment variable.
To permit X11 clients to open applications on the X11 server on your workstation, use the xauth
command. To manage X11 authorization cookies with xaut h, you must log in to the Linux
installation system using SSH as user root. For details on xaut h and how to manage authorization
cookies, refer to the xauth manpage.
In contrast to setting up X11 authorizations with xaut h, you can use xhost to permit the Linux
installation system to connect to the X11 server:
271
xhost +linuxvm
Replace linuxvm with the hostname or IP address of the Linux installation system. This allows linuxvm
to make connections to the X11 server.
If the graphical installation does not begin automatically, verify the display= variable settings in the
parameter file. If performing an installation under z/VM, rerun the installation to load the new
parameter file on the reader.
18.3.3. Inst allat ion using VNC
Using VNC is recommended for slow or long-distance network connections. To use VNC, disable X11
forwarding in your SSH client prior to connecting to the temporary Linux installation system. The
loader will then provide a choice between text-mode and VNC; choose VNC here. Alternatively,
provide the vnc variable and optionally the vncpassword variable in your parameter file (refer to
Section 26.4, VNC and X11 Parameters for details).
A message on the workstation SSH terminal prompts you to start the VNC client viewer and provides
details about the VNC display specifications. Enter the specifications from the SSH terminal into the
VNC client viewer and connect to the temporary Linux installation system to begin the installation.
Refer to Chapter 31, Installing Through VNC for details.
18.3.4. Inst allat ion using a VNC list ener
To connect from your temporary Linux installation system to a VNC client running on your
workstation in listening mode, use the vncconnect option in your parameter file, in addition to the
options vnc and optionally vncpassword. The network and firewalls must allow an IP connection
from your temporary Linux installation to your workstation.
To have the temporary Linux installation system automatically connect to a VNC client, first start the
client in listening mode. On Red Hat Enterprise Linux systems, use the -listen option to run
vncvi ewer as a listener. In a terminal window, enter the command:
vncviewer -listen
Refer to Chapter 31, Installing Through VNC for details.
18.3.5. Aut omat ing t he Inst allat ion wit h Kickst art
You can allow an installation to run unattended by using Kickstart. A Kickstart file specifies settings
for an installation. Once the installation system boots, it can read a Kickstart file and carry out the
installation process without any further input from a user.
On System z, this also requires a parameter file (optionally an additional configuration file under
z/VM). This parameter file must contain the required network options described in Section 26.3,
Installation Network Parameters and specify a kickstart file using the ks= option. The kickstart file
typically resides on the network. The parameter file often also contains the options cmdline and
RUNKS=1 to execute the loader without having to log in over the network with SSH (Refer to
Section 26.6, Parameters for Kickstart Installations ).
For further information and details on how to set up a kickstart file, refer to Section 32.3, Creating
the Kickstart File .
18.3.5.1. Every Inst allat ion Produces a Kickst art File
272
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation process automatically writes a Kickstart file that contains
the settings for the installed system. This file is always saved as /root/anaconda-ks.cfg. You
may use this file to repeat the installation with identical settings, or modify copies to specify settings
for other systems.
[9] Direct Access Storage Devices (DASDs) are hard di sks that al l ow a maxi mum of three parti ti ons per
devi ce. For exampl e, dasda can have parti ti ons dasda1, dasda2, and dasda3.
[10] Usi ng the SCSI-over-Fi bre Channel devi ce dri ver (zfcp devi ce dri ver) and a swi tch, SCSI LUNs can
be presented to Li nux on System z as i f they were l ocal l y attached SCSI dri ves.
273
Note
Make sure no installation DVD (or any other type of DVD or CD) is in your hosting partition' s
drive if you are performing a network-based installation. Having a DVD or CD in the drive
Ensure that you have boot media available as described in Chapter 20, Booting (IPL) the Installer.
separate, network-accessible server. The separate server can be a virtual machine, LPAR, or any
other system (such as a Linux on Power Systems or x86 system). It must provide the complete
contents of the installation DVD-ROM.
Note
stored.
274
run:
loop,ro
umount /mount_point
umount /mnt/tmp
directory.
275
Selection ).
NFS server.
Note
linux mediacheck
Use this option to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on hardware systems without a DVD drive and if
you do not want to access installation phase 3 and the package repository over a network.
19.2.1. Accessing Inst allat ion Phase 3 and t he Package Reposit ory on a Hard
Drive
Note
Hard drive installations using DASD or FCP-attached SCSI storage only work from native
ext2, ext3, or ext4 partitions. If you have a file system based on devices other than native ext2,
ext3, or ext4 (particularly a file system based on RAID or LVM partitions) you will not be able to
use it as a source to perform a hard drive installation.
Hard drive installations use an ISO image of the installation DVD (a file that contains an exact copy
of the content of the DVD), and an install.img file extracted from the ISO image. With these files
present on a hard drive, you can choose Hard dri ve as the installation source when you boot the
276
content of a DVD.
Ensure that you have boot media available as described in Chapter 20, Booting (IPL) the Installer.
To prepare a DASD or FCP-attached device as an installation source, follow these steps:
2. Transfer the ISO images to the DASD or SCSI device.
The ISO files must be located on a hard drive that is activated in installation phase 1 (refer to
Chapter 21, Installation Phase 1: Configuring a Network Device) or in installation phase 2 (refer to
Chapter 22, Installation Phase 2: Configuring Language and Installation Source). This is
automatically possible with DASDs.
For an FCP LUN, you must either boot (IPL) from the same FCP LUN or use the rescue shell
provided by the installation phase 1 menus to manually activate the FCP LUN holding the
ISOs as described in Section 25.2.1, Dynamically Activating an FCP LUN .
run:
loop,ro
umount /mount_point
277
umount /mnt/tmp
directory.
Selection ).
6. Make the DASD or SCSI LUN accessible to the new z/VM guest virtual machine or LPAR, and
then proceed with installation. (Refer to Chapter 20, Booting (IPL) the Installer) or alternatively
with Section 19.2.1.1, Preparing for Booting the Installer from a Hard Drive .
Note Verifying ISO images
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program can test the integrity of the installation
medium. It works with the DVD, hard drive ISO, and NFS ISO installation methods. We
recommend that you test all installation media before starting the installation process, and
before reporting any installation-related bugs. To use this test, add the mediacheck
parameter to your parameter file (refer to Section 26.7, Miscellaneous Parameters ).
19.2.1.1. Preparing for Boot ing t he Inst aller from a Hard Drive
If you would like to boot (IPL) the installer from a hard drive, in addition to accessing installation
phase 3 and the package repository, you can optionally install the zipl boot loader on the same (or a
different) disk. Be aware that zipl only supports one boot record per disk. If you have multiple
partitions on a disk, they all share the disk' s one boot record.
In the following, assume the hard drive is prepared as described in Section 19.2.1, Accessing
Installation Phase 3 and the Package Repository on a Hard Drive , mounted under /mnt, and you
do not need to preserve an existing boot record.
To prepare a hard drive to boot the installer, install the zipl boot loader on the hard drive by entering
the following command:
zipl -V -t /mnt/ -i /mnt/images/kernel.img -r /mnt/images/initrd.img -p
/mnt/images/generic.prm
278
For more details on zipl.conf, refer to the chapter on zipl in Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features,
and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
Warning Accessing a previously-installed operating system
If you have an operating system installed on the disk, and you still plan to access it later on,
refer the chapter on zipl in Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red
Hat Enterprise Linux 6 for how to add a new entry in the zipl boot loader (that is, in
zipl.conf).
279
Chapter 20. Booting (IPL) the Installer
The steps to perform the initial boot (IPL) of the installer depend on the environment (either z/VM or
LPAR) in which Red Hat Enterprise Linux will run. For more information on booting, see the Booting
Linux chapter in Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux
6.
20.1. Inst alling Under z/VM
When installing under z/VM, you can boot from:
the z/VM virtual reader
a DASD or an FCP-attached SCSI device prepared with the zipl boot loader
an FCP-attached SCSI DVD drive
Log on to the z/VM guest virtual machine chosen for the Linux installation. You can use x3270 or
c3270 (from the x3270-text package in Red Hat Enterprise Linux) to log in to z/VM from other Linux
systems. Alternatively, use the 3270 terminal emulator on the IBM System z Hardware Management
Console (HMC). If you are working from a machine with a Windows operating system, Jolly Giant
(http://www.jollygiant.com/) offers an SSL-enabled 3270 emulator. A free native Windows port of
c3270 called wc3270 also exists.
Note If your 3270 connection is interrupted
If your 3270 connection is interrupted and you cannot log in again because the previous
session is still active, you can replace the old session with a new one by entering the following
command on the z/VM logon screen:
logon user here
Replace user with the name of the z/VM guest virtual machine. Depending on whether an
external security manager, for example RACF, is used, the logon command might vary.
If you are not already running CMS (single user operating system shipped with z/VM) in your guest,
boot it now by entering the command:
#cp ipl cms
Be sure not to use CMS disks such as your A disk (often device number 0191) as installation targets.
To find out which disks are in use by CMS use the following query:
query disk
You can use the following CP (z/VM Control Program, which is the z/VM hypervisor) query commands
to find out about the device configuration of your z/VM guest virtual machine:
Query the available main memory, which is called storage in System z terminology. Your guest
should have at least 512 megabytes of main memory.
280
cp query virtual storage
Query available network devices of type:
osa
OSA (CHPID type OSD, real or virtual (VSWITCH or GuestLAN type QDIO), both in QDIO
mode)
hsi
HiperSockets (CHPID type IQD, real or virtual (GuestLAN type Hipers))
lcs
LCS (CHPID type OSE)
For example, to query all of the network device types mentioned above:
cp query virtual osa
Query available DASDs. Only those that are flagged RW for read-write mode can be used as
installation targets:
cp query virtual dasd
Query available FCP channels:
cp query virtual fcp
20.1.1. Using t he z/VM Reader
Perform the following steps to boot from the z/VM reader:
1. If necessary, add the device containing the z/VM TCP/IP tools to your CMS disk list. For
example:
cp link tcpmaint 592 592
acc 592 fm
Replace fm with any FILEMODE letter.
2. Execute the command:
ftp host
Where host is the hostname or IP address of the FTP server that hosts the boot images
(kernel.img and initrd.img).
3. Log in and execute the following commands. Use the (repl option if you are overwriting
existing kernel.img, initrd.img, generic.prm, or redhat.exec files:
cd /location/of/install-tree/images/
ascii
get generic.prm (repl
281
get redhat.exec (repl
locsite fix 80
binary
get kernel.img (repl
get initrd.img (repl
quit
4. Optionally check whether the files were transferred correctly by using the CMS command
filelist to show the received files and their format. It is important that kernel.img and
initrd.img have a fixed record length format denoted by F in the Format column and a
record length of 80 in the Lrecl column. For example:
VMUSER FILELIST A0 V 169 Trunc=169 Size=6 Line=1 Col=1 Alt=0
Cmd Filename Filetype Fm Format Lrecl Records Blocks Date Time
REDHAT EXEC B1 V 22 1 1 4/15/10 9:30:40
GENERIC PRM B1 V 44 1 1 4/15/10 9:30:32
INITRD IMG B1 F 80 118545 2316 4/15/10 9:30:25
KERNEL IMG B1 F 80 74541 912 4/15/10 9:30:17
Press PF3 to quit filelist and return to the CMS prompt.
5. Finally execute the REXX script redhat.exec to boot (IPL) the installer:
redhat
20.1.2. Using a Prepared DASD
Boot from the prepared DASD and select the zipl boot menu entry referring to the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux installer. Use a command of the following form:
cp ipl DASD device number loadparm boot_entry_number
Replace DASD device number with the device number of the boot device, and boot_entry_number with
the zipl configuration menu for this device. For example:
cp ipl eb1c loadparm 0
20.1.3. Using a Prepared FCP-at t ached SCSI Disk
Perform the following steps to boot from a prepared FCP-attached SCSI disk:
1. Configure the SCSI boot loader of z/VM to access the prepared SCSI disk in the FCP storage
area network. Select the prepared zipl boot menu entry referring to the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux installer. Use a command of the following form:
cp set loaddev portname WWPN lun LUN bootprog boot_entry_number
Replace WWPN with the WWPN of the storage system and LUN with the LUN of the disk. The
16-digit hexadecimal numbers must be split into two pairs of eight digits each. For example:
cp set loaddev portname 50050763 050b073d lun 40204011 00000000
bootprog 0
282
2. Optionally, confirm your settings with the command:
query loaddev
3. IPL the FCP device connected with the storage system containing the disk with the command:
cp ipl FCP_device
For example:
cp ipl fc00
20.1.4. Using an FCP-at t ached SCSI DVD Drive
This requires a SCSI DVD drive attached to an FCP-to-SCSI bridge which is in turn connected to an
FCP adapter in your System z. The FCP adapter must be configured and available under z/VM.
1. Insert your Red Hat Enterprise Linux for System z DVD into the DVD drive.
2. Configure the SCSI boot loader of z/VM to access the DVD drive in the FCP storage area
network and specify 1 for the boot entry on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux for System z DVD.
Use a command of the following form:
cp set loaddev portname WWPN lun FCP_LUN bootprog 1
Replace WWPN with the WWPN of the FCP-to-SCSI bridge and FCP_LUN with the LUN of the
DVD drive. The 16-digit hexadecimal numbers must be split into two pairs of eight characters
each. For example:
cp set loaddev portname 20010060 eb1c0103 lun 00010000 00000000
bootprog 1
3. Optionally, confirm your settings with the command:
cp query loaddev
4. IPL on the FCP device connected with the FCP-to-SCSI bridge.
cp ipl FCP_device
For example:
cp ipl fc00
20.2. Inst alling in an LPAR
When installing in a logical partition (LPAR), you can boot from:
an FTP server
the DVD drive of the HMC or SE
283
a DASD or an FCP-attached SCSI drive prepared with the zipl boot loader
an FCP-attached SCSI DVD drive
Perform these common steps first:
1. Log in on the IBM System z Hardware Management Console (HMC) or the Support Element (SE)
as a user with sufficient privileges to install a new operating system to an LPAR. The
SYSPROG user is recommended.
2. Select Images, then select the LPAR to which you wish to install. Use the arrows in the frame
on the right side to navigate to the CPC Recovery menu.
3. Double-click Operating System Messages to show the text console on which Linux boot
messages will appear and potentially user input will be required. Refer to the chapter on
booting Linux in Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6 and the Hardware Management Console Operations Guide, order number
[SC28-6857], for details.
Continue with the procedure for your installation source.
20.2.1. Using an FTP Server
1. Double-click Load from CD-ROM, DVD, or Server.
2. In the dialog box that follows, select FTP Source, and enter the following information: Host
Computer: Hostname or IP address of the FTP server you wish to install from (for example,
ftp.redhat.com) User ID: Your user name on the FTP server (or anonymous) Password: Your
password (use your email address if you are logging in as anonymous) Account (optional):
Leave this field empty File location (optional): Directory on the FTP server holding Red Hat
Enterprise Linux for System z (for example, /rhel/s390x/)
3. Click Continue.
4. In the dialog that follows, keep the default selection of generic.ins and click Continue.
20.2.2. Using t he HMC or SE DVD Drive
1. Double-click Load from CD-ROM, DVD, or Server.
2. In the dialog box that follows, select Local CD-ROM / DVD then click Continue.
3. In the dialog that follows, keep the default selection of generic.ins then click Continue.
20.2.3. Using a Prepared DASD
1. Double-click Load.
2. In the dialog box that follows, select Normal as the Load type.
3. As Load address fill in the device number of the DASD.
4. As Load parameter fill in the number corresponding the zipl boot menu entry that you
prepared for booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installer.
5. Click the OK button.
20.2.4. Using a Prepared FCP-at t ached SCSI Disk
284
2. In the dialog box that follows, select SCSI as the Load type.
3. As Load address fill in the device number of the FCP channel connected with the SCSI
disk.
4. As World wide port name fill in the WWPN of the storage system containing the disk as a
16-digit hexadecimal number.
5. As Logical unit number fill in the LUN of the disk as a 16-digit hexadecimal number.
6. As Boot program selector fill in the number corresponding the zipl boot menu entry that
you prepared for booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installer.
7. Leave the Boot record logical block address as 0 and the Operating system
specific load parameters empty.
20.2.5. Using an FCP-at t ached SCSI DVD Drive
This requires to have a SCSI DVD drive attached to an FCP-to-SCSI bridge which is in turn
connected to an FCP adapter in your System z machine. The FCP adapter has to be configured and
available in your LPAR.
1. Insert your Red Hat Enterprise Linux for System z DVD into the DVD drive.
3. In the dialog box that follows, select SCSI as the Load type.
4. As Load address fill in the device number of the FCP channel connected with the FCP-to-
SCSI bridge.
5. As World wide port name fill in the WWPN of the FCP-to-SCSI bridge as a 16-digit
hexadecimal number.
6. As Logical unit number fill in the LUN of the DVD drive as a 16-digit hexadecimal
number.
7. As Boot program selector fill in the number 1 to select the boot entry on the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux for System z DVD.
8. Leave the Boot record logical block address as 0 and the Operating system
specific load parameters empty.
285
Chapter 21. Installation Phase 1: Configuring a Network Device
After the kernel boot, you will configure one network device using the l i nuxrc program. This network
device is needed to complete the installation. If you are installing interactively (with the default
parameter file generic.prm), you will be asked questions about your network. It is a good idea to
have your data ready in the form of a datasheet or similar. If you want to automate this step, supply
the information for each option in your parameter file or CMS configuration file.
As an example, let us look at how to configure an OSA network adapter under z/VM. When l i nuxrc
starts, you see the following message:
Starting the zSeries initrd to configure networking. Version is 1.2
Starting udev...
Network devices are sensed and listed. The list of devices depends on the cio_ignore kernel
parameter used. If no devices are found because of cio_ignore, as in the example below, you can
clear the list of ignored devices. Note that this might take some time and result in a long list when
there are many devices, such as on an LPAR.
Scanning for available network devices...
Autodetection found 0 devices.
Note: There is a device blacklist active! (Clearing might take long)
c) clear blacklist, m) manual config, r) rescan, s) shell:
c
Clearing device blacklist...
Scanning for available network devices...
Autodetection found 14 devices.

NUM CARD CU CHPID TYPE DRIVER IF DEVICES
1 OSA (QDIO) 1731/01 00 OSD qeth eth 0.0.f500,0.0.f501,0.0.f502
2 OSA (QDIO) 1731/01 01 OSD qeth eth 0.0.f503,0.0.f504,0.0.f505
3 OSA (QDIO) 1731/01 02 OSD qeth eth 0.0.1010,0.0.1011,0.0.1012
4 HiperSockets 1731/05 03 IQD qeth hsi 0.0.1013,0.0.1014,0.0.1015
5 OSA (QDIO) 1731/01 04 OSD qeth eth 0.0.1017,0.0.1018,0.0.1019
6 CTC adapter 3088/08 12 ? ctcm ctc 0.0.1000,0.0.1001
7 escon channel 3088/1f 12 ? ctcm ctc 0.0.1002,0.0.1003
8 ficon channel 3088/1e 12 ? ctcm ctc 0.0.1004,0.0.1005
9 OSA (QDIO) 1731/01 76 OSD qeth eth 0.0.f5f0,0.0.f5f1,0.0.f5f2
10 LCS OSA 3088/60 8a OSE lcs eth 0.0.1240,0.0.1241
11 HiperSockets 1731/05 fb IQD qeth hsi 0.0.8024,0.0.8025,0.0.8026
12 HiperSockets 1731/05 fc IQD qeth hsi 0.0.8124,0.0.8125,0.0.8126
13 HiperSockets 1731/05 fd IQD qeth hsi 0.0.8224,0.0.8225,0.0.8226
14 HiperSockets 1731/05 fe IQD qeth hsi 0.0.8324,0.0.8325,0.0.8326

<num>) use config, m) manual config, r) rescan, s) shell:
Enter the number of the configuration you want to use, for example 9. Selecting from the table
provides the installer with information for the type of network device and the device addresses for its
subchannels. Alternatively, you can enter m and proceed to enter the network type (qeth), the read,
write, data channels, and the OSA port. Accept defaults by pressing Enter; under z/VM you might
need to press Enter twice.
286
m

* NOTE: To enter default or empty values press enter twice. *

Network type (qeth, lcs, ctc, ? for help). Default is qeth:
qeth

Read,write,data channel (e.g. 0.0.0300,0.0.0301,0.0.0302 or ? for
help).
0.0.f5f0,0.0.f5f1,0.0.f5f2

Portname (1..8 characters, or ? for help). Default is no portname:

Relative port number for OSA (0, 1, or ? for help). Default is 0:

Activating network device...
Detected: OSA card in OSD mode, Gigabit Ethernet
Then questions pertaining to your Linux instance are displayed:
Hostname of your new Linux guest (FQDN e.g. s390.redhat.com or ? for
help):
host.subdomain.domain

IPv4 address / IPv6 addr. (e.g. 10.0.0.2 / 2001:0DB8:: or ? for help)
10.0.0.42

IPv4 netmask or CIDR prefix (e.g. 255.255.255.0 or 1..32 or ? for
help). Default is 255.0.0.0:
24

IPv4 address of your default gateway or ? for help:
10.0.0.1
Trying to reach gateway 10.0.0.1...

IPv4 addresses of DNS servers (separated by colons ':' or ? for help):
10.1.2.3:10.3.2.1
Trying to reach DNS servers...

DNS search domains (separated by colons ':' or ? for help):
subdomain.domain:domain

DASD range (e.g. 200-203,205 or ? for help). Default is autoprobing:
eb1c
Activated DASDs:
0.0.eb1c(ECKD) dasda : active, blocksize: 4096, 1803060 blocks, 7043
MB
287
Important you must define a DASD
The installer requires the definition of a DASD. For a SCSI-only installation, enter none. This
satisfies the requirement for a defined DASD parameter, while resulting in a SCSI-only
environment.
If you make a mistake, the dialog either notices the error and asks you to re-enter the parameter, or
you can go back later to restart the dialog:
Incorrect ... (<OPTION-NAME>):
0) redo this parameter, 1) continue, 2) restart dialog, 3) halt, 4)
shell
When you restart the dialog, it remembers what you entered before:
Network type
0) default is previous "qeth", 1) new value, ?) help
At the end of the configuration, you see the message Initial configuration completed:
Initial configuration completed.

c) continue, p) parm file/configuration, n) network state, r) restart,
s) shell
You can now check your network configuration by entering n:
n
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 02:00:00:AB:C9:81
inet addr:10.0.0.42 Bcast:10.0.0.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1492 Metric:1
RX packets:64 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:4 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:3334 (3.2 KiB) TX bytes:336 (336.0 b)

lo Link encap:Local Loopback
inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0
UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1
RX bytes:0 (0.0 b) TX bytes:0 (0.0 b)

Kernel IP routing table
Destination Gateway Genmask Flags Metric Ref Use Iface
127.0.0.1 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 UH 0 0 0 lo
10.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 U 0 0 0 eth0
0.0.0.0 10.0.0.1 0.0.0.0 UG 0 0 0 eth0

s) shell
288
If you want to change something, enter r to restart the dialog. To show the parameters as specified in
a parameter or configuration file or interactively enter p. You can then copy the output from your
terminal and paste it into an editor to save it to disk on your local workstation. You can use the copy
as a template for a parameter or configuration file for future installations:
p

NETTYPE=qeth
IPADDR=10.0.0.42
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
GATEWAY=10.0.0.1
HOSTNAME=host.subdomain.domain
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.f5f0,0.0.f5f1,0.0.f5f2
LAYER2=1
MACADDR=02:00:00:AB:C9:81
PORTNAME=OSAPORT
DNS=10.1.2.3:10.3.2.1
SEARCHDNS=subdomain.domain:domain
DASD=eb1c

s) shell
Again, to change something, restart the dialog with r. Finally, if all is in order, enter c to continue:
c

Starting sshd to allow login over the network.

Connect now to 10.0.0.42 and log in as user 'install' to start the
installation.
E.g. using: ssh -x [email protected]
For VNC or text mode, disable X11 forwarding (recommended) with 'ssh -
x'.
For X11, enable X11 forwarding with 'ssh -X'.

You may log in as the root user to start an interactive shell.
The preliminary network setup is now complete and the installer starts an SSH daemon. You can log
into your Linux instance over SSH. If you are using RUNKS=1 with kickstart and cmdline mode,
l i nuxrc automatically starts the loader.
21.1. A Not e on Terminals
During the installation, the installation program displays messages on a line-mode terminal. This is
the HMC Operat i ng Syst em Messages applet if you install under LPAR, or a 3270 terminal if you
install under z/VM.
Linuxrc provides a rescue shell on the line-mode terminal. Press the Enter key (twice under z/VM) to
start the shell. You cannot use full-screen applications such as the vi editor on the line-mode
terminal. Switch to line-mode based editors such as ed, ex, or sed to edit text files if necessary.
289
Be aware that long-running commands might not be interruptible with the escape sequence Ctrl+C.
Call commands with options that make them return in time voluntarily. The shell on the 3270 terminal
is available throughout the whole installation process until the point where the system needs to
reboot.
Once the shell has been provided, you may exit with an error level of zero to get a new shell instance
replacing the old one, or you may exit with an error level different from zero to force a shutdown of the
installation system.
Connect to the installed system using user root to get a root shell without automatically starting the
installer. For problem determination, you might connect with many ssh sessions.
290
Chapter 22. Installation Phase 2: Configuring Language and
Installation Source
source.
By default, if you are installing interactively (with the default parameter file generic.prm) the loader
program to select language and installation source starts in text mode. In your new ssh session, the
following message is displayed:
Welcome to the anaconda install environment 1.2 for zSeries
22.1. Non-int eract ive Line-Mode Inst allat ion
If the cmdline option was specified as boot option in your parameter file (Section 26.6, Parameters
for Kickstart Installations ) or in your kickstart file (refer to Section 32.3, Creating the Kickstart File ,
the loader starts up with line-mode oriented text output. In this mode, all necessary information must
be provided in the kickstart file. The installer does not allow user interaction and stops if there is
unspecified installation information.
291
Here is a list of the most important widgets shown in Figure 22.1, Installation Program Widgets as
seen in URL Setup and Figure 22.2, Installation Program Widgets as seen in Choose a
Language :
a file.
292
the OK button.
Warning
key to move to the OK button and press the Enter key to confirm your choice. You can automate this
choice in the parameter file with the parameter lang= (refer to Section 26.5, Loader Parameters ) or
with the kickstart command lang (refer to Section 28.4, Automating the Installation with Kickstart ).
293
Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to select an installation method (refer to Figure 22.4,
Installation Method ). With your selected method highlighted, press the Tab key to move to the OK
button and press the Enter key to confirm your choice.
294
22.4.1. Inst alling from a DVD
To install Red Hat Enterprise Linux from a DVD, place the DVD in your DVD drive and boot your
system from the DVD as described in Section 20.1.4, Using an FCP-attached SCSI DVD Drive for
z/VM or Section 20.2.5, Using an FCP-attached SCSI DVD Drive for LPAR.
The installation program then probes your system and attempts to identify your DVD-ROM drive. It
starts by looking for a SCSI DVD-ROM drive.
Note
To abort the installation process at this time, reboot your machine and then eject the boot
media. You can safely cancel the installation at any point before the Write changes to
disk screen. Refer to Section 23.16, Write Changes to Disk for more information.
If the DVD drive is found and the driver loaded, the installer presents you with the option to perform a
media check on the DVD. This takes some time, and you may opt to skip over this step. However, if
you later encounter problems with the installer, you should reboot and perform the media check
before calling for support. From the media check dialog, continue to the next stage of the installation
process (refer to Section 23.5, Welcome to Red Hat Enterprise Linux ).
295
Select the partition containing the ISO files from the list of available partitions. DASD names begin
with /dev/dasd. Each individual drive has its own letter, for example /dev/dasda or /dev/sda.
Each partition on a drive is numbered, for example /dev/dasda1 or /dev/sda1.
For an FCP LUN, you would have to either boot (IPL) from the same FCP LUN or use the rescue shell
provided by the l i nuxrc menus to manually activate the FCP LUN holding the ISOs as described in
Section 25.2.1, Dynamically Activating an FCP LUN .
information:
Fi l e syst em Mount poi nt Ori gi nal pat h t o
f i l es
Di rect ory t o use
Use a leading slash
Select OK to continue. Proceed with Chapter 23, Installation Phase 3: Installing Using Anaconda.
The installation program is network-aware and can use network settings for a number of functions.
On System z, installation phases 2 and 3 take over the network configuration values specified
previously either interactively or by means of a parameter or configuration file in installation phase 1.
You can also instruct the installation program to consult additional software repositories later in the
process.
HTTPS .
296
Fi gure 22. 6 . NFS Set up Di al og
directory field:
4. Proceed with Chapter 23, Installation Phase 3: Installing Using Anaconda.
297
/mirrors/redhat/rhel-6.6/Server/s390x/
For example:
6.6/Server/s390x/
Proceed with Chapter 23, Installation Phase 3: Installing Using Anaconda.
22.6. Ret rieving Phase 3 of t he Inst allat ion Program
298
The loader then retrieves phase 3 of the installation program from the network into its RAM disk. This
may take some time.
Fi gure 22. 8. Ret ri evi ng phase 3 of t he i nst al l at i on program
299
Chapter 23. Installation Phase 3: Installing Using Anaconda
23.1. The Non-int eract ive Line-Mode Text Inst allat ion Program Out put
If the cmdline option was specified as boot option in your parameter file (Refer to Section 26.6,
Parameters for Kickstart Installations ) or in your kickstart file (refer to Chapter 32, Kickstart
Installations), anaconda starts with line-mode oriented text output. In this mode, all necessary
information must be provided in the kickstart file. The installer will not allow user interaction and
stops if there is unspecified installation information.
Interactively activating FCP LUNs
23.4. Configure t he Inst all Terminal
If you logged in with ssh and X11 forwarding, anaconda starts immediately with its graphical user
interface.
If you did not set the display= variable and do not use X11 forwarding, anaconda gives you the
choice of starting VNC or text mode.
300
Fi gure 23. 1. Choosi ng VNC or t ext mode
If you choose VNC, you will be asked for a password or you can choose to use VNC without a
password. If you use a password, make a note of the password for future reference. The VNC server
then starts.
Fi gure 23. 2. The VNC server st art s
Now open a connection to the IP address of your z/VM guest virtual machine using a VNC client.
Authenticate to the VNC server with the previously entered password.
301
Fi gure 23. 3. The Wel come screen
You can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on a large variety of storage devices. For System z, select
302
Fi gure 23. 4 . St orage devi ces
This option does not apply to System z.
storage devices:
Multipath devices such as FCP-attachable SCSI LUN with multiple paths
Storage area networks (SANs) such as FCP-attachable SCSI LUNs with a single path
Interface (iSCSI) connections. You cannot use the FCoE (Fiber Channel over Ethernet)
option on System z; this option is grayed out.
Note
Basi c Devi ces
solid-state drives. On System z, this contains activated DASDs.
Fi rmware RAI D
Storage devices attached to a firmware RAID controller. This does not apply to System z.
characters
Ot her SAN Devi ces
303
Any other devices available on a storage area network (SAN) such as FCP LUNs attached
over one single path.
Fi gure 23. 5. Sel ect st orage devi ces Basi c Devi ces
Fi gure 23. 6 . Sel ect st orage devi ces Mul t i pat h Devi ces
304
Fi gure 23. 7. Sel ect st orage devi ces Ot her SAN Devi ces
Fi gure 23. 8. The St orage Devi ces Search Tab
305
Fi gure 23. 9 . Sel ect i ng Col umns
system.
proceed to Section 23.7, Setting the Hostname
23.6.1.1. DASD low-level format t ing
Any DASDs used must be low-level formatted. The installer detects this and lists the DASDs that need
formatting.
If any of the DASDs specified interactively in l i nuxrc or in a parameter or configuration file are not
yet low-level formatted, the following confirmation dialog appears:
Fi gure 23. 10. Unf ormat t ed DASD Devi ces Found
To automatically allow low-level formatting of unformatted online DASDs specify the kickstart
command zerombr. Refer to Chapter 32, Kickstart Installations for more details.
306
From this screen you can configure an iSCSI (SCSI over TCP/IP) target or FCP LUNs. Refer to
Appendix B, iSCSI Disks for an introduction to iSCSI.
Fi gure 23. 11. Advanced St orage Opt i ons
23. 6 . 1. 2. 1. Conf i gure i SCSI paramet ers
Procedure 23. 1. i SCSI di scovery
307
Fi gure 23. 12. The i SCSI Di scovery Det ai l s di al og
name (IQN) format.
structure.
308
Fi gure 23. 13. i SCSI di scovery aut hent i cat i on
no credent i al s
CHAP pai r
Fi gure 23. 14 . CHAP pai r
309
Fi gure 23. 15. CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r
310
Fi gure 23. 16 . The i SCSI Di scovered Nodes di al og
Procedure 23. 2. St art i ng an i SCSI sessi on
Fi gure 23. 17. The i SCSI Nodes Logi n di al og
311
Fi gure 23. 18. i SCSI sessi on aut hent i cat i on
no credent i al s
CHAP pai r
Fi gure 23. 19 . CHAP pai r
312
Fi gure 23. 20. CHAP pai r and a reverse pai r
results.
Fi gure 23. 21. The i SCSI Logi n Resul t s di al og
23. 6 . 1. 2. 2. FCP Devi ces
FCP devices enable IBM System z to use SCSI devices rather than, or in addition to, DASD devices.
FCP devices provide a switched fabric topology that enables System z systems to use SCSI LUNs as
disk devices in addition to traditional DASD devices.
313
IBM System z requires that any FCP device be entered manually (either in the installation program
interactively, or specified as unique parameter entries in the parameter or CMS configuration file) for
the installation program to activate FCP LUNs. The values entered here are unique to each site in
which they are set up.
Not es
Interactive creation of an FCP device is only possible in graphical mode. It is not possible to
interactively configure an FCP device in a text-only install.
Each value entered should be verified as correct, as any mistakes made may cause the system not
to operate properly. Use only lower-case letters in hex values.
For more information on these values, refer to the hardware documentation check with the system
administrator who set up the network for this system.
To configure a Fiber Channel Protocol SCSI device, select Add ZFCP LUN and click Add Drive.
In the Add FCP device dialog, fill in the details for the 16-bit device number, 64-bit World Wide
Port Number (WWPN) and 64-bit FCP LUN. Click the Add button to connect to the FCP device using
this information.
Fi gure 23. 22. Add FCP Devi ce
The newly added device should then be present and usable in the storage device selection screen on
the Multipath Devices tab, if you have activated more than one path to the same LUN, or on
Other SAN Devices, if you have activated only one path to the LUN.
314
Important you must define a DASD
The installer requires the definition of a DASD. For a SCSI-only installation, enter none as the
parameter interactively during phase 1 of an interactive installation, or add DASD=none in the
parameter or CMS configuration file. This satisfies the requirement for a defined DASD
parameter, while resulting in a SCSI-only environment.
Valid Hostnames
Change the default setting localhost.localdomain to a unique hostname for each of your Linux
instances.
Fi gure 23. 23. Set t i ng t he host name
315
Note
Usually, the network connection configured earlier in installation phase 1 does not need to be
modified during the rest of the installation. You cannot add a new connection on System z because
the network subchannels need to be grouped and set online beforehand, and this is currently only
done in installation phase 1. To change the existing network connection, click the button
Configure Network. The Network Connections dialog appears that allows you to configure
network connections for the system, not all of which are relevant to System z.
Fi gure 23. 24 . Net work Connect i ons
All network connections on System z are listed in the Wired tab. By default this contains the
connection configured earlier in installation phase 1 and is either eth0 (OSA, LCS), or hsi0
(HiperSockets). Note that on System z you cannot add a new connection here. To modify an existing
connection, select a row in the list and click the Edit button. A dialog box appears with a set of tabs
appropriate to wired connections, as described below.
316
The most important tabs on System z are Wired and IPv4 Settings.
interface.
317
Fi gure 23. 25. The Wi red t ab
Authentication
EAP-TTLS
318
Identity
User certificate
CA certificate
Private key
319
Fi gure 23. 26 . The 802. 1x Securi t y t ab
network connection.
The address, netmask, gateway, DNS servers and DNS search suffix for an IPv4 connection were
configured during installation phase 1 or reflect the following parameters in the parameter file or
configuration file: IPADDR, NETMASK, GATEWAY, DNS, SEARCHDNS (Refer to Section 26.3, Installation
Network Parameters ).
following options:
Automatic (DHCP)
320
Manual
Link-Local Only
Disabled
321
Fi gure 23. 27. The I Pv4 Set t i ngs t ab
23. 7. 1. 4 . 1. Edi t i ng I Pv4 rout es
appears.
322
Fi gure 23. 28. The Edi t i ng I Pv4 Rout es di al og
network connection.
following options:
Ignore
Automatic
configuration.
323
Manual
Link-Local Only
324
Fi gure 23. 29 . The I Pv6 Set t i ngs t ab
23. 7. 1. 5. 1. Edi t i ng I Pv6 rout es
appears.
325
Fi gure 23. 30. The Edi t i ng I Pv6 Rout es di al og
files.
326
directory:
Specify a time zone even if you plan to use NTP (Network Time Protocol) to maintain the accuracy of
the system clock.
Fi gure 23. 31. Conf i guri ng t he Ti me Zone
Select System clock uses UTC. The system clock is a piece of hardware on your computer
system. Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses the timezone setting to determine the offset between the local
time and UTC on the system clock. This behavior is standard for systems that use UNIX, Linux, and
similar operating systems.
327
Note
timeconfig.
Note
administration.
Fi gure 23. 32. Root Password
328
Note
Tool .
system for data storage.
[11]
329
Fi gure 23. 33. Assi gn st orage devi ces
system.
system.
On platforms other than System z, this radio button is used to specify the device to which you want to
install the boot loader. On System z this choice does not have any effect. The zi pl boot loader will be
installed on the disk that contains the /boot directory, which is determined later on during
partitioning.
330
Fi gure 23. 34 . Warni ng screen i ni t i al i zi ng DASD
Fi gure 23. 35. Warni ng screen i ni t i al i zi ng FCP LUN
331
Important
332
pkglist.txt
Storing Backups
Upgrade .
333
Partitioning allows you to divide your storage devices into isolated sections, where each section
behaves as a separate Linux device. Partitioning is particularly useful if you run multiple operating
systems, or wish to enforce a logical or functional distinction between your storage partitions (such
as a /home partition that persistently contains user information).
Fi gure 23. 36 . Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up
334
Automatic partitions cannot be encrypted on System z
To encrypt partitions, you will need to select the Creat e Cust om Layout option. Partitions
created with one of the four automated options cannot be encrypted.
Your options are:
Use Al l Space
Select this option to remove all partitions on your storage drives (this includes partitions
created by other operating systems such as z/VM or z/OS).
Warning
If you select this option, all data on the selected DASD and SCSI storage devices is
removed by the installation program.
Select this option to remove only Linux partitions (partitions created from a previous Linux
installation). This does not remove other partitions you may have on your storage devices
(such as z/VM or z/OS partitions).
Warning
Use Free Space
Pre-Installation .
the dialog box.
335
meet your needs.
multipath storage.
partitioning.
more information.
Fi gure 23. 37. Ent er passphrase f or encrypt ed part i t i on
336
Passphrases .
Section 23.16, Write Changes to Disk .
Hat Enterprise Linux is installed.
Partitions and Section 23.15.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme . At a bare minimum, you need
an appropriately-sized root partition, and usually a swap partition appropriate to the amount of RAM
you have on the system.
Fi gure 23. 38. Part i t i oni ng on Syst em z
DASD, FCP LUN, or logical volume selected in the lower pane.
337
Above the display, you can review the Drive name (such as /dev/dasda), the Geom (which shows
the hard disk' s geometry and consists of three numbers representing the number of cylinders, heads,
and sectors as reported by the hard disk), and the Model of the hard drive as detected by the
The lower pane contains a list of all DASDs, FCP LUNs, and logical volumes to be used during
Devices . Note that if you specified a CMSDASD in your parameter file, DASD names begin at
dasdb; dasda was assigned to the CMSDASD and this name is no longer available at this point in
the installation process.
Devi ce
Si ze ( MB)
Type
Format
Creat e
Edi t
Del et e
Reset
338
Finally, note which device is associated with /boot. The kernel files and bootloader sector will be
associated with this device. The first DASD or SCSI LUN will be used, and the device number will be
used when re-IPLing the post-installed system.
Note device names and types are illustrative only
The screenshots in the following subsections of this manual sometimes show hard disk types
and device names that do not appear as such on System z. These screenshots are only
intended to illustrate the installation interface itself and apply equally to DASDs and FCP-
attached SCSI disks.
Fi gure 23. 39 . Creat i ng St orage
339
follows:
On System z, the storage subsystem uses RAID transparently, and you do not need to set it up.
system.
Note
340
Fi gure 23. 4 0. Creat i ng a New Part i t i on
partition. For more information on file system types, refer to Section 23.15.2.1, File System
Types .
future use.
341
used.
Fi l e syst ems
for ext3.
[12]
342
Important XFS not supported on System z
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 does not support XFS on System z.
Note Software RAIDs are unnecessary on System z
On System z, the storage subsystem uses RAID transparently. There is no need to set up a
software RAID.
RAI D Part i t i on
343
Fi gure 23. 4 1. Creat e a sof t ware RAI D part i t i on
RAID Device
configured.
344
Fi gure 23. 4 2. Creat e a RAI D devi ce
RAID.
options:
RAID partitions.
345
RAID partitions.
configuration from scratch, establish another SSH connection to the installation image with
the root user and run the lvm command.
346
Fi gure 23. 4 3. Creat e an LVM Physi cal Vol ume
347
Fi gure 23. 4 4 . Make LVM Vol ume Group
Make Logical Volume
348
Fi gure 23. 4 5. Make Logi cal Vol ume
Configuring efficient swap space for Linux on System z is a complex task. It very much depends on
the specific environment and should be tuned to the actual system load.
Refer to the following resources for more information and to guide your decision:
' Chapter 7. Linux Swapping' in the IBM Redbooks publication Linux on IBM System z: Performance
Measurement and Tuning [IBM Form Number SG24-6926-01], [ISBN 0738485586], available from
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/sg246926.html
Linux Performance when running under VM, available from
http://www.vm.ibm.com/perf/tips/linuxper.html
Linux.
Fi gure 23. 4 6 . Wri t i ng st orage conf i gurat i on t o di sk
349
installation completely, switch off your computer.
system.
350
Fi gure 23. 4 7. Package Group Sel ect i on
Basi c Server
Dat abase Server
Web server
Vi rt ual Host
virtual machines.
Deskt op
351
Linux system.
Mi ni mal
Selection ).
352
Fi gure 23. 4 8. Addi ng a sof t ware reposi t ory
Modify repository.
Fi gure 23. 4 9 . Sel ect net work i nt erf ace
353
2. Click OK.
Fi gure 23. 50. Net work Connect i ons
system.
354
Note 31-bit applications
Users of IBM System z who want support for developing or running legacy 31-bit applications
are encouraged to select the Compatibility Arch Support and Compatibility Arch
Development Support packages to install architecture specific support for their systems.
select Next.
Fi gure 23. 51. Package Group Det ai l s
355
Fi gure 23. 52. Package Sel ect i on Li st Cont ext Menu
356
Fi gure 23. 53. St art i ng i nst al l at i on
During installation of the selected packages and their dependencies, you see the following progress
bar:
Fi gure 23. 54 . Packages compl et ed
The installation program prompts you to prepare your system for reboot.
The installation program automatically reboots into the installed system.
357
Should the installation program not reboot, the installation program shows information from which
device to do an IPL (boot). Accept the shutdown option and after shutdown, IPL from the DASD or
SCSI LUN where the /boot partition for Red Hat Enterprise Linux has been installed.
23.19.1. IPL Under z/VM
To IPL from a DASD, for example using the DASD device 200 on the 3270 console, issue the
command:
#cp i 200
In DASD only environments where automatic partitioning (clearing data from all partitions) was used,
the first activated DASD is where the /boot partition is typically located.
Using /boot on an FCP LUN, you must provide the WWPN and LUN for the FCP-attached device
from which to IPL.
To IPL from an FCP-attached device:
1. Provide FCP routing information to an FCP-attached device, for example, where
0x50050763050B073D is the WWPN, and 0x4020400100000000 is the FCP LUN:
#cp set loaddev portname50050763 050B073D lun 40204001 00000000
2. IPL the FCP adapter, for example FC00:
#cp ipl FC00
Note
To disconnect from the 3270 terminal without stopping the Linux running in your virtual
machine, use #cp disconnect instead of #cp logoff. When your virtual machine is re-
connected using the usual logon procedure, it might be placed in CP console function mode
(CP READ). If so, to resume execution on your virtual machine, enter the BEGIN command.
23.19.2. IPL on an LPAR
For LPAR-based installations, on the HMC, issue a load command to the LPAR, specifying the
particular DASD, or the FCP adapter, WWPN, and FCP LUN where the /boot partition is located.
23.19.3. Cont inuing Aft er Reboot (re-IPL)
Following the automatic reboot or the manual IPL of the installed Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating
system, you can log on to the system via ssh. Note that the only place from which you can log in as
root is from the 3270 terminal or from other terminal devices listed in /etc/securetty.
The first time you start your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system in a graphical environment, you can use
Fi rst Boot to guide you through Red Hat Enterprise Linux configuration. Using this tool, you can set
your system time and date, install software, register your machine with Red Hat Network, and more.
Fi rst Boot lets you configure your environment at the beginning, so that you can get started using
your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system quickly.
358
[12] The fsck appl i cati on i s used to check the fi l e system for metadata consi stency and opti onal l y
repai r one or more Li nux fi l e systems.
359
Chapter 24. Troubleshooting Installation on IBM System z
files include:
/tmp/anaconda.log
/tmp/program.log
/tmp/storage.log
/tmp/yum.log
/tmp/syslog
other way round).
Ensure that you have the latest installation updates and images from Red Hat. Review the online
errata to see if newer versions are available.
Message
Enterprise Linux, then there may be an issue with your DASD devices. If you encounter this
error, add the DASD=<disks> parameter to your parameter file or CMS configuration file (where
disks is the DASD range reserved for installation) and start the install again.
360
Additionally, make sure you format the DASDs using the dasdfmt command within a Linux root
shell, instead of formatting the DASDs using CMS. Anaconda automatically detects any DASD
devices that are not yet formatted and asks you whether to format the devices.
Fi gure 24 . 1. The Crash Report i ng Di al og Box
Det ai l s
361
Fi gure 24 . 2. Det ai l s of t he Crash
Save
Exi t
362
Fi gure 24 . 3. Sel ect report er
Logger
Report upl oader
363
Fi gure 24 . 4 . Conf i gure report er pref erences
Logger
existing log file.
Fi gure 24 . 5. Speci f y l ocal pat h f or l og f i l e
364
by default.
Fi gure 24 . 6 . Ent er Red Hat Net work aut hent i cat i on det ai l s
Report upl oader
Fi gure 24 . 7. Ent er URL f or upl oadi ng crash report
Bugzi l l a
365
Fi gure 24 . 8. Ent er Bugzi l l a aut hent i cat i on det ai l s
Fi gure 24 . 9 . Conf i rm report dat a
366
Fi gure 24 . 10. Report i n progress
Fi gure 24 . 11. Report i ng done
367
process.
24.2.3. Ot her Part it ioning Problems
Note
24.3.1. Remot e Graphical Deskt ops and XDMCP
If you have installed the X Window System and would like to log in to your Red Hat Enterprise Linux
system using a graphical login manager, enable the X Display Manager Control Protocol (XDMCP). This
protocol allows users to remotely log in to a desktop environment from any X Window System
compatible client (such as a network-connected workstation or X11 terminal).
To enable remote login using XDMCP, edit the /etc/gdm/custom.conf file on the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux system with a text editor such as vi or nano. In the [xdcmp] section, add the line
Enable=true, save the file, and exit the text editor.
To enable this change, you will need to restart the X Window System. First, switch to runlevel 4:
/sbin/init 4
The graphical display will close, leaving only a terminal. When you reach the login: prompt,
enter your username and password.
Then, as root in the terminal, switch to runlevel 5 to return to the graphical interface and start the X11
server:
/sbin/init 5
From the client machine, start a remote X11 session using X. For example:
X :1 -query s390vm.example.com
368
The command connects to the remote X11 server via XDMCP (replace s390vm.example.com with the
hostname of the remote X11 server) and displays the remote graphical login screen on display :1 of
the X11 server system (usually accessible by using the Ctrl-Alt-F8 key combination).
You can also access remote desktop sessions using a nested X11 server, which opens the remote
desktop as a window in your current X11 session. Xnest allows users to open a remote desktop
nested within their local X11 session. For example, run Xnest using the following command,
replacing s390vm.example.com with the hostname of the remote X11 server:
Xnest :1 -query s390vm.example.com
If you cannot remember your root password, boot your system into single user mode by appending
the boot option single to the zipl boot menu or by any other means to append kernel command line
options at IPL.
369
Chapter 25. Configuring an Installed Linux on System z Instance
For more information about Linux on System z, see the publications listed in Chapter 27, IBM
System z References. Some of the most common tasks are described here.
25.1. Adding DASDs
This section explains how to set a Direct Access Storage Device (DASD) online, format it, and how to
make sure it is attached to the system persistently, making it automatically available after a reboot.
Note
Make sure the device is attached or linked to the Linux system if running under z/VM.
CP ATTACH EB1C TO *
To link a mini disk to which you have access, issue, for example:
CP LINK RHEL6X 4B2E 4B2E MR
DASD 4B2E LINKED R/W
See z/VM: CP Commands and Utilities Reference, SC24-6175 for details about these commands.
25.1.1. Dynamically Set t ing DASDs Online
The following procedure describes bringing a DASD online dynamically (not persistently). This is the
first step when configuring a new DASD; later procedures will explain how to make it available
persistently.
Procedure 25. 1. Addi ng DASD Di sks on I BM Syst em z Usi ng t he VMCP Dri ver
1. Enable the VMCP driver:
# modprobe vmcp
2. Use the cio_ignore command to remove the DASD from the list of ignored devices and
make it visible to Linux:
# cio_ignore -r DeviceNumber
Replace DeviceNumber with the device number of the DASD. For example:
# cio_ignore -r 0102
3. Link the disk to the virtual machine:
# vmcp 'link * DeviceNumber DeviceNumber rw'
370
Replace DeviceNumber with the device number of the DASD.
4. Set the device online. Use a command of the following form:
# # chccwdev -e DeviceNumber
5. Verify that the disk is ready using the lsdasd command:
# lsdasd
Bus-ID Status Name Device Type BlkSz Size
Blocks
==================================================================
============
0.0.0100 active dasda 94:0 ECKD 4096 2347MB
600840
0.0.0301 active dasdb 94:4 FBA 512 512MB
1048576
0.0.0300 active dasdc 94:8 FBA 512 256MB
524288
0.0.0101 active dasdd 94:12 ECKD 4096 2347MB
600840
0.0.0200 active dasde 94:16 ECKD 4096 781MB
200160
0.0.0102 active dasdf 94:20 ECKD 4096 2347MB
600840
In the above example, device 0102 (shown as 0.0.0102 in the Bus-ID column) is being
accessed as /dev/dasdf.
If you followed the above procedure, the new DASD is attached for the current session only. This
means that the DASD will not still be attached after you reboot the system. See Section 25.1.2,
Persistently setting DASDs online for information about attaching the storage device permanently.
You can also find more information in the DASD Chapter in Linux on System z Device Drivers,
Features, and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
25.1.2. Persist ent ly set t ing DASDs online
The instructions in Section 25.1.1, Dynamically Setting DASDs Online described how to activate
DASDs dynamically in a running system. Such changes are not persistent; the DASDs will not be
attached after the system reboots. Procedures described in this section assume that you have
already attached the DASD dynamically.
Making changes to the DASD configuration persistent in your Linux system depends on whether the
DASDs belong to the root (/) file system. Those DASDs required for the root file system need to be
activated early during the boot process by the initramfs to be able to mount the root file system.
The DASDs which are not part of the root file system can be activated later, simplifying the
configuration process.
The list of ignored devices (cio_ignore) is handled transparently for persistent device
configurations. You do not need to free devices from the ignore list manually.
25.1.2.1. DASDs Which Are Part of t he Root File Syst em
371
If you are attaching a new DASD as part of the root file system, you will have to edit the zi pl boot
loader' s configuration and then regenerate the initramfs so that your changes will take effect after
the next reboot. The following procedure explains the steps you need to take.
Procedure 25. 2. Permanent l y At t achi ng DASDs as Root Devi ces
1. Edit the /etc/dasd.conf configuration file using a plain text editor such as Vi m, and
append a line to this file with your DASD' s configuration. You can use parts of the file that
describe previously configured devices for reference. A valid configuration line will look
similar to the following:
0.0.0102 use_diag=0 readonly=0 erplog=0 failfast=0
2. Edit the /etc/zipl.conf configuration file. An example zipl.conf file will look similar to
the following:
[defaultboot]
default=linux
target=/boot/
[linux]
image=/boot/vmlinuz-2.6.32-19.el6.s390x
ramdisk=/boot/initramfs-2.6.32-19.el6.s390x.img
parameters="root=/dev/mapper/vg_devel1-lv_root
rd_DASD=0.0.0200,use_diag=0,readonly=0,erplog=0,failfast=0
rd_LVM_LV=vg_devel1/lv_root rd_NO_LUKS rd_NO_MD rd_NO_DM
LANG=en_US.UTF-8 SYSFONT=latarcyrheb-sun16 KEYTABLE=us
cio_ignore=all,!0.0.0009"
Note the multiple rd_DASD= options on the parameters= line. You must add the new DASD
to this line, using the same syntax - the rd_DASD= keyword, followed by the device ID and a
comma-separated list of options. See the dasd= parameter description in the DASD device
driver chapter in Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6 for details.
3. The next step is to rebuild the initrd:
# mkinitrd -f /boot/initramfs-2.6.32-71.el6.s390x.img ùname -r`
4. Then, rebuild the boot loader configuration using the zipl command. You can use the -V
option for more detailed output:
# zipl -V
Using config file '/etc/zipl.conf'
Target device information
Device..........................: 5e:00
Partition.......................: 5e:01
Device name.....................: dasda
DASD device number..............: 0201
Type............................: disk partition
Disk layout.....................: ECKD/compatible disk layout
Geometry - heads................: 15
Geometry - sectors..............: 12
Geometry - cylinders............: 3308
Geometry - start................: 24
372
File system block size..........: 4096
Physical block size.............: 4096
Device size in physical blocks..: 595416
Building bootmap in '/boot/'
Building menu 'rh-automatic-menu'
Adding #1: IPL section 'linux' (default)
kernel image......: /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.32-19.el6.s390x
kernel parmline...: 'root=/dev/mapper/vg_devel1-lv_root
rd_LVM_LV=vg_devel1/lv_root rd_NO_LUKS rd_NO_MD rd_NO_DM
cio_ignore=all,!0.0.0009'
initial ramdisk...: /boot/initramfs-2.6.32-19.el6.s390x.img
component address:
kernel image....: 0x00010000-0x00a70fff
parmline........: 0x00001000-0x00001fff
initial ramdisk.: 0x02000000-0x022d2fff
internal loader.: 0x0000a000-0x0000afff
Preparing boot device: dasda (0201).
Preparing boot menu
Interactive prompt......: enabled
Menu timeout............: 15 seconds
Default configuration...: 'linux'
Syncing disks...
Done.
After completing this procedure, the new DASD is persistently attached and can be used as part of
the root file system. However, the root file system still needs to be expanded to the new DASD. If your
system uses an LVM logical volume for the root file system, you will also need to expand this volume
(and the volume group which contains it) to the new DASD. This can be done using the built-in
pvcreate, vgextend and lvextend commands to create a physical volume for LVM, expand the
existing volume group and expand the root logical volume, respectively. See Section 25.1.5,
Expanding Existing LVM Volumes to New Storage Devices for details.
25.1.3. DASDs Which Are Not Part of t he Root File Syst em
DASDs that are not part of the root file system, that is, data disks, are persistently configured in the file
/etc/dasd.conf. It contains one DASD per line. Each line begins with the device bus ID of a
DASD. Optionally, each line can continue with options separated by space or tab characters.
Options consist of key-value-pairs, where the key and value are separated by an equals sign.
The key corresponds to any valid sysfs attribute a DASD may have. The value will be written to the
key' s sysfs attribute. Entries in /etc/dasd.conf are activated and configured by udev when a
DASD is added to the system. At boot time, all DASDs visible to the system get added and trigger
udev.
Example content of /etc/dasd.conf:
0.0.0207
0.0.0200 use_diag=1 readonly=1
Modifications of /etc/dasd.conf only become effective after a reboot of the system or after the
dynamic addition of a new DASD by changing the system' s I/O configuration (that is, the DASD is
attached under z/VM). Alternatively, you can trigger the activation of a new entry in
/etc/dasd.conf for a DASD which was previously not active, by executing the following
373
commands:
Procedure 25. 3. Permanent l y At t achi ng DASDs as Non- root Devi ces
Trigger the activation by writing to the uevent attribute of the device:
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/device.bus,ID/uevent
For example:
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/0.0.021a/uevent
25.1.4. Preparing a New DASD wit h Low-level Format t ing
The next step after bringing the DASD online is to format it, if you need to do so. The following
procedure explains the necessary steps.
Warning
This procedure will wipe all existing data on the disk. Make sure to back up any data you want
to keep before proceeding.
Procedure 25. 4 . Format t i ng a DASD
1. Wipe all existing data on the DASD using the dasdfmt command. Replace DeviceNumber
with the device number of the DASD. When prompted for confirmation (as shown in the
example below), type yes to proceed.
# dasdfmt -b 4096 -d cdl -p /dev/disk/by-path/ccw-
0.0.DeviceNumber
Drive Geometry: 10017 Cylinders * 15 Heads = 150255 Tracks
I am going to format the device /dev/disk/by-path/ccw-0.0.0102 in
the following way:
Device number of device : 0x4b2e
Labelling device : yes
Disk label : VOL1
Disk identifier : 0X0102
Extent start (trk no) : 0
Extent end (trk no) : 150254
Compatible Disk Layout : yes
Blocksize : 4096
--->> ATTENTION! <<---
All data of that device will be lost.
Type "yes" to continue, no will leave the disk untouched: yes
cyl 97 of 3338 |#----------------------------------------------
| 2%
When the progress bar reaches the end and the format is complete, dasdfmt prints the
following output:
374
Rereading the partition table...
Exiting...
See the dasdfmt(8) man page for information about the syntax of the dasdfmt command.
2. Use the fdasd command to write a new Linux-compatible partition table to the DASD.
# fdasd -a /dev/disk/by-path/ccw-DeviceNumber
auto-creating one partition for the whole disk...
writing volume label...
writing VTOC...
checking !
wrote NATIVE!
rereading partition table...
This example uses the -a option to create a single partition spanning the entire disk. Other
layouts are possible; up to three partitions can be created on a single DASD. For information
about the syntax of the fdasd command and available options, see the fdasd(8) man
page.
3. Create a new partition with fdisk. Replace DeviceName with the device name of the DASD.
# fdisk /dev/DeviceName
After you execute fdisk, a series of prompts will appear in your terminal. These prompts can
be used to manipulate the disk partition table, creating new partitions or editing existing one.
For information about using fdisk, see the fdisk(8) man page.
After a (low-level formatted) DASD is online, it can be used like any other disk under Linux. For
instance, you can create file systems, LVM physical volumes, or swap space on its partitions, for
example /dev/disk/by-path/ccw-0.0.4b2e-part1. Never use the full DASD device
(dev/dasdb) for anything but the commands dasdfmt and fdasd. If you want to use the entire
DASD, create one partition spanning the entire drive as in the fdasd example above.
Note
To add additional disks later without breaking existing disk entries in, for example,
/etc/fstab, use the persistent device symbolic links under /dev/disk/by-path/.
25.1.5. Expanding Exist ing LVM Volumes t o New St orage Devices
If your system uses LVM, you need to expand an existing volume group and one or more logical
volumes so that they contain the new DASD which you attached by following the procedures
described earlier in this chapter. Otherwise, the DASD will be attached to the system, but you will not
be able to use it.
The following procedure explains how to use the entire capacity of the new DASD to expand an
existing logical volume. If you want to use the new DASD for multiple logical volumes, you will need
to create multiple LVM physical volumes on this partition, and repeat this procedure for each logical
volume (and volume group) you want to expand. This procedure assumes you followed the steps in
375
Section 25.1.1, Dynamically Setting DASDs Online to attach the new DASD dynamically, then
Section 25.1.2.1, DASDs Which Are Part of the Root File System to attach it persistently and
prepare it to be used for the root volume, and that you formatted it as described in Section 25.1.4,
Preparing a New DASD with Low-level Formatting and created a single partition on it.
Procedure 25. 5. Expandi ng Exi st i ng Logi cal Vol ume t o Use a New DASD
1. Create a new physical volume for LVM on the DASD using the pvcreate command:
# pvcreate /dev/DeviceName
Important
The device name must be specified as a partition - for example, /dev/dasdf1. Do not
specify the entire block device.
2. List existing physical volumes using the pvs command to verify that the physical volume has
been created:
# pvs
PV VG Fmt Attr PSize PFree
/dev/dasda2 vg_local lvm2 a-- 1,29g 0
/dev/dasdd1 vg_local lvm2 a-- 2,29g 0
/dev/dasdf1 lvm2 a-- 2,29g 2,29g
/dev/mapper/mpathb vgextnotshared lvm2 a-- 200,00g 1020,00m
As you can see in the above example, /dev/dasdf1 now contains an empty physical
volume which is not assigned to any volume group.
3. Use the vgextend command to expand an existing volume group containing the volume you
want to use the new DASD for:
# vgextend VolumeGroup PhysicalVolume
Replace VolumeGroup with the name of the volume group you are expanding, and
PhysicalVolume with the name of the physical volume (for example, /dev/dasdf1).
4. Use the lvextend command to expand a logical volume you want to use the new DASD for:
# lvextend -L +Size /dev/mapper/VolumeGroup-LogicalVolume
For example:
# lvextend -L +2G /dev/mapper/vg_local-lv_root
Extending logical volume lv_root to 2,58 GiB
Logical volume lv_root successfully resized
After you complete the procedure, an existing logical volume is expanded and contains the new
DASD in addition to any previously assigned storage devices. You can also use the pvs, vgs, and
lvs commands as root to view existing LVM physical volumes, volume groups and logical volumes
at any point during the procedure.
376
25.2. Adding FCP-At t ached Logical Unit s (LUNs)
The following is an example of how to add an FCP LUN.
Note
If running under z/VM, make sure the FCP adapter is attached to the z/VM guest virtual
machine. For multipathing in production environments there would be at least two FCP
devices on two different physical adapters (CHPIDs). For example:
CP ATTACH FC00 TO *
CP ATTACH FCD0 TO *
25.2.1. Dynamically Act ivat ing an FCP LUN
Follow these steps to activate a LUN:
1. Use the cio_ignore command to remove the FCP adapter from the list of ignored devices
and make it visible to Linux:
Replace DeviceNumber with the device number of the FCP adapter. For example:
2. To bring the FCP adapter device online, use the following command:
# chccwdev -e fc00
3. Verify that the required WWPN was found by the automatic port scanning of the zfcp device
driver:
# ls -l /sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.fc00/
drwxr-xr-x. 3 root root 0 Apr 28 18:19 0x500507630040710b
drwxr-xr-x. 3 root root 0 Apr 28 18:19 0x50050763050b073d
drwxr-xr-x. 3 root root 0 Apr 28 18:19 0x500507630e060521
drwxr-xr-x. 3 root root 0 Apr 28 18:19 0x500507630e860521
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 availability
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 card_version
-rw-r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 cmb_enable
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 cutype
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 devtype
lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 28 18:17 driver ->
../../../../bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp
-rw-r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 failed
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 hardware_version
drwxr-xr-x. 35 root root 0 Apr 28 18:17 host0
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 in_recovery
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 lic_version
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 modalias
-rw-r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 online
377
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 peer_d_id
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 peer_wwnn
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 peer_wwpn
--w-------. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 port_remove
--w-------. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 port_rescan
drwxr-xr-x. 2 root root 0 Apr 28 18:19 power
-r--r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:19 status
lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 28 18:17 subsystem ->
../../../../bus/ccw
-rw-r--r--. 1 root root 4096 Apr 28 18:17 uevent
4. Activate the FCP LUN by adding it to the port (WWPN) through which you would like to access
the LUN:
# echo 0x4020400100000000 >
/sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.fc00/0x50050763050b073d/unit_add
5. Find out the assigned SCSI device name:
# lszfcp -DV
/sys/devices/css0/0.0.0015/0.0.fc00/0x50050763050b073d/0x40204001000
00000
/sys/bus/ccw/drivers/zfcp/0.0.fc00/host0/rport-0:0-
21/target0:0:21/0:0:21:1089355792
For more information, refer to the chapter on SCSI-over-Fibre Channel in Linux on System z Device
Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
25.2.2. Persist ent ly Act ivat ing FCP LUNs
The above instructions described how to activate FCP LUNs dynamically in a running system.
However, such changes are not persistent and do not survive a reboot. How you make the changes
to the FCP configuration persistent in your Linux system depends on whether the FCP LUNs belong
to the root file system. Those required for the root file system need to be activated very early during
the boot process by the initramfs to be able to mount the root file system. cio_ignore is
handled transparently for persistent device configurations and you do not need to free devices from
the ignore list manually.
25.2.2.1. FCP LUNs That Are Part of t he Root File Syst em
The only file you have to modify for adding FCP LUNs that are part of the root file system is
/etc/zipl.conf followed by a run of the zi pl boot loader tool. There is no more need to recreate
the initramfs.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides a parameter to activate FCP LUNs early in the boot process:
rd_ZFCP=. The value is a comma-separated list containing the device bus ID, the WWPN as 16 digit
hexadecimal number prefixed with 0x, and the FCP LUN prefixed with 0x and padded with zeroes to
the right to have 16 hexadecimal digits.
The following example zipl.conf is for a system that uses physical volumes on partitions of two
FCP LUNs for an LVM volume group vg_devel1 that contains a logical volume lv_root for the
root file system. For simplicity, the example shows a configuration without multipathing.
[defaultboot]
default=linux
378
target=/boot/
[linux]
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a000000000
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a100000000
rd_LVM_LV=vg_devel1/lv_root rd_NO_LUKS rd_NO_MD rd_NO_DM LANG=en_US.UTF-8
SYSFONT=latarcyrheb-sun16 KEYTABLE=us cio_ignore=all,!0.0.0009"
To add another physical volume on a partition of a third FCP LUN with device bus ID 0.0.fc00,
WWPN 0x5105074308c212e9 and FCP LUN 0x401040a300000000, simply add
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a300000000 to the parameters line
of your boot kernel in zipl.conf, for example:
[defaultboot]
default=linux
target=/boot/
[linux]
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a000000000
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a100000000
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a300000000
SYSFONT=latarcyrheb-sun16 KEYTABLE=us cio_ignore=all,!0.0.0009"
Run zi pl to apply the changes of /etc/zipl.conf for the next IPL:
# zipl -V
Using config file '/etc/zipl.conf'
Target device information
Device..........................: 08:00
Partition.......................: 08:01
Device name.....................: sda
Device driver name..............: sd
Type............................: disk partition
Disk layout.....................: SCSI disk layout
Geometry - start................: 2048
File system block size..........: 4096
Physical block size.............: 512
Device size in physical blocks..: 10074112
Building bootmap in '/boot/'
Building menu 'rh-automatic-menu'
Adding #1: IPL section 'linux' (default)
kernel image......: /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.32-19.el6.s390x
kernel parmline...: 'root=/dev/mapper/vg_devel1-lv_root
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a000000000
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a100000000
rd_ZFCP=0.0.fc00,0x5105074308c212e9,0x401040a300000000
SYSFONT=latarcyrheb-sun16 KEYTABLE=us cio_ignore=all,!0.0.0009'
initial ramdisk...: /boot/initramfs-2.6.32-19.el6.s390x.img
component address:
379
kernel image....: 0x00010000-0x007a21ff
parmline........: 0x00001000-0x000011ff
initial ramdisk.: 0x02000000-0x028f63ff
internal loader.: 0x0000a000-0x0000a3ff
Preparing boot device: sda.
Detected SCSI PCBIOS disk layout.
Writing SCSI master boot record.
Syncing disks...
Done.
25.2.2.2. FCP LUNs That Are Not Part of t he Root File Syst em
FCP LUNs that are not part of the root file system, such as data disks, are persistently configured in
the file /etc/zfcp.conf. It contains one FCP LUN per line. Each line contains the device bus ID of
the FCP adapter, the WWPN as 16 digit hexadecimal number prefixed with 0x, and the FCP LUN
prefixed with 0x and padded with zeroes to the right to have 16 hexadecimal digits, separated by a
space or tab. Entries in /etc/zfcp.conf are activated and configured by udev when an FCP
adapter is added to the system. At boot time, all FCP adapters visible to the system are added and
trigger udev.
Example content of /etc/zfcp.conf:
0.0.fc00 0x5105074308c212e9 0x401040a000000000
0.0.fc00 0x5105074308c212e9 0x401040a100000000
0.0.fc00 0x5105074308c212e9 0x401040a300000000
0.0.fcd0 0x5105074308c2aee9 0x401040a000000000
0.0.fcd0 0x5105074308c2aee9 0x401040a100000000
0.0.fcd0 0x5105074308c2aee9 0x401040a300000000
Modifications of /etc/zfcp.conf only become effective after a reboot of the system or after the
dynamic addition of a new FCP channel by changing the system' s I/O configuration (for example, a
channel is attached under z/VM). Alternatively, you can trigger the activation of a new entry in
/etc/zfcp.conf for an FCP adapter which was previously not active, by executing the following
commands:
1. Use the cio_ignore command to remove the FCP adapter from the list of ignored devices
and make it visible to Linux:
Replace DeviceNumber with the device number of the FCP adapter. For example:
# cio_ignore -r fcfc
2. To trigger the uevent that activates the change, issue:
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/Device.Bus.ID/uevent
For example:
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/0.0.fcfc/uevent
25.3. Adding a Net work Device
380
Network device driver modules are loaded automatically by udev.
You can add a network interface on IBM System z dynamically or persistently.
Dynamically
Load the device driver
Remove the network devices from the list of ignored devices.
Create the group device.
Configure the device.
Set the device online.
Persistently
Create a configuration script.
Activate the interface.
The following sections provide basic information for each task of each IBM System z network device
driver. Section 25.3.1, Adding a qeth Device describes how to add a qeth device to an existing
instance of Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Section 25.3.2, Adding an LCS Device describes how to add
an lcs device to an existing instance of Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Section 25.3.3, Mapping
Subchannels and Network Device Names describes how persistent network device names work.
Section 25.3.4, Configuring a System z Network Device for Network Root File System describes how
to configure a network device to use with a root file system that is only accessible through the
network.
25.3.1. Adding a qet h Device
The qeth network device driver supports System z OSA-Express features in QDIO mode,
HiperSockets, z/VM guest LAN, and z/VM VSWITCH.
Based on the type of interface being added, the qeth device driver assigns one of the base interface
names:
hsin for HiperSockets devices
ethn for Ethernet features
The value n is an integer that uniquely identifies the device. n is 0 for the first device of that type, 1 for
the second, and so on.
25.3.1.1. Dynamically Adding a qet h Device
To add a qeth device dynamically, follow these steps:
1. Determine whether the qeth device driver modules are loaded. The following example shows
loaded qeth modules:
# lsmod | grep qeth
qeth_l3 127056 9
qeth_l2 73008 3
ipv6 492872
381
155ip6t_REJECT,nf_conntrack_ipv6,qeth_l3
qeth 115808 2 qeth_l3,qeth_l2
qdio 68240 1 qeth
ccwgroup 12112 2 qeth
If the output of the lsmod command shows that the qeth modules are not loaded, run the
modprobe command to load them:
# modprobe qeth
2. Use the cio_ignore command to remove the network channels from the list of ignored
devices and make them visible to Linux:
# cio_ignore -r
read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,data_device_bus_id
Replace read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,data_device_bus_id with the three device bus
IDs representing a network device. For example, if the read_device_bus_id is 0.0.f500, the
write_device_bus_id is 0.0.f501, and the data_device_bus_id is 0.0.f502:
# cio_ignore -r 0.0.f500,0.0.f501,0.0.f502
3. Use the znetconf command to sense and list candidate configurations for network devices:
# znetconf -u
Scanning for network devices...
Device IDs Type Card Type CHPID Drv.
------------------------------------------------------------
0.0.f500,0.0.f501,0.0.f502 1731/01 OSA (QDIO) 00 qeth
0.0.f503,0.0.f504,0.0.f505 1731/01 OSA (QDIO) 01 qeth
0.0.0400,0.0.0401,0.0.0402 1731/05 HiperSockets 02 qeth
4. Select the configuration you want to work with and use znet conf to apply the configuration
and to bring the configured group device online as network device.
# znetconf -a f500
Successfully configured device 0.0.f500 (eth1)
5. Optionally, you can also pass arguments that are configured on the group device before it is
set online:
# znetconf -a f500 -o portname=myname
Successfully configured device 0.0.f500 (eth1)
Now you can continue to configure the network eth1 interface.
Alternatively, you can use sysfs attributes to set the device online as follows:
1. Create a qeth group device:
# echo read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,data_device_bus_id >
/sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/group
382
For example:
# echo 0.0.f500,0.0.f501,0.0.f502 >
/sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/group
2. Next, verify that the qeth group device was created properly by looking for the read channel:
# ls /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.f500
You may optionally set additional parameters and features, depending on the way you are
setting up your system and the features you require, such as:
portno
layer2
portname
For information on additional parameters, refer to the chapter on the qeth device driver in
Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
3. Bring the device online by writing 1 to the online sysfs attribute:
# echo 1 > /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.f500/online
4. Then verify the state of the device:
# cat /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.f500/online
1
A return value of 1 indicates that the device is online, while a return value 0 indicates that the
device is offline.
5. Find the interface name that was assigned to the device:
# cat /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/qeth/0.0.f500/if_name
eth1
Now you can continue to configure the network eth1 interface.
The following command from the s390utils package shows the most important settings of your
qeth device:
# lsqeth eth1
Device name : eth1
---------------------------------------------
card_type : OSD_1000
cdev0 : 0.0.f500
cdev1 : 0.0.f501
cdev2 : 0.0.f502
chpid : 76
online : 1
portname : OSAPORT
portno : 0
383
state : UP (LAN ONLINE)
priority_queueing : always queue 0
buffer_count : 16
layer2 : 1
isolation : none
25.3.1.2. Dynamically Removing a qet h Device
To remove a qeth device, use the znetconf tool. For example:
1. Use the znetconf command to show you all configured network devices:
znetconf -c
Device IDs Type Card Type CHPID Drv. Name
State
------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------
0.0.8036,0.0.8037,0.0.8038 1731/05 HiperSockets FB qeth hsi1
online
0.0.f5f0,0.0.f5f1,0.0.f5f2 1731/01 OSD_1000 76 qeth eth0
online
0.0.f500,0.0.f501,0.0.f502 1731/01 GuestLAN QDIO 00 qeth eth1
online
2. Select the network device to be removed and trigger znetconf to set the device offline and
ungroup the ccw group device.
# znetconf -r f500
Remove network device 0.0.f500 (0.0.f500,0.0.f501,0.0.f502)?
Warning: this may affect network connectivity!
Do you want to continue (y/n)?y
Successfully removed device 0.0.f500 (eth1)
3. Verify the success of the removal:
znetconf -c
Device IDs Type Card Type CHPID Drv. Name
State
------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------
0.0.8036,0.0.8037,0.0.8038 1731/05 HiperSockets FB qeth hsi1
online
0.0.f5f0,0.0.f5f1,0.0.f5f2 1731/01 OSD_1000 76 qeth eth0
online
25.3.1.3. Persist ent ly Adding a qet h Device
To make your new qeth device persistent you need to create the configuration file for your new
interface. The network interface configuration files are placed in /etc/sysconfig/network-
scripts/.
384
The network configuration files use the naming convention ifcfg-device, where device is the
value found in the if_name file in the qeth group device that was created earlier. In this example it is
eth1. cio_ignore is handled transparently for persistent device configurations and you do not
need to free devices from the ignore list manually.
If a configuration file for another device of the same type already exists, the simplest solution is to
copy it to the new name.
# cd /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts
# cp ifcfg-eth0 ifcfg-eth1
If you do not have a similar device defined you must create one. Use this example of ifcfg-eth0 as
a template:
/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth0
# IBM QETH
DEVICE=eth0
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=10.12.20.136
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
ONBOOT=yes
NETTYPE=qeth
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.09a0,0.0.09a1,0.0.09a2
PORTNAME=OSAPORT
OPTIONS='layer2=1 portno=0'
MACADDR=02:00:00:23:65:1a
TYPE=Ethernet
Edit the new ifcfg-eth1 file as follows:
1. Modify the DEVICE statement to reflect the contents of the if_name file from your ccwgroup.
2. Modify the IPADDR statement to reflect the IP address of your new interface.
3. Modify the NETMASK statement as needed.
4. If the new interface is to be activated at boot time, then make sure ONBOOT is set to yes.
5. Make sure the SUBCHANNELS statement matches the hardware addresses for your qeth
device.
6. Modify the PORTNAME statement or leave it out if it is not necessary in your environment.
7. You may add any valid sysfs attribute and its value to the OPTIONS parameter. The Red Hat
Enterprise Linux installer currently uses this to configure the layer mode (layer2) and the
relative port number (portno) of qeth devices.
The qeth device driver default for OSA devices is now layer 2 mode. To continue using old
ifcfg definitions that rely on the previous default of layer 3 mode, add layer2=0 to the
OPTIONS parameter.
# IBM QETH
DEVICE=eth1
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.70.87
385
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
ONBOOT=yes
NETTYPE=qeth
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602
PORTNAME=OSAPORT
OPTIONS='layer2=1 portno=0'
MACADDR=02:00:00:b3:84:ef
TYPE=Ethernet
Changes to an ifcfg file only become effective after rebooting the system or after the dynamic
addition of new network device channels by changing the system' s I/O configuration (for example,
attaching under z/VM). Alternatively, you can trigger the activation of a ifcfg file for network
channels which were previously not active yet, by executing the following commands:
# cio_ignore -r
read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,data_device_bus_id
Replace read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,data_device_bus_id with the three device bus
IDs representing a network device. For example, if the read_device_bus_id is 0.0.0600, the
write_device_bus_id is 0.0.0601, and the data_device_bus_id is 0.0.0602:
# cio_ignore -r 0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/read-channel/uevent
For example:
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/0.0.0600/uevent
3. Check the status of the network device:
# lsqeth
4. Now start the new interface:
# ifup eth1
5. Check the status of the interface:
# ifconfig eth1
eth1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 02:00:00:00:00:01
inet addr:192.168.70.87 Bcast:192.168.70.255
Mask:255.255.255.0
inet6 addr: fe80::ff:fe00:1/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST RUNNING NOARP MULTICAST MTU:1492 Metric:1
386
RX bytes:644 (644.0 b) TX bytes:264 (264.0 b)
6. Check the routing for the new interface:
# route
Kernel IP routing table
Destination Gateway Genmask Flags Metric Ref
Use Iface
192.168.70.0 * 255.255.255.0 U 0 0
0 eth1
10.1.20.0 * 255.255.255.0 U 0 0
0 eth0
default 10.1.20.1 0.0.0.0 UG 0 0
0 eth0
7. Verify your changes by using the ping command to ping the gateway or another host on the
subnet of the new device:
# ping -c 1 192.168.70.8
PING 192.168.70.8 (192.168.70.8) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 192.168.70.8: icmp_seq=0 ttl=63 time=8.07 ms
8. If the default route information has changed, you must also update
/etc/sysconfig/network accordingly.
25.3.2. Adding an LCS Device
The LAN channel station (LCS) device driver supports 1000Base-T Ethernet on the OSA-Express2 and
OSA-Express 3 features.
Based on the type of interface being added, the LCS driver assigns one base interface name:
ethn for OSA-Express Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet
n is 0 for the first device of that type, 1 for the second, and so on.
25.3.2.1. Dynamically Adding an LCS Device
1. Load the device driver:
# modprobe lcs
# cio_ignore -r read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id
Replace read_device_bus_id and write_device_bus_id with the two device bus IDs representing
a network device. For example:
# cio_ignore -r 0.0.09a0,0.0.09a1
387
3. Create the group device:
# echo read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id >
/sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/lcs/group
4. Configure the device. OSA cards can provide up to 16 ports for a single CHPID. By default,
the LCS group device uses port 0. To use a different port, issue a command similar to the
following:
# echo portno >
/sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/lcs/device_bus_id/portno
Replace portno with the port number you want to use. For more information about
configuration of the LCS driver, refer to the chapter on LCS in Linux on System z Device
Drivers, Features, and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
5. Set the device online:
# echo 1 >
/sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/lcs/read_device_bus_id/online
6. To find out what network device name has been assigned, enter the command:
# ls -l /sys/bus/ccwgroup/drivers/lcs/read_device_bus_ID/net/
drwxr-xr-x 4 root root 0 2010-04-22 16:54 eth1
25.3.2.2. Persist ent ly Adding an LCS Device
cio_ignore is handled transparently for persistent device configurations and you do not need to
free devices from the ignore list manually.
To add an LCS device persistently, follow these steps:
1. Create a configuration script as file in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ with a name
like ifcfg-ethn where n is an integer starting with 0. The file should look similar to the
following:
# IBM LCS
DEVICE=eth0
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=10.12.20.136
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
ONBOOT=yes
NETTYPE=lcs
SUBCHANNELS=0.0.09a0,0.0.09a1
PORTNAME=0
OPTIONS=''
TYPE=Ethernet
2. Modify the value of PORTNAME to reflect the LCS port number (portno) you would like to use.
You can add any valid lcs sysfs attribute and its value to the optional OPTIONS parameter.
Refer to Section 25.3.1.3, Persistently Adding a qeth Device for the syntax.
3. Set the DEVICE parameter as follows:
388
DEVICE=ethn
4. Issue an ifup command to activate the device:
# ifup ethn
Changes to an ifcfg file only become effective after rebooting the system. You can trigger the
activation of a ifcfg file for network channels by executing the following commands:
1. Use the cio_ignore command to remove the LCS device adapter from the list of ignored
devices and make it visible to Linux:
# cio_ignore -r read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id
Replace read_device_bus_id and write_device_bus_id with the device bus IDs of the LCS device.
For example:
# cio_ignore -r 0.0.09a0,0.0.09a1
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/read-channel/uevent
For example:
echo add > /sys/bus/ccw/devices/0.0.09a0/uevent
25.3.3. Mapping Subchannels and Net work Device Names
The DEVICE= option in the ifcfg file does not determine the mapping of subchannels to network
device names. Instead, the udev rules file /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-net.rules
determines which network device channel gets which network device name.
When configuring a new network device on System z, the system automatically adds a new rule to
that file and assigns the next unused device name. You can then edit the values assigned to the
NAME= variable for each device.
Example content of /etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-net.rules:
# This file was automatically generated by the /lib/udev/write_net_rules
# program run by the persistent-net-generator.rules rules file.
#
# You can modify it,as long as you keep each rule on a single line.
# S/390 qeth device at 0.0.f5f0
SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", DRIVERS=="qeth", KERNELS=="0.0.f5f0",
ATTR{type}=="1", KERNEL=="eth*", NAME="eth0"
# S/390 ctcm device at 0.0.1000
SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", DRIVERS=="ctcm", KERNELS=="0.0.1000",
ATTR{type}=="256", KERNEL=="ctc*", NAME="ctc0"
# S/390 qeth device at 0.0.8024
SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", DRIVERS=="qeth", KERNELS=="0.0.8024",
ATTR{type}=="1", KERNEL=="hsi*", NAME="hsi0"
389
# S/390 lcs device at 0.0.1240
SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", DRIVERS=="lcs", KERNELS=="0.0.1240",
25.3.4. Configuring a Syst em z Net work Device for Net work Root File Syst em
To add a network device that is required to access the root file system, you only have to change the
boot options. The boot options can be in a parameter file (refer to Chapter 26, Parameter and
Configuration Files) or part of a zipl.conf on a DASD or FCP-attached SCSI LUN prepared with the
zi pl boot loader. There is no need to recreate the initramfs.
Dracut (the mki ni t rd successor that provides the functionality in the initramfs that in turn replaces
i ni t rd) provides a boot parameter to activate network devices on System z early in the boot process:
rd_ZNET=.
As input, this parameter takes a comma-separated list of the NETTYPE (qeth, lcs, ctc), two (lcs, ctc) or
three (qeth) device bus IDs, and optional additional parameters consisting of key-value pairs
corresponding to network device sysfs attributes. This parameter configures and activates the
System z network hardware. The configuration of IP addresses and other network specifics works the
same as for other platforms. Refer to the dracut documentation for more details.
ci o_i gnore for the network channels is handled transparently on boot.
Example boot options for a root file system accessed over the network through NFS:
root=10.16.105.196:/nfs/nfs_root cio_ignore=all,!0.0.0009
rd_ZNET=qeth,0.0.0a00,0.0.0a01,0.0.0a02,layer2=1,portno=0,portname=OSAPO
RT
ip=10.16.105.197:10.16.105.196:10.16.111.254:255.255.248.0:nfsserver.subdo
main.domain:eth0:none rd_NO_LUKS rd_NO_LVM rd_NO_MD rd_NO_DM
390
Chapter 26. Parameter and Configuration Files
The IBM System z architecture can use a customized parameter file to pass boot parameters to the
kernel and the installer. This section describes the contents of this parameter file.
You need only read this section if you intend to change the shipped parameter file. You need to
change the parameter file if you want to:
automate the user input for l i nuxrc or the loader (refer to Chapter 21, Installation Phase 1:
Configuring a Network Device and Chapter 22, Installation Phase 2: Configuring Language and
Installation Source).
install unattended with kickstart.
choose non-default installation settings that are not accessible through the installer"s interactive
user interface, such as rescue mode.
The parameter file can be used to set up networking non-interactively before the installation program
(loader and anaconda) starts.
The kernel parameter file is limited to 895 characters plus an end-of-line character. The parameter file
can be variable or fixed record format. Fixed record format increases the file size by padding each
line up to the record length. Should you encounter problems with the installer not recognizing all
specified parameters in LPAR environments, you can try to put all parameters in one single line or
start and end each line with a space character.
For more details on kernel parameters and different possibilities of specifying them, see the chapter
on booting Linux and the chapter on kernel parameters in Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features,
and Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
The parameter file contains kernel parameters, such as root=/dev/ram0 or ro, and parameters for
the installation process, such as vncpassword=test or vnc.
26.1. Required Paramet ers
The following parameters are required and must be included in the parameter file. They are also
provided in the file generic.prm in directory images/ of the installation DVD:
root=file_system
where file_system represents the device on which the root file system can be found. For
installation purposes, it must be set to /dev/ram0, which is the ramdisk containing the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program.
ro
mounts the root file system, which is a ramdisk, read-only.
ip=off
disables automatic network configuration.
ramdisk_size=size
modifies the memory size reserved for the ramdisk to ensure that the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux installation program fits within it. For example: ramdisk_size=40000.
391
The file generic.prm also contains the additional parameter cio_ignore=all,!0.0.0009. This
setting speeds up boot and device detection on systems with many devices. The installer
transparently handles the activation of ignored devices.
Important adapt the cio_ignore parameter to your system
To avoid installation problems arising from cio_ignore support not being implemented
throughout the entire stack, adapt the cio_ignore= parameter value to your system or
remove the parameter entirely from your parameter file used for booting (IPL) the installer.
When installing from an FCP-attached DVD drive, and you encounter a problem with ignored
devices, select the menu option clear blacklist in l i nuxrc (refer to Chapter 21, Installation
Phase 1: Configuring a Network Device) to remove the list of ignored devices.
26.2. The z/VM Configurat ion File
This applies only if installing under z/VM. Under z/VM, you can use a configuration file on a CMS-
formatted disk. The purpose of the CMS configuration file is to save space in the parameter file by
moving the parameters that configure the initial network setup, the DASD, and the FCP specification
out of the parameter file (refer to Section 26.3, Installation Network Parameters ).
Each line of the CMS configuration file contains a single variable and its associated value, in the
following shell-style syntax: variable=value .
You must also add the CMSDASD and CMSCONFFILE parameters to the parameter file. These
parameters point the installation program to the configuration file:
CMSDASD=cmsdasd_address
Where cmsdasd_address is the device number of a CMS-formatted disk that contains the
configuration file. This is usually the CMS user"s A disk.
For example: CMSDASD=191
CMSCONFFILE=configuration_file
Where configuration_file is the name of the configuration file. This value must be specified in
lower case. It is specified in a Linux file name format: CMS_file_name.CMS_file_type.
The CMS file REDHAT CONF is specified as redhat.conf. The CMS file name and the file
type can each be from one to eight characters that follow the CMS conventions.
For example: CMSCONFFILE=redhat.conf
26.3. Inst allat ion Net work Paramet ers
The following parameters can be used to set up the preliminary network automatically and can be
defined in either the parameter file or the CMS configuration file. The parameters in this section are
the only parameters that can also be used in a CMS configuration file. All other parameters in other
sections must be specified in the parameter file.
NETTYPE="type"
Where type must be one of the following: qeth, lcs, or ctc. The default is qeth.
392
Choose lcs for:
OSA-2 Ethernet/Token Ring
OSA-Express Fast Ethernet in non-QDIO mode
OSA-Express High Speed Token Ring in non-QDIO mode
Gigabit Ethernet in non-QDIO mode
Choose qeth for:
OSA-Express Fast Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet (including 1000Base-T)
High Speed Token Ring
HiperSockets
ATM (running Ethernet LAN emulation)
SUBCHANNELS="device_bus_IDs"
Where bus_IDs is a comma-separated list of two or three device bus IDs.
Provides required device bus IDs for the various network interfaces:
qeth:
SUBCHANNELS="read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id,data_device_b
us_id"
lcs or ctc: SUBCHANNELS="read_device_bus_id,write_device_bus_id"
For example (a sample qeth SUBCHANNEL statement):
SUBCHANNELS="0.0.f5f0,0.0.f5f1,0.0.f5f2"
PORTNAME="osa_portname" , PORTNAME="lcs_portnumber"
This variable supports OSA devices operating in qdio mode or in non-qdio mode.
When using qdio mode (NETTYPE="qeth"), osa_portname is the portname specified on the
OSA device when operating in qeth mode.
When using non-qdio mode (NETTYPE="lcs"), lcs_portnumber is used to pass the relative
port number as a decimal integer in the range of 0 through 15.
PORTNO="portnumber"
You can add either PORTNO="0" (to use port 0) or PORTNO="1" (to use port 1 of OSA
features with two ports per CHPID) to the CMS configuration file to avoid being prompted for
the mode.
LAYER2="value"
Where value can be 0 or 1.
393
Use LAYER2="0" to operate an OSA or HiperSockets device in layer 3 mode
(NETTYPE="qeth"). Use LAYER2="1" for layer 2 mode. For virtual network devices under
z/VM this setting must match the definition of the GuestLAN or VSWITCH to which the device
is coupled.
To use network services that operate on layer 2 (the Data Link Layer or its MAC sublayer)
such as DHCP, layer 2 mode is a good choice.
The qeth device driver default for OSA devices is now layer 2 mode. To continue using the
previous default of layer 3 mode, set LAYER2="0" explicitly.
VSWITCH="value"
Where value can be 0 or 1.
Specify VSWITCH="1" when connecting to a z/VM VSWITCH or GuestLAN, or
VSWITCH="0" (or nothing at all) when using directly attached real OSA or directly
attached real HiperSockets.
MACADDR="MAC_address"
When you specify LAYER2="1" and VSWITCH="0", optionally use this parameter to
specify the MAC address. Linux needs six colon-separated octets and lower case hex digits.
Note that this is different from the z/VM notation, so be careful if you copy and paste
information from z/VM.
If you specify LAYER2="1" and VSWITCH="1", you must not specify the MACADDR,
because z/VM assigns a unique MAC address to virtual network devices in layer 2 mode.
CTCPROT="value"
Where value can be 0, 1, or 3.
Specifies the CTC protocol for NETTYPE="ctc". The default is 0.
HOSTNAME="string"
Where string is the hostname of the newly-installed Linux instance.
IPADDR="IP"
Where IP is the IP address of the new Linux instance.
NETMASK="netmask"
Where netmask is the netmask.
The netmask supports the syntax of a prefix integer (from 1 to 32) as specified in IPv4
classless interdomain routing (CIDR). For example, you can specify 24 instead of
255.255.255.0, or 20 instead of 255.255.240.0.
GATEWAY="gw"
Where gw is the gateway IP address for this network device.
MTU="mtu"
Where mtu is the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for this network device.
DNS="server1:server2:additional_server_terms:serverN"
394
Where "server1:server2:additional_server_terms:serverN" is a list of DNS servers, separated
by colons. For example:
DNS="10.1.2.3:10.3.2.1"
SEARCHDNS="domain1:domain2:additional_dns_terms:domainN"
Where "domain1:domain2:additional_dns_terms:domainN" is a list of the search domains,
separated by colons. For example:
SEARCHDNS="subdomain.domain:domain"
You only need to specify SEARCHDNS= if you specify the DNS= parameter.
DASD=
Defines the DASD or range of DASDs to configure for the installation. For a detailed
description of the syntax, refer to the dasd_mod device driver module option described in
the chapter on the DASD device driver in Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and
Commands on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
Li nuxrc supports a comma-separated list of device bus IDs or of ranges of device bus IDs
with the optional attributes ro, diag, erplog, and failfast. Optionally, you can
abbreviate device bus IDs to device numbers with leading zeros stripped. Any optional
attributes should be separated by colons and enclosed in parentheses. Optional attributes
follow a device bus ID or a range of device bus IDs.
The only supported global option is autodetect. This does not support the specification
of non-existent DASDs to reserve kernel device names for later addition of DASDs. Use
persistent DASD device names (for example /dev/disk/by-path/...) to enable
transparent addition of disks later. Other global options such as probeonly, nopav, or
nofcx are not supported by linuxrc.
Only specify those DASDs that you really need to install your system. All unformatted
DASDs specified here must be formatted after a confirmation later on in the installer (refer to
Section 23.6.1.1, DASD low-level formatting ). Add any data DASDs that are not needed
for the root file system or the /boot partition after installation as described in
Section 25.1.3, DASDs Which Are Not Part of the Root File System .
For FCP-only environments, specify DASD="none".
For example:
DASD="eb1c,0.0.a000-0.0.a003,eb10-eb14(diag),0.0.ab1c(ro:diag)"
FCP_n="device_bus_ID WWPN FCP_LUN"
Where:
n is typically an integer value (for example FCP_1 or FCP_2) but could be any string
with alphabetic or numeric characters or underscores.
device_bus_ID specifies the device bus ID of the FCP device representing the host bus
adapter (HBA) (for example 0.0.fc00 for device fc00).
WWPN is the world wide port name used for routing (often in conjunction with
multipathing) and is as a 16-digit hex value (for example 0x50050763050b073d).
395
FCP_LUN refers to the storage logical unit identifier and is specified as a 16-digit
hexadecimal value padded with zeroes to the right (for example
0x4020400100000000).
These variables can be used on systems with FCP devices to activate FCP LUNs such as
SCSI disks. Additional FCP LUNs can be activated during the installation interactively or by
means of a kickstart file. There is no interactive question for FCP in linuxrc. An example
value may look similar to the following:
FCP_1="0.0.fc00 0x50050763050b073d 0x4020400100000000"
Important values are site-specific
Each of the values used in the FCP parameters (for example FCP_1 or FCP_2) are
site-specific and are normally supplied by the FCP storage administrator.
The installation program prompts you for any required parameters not specified in the parameter or
configuration file except for FCP_n.
26.4. VNC and X11 Paramet ers
The following parameters can be defined in a parameter file but do not work in a CMS configuration
file. With these parameters you control what interface will be used for anaconda.
To use an X11 user interface without X11 forwarding, specify the following X11 parameter:
display=IP/hostname:display
Sets the hostname or IP address and the X11 display where the installer should connect to
and display its graphical user interface.
To use a VNC server instead of an X11 user interface, specify the following VNC parameters:
vnc
Specify vnc to use the VNC graphical user interface later in the installation process.
vncpassword=
This parameter sets the password used to connect to the VNC server. The password
parameter is optional. If not used, the VNC server does not use a password and anybody
can connect to the VNC server.
vncconnect=IP/hostname[:port]
When used in addition to vnc and vncpassword=, this optional parameter specifies the
hostname or IP address (and optionally, a TCP port) where a VNC client is running in
listening mode. The installer connects to and displays its graphical user interface on this
VNC client.
26.5. Loader Paramet ers
file.
396
To automate the loader screens, specify the following parameters:
lang=language
Sets the language of the installer user interface, for example, en for English or de for
German. This automates the response to Choose a Language (refer to Section 22.3,
Language Selection ).
repo=installation_source
Sets the installation source to access stage 2 as well as the repository with the packages to
be installed. This automates the response to Installation Method (refer to
Section 22.4, Installation Method ).
26.6. Paramet ers for Kickst art Inst allat ions
file.
ks=URL
References a kickstart file, which usually resides on the network for Linux installations on
System z. Replace URL with the full path including the file name of the kickstart file. This
parameter activates automatic installation with kickstart. Refer to Section 28.4, Automating
the Installation with Kickstart and Section 32.10, Starting a Kickstart Installation for more
details.]
RUNKS=value
Where value is defined as 1 if you want to run the loader automatically on the Linux console
without having to log in over the network with SSH. To use RUNKS=1, the console must
either support full-screen or the cmdline option below should be used. The latter applies
for the 3270 terminal under z/VM or the operating system messages console for LPAR. We
recommend RUNKS=1 for fully automatic installations with kickstart. When RUNKS=1 is set,
l i nuxrc automatically continues in case of parameter errors and does not interrupt
unattended installations by prompting for user interaction.
Leave out the parameter or specify RUNKS=0 otherwise.
cmdline
When cmdline is specified, output on line-mode terminals (such as 3270 under z/VM or
operating system messages for LPAR) becomes readable, as the installer disables escape
terminal sequences that are only applicable to UNIX-like consoles. This requires
installation with a kickstart file that answers all questions, since the installer does not
support interactive user input in cmdline mode.
Ensure that your kickstart file contains all required parameters before you use either the RUNKS or
cmdline options. Refer to Chapter 32, Kickstart Installations for details.
26.7. Miscellaneous Paramet ers
file.
askmethod
397
Do not use an automatically detected DVD as installation source but ask for the installation
method to manually specify the installation source. This parameter is useful if you booted
from an FCP-attached DVD but want to continue with another installation source, for
example on the network or on a local hard disk.
mediacheck
Turns on testing of an ISO-based installation source; for example, when booted from an
FCP-attached DVD or using repo= with an ISO on local hard disk or mounted with NFS.
nompath
Disables support for multipathing devices.
proxy=[protocol://][username[:password]@]host[:port]
Specify a proxy to use with installation over HTTP, HTTPS, or FTP.
rescue
Boot into a rescue system running from a ramdisk that can be used to fix and restore an
installed system.
stage2=URL
Specifies a path to an install.img file instead of to an installation source. Otherwise,
follows the same syntax as repo=. If stage2 is specified, it typically takes precedence over
other methods of finding install.img. However, if anaconda finds install.img on
local media, the stage2 URL will be ignored.
If stage2 is not specified and install.img cannot be found locally, anaconda looks to
the location given by repo= or method=.
If only stage2= is given without repo= or method=, anaconda uses whatever repos the
installed system would have enabled by default for installation.
syslog=IP/hostname[:port]
Makes the installer send log messages to a remote syslog server.
The boot parameters described here are the most useful for installations and trouble shooting on
System z, but only a subset of those that influence the installer. Refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options for a
more complete list of installer boot parameters.
26.8. Sample Paramet er File and CMS Configurat ion File
To change the parameter file, begin by extending the shipped generic.prm file.
Example of generic.prm file:
root="/dev/ram0" ro ip="off" ramdisk_size="40000"
cio_ignore="all,!0.0.0009"
CMSDASD="191" CMSCONFFILE="redhat.conf"
vnc
Example of redhat.conf file configuring a QETH network device (pointed to by CMSCONFFILE in
generic.prm):
398
NETTYPE="qeth"
SUBCHANNELS="0.0.0600,0.0.0601,0.0.0602"
PORTNAME="FOOBAR"
PORTNO="0"
LAYER2="1"
MACADDR="02:00:be:3a:01:f3"
HOSTNAME="foobar.systemz.example.com"
IPADDR="192.168.17.115"
NETMASK="255.255.255.0"
GATEWAY="192.168.17.254"
DNS="192.168.17.1"
SEARCHDNS="systemz.example.com:example.com"
DASD="200-203"
399
Chapter 27. IBM System z References
27.1. IBM Syst em z Publicat ions
Current versions of the Linux on System z publications can be found at
http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390/documentation_red_hat.html. They include:
Linux on System z Device Drivers, Features, and Commands as available with Red Hat Enterprise Linux
6. IBM . 2010. SC34-2597.
Linux on System z Using the Dump Tools on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6. IBM . 2010. SC34-2607.
Linux on System z How to use FC-attached SCSI devices with Linux on System z9 and zSeries. IBM .
2008. SC33-8413.
How to use Execute-in-Place Technology with Linux on z/VM. IBM . 2008. SC34-2594.
Linux on System z How to Set up a Terminal Server Environment on z/VM. IBM . 2009. SC34-2596.
Linux on System z libica 2.0 Programmers Reference. IBM . 2009. SC34-2602.
Linux on System z How to Improve Performance with PAV. IBM . 2008. SC33-8414.
z/VM Getting Started with Linux on System z. IBM . 2009. SC24-6194.
27.2. IBM Redbooks Publicat ions for Syst em z
Current versions of IBM Redbooks publications can be found at http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/. They
include:
I nt roduct ory publ i cat i ons
Introduction to the New Mainframe: z/VM Basics. IBM Redbooks . 2007. SG24-7316.
z/VM and Linux on IBM System z The Virtualization Cookbook for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2. IBM
Redbooks . 2008. SG24-7492.
400
Practical Migration to Linux on System z. IBM Redbooks . 2009. SG24-7727.
Perf ormance and hi gh avai l abi l i t y
Linux on IBM System z: Performance Measurement and Tuning. IBM Redbooks . 2011. SG24-6926.
Achieving High Availability on Linux for System z with Linux-HA Release 2. IBM Redbooks . 2009. SG24-
7711.
Securi t y
Security for Linux on System z. IBM Redbooks . 2013. SG24-7728.
Using Cryptographic Adapters for Web Servers with Linux on IBM System z9 and zSeries. IBM Redbooks .
2006. REDP-4131.
Net worki ng
IBM System z Connectivity Handbook. IBM Redbooks . 2013. SG24-5444.
OSA Express Implementation Guide. IBM Redbooks . 2009. SG24-5948.
HiperSockets Implementation Guide. IBM Redbooks . 2007. SG24-6816.
Fibre Channel Protocol for Linux and z/VM on IBM System z. IBM Redbooks . 2007. SG24-7266.
27.3. Online Resources
For z/VM publications, refer to http://www.vm.ibm.com/library/ .
For System z I/O connectivity information, refer to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/z/hardware/connectivity/index.html .
For System z cryptographic coprocessor information, refer to
http://www.ibm.com/security/cryptocards/ .
Chapt er 27. IBM Syst em z References
401
Sharing and maintaining RHEL 5.3 Linux under z/VM. Brad Hinson and Mike MacIsaac.
http://www.linuxvm.org/Present/misc/ro-root-RH5.pdf .
402
Part IV. Advanced Installation Options
This part of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide covers more advanced or uncommon
methods of installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux, including:
boot options.
installing without media.
installing through VNC.
using ki ckst art to automate the installation process.
Part IV. Advanced Inst allat ion Opt ions
403
Chapter 28. Boot Options
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation system includes a range of functions and options for
administrators. To use boot options, enter linux option at the boot: prompt.
To access the boot: prompt on a system that displays a graphical boot screen, press the Esc key
while the graphical boot screen is displayed.
If you specify more than one option, separate each of the options by a single space. For example:
linux option1 option2 option3
Rescue Mode
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation and rescue discs may either boot with rescue mode,
or load the installation system. For more information on rescue discs and rescue mode, refer to
Section 28.6.2, Booting Your Computer with the Rescue Mode .
28.1. Configuring t he Inst allat ion Syst em at t he Boot Menu
You can use the boot menu to specify a number of settings for the installation system, including:
language
display resolution
interface type
Installation method
network settings
28.1.1. Specifying t he Language
To set the language for both the installation process and the final system, specify the ISO code for
that language with the lang option. Use the keymap option to configure the correct keyboard layout.
For example, the ISO codes el_GR and gr identify the Greek language and the Greek keyboard
layout:
linux lang=el_GR keymap=gr
28.1.2. Configuring t he Int erface
To use a specific display resolution, enter resolution=setting as a boot option. For example, to
set the display resolution to 1024768, enter:
linux resolution=1024x768
To run the installation process in text mode, enter:
404
linux text
To enable support for a serial console, enter serial as an additional option.
Use display=ip:0 to allow remote display forwarding. In this command, ip should be replaced
with the IP address of the system on which you want the display to appear.
On the system you want the display to appear on, you must execute the command xhost
+remotehostname, where remotehostname is the name of the host from which you are running the
original display. Using the command xhost +remotehostname limits access to the remote display
terminal and does not allow access from anyone or any system not specifically authorized for remote
access.
28.1.3. Updat ing anaconda
You can install Red Hat Enterprise Linux with a newer version of the anaconda installation program
than the one supplied on your installation media.
The boot option
linux updates
presents you with a prompt that asks you for a disk image containing anaconda updates. You do
not need to specify this option if you are performing a network installation and have already placed
the updates image contents in rhupdates/ on the server.
Important
The rhupdates directory should only contain anaconda updates. The installation may fail if
you add other files (such as errata RPMs) or if you place too much content in the directory.
To load the anaconda updates from a network location instead, use:
linux updates=
followed by the URL for the location where the updates are stored.
28.1.4. Specifying t he Inst allat ion Met hod
Use the askmethod option to display additional menus that enable you to specify the installation
method and network settings. You may also configure the installation method and network settings at
the boot: prompt itself.
To specify the installation method from the boot: prompt, use the repo option. Refer to Table 28.1,
Installation methods for the supported installation methods.
Tabl e 28. 1. I nst al l at i on met hods
I nst al l at i on met hod Opt i on f ormat
DVD drive repo=cdrom:device
Hard Drive repo=hd:device/path
HTTP Server repo=http://host/path
405
HTTPS Server repo=https://host/path
FTP Server repo=ftp://username:password@host/path
NFS Server repo=nfs:server:/path
ISO images on an NFS
Server
repo=nfsiso:server:/path
I nst al l at i on met hod Opt i on f ormat
28.1.5. Specifying t he Net work Set t ings
Normally, anaconda prompts you to configure a network interface if one is needed during
installation. However, you can provide network settings with options at the boot: prompt as
follows:
ip
the IP address for system
netmask
the netmask for the system
gateway
the IP address of the network gateway
dns
the IP address of the network DNS server
ksdevice
the network device to use with these settings
ifname
the name you wish to assign to the network device, followed by the device' s MAC address
Each of these settings is required even if you are only configuring a single interface.
The following setting is optional:
vlanid
the virtual LAN ID number (802.1q tag) for the specified network device
This example configures the network settings for an installation system that uses the IP address
192.168.1.10 for interface eth0. The interface is named primary:
linux ip=192.168.1.10 netmask=255.255.255.0 gateway=192.168.1.1
dns=192.168.1.3 ksdevice=eth0 ifname=primary:01:23:45:67:89:ab
If you specify the network configuration and network device at the boot: prompt, these settings are
used for the installation process and the Networking Devices and Configure TCP/IP
dialogs do not appear.
28.1.5.1. Configuring a Bonded Int erface
406
To configure a bonded network interface, use the bond option. Name the bonded interface, specify
which network connections will be bonded, and list any additional options in the following format:
linux bond=<bondname>:<bondslaves>:[:<options>]
For example:
linux bond=bond0:eth0,eth1:mode=active-backup,primary=eth1
Available optional parameters are listed in the Working with Kernel Modules chapter of the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide.
28.2. Enabling Remot e Access t o t he Inst allat ion Syst em
You may access either graphical or text interfaces for the installation system from any other system.
Access to a text mode display requires t el net , which is installed by default on Red Hat Enterprise
Linux systems. To remotely access the graphical display of an installation system, use client software
that supports the VNC (Virtual Network Computing) display protocol.
Installing a VNC Client on Red Hat Enterprise Linux
Red Hat Enterprise Linux includes the VNC client vncvi ewer. To obtain vncvi ewer, install the
tigervnc package.
The installation system supports two methods of establishing a VNC connection. You may start the
installation, and manually login to the graphical display with a VNC client on another system.
Alternatively, you may configure the installation system to automatically connect to a VNC client on
the network that is running in listening mode.
28.2.1. Enabling Remot e Access wit h VNC
To enable remote graphical access to the installation system, enter two options at the prompt:
linux vnc vncpassword=qwerty
The vnc option enables the VNC service. The vncpassword option sets a password for remote
access. The example shown above sets the password as qwerty.
VNC Passwords
The VNC password must be at least six characters long.
Specify the language, keyboard layout and network settings for the installation system with the
screens that follow. You may then access the graphical interface through a VNC client. The
installation system displays the correct connection setting for the VNC client:
Starting VNC...
The VNC server is now running.
Please connect to computer.mydomain.com:1 to begin the install...
407
Starting graphical installation...
Press <enter> for a shell
You may then login to the installation system with a VNC client. To run the vncvi ewer client on Red
Hat Enterprise Linux, choose Appl i cat i ons Accessori es VNC Vi ewer, or type the command
vncvi ewer in a terminal window. Enter the server and display number in the VNC Server dialog. For
the example above, the VNC Server is computer.mydomain.com:1.
28.2.2. Connect ing t he Inst allat ion Syst em t o a VNC List ener
To have the installation system automatically connect to a VNC client, first start the client in listening
mode. On Red Hat Enterprise Linux systems, use the -listen option to run vncvi ewer as a listener.
In a terminal window, enter the command:
vncviewer -listen
Firewall Reconfiguration Required
By default, vncvi ewer uses TCP port 5500 when in listening mode. To permit connections to
this port from other systems, choose Syst em Admi ni st rat i on Fi rewal l . Select Other
ports, and Add. Enter 5500 in the Port(s) field, and specify tcp as the Protocol.
Once the listening client is active, start the installation system and set the VNC options at the boot:
prompt. In addition to vnc and vncpassword options, use the vncconnect option to specify the
name or IP address of the system that has the listening client. To specify the TCP port for the listener,
add a colon and the port number to the name of the system.
For example, to connect to a VNC client on the system desktop.mydomain.com on the port 5500,
enter the following at the boot: prompt:
linux vnc vncpassword=qwerty vncconnect=desktop.mydomain.com:5500
28.2.3. Enabling Remot e Access wit h ssh
To enable remote access to a text mode installation, use the sshd=1 option at the boot: prompt:
linux sshd=1
You can then connect to the installation system with the ssh utility. The ssh command requires the
name or IP address of the installation system, and a password if you specified one (for example, in a
kickstart file).
28.2.4. Enabling Remot e Access wit h Telnet
To enable remote access to a text mode installation, use the telnet option at the boot: prompt:
linux text telnet
You may then connect to the installation system with the telnet utility. The telnet command
requires the name or IP address of the installation system:
408
telnet computer.mydomain.com
Telnet Access Requires No Password
To ensure the security of the installation process, only use the telnet option to install
systems on networks with restricted access.
28.3. Logging t o a Remot e Syst em During t he Inst allat ion
By default, the installation process sends log messages to the console as they are generated. You
may specify that these messages go to a remote system that runs a syslog service.
To configure remote logging, add the syslog option. Specify the IP address of the logging system,
and the UDP port number of the log service on that system. By default, syslog services that accept
remote messages listen on UDP port 514.
For example, to connect to a syslog service on the system 192.168.1.20, enter the following at the
boot: prompt:
linux syslog=192.168.1.20:514
28.3.1. Configuring a Log Server
Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses rsyslog to provide a syslog service. The default configuration of
rsyslog rejects messages from remote systems.
Only Enable Remote Syslog Access on Secured Networks
The rsyslog configuration detailed below does not make use of any of the security measures
available in rsyslog Crackers may slow or crash systems that permit access to the logging
service, by sending large quantities of false log messages. In addition, hostile users may
intercept or falsify messages sent to the logging service over the network.
To configure a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system to accept log messages from other systems on the
network, edit the file /etc/rsyslog.conf. You must use root privileges to edit the file
/etc/rsyslog.conf. Uncomment the following lines by removing the hash preceding them:
$ModLoad imudp.so
$UDPServerRun 514
Restart the rsyslog service to apply the change:
su -c '/sbin/service rsyslog restart'
Enter the root password when prompted.
409
Firewall Reconfiguration Required
By default, the syslog service listens on UDP port 514. To permit connections to this port from
other systems, choose Syst em Admi ni st rat i on Fi rewal l . Select Other ports, and
Add. Enter 514 in the Port(s) field, and specify udp as the Protocol.
28.4. Aut omat ing t he Inst allat ion wit h Kickst art
You can allow an installation to run unattended by using Kickstart. A Kickstart file specifies settings
for an installation. Once the installation system boots, it can read a Kickstart file and carry out the
installation process without any further input from a user.
Every Installation Produces a Kickstart File
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation process automatically writes a Kickstart file that
contains the settings for the installed system. This file is always saved as /root/anaconda-
ks.cfg. You may use this file to repeat the installation with identical settings, or modify
copies to specify settings for other systems.
Important Kickstart installations and firstboot
Fi rst boot does not run after a system is installed from a Kickstart file unless a desktop and
the X Window System were included in the installation and graphical login was enabled. Either
specify a user with the user option in the Kickstart file before installing additional systems
from it (refer to Section 32.4, Kickstart Options for details) or log into the installed system with
a virtual console as root and add users with the adduser command.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux includes a graphical application to create and modify Kickstart files by
selecting the options that you require. Use the package system-config-kickstart to install this
utility. To load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Kickstart editor, choose Appl i cat i ons Syst em
Tool s Ki ckst art .
Kickstart files list installation settings in plain text, with one option per line. This format lets you
modify your Kickstart files with any text editor, and write scripts or applications that generate custom
Kickstart files for your systems.
To automate the installation process with a Kickstart file, use the ks option to specify the name and
location of the file:
linux ks=location/kickstart-file.cfg
You may use Kickstart files that are held on either removable storage, a hard drive, or a network
server. Refer to Table 28.2, Kickstart sources for the supported Kickstart sources.
Tabl e 28. 2. Ki ckst art sources
Ki ckst art source Opt i on f ormat
DVD drive ks=cdrom:/directory/ks.cfg
410
Hard Drive ks=hd:/device/directory/ks.cfg
Other Device ks=file:/device/directory/ks.cfg
HTTP Server ks=http://server.mydomain.com/directory/ks.cfg
HTTPS Server ks=https://server.mydomain.com/directory/ks.cfg
FTP Server ks=ftp://server.mydomain.com/directory/ks.cfg
NFS Server ks=nfs:server.mydomain.com:/directory/ks.cfg
Ki ckst art source Opt i on f ormat
Important
You can use a device name such as /dev/sdb to identify a hard drive or a USB drive
containing a Kickstart file. However, there is no guarantee that the device identifier will remain
the same on multiple systems. Therefore, the recommended method for specifying a hard drive
or a USB drive in Kickstart installations is by UUID. For example:
ks=hd:UUID=ede47e6c-8b5f-49ad-9509-774fa7119281:ks.cfg
You can determine a device' s UUID by using the blkid command as root:
# blkid /dev/sdb1
/dev/sdb1: UUID="2c3a072a-3d0c-4f3a-a4a1-ab5f24f59266" TYPE="ext4"
To obtain a Kickstart file from a script or application on a Web server, specify the URL of the
application with the ks= option. If you add the option kssendmac, the request also sends HTTP
headers to the Web application. Your application can use these headers to identify the computer.
This line sends a request with headers to the application http://server.mydomain.com/kickstart.cgi:
linux ks=http://server.mydomain.com/kickstart.cgi kssendmac
28.5. Enhancing Hardware Support
By default, Red Hat Enterprise Linux attempts to automatically detect and configure support for all of
the components of your computer. Red Hat Enterprise Linux supports the majority of hardware in
common use with the software drivers that are included with the operating system. To support other
devices you may supply additional drivers during the installation process, or at a later time.
28.5.1. Overriding Aut omat ic Hardware Det ect ion
For some models of device automatic hardware configuration may fail, or cause instability. In these
cases, you may need to disable automatic configuration for that type of device, and take additional
steps to manually configure the device after the installation process is complete.
Check the Release Notes
Refer to the Release Notes for information on known issues with specific devices.
To override the automatic hardware detection, use one or more of the following options:
411
Tabl e 28. 3. Hardware Opt i ons
Compat i bi l i t y Opt i on
Disable all hardware detection noprobe
Disable graphics, keyboard, and mouse detection headless
Disable passing keyboard and mouse information to
stage 2 of the installation program
nopass
Use basic VESA driver for video xdriver=vesa
Disable shell access on virtual console 2 during
installation
noshell
Disable advanced configuration and power interface
(ACPI)
acpi=off
Disable machine check exception (MCE) CPU self-
diagnosis.
nomce
Disable non-uniform memory access on the AMD64
architecture
numa-off
Force kernel to detect a specific amount of memory, where
xxx is a value in megabytes
mem=xxxm
Enable DMA only for IDE and SATA drives libata.dma=1
Disable BIOS-assisted RAID nodmraid
Disable Firewire device detection nofirewire
Disable parallel port detection noparport
Disable PC Card (PCMCIA) device detection nopcmcia
Disable all probing of network hardware nonet
Additional Screen
The isa option causes the system to display an additional text screen at the beginning of the
installation process. Use this screen to configure the ISA devices on your computer.
Important
Other kernel boot options have no particular meaning for anaconda and do not affect the
installation process. However, if you use these options to boot the installation system,
anaconda will preserve them in the bootloader configuration.
28.6. Using t he Maint enance Boot Modes
28.6.1. Verifying Boot Media
You can test the integrity of an ISO-based installation source before using it to install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux. These sources include DVD, and ISO images stored on a hard drive or NFS server.
Verifying that the ISO images are intact before you attempt an installation helps to avoid problems
that are often encountered during installation.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux offers you two ways to test installation ISOs:
412
select OK at the prompt to test the media before installation when booting from the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux DVD
boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux with the option mediacheck option.
28.6.2. Boot ing Your Comput er wit h t he Rescue Mode
You may boot a command-line Linux system from either a rescue disc or an installation disc, without
installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux on the computer. This enables you to use the utilities and
functions of a running Linux system to modify or repair systems that are already installed on your
computer.
The rescue disc starts the rescue mode system by default. To load the rescue system with the
installation disc, choose Rescue i nst al l ed syst em from the boot menu.
Specify the language, keyboard layout and network settings for the rescue system with the screens
that follow. The final setup screen configures access to the existing system on your computer.
By default, rescue mode attaches an existing operating system to the rescue system under the
directory /mnt/sysimage/.
28.6.3. Upgrading Your Comput er
A previous boot option, upgrade, has been superceded by a stage in the installation process where
the installation program prompts you to upgrade or reinstall earlier versions of Red Hat Enterprise
Linux that it detects on your system.
However, the installation program may not correctly detect a previous version of Red Hat Enterprise
Linux if the contents of the /etc/redhat-release file have changed. The boot option
upgradeany relaxes the test that the installation program performs and allows you to upgrade a
Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation that the installation program has not correctly identified.
413
Chapter 29. Installing Without Media
Linux Required
This procedure assumes you are already using Red Hat Enterprise Linux or another relatively
modern Linux distribution, and the GRUB boot loader. It also assumes you are a somewhat
experienced Linux user.
This section discusses how to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux on your system without making any
additional physical media. Instead, you can use your existing GRUB boot loader to start the
29.1. Ret rieving Boot Files
To perform an installation without media or a PXE server, your system must have two files stored
locally, a kernel and an initial RAM disk.
Copy the vmlinuz and initrd.img files from a Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD (or DVD image) to
the /boot/ directory, renaming them to vmlinuz-install and initrd.img-install. You
must have root privileges to write files into the /boot/ directory.
29.2. Edit ing t he GRUB Configurat ion
The GRUB boot loader uses the configuration file /boot/grub/grub.conf. To configure GRUB
to boot from the new files, add a boot stanza to /boot/grub/grub.conf that refers to them.
A minimal boot stanza looks like the following listing:
title Installation
root (hd0,0)
kernel /vmlinuz-install
initrd /initrd.img-install
You may wish to add options to the end of the kernel line of the boot stanza. These options set
preliminary options in Anaconda which the user normally sets interactively. For a list of available
installer boot options, refer to Chapter 28, Boot Options.
The following options are generally useful for medialess installations:
ip=
repo=
lang=
keymap=
ksdevice= (if installation requires an interface other than eth0)
vnc and vncpassword= for a remote installation
When you are finished, change the default option in /boot/grub/grub.conf to point to the new
first stanza you added:
414
default 0
29.3. Boot ing t o Inst allat ion
Reboot the system. GRUB boots the installation kernel and RAM disk, including any options you set.
You may now refer to the appropriate chapter in this guide for the next step. If you chose to install
remotely using VNC, refer to Section 28.2, Enabling Remote Access to the Installation System for
assistance in connecting to the remote system.
Chapt er 29. Inst alling Wit hout Media
415
Chapter 30. Setting Up an Installation Server
The following steps must be performed to prepare for a network installation:
1. Configure the network (NFS, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS) server to export the installation tree.
2. Configure the files on the tftp server necessary for network booting.
3. Configure which hosts are allowed to boot from the network configuration.
4. Start the tftp service.
5. Configure DHCP.
6. Boot the client, and start the installation.
30.1. Set t ing Up t he Net work Server
First, configure an NFS, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server to export the entire installation tree for the
version and variant of Red Hat Enterprise Linux to be installed. Refer to Section 4.1, Preparing for a
Network Installation for detailed instructions.
30.2. Net work Boot Configurat ion
The next step is to copy the files necessary to start the installation to the tftp server so they can be
found when the client requests them. The tftp server is usually the same server as the network server
exporting the installation tree.
The PXE boot configuration procedure differs for BIOS and EFI. A separate yaboot configuration
procedure is provided for Power Systems servers.
30.2.1. Configuring PXE Boot for BIOS
1. If t f t p- server is not yet installed, run yum install tftp-server.
2. In the t f t p- server config file at /etc/xinet.d/tftp, change the disabled parameter from
yes to no.
3. Configure your DHCP server to use the boot images packaged with SYSLINUX. (If you do not
have a DHCP server installed, refer to the DHCP Servers chapter in the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux Deployment Guide.)
A sample configuration in /etc/dhcp/dhcpd.conf might look like:
option space pxelinux;
option pxelinux.magic code 208 = string;
option pxelinux.configfile code 209 = text;
option pxelinux.pathprefix code 210 = text;
option pxelinux.reboottime code 211 = unsigned integer 32;
subnet 10.0.0.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
option routers 10.0.0.254;
range 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.253;
class "pxeclients" {
416
match if substring (option vendor-class-
identifier, 0, 9) = "PXEClient";
next-server 10.0.0.1;

if option arch = 00:06 {
filename "pxelinux/bootia32.efi";
} else if option arch = 00:07 {
filename "pxelinux/bootx64.efi";
} else {
filename "pxelinux/pxelinux.0";
}
}
host example-ia32 {
hardware ethernet XX:YY:ZZ:11:22:33;
fixed-address 10.0.0.2;
}
}
4. You now need the pxelinux.0 file from the SYSLINUX package in the ISO image file. To
access it, run the following commands as root:
loop,ro
cp -pr /mount_point/Packages/syslinux-version-architecture.rpm
/publicly_available_directory
umount /mount_point
Extract the package:
rpm2cpio syslinux-version-architecture.rpm | cpio -dimv
5. Create a pxelinux directory within tftpboot and copy pxelinux.0 into it:
mkdir /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux
cp publicly_available_directory/usr/share/syslinux/pxelinux.0
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux
6. Create a pxelinux.cfg directory within pxelinux:
mkdir /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.cfg
7. Add a config file to this directory. The file should either be named default or named after the
IP address. For example, if your machine' s IP address is 10.0.0.1, the filename would be
0A000001.
A sample config file at /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.cfg/default might
look like:
default vesamenu.c32
prompt 1
timeout 600
display boot.msg
417
label linux
menu label Înstall or upgrade an existing system
menu default
kernel vmlinuz
append initrd=initrd.img
label vesa
menu label Install system with ^basic video driver
kernel vmlinuz
append initrd=initrd.img xdriver=vesa nomodeset
label rescue
menu label ^Rescue installed system
kernel vmlinuz
append initrd=initrd.img rescue
label local
menu label Boot from ^local drive
localboot 0xffff
label memtest86
menu label ^Memory test
kernel memtest
append -
For instructions on how to specify the installation source, refer to Section 7.1.3, Additional
Boot Options
8. Copy the splash image into your tftp root directory:
cp /boot/grub/splash.xpm.gz
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/splash.xpm.gz
9. Copy the boot images into your tftp root directory:
cp /path/to/x86_64/os/images/pxeboot/{vmlinuz,initrd.img}
10. Reboot the system, and select the network device as your boot device when prompted.
30.2.2. Configuring PXE Boot for EFI
yes to no.
3. Create a directory path within tftpboot for the EFI boot images, and then copy them from
your boot directory:
mkdir /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux
cp /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.efi
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/bootx64.efi
4. Configure your DHCP server to use the EFI boot images packaged with GRUB. (If you do not
418
option space PXE;
option PXE.mtftp-ip code 1 = ip-address;
option PXE.mtftp-cport code 2 = unsigned integer 16;
option PXE.mtftp-sport code 3 = unsigned integer 16;
option PXE.mtftp-tmout code 4 = unsigned integer 8;
option PXE.mtftp-delay code 5 = unsigned integer 8;
option arch code 93 = unsigned integer 16; # RFC4578
subnet 10.0.0.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
option routers 10.0.0.254;
range 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.253;
class "pxeclients" {
match if substring (option vendor-class-
identifier, 0, 9) = "PXEClient";
if option arch = 00:06 {
filename "pxelinux/bootia32.efi";
} else if option arch = 00:07 {
filename "pxelinux/bootx64.efi";
} else {
filename "pxelinux/pxelinux.0";
}
}
host example-ia32 {
hardware ethernet XX:YY:ZZ:11:22:33;
}
}
5. Create a pxelinux.cfg directory within pxelinux:
mkdir /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.cfg
6. Add a config file to this directory. The file should either be named efidefault or named
after the IP address. For example, if your machine' s IP address is 10.0.0.1, the filename would
be 0A000001.
A sample config file at /var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/pxelinux.cfg/efidefault
might look like:
default=0
timeout=1
splashimage=(nd)/splash.xpm.gz
hiddenmenu
title RHEL
root (nd)
kernel /rawhide-x86_64/vmlinuz
initrd /rawhide-x86_64/initrd.img
419
Boot Options
7. Copy the splash image into your tftp root directory:
cp /boot/grub/splash.xpm.gz
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux/splash.xpm.gz
8. Copy the boot images into your tftp root directory:
cp /path/to/x86_64/os/images/pxeboot/{vmlinuz,initrd.img}
30.2.3. Configuring for Power Syst ems Servers
yes to no.
3. Configure your DHCP server to use the boot images packaged with yaboot . (If you do not
host bonn {
filename "yaboot";
hardware ethernet 00:0e:91:51:6a:26;
}
4. You now need the yaboot binary file from the yaboot package in the ISO image file. To
access it, run the following commands as root:
mkdir /publicly_available_directory/yaboot-unpack
loop,ro
cp -pr /mount_point/Packages/yaboot-version.ppc.rpm
/publicly_available_directory/yaboot-unpack
Extract the package:
cd /publicly_available_directory/yaboot-unpack
rpm2cpio yaboot-version.ppc.rpm | cpio -dimv
5. Create a yaboot directory within tftpboot and copy the yaboot binary file into it:
mkdir /var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot
cp publicly_available_directory/yaboot-
unpack/usr/lib/yaboot/yaboot /var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot
420
6. Add a config file named yaboot.conf to this directory. A sample config file might look like:
init-message = "\nWelcome to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6
installer!\n\n"
timeout=60
default=rhel6
image=/rhel6/vmlinuz-RHEL6
label=linux
alias=rhel6
initrd=/rhel6/initrd-RHEL6.img

append="repo=http://10.32.5.1/mnt/archive/redhat/released/RHEL-
6/6.x/Server/ppc64/os/"
read-only
Boot Options
7. Copy the boot images from the extracted ISO into your tftp root directory:
cp /mount_point/images/ppc/ppc64/vmlinuz
/var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/rhel6/vmlinuz-RHEL6
cp /mount_point/images/ppc/ppc64/initrd.img
/var/lib/tftpboot/yaboot/rhel6/initrd-RHEL6.img
8. Clean up by removing the yaboot-unpack directory and unmounting the ISO:
rm -rf /publicly_available_directory/yaboot-unpack
umount /mount_point
30.3. St art ing t he tftp Server
On the DHCP server, verify that the tftp-server package is installed with the command rpm -q
tftp-server.
tftp is an xinetd-based service; start it with the following commands:
/sbin/chkconfig --level 345 xinetd on
/sbin/chkconfig --level 345 tftp on
These commands configure the tftp and xinetd services to start at boot time in runlevels 3, 4, and
5.
30.4. Adding a Cust om Boot Message
Optionally, modify /var/lib/tftpboot/linux-install/msgs/boot.msg to use a custom
boot message.
30.5. Performing t he Inst allat ion
421
For instructions on how to configure the network interface card to boot from the network, consult the
documentation for the NIC. It varies slightly per card.
After the system boots the installation program, refer to the Chapter 9, Installing Using Anaconda.
422
Chapter 31. Installing Through VNC
The Red Hat Enterprise Linux installer (anaconda) offers you two interactive modes of operation.
The original mode is a text-based interface. The newer mode uses GTK+ and runs in the X Window
environment. This chapter explains how you can use the graphical installation mode in
environments where the system lacks a proper display and input devices typically associated with a
workstation. This scenario is typical of systems in datacenters, which are often installed in a rack
environment and do not have a display, keyboard, or mouse. Additionally, a lot of these systems
even lack the ability to connect a graphical display. Given that enterprise hardware rarely needs that
ability at the physical system, this hardware configuration is acceptable.
Even in these environments, however, the graphical installer remains the recommended method of
installation. The text mode environment lacks a lot of capabilities found in the graphical mode. Many
users still feel that the text mode interface provides them with additional power or configuration ability
not found in the graphical version. The opposite is true. Much less development effort is put in to the
text-mode environment and specific things (for example, LVM configuration, partition layout, package
selection, and bootloader configuration) are deliberately left out of the text mode environment. The
reasons for this are:
Less screen real estate for creating user interfaces similar to those found in the graphical mode.
Difficult internationalization support.
Desire to maintain a single interactive installation code path.
Anaconda therefore includes a Vi rt ual Net work Comput i ng (VNC) mode that allows the
graphical mode of the installer to run locally, but display on a system connected to the network.
Installing in VNC mode provides you with the full range of installation options, even in situations
where the system lacks a display or input devices.
31.1. VNC Viewer
Performing a VNC installation requires a VNC viewer running on your workstation or other terminal
computer. Locations where you might want a VNC viewer installed:
Your workstation
Laptop on a datacenter crash cart
VNC is open source software licensed under the GNU General Public License.
VNC clients are available in the repositories of most Linux distributions. Use your package manager
to search for a client for your chosen distribution. For example, on Red Hat Enterprise Linux, install
the tigervnc package:
# yum install tigervnc
Once you have verified you have a VNC viewer available, it' s time to start the installation.
31.2. VNC Modes in Anaconda
Anaconda offers two modes for VNC installation. The mode you select will depend on the network
configuration in your environment.
31.2.1. Direct Mode
423
Direct mode VNC in anaconda is when the client initiates a connection to the VNC server running in
anaconda. Anaconda will tell you when to initiate this connection in the VNC viewer. Direct mode can
be activated by either of the following commands:
Specify vnc as a boot argument.
Specify the vnc command in the kickstart file used for installation.
When you activate VNC mode, anaconda will complete the first stage of the installer and then start
VNC to run the graphical installer. The installer will display a message on the console in the
following format:
Running anaconda VERSION, the PRODUCT system installer - please wait...
Anaconda will also tell you the IP address and display number to use in your VNC viewer. At this
point, you need to start the VNC viewer and connect to the target system to continue the installation.
The VNC viewer will present anaconda to you in graphical mode.
There are some disadvantages to direct mode, including:
Requires visual access to the system console to see the IP address and port to connect the VNC
viewer to.
Requires interactive access to the system console to complete the first stage of the installer.
If either of these disadvantages would prevent you from using direct mode VNC in anaconda, then
connect mode is probably more suited to your environment.
31.2.2. Connect Mode
Certain firewall configurations or instances where the target system is configured to obtain a dynamic
IP address may cause trouble with the direct VNC mode in anaconda. In addition, if you lack a
console on the target system to see the message that tells you the IP address to connect to, then you
will not be able to continue the installation.
The VNC connect mode changes how VNC is started. Rather than anaconda starting up and waiting
for you to connect, the VNC connect mode allows anaconda to automatically connect to your view.
You won' t need to know the IP address of the target system in this case.
To activate the VNC connect mode, pass the vncconnect boot parameter:
boot: linux vncconnect=HOST
Replace HOST with your VNC viewer' s IP address or DNS host name. Before starting the installation
process on the target system, start up your VNC viewer and have it wait for an incoming connection.
Start the installation and when your VNC viewer displays the graphical installer, you are ready to go.
31.3. Inst allat ion Using VNC
Now that you have installed a VNC viewer application and selected a VNC mode for use in
anaconda, you are ready to begin the installation.
31.3.1. Inst allat ion Example
424
The easiest way to perform an installation using VNC is to connect another computer directly to the
network port on the target system. The laptop on a datacenter crash cart usually fills this role. If you
are performing your installation this way, make sure you follow these steps:
1. Connect the laptop or other workstation to the target system using a crossover cable. If you
are using regular patch cables, make sure you connect the two systems using a small hub or
switch. Most recent Ethernet interfaces will automatically detect if they need to be crossover or
not, so it may be possible to connect the two systems directly using a regular patch cable.
2. Configure the VNC viewer system to use a RFC 1918 address with no gateway. This private
network connection will only be used for the purpose of installation. Configure the VNC viewer
system to be 192.168.100.1/24. If that address is in use, just pick something else in the RFC
1918 address space that is available to you.
3. Start the installation on the target system.
a. Booting the installation DVD.
If booting the installation DVD, make sure vnc is passed as a boot parameter. To add
the vnc parameter, you will need a console attached to the target system that allows
you to interact with the boot process. Enter the following at the prompt:
boot: linux vnc
b. Boot over the network.
If the target system is configured with a static IP address, add the vnc command to the
kickstart file. If the target system is using DHCP, add vncconnect=HOST to the boot
arguments for the target system. HOST is the IP address or DNS host name of the VNC
viewer system. Enter the following at the prompt:
boot: linux vncconnect=HOST
4. When prompted for the network configuration on the target system, assign it an available RFC
1918 address in the same network you used for the VNC viewer system. For example,
192.168.100.2/24.
Note
This IP address is only used during installation. You will have an opportunity to
configure the final network settings, if any, later in the installer.
5. Once the installer indicates it is starting anaconda, you will be instructed to connect to the
system using the VNC viewer. Connect to the viewer and follow the graphical installation
mode instructions found in the product documentation.
31.3.2. Kickst art Considerat ions
If your target system will be booting over the network, VNC is still available. Just add the vnc
command to the kickstart file for the system. You will be able to connect to the target system using
your VNC viewer and monitor the installation progress. The address to use is the one the system is
configured with via the kickstart file.
If you are using DHCP for the target system, the reverse vncconnect method may work better for
425
you. Rather than adding the vnc boot parameter to the kickstart file, add the vncconnect=HOST
parameter to the list of boot arguments for the target system. For HOST, put the IP address or DNS
host name of the VNC viewer system. See the next section for more details on using the vncconnect
mode.
31.3.3. Firewall Considerat ions
If you are performing the installation where the VNC viewer system is a workstation on a different
subnet from the target system, you may run in to network routing problems. VNC works fine so long
as your viewer system has a route to the target system and ports 5900 and 5901 are open. If your
environment has a firewall, make sure ports 5900 and 5901 are open between your workstation and
the target system.
In addition to passing the vnc boot parameter, you may also want to pass the vncpassword
parameter in these scenarios. While the password is sent in plain text over the network, it does
provide an extra step before a viewer can connect to a system. Once the viewer connects to the target
system over VNC, no other connections are permitted. These limitations are usually sufficient for
installation purposes.
Important
Be sure to use a temporary password for the vncpassword option. It should not be a
password you use on any systems, especially a real root password.
If you continue to have trouble, consider using the vncconnect parameter. In this mode of
operation, you start the viewer on your system first telling it to listen for an incoming connection.
Pass vncconnect=HOST at the boot prompt and the installer will attempt to connect to the specified
HOST (either a hostname or IP address).
31.4. References
TigerVNC: http://tigervnc.sourceforge.net/
RFC 1918 - Address Allocation for Private Networks: http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1918.txt
426
Chapter 32. Kickstart Installations
32.1. What are Kickst art Inst allat ions?
Many system administrators would prefer to use an automated installation method to install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux on their machines. To answer this need, Red Hat created the kickstart installation
method. Using kickstart, a system administrator can create a single file containing the answers to all
the questions that would normally be asked during a typical installation.
Kickstart files can be kept on a single server system and read by individual computers during the
installation. This installation method can support the use of a single kickstart file to install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux on multiple machines, making it ideal for network and system administrators.
Kickstart provides a way for users to automate a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.
All kickstart scriptlets and the log files of their execution are stored in the /tmp directory to assist with
debugging installation failures.
Note
Anaconda now configures network interfaces with Net workManager. Consequently,
kickstart users that referenced the network settings located in /tmp/netinfo in previous
versions of Red hat Enterprise Linux must now source the ifcfg files in
/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts.
32.2. How Do You Perform a Kickst art Inst allat ion?
Kickstart installations can be performed using a local DVD, a local hard drive, or via NFS, FTP,
HTTP, or HTTPS.
To use kickstart, you must:
1. Create a kickstart file.
2. Create a boot media with the kickstart file or make the kickstart file available on the network.
3. Make the installation tree available.
4. Start the kickstart installation.
This chapter explains these steps in detail.
32.3. Creat ing t he Kickst art File
The kickstart file is a simple text file, containing a list of items, each identified by a keyword. You can
create it by using the Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or application, or writing it from scratch. The Red Hat
Enterprise Linux installation program also creates a sample kickstart file based on the options that
you selected during installation. It is written to the file /root/anaconda-ks.cfg. You should be
able to edit it with any text editor or word processor that can save files as ASCII text.
First, be aware of the following issues when you are creating your kickstart file:
427
Sections must be specified in order. Items within the sections do not have to be in a specific order
unless otherwise specified. The section order is:
Command section Refer to Section 32.4, Kickstart Options for a list of kickstart options.
You must include the required options.
The %packages section Refer to Section 32.5, Package Selection for details.
The %pre and %post sections These two sections can be in any order and are not required.
Refer to Section 32.6, Pre-installation Script and Section 32.7, Post-installation Script for
details.
Note
Each section should end with %end to avoid logged warnings.
Items that are not required can be omitted.
Omitting any required item results in the installation program prompting the user for an answer to
the related item, just as the user would be prompted during a typical installation. Once the answer
is given, the installation continues unattended (unless it finds another missing item).
Lines starting with a pound (also known as hash) sign (#) are treated as comments and are
ignored.
For kickstart upgrades, the following items are required:
Language
Installation method
Device specification (if device is needed to perform the installation)
Keyboard setup
The upgrade keyword
Boot loader configuration
If any other items are specified for an upgrade, those items are ignored (note that this includes
package selection).
32.4. Kickst art Opt ions
The following options can be placed in a kickstart file. If you prefer to use a graphical interface for
creating your kickstart file, use the Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or application. Refer to Chapter 33,
Kickstart Configurator for details.
Note
If the option is followed by an equals mark (=), a value must be specified after it. In the example
commands, options in square brackets ([ ]) are optional arguments for the command.
428
Important
Device names are not guaranteed to be consistent across reboots, which can complicate
usage in kickstart scripts. When a kickstart option calls for a device node name (such as sda),
you can instead use any item from /dev/disk. For example, instead of:
part / --fstype=ext4 --onpart=sda1
You could use an entry similar to one of the following:
part / --fstype=ext4 --onpart=/dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:05.0-
scsi-0:0:0:0-part1
part / --fstype=ext4 --onpart=/dev/disk/by-id/ata-
ST3160815AS_6RA0C882-part1
This provides a consistent way to refer to disks that is more meaningful than just sda. This is
especially useful in large storage environments.
auth or authconfig ( requi red)
Sets up the authentication options for the system. It is similar to the authconfig
command, which can be run after the installation - see the authconfig(8) man page for
more information.
Passwords are shadowed by default.
--enablenis Turns on NIS support. By default, --enablenis uses whatever
domain it finds on the network. A domain should almost always be set by hand with the
--nisdomain= option.
--nisdomain= NIS domain name to use for NIS services.
--nisserver= Server to use for NIS services (broadcasts by default).
--useshadow or --enableshadow Use shadow passwords. This option is enabled
by default.
--enableldap Turns on LDAP support in /etc/nsswitch.conf, allowing your
system to retrieve information about users (for example, their UIDs, home directories,
and shells) from an LDAP directory. To use this option, you must install the nss-pam-
ldapd package. You must also specify a server and a base DN (distinguished name)
with --ldapserver= and --ldapbasedn=.
--enableldapauth Use LDAP as an authentication method. This enables the
pam_ldap module for authentication and changing passwords, using an LDAP
directory. To use this option, you must have the nss-pam-ldapd package installed.
You must also specify a server and a base DN with --ldapserver= and --
ldapbasedn=. If your environment does not use TLS (Transport Layer Security), use
the --disableldaptls switch to ensure that the resulting configuration file works.
--ldapserver= If you specified either --enableldap or --enableldapauth,
use this option to specify the name of the LDAP server to use. This option is set in the
/etc/ldap.conf file.
429
--ldapbasedn= If you specified either --enableldap or --enableldapauth,
use this option to specify the DN in your LDAP directory tree under which user
information is stored. This option is set in the /etc/ldap.conf file.
--enableldaptls Use TLS (Transport Layer Security) lookups. This option allows
LDAP to send encrypted usernames and passwords to an LDAP server before
authentication.
--disableldaptls Do not use TLS (Transport Layer Security) lookups in an
environment that uses LDAP for authentication.
--enablekrb5 Use Kerberos 5 for authenticating users. Kerberos itself does not
know about home directories, UIDs, or shells. If you enable Kerberos, you must make
users' accounts known to this workstation by enabling LDAP, NIS, or Hesiod or by
using the /usr/sbin/useradd command. If you use this option, you must have the
pam_krb5 package installed.
--krb5realm= The Kerberos 5 realm to which your workstation belongs.
--krb5kdc= The KDC (or KDCs) that serve requests for the realm. If you have
multiple KDCs in your realm, separate their names with commas (,).
--krb5adminserver= The KDC in your realm that is also running kadmind. This
server handles password changing and other administrative requests. This server must
be run on the master KDC if you have more than one KDC.
--enablehesiod Enable Hesiod support for looking up user home directories,
UIDs, and shells. More information on setting up and using Hesiod on your network is in
/usr/share/doc/glibc-2.x.x/README.hesiod, which is included in the glibc
package. Hesiod is an extension of DNS that uses DNS records to store information
about users, groups, and various other items.
--hesiodlhs and --hesiodrhs The Hesiod LHS (left-hand side) and RHS
(right-hand side) values, set in /etc/hesiod.conf. The Hesiod library uses these
values to search DNS for a name, similar to the way that LDAP uses a base DN.
To look up user information for the username jim, the Hesiod library looks up
jim.passwd<LHS><RHS>, which should resolve to a TXT record that contains a string
identical to an entry for that user in the passwd file: jim:*:501:501:Jungle
Jim:/home/jim:/bin/bash. To look up groups, the Hesiod library looks up
jim.group<LHS><RHS> instead.
To look up users and groups by number, make 501.uid a CNAME for jim.passwd,
and 501.gid a CNAME for jim.group. Note that the library does not place a period
(.) in front of the LHS and RHS values when performing a search. Therefore, if the LHS
and RHS values need to have a period placed in front of them, you must include the
period in the values you set for --hesiodlhs and --hesiodrhs.
--enablesmbauth Enables authentication of users against an SMB server (typically
a Samba or Windows server). SMB authentication support does not know about home
directories, UIDs, or shells. If you enable SMB, you must make users' accounts known to
the workstation by enabling LDAP, NIS, or Hesiod or by using the
/usr/sbin/useradd command.
--smbservers= The name of the servers to use for SMB authentication. To specify
more than one server, separate the names with commas (,).
--smbworkgroup= The name of the workgroup for the SMB servers.
430
--enablecache Enables the nscd service. The nscd service caches information
about users, groups, and various other types of information. Caching is especially
helpful if you choose to distribute information about users and groups over your
network using NIS, LDAP, or Hesiod.
--passalgo= specify sha256 to set up the SHA-256 hashing algorithm or sha512
to set up the SHA-512 hashing algorithm.
autopart ( opt i onal )
Automatically creates partitions a root (/) partition (1 GB or bigger), a swap partition,
and an appropriate boot partition for the architecture.
Note
Note that the autopart option cannot be used together with the part/partition,
raid, logvol, or volgroup options in the same kickstart file.
--encrypted Should all devices with support be encrypted by default? This is
equivalent to checking the Encrypt checkbox on the initial partitioning screen.
--cipher= Specifies which type of encryption will be used if the anaconda default
aes-xts-plain64 is not satisfactory. You must use this option together with the --
encrypted option; by itself it has no effect. Available types of encryption are listed in
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Security Guide, but Red Hat strongly recommends using
either aes-xts-plain64 or aes-cbc-essiv:sha256.
--passphrase= Provide a default system-wide passphrase for all encrypted
devices.
--escrowcert=URL_of_X.509_certificate Store data encryption keys of all
encrypted volumes as files in /root, encrypted using the X.509 certificate from the URL
specified with URL_of_X.509_certificate. The keys are stored as a separate file for each
encrypted volume. This option is only meaningful if --encrypted is specified.
--backuppassphrase= Add a randomly-generated passphrase to each encrypted
volume. Store these passphrases in separate files in /root, encrypted using the X.509
certificate specified with --escrowcert. This option is only meaningful if --
escrowcert is specified.
autostep ( opt i onal )
Similar to interactive except it goes to the next screen for you. It is used mostly for
debugging and should not be used when deploying a system because it may disrupt
package installation.
--autoscreenshot Take a screenshot at every step during installation and copy
the images over to /root/anaconda-screenshots after installation is complete. This
is most useful for documentation.
bootloader ( requi red)
Specifies how the boot loader should be installed. This option is required for both
installations and upgrades.
431
Important
If you select text mode for a kickstart installation, make sure that you specify choices
for the partitioning, bootloader, and package selection options. These steps are
automated in text mode, and anaconda cannot prompt you for missing information.
If you do not provide choices for these options, anaconda will stop the installation
process.
Important
It is highly recommended to set up a boot loader password on every machine. An
unprotected boot loader can allow a potential attacker to modify the system' s boot
options and gain access to the system. See the chapter titled Workstation Security in
the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Security Guide for more information on boot loader
passwords and password security in general.
--append= Specifies kernel parameters. To specify multiple parameters, separate
them with spaces. For example:
bootloader --location=mbr --append="hdd=ide-scsi ide=nodma"
--driveorder Specify which drive is first in the BIOS boot order. For example:
bootloader --driveorder=sda,hda
--location= Specifies where the boot record is written. Valid values are the
following: mbr (the default), partition (installs the boot loader on the first sector of the
partition containing the kernel necessary for UEFI), or none (do not install the boot
loader).
Important
64-bit AMD and Intel systems with UEFI firmware require the boot loader to be
installed in an EFI system partition on a disk labeled with a GUID Partition Table
(GPT). Using a disk with a Master Boot Record (MBR) label requires that the disk
be relabeled using the clearpart and zerombr commands. Relabeling a disk
will render all data on that disk inaccessible and it will require creating a new
partition layout.
--password= If using GRUB, sets the GRUB boot loader password to the one
specified with this option. This should be used to restrict access to the GRUB shell,
where arbitrary kernel options can be passed.
--iscrypted If using GRUB, should be included if the password is already
encrypted. The encryption method is detected automatically based on the password.
--upgrade Upgrade the existing boot loader configuration, preserving the old
entries. This option is only available for upgrades.
clearpart ( opt i onal )
432
Removes partitions from the system, prior to creation of new partitions. By default, no
partitions are removed.
Note
If the clearpart command is used, then the --onpart command cannot be used
on a logical partition.
--all Erases all partitions from the system.
--drives= Specifies which drives to clear partitions from. For example, the following
clears all the partitions on the first two drives on the primary IDE controller:
clearpart --drives=hda,hdb --all
To clear a multipath device, use the format disk/by-id/scsi-WWID, where WWID is
the world-wide identifier for the device. For example, to clear a disk with WWID
58095BEC5510947BE8C0360F604351918, use:
clearpart --drives=disk/by-id/scsi-
58095BEC5510947BE8C0360F604351918
This format is preferable for all multipath devices, but if errors arise, multipath devices
that do not use logical volume management (LVM) can also be cleared using the format
disk/by-id/dm-uuid-mpath-WWID, where WWID is the world-wide identifier for the
device. For example, to clear a disk with WWID
2416CD96995134CA5D787F00A5AA11017, use:
clearpart --drives=disk/by-id/dm-uuid-mpath-
2416CD96995134CA5D787F00A5AA11017
Warning
Never specify multipath devices by device names like mpatha. Device names like
mpatha are not specific to a particular disk. The disk named /dev/mpatha
during installation might not be the one that you expect it to be. Therefore, the
clearpart command could target the wrong disk.
--linux Erases all Linux partitions.
--none (default) Do not remove any partitions.
Note
Using the clearpart --all command in a Kickstart file to remove all existing
partitions during the installation will cause Anaconda to pause and prompt you for
a confirmation. If you need to perform the installation automatically with no
interaction, add the zerombr command to your Kickstart file.
433
Important
The --initlabel option has been deprecated. To initialize disks with invalid
partition tables and clear their contents, use the zerombr command.
cmdline ( opt i onal )
Perform the installation in a completely non-interactive command line mode. Any prompts
for interaction halts the install. This mode is useful on IBM System z systems with the 3270
terminal under z/VM and operating system messages applet on LPAR. The recommended
use is in conjunction with RUNKS=1 and ks=. Refer to Section 26.6, Parameters for
Kickstart Installations .
device ( opt i onal )
On most PCI systems, the installation program autoprobes for Ethernet and SCSI cards
properly. On older systems and some PCI systems, however, kickstart needs a hint to find
the proper devices. The device command, which tells the installation program to install
extra modules, is in this format:
device <moduleName> --opts=<options>
<moduleName> Replace with the name of the kernel module which should be installed.
--opts= Options to pass to the kernel module. For example:
--opts="aic152x=0x340 io=11"
driverdisk ( opt i onal )
Driver disks can be used during kickstart installations. You must copy the driver disks' s
contents to the root directory of a partition on the system' s hard drive. Then you must use
the driverdisk command to tell the installation program where to look for the driver disk.
driverdisk <partition> --source=<url> --biospart=<biospart> [--
type=<fstype>]
Alternatively, a network location can be specified for the driver disk:
driverdisk --source=ftp://path/to/dd.img
driverdisk --source=http://path/to/dd.img
driverdisk --source=nfs:host:/path/to/img
<partition> Partition containing the driver disk.
<url> URL for the driver disk. NFS locations can be given in the form
nfs:host:/path/to/img.
<biospart> BIOS partition containing the driver disk (for example, 82p2).
--type= File system type (for example, vfat or ext2).
fcoe ( opt i onal )
Specify which FCoE devices should be activated automatically in addition to those
discovered by Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD).
434
discovered by Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD).
--nic= (mandatory) The name of the device to be activated.
--dcb= Establish Data Center Bridging (DCB) settings.
--autovlan Discover VLANs automatically.
firewall ( opt i onal )
This option corresponds to the Firewall Configuration screen in the installation
program:
firewall --enabled|--disabled [--trust=] <device> <incoming> [--
port=]
--enabled or --enable Reject incoming connections that are not in response to
outbound requests, such as DNS replies or DHCP requests. If access to services
running on this machine is needed, you can choose to allow specific services through
the firewall.
--disabled or --disable Do not configure any iptables rules.
--trust= Listing a device here, such as eth0, allows all traffic coming to and from
that device to go through the firewall. To list more than one device, use --trust eth0
--trust eth1. Do NOT use a comma-separated format such as --trust eth0,
eth1.
<incoming> Replace with one or more of the following to allow the specified services
through the firewall.
--ssh
--telnet
--smtp
--http
--ftp
--port= You can specify that ports be allowed through the firewall using the
port:protocol format. For example, to allow IMAP access through your firewall, specify
imap:tcp. Numeric ports can also be specified explicitly; for example, to allow UDP
packets on port 1234 through, specify 1234:udp. To specify multiple ports, separate
them by commas.
firstboot ( opt i onal )
Determine whether the f i rst boot starts the first time the system is booted. If enabled, the
firstboot package must be installed. If not specified, this option is disabled by default.
--enable or --enabled The Set up Agent is started the first time the system boots.
--disable or --disabled The Set up Agent is not started the first time the
system boots.
--reconfig Enable the Set up Agent to start at boot time in reconfiguration mode.
This mode enables the language, mouse, keyboard, root password, security level, and
time zone configuration options in addition to the default ones.
435
graphical ( opt i onal )
Perform the kickstart installation in graphical mode. This is the default.
group ( opt i onal )
Creates a new user group on the system. If a group with the given name or GID already
exists, this command will fail. In addition, the user command can be used to create a new
group for the newly created user.
group --name=name [--gid=gid]
--name= - Provides the name of the group.
--gid= - The group' s GID. If not provided, defaults to the next available non-system
GID.
halt ( opt i onal )
Halt the system after the installation has successfully completed. This is similar to a manual
installation, where anaconda displays a message and waits for the user to press a key
before rebooting. During a kickstart installation, if no completion method is specified, this
option is used as the default.
The halt option is equivalent to the shutdown -h command.
For other completion methods, refer to the poweroff, reboot, and shutdown kickstart
options.
ignoredisk ( opt i onal )
Causes the installer to ignore the specified disks. This is useful if you use autopartition and
want to be sure that some disks are ignored. For example, without ignoredisk,
attempting to deploy on a SAN-cluster the kickstart would fail, as the installer detects
passive paths to the SAN that return no partition table.
The syntax is:
ignoredisk --drives=drive1,drive2,...
where driveN is one of sda, sdb,..., hda,... etc.
To ignore a multipath device that does not use logical volume management (LVM), use the
format disk/by-id/dm-uuid-mpath-WWID, where WWID is the world-wide identifier for the
device. For example, to ignore a disk with WWID
2416CD96995134CA5D787F00A5AA11017, use:
ignoredisk --drives=disk/by-id/dm-uuid-mpath-
2416CD96995134CA5D787F00A5AA11017
Multipath devices that use LVM are not assembled until after anaconda has parsed the
kickstart file. Therefore, you cannot specify these devices in the format dm-uuid-mpath.
Instead, to ignore a multipath device that uses LVM, use the format disk/by-
id/scsi-WWID, where WWID is the world-wide identifier for the device. For example, to
ignore a disk with WWID 58095BEC5510947BE8C0360F604351918, use:
436
ignoredisk --drives=disk/by-id/scsi-
58095BEC5510947BE8C0360F604351918
Warning
mpatha are not specific to a particular disk. The disk named /dev/mpatha during
installation might not be the one that you expect it to be. Therefore, the clearpart
command could target the wrong disk.
--only-use specifies a list of disks for the installer to use. All other disks are
ignored. For example, to use disk sda during installation and ignore all other disks:
ignoredisk --only-use=sda
To include a multipath device that does not use LVM:
ignoredisk --only-use=disk/by-id/dm-uuid-mpath-
2416CD96995134CA5D787F00A5AA11017
To include a multipath device that uses LVM:
ignoredisk --only-use=disk/by-id/scsi-
58095BEC5510947BE8C0360F604351918
install ( opt i onal )
Tells the system to install a fresh system rather than upgrade an existing system. This is the
default mode. For installation, you must specify the type of installation from cdrom,
harddrive, nfs, or url (for FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS installations). The install command
and the installation method command must be on separate lines.
cdrom Install from the first optical drive on the system.
harddrive Install from a Red Hat installation tree on a local drive, which must be
either vfat or ext2.
--biospart=
BIOS partition to install from (such as 82).
--partition=
Partition to install from (such as sdb2).
--dir=
Directory containing the variant directory of the installation tree.
For example:
harddrive --partition=hdb2 --dir=/tmp/install-tree
nfs Install from the NFS server specified.
437
--server=
Server from which to install (hostname or IP).
--dir=
Directory containing the variant directory of the installation tree.
--opts=
Mount options to use for mounting the NFS export. (optional)
For example:
nfs --server=nfsserver.example.com --dir=/tmp/install-tree
url Install from an installation tree on a remote server via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS.
For example:
url --url http://<server>/<dir>
or:
url --url ftp://<username>:<password>@<server>/<dir>
interactive ( opt i onal )
Perform an interactive installation, but use the information in the kickstart file to provide
defaults. During the installation, anaconda still prompts you at every stage. Either accept
the values from the kickstart file by clicking Next or change the values and click Next to
continue. Refer also to the autostep command.
iscsi ( opt i onal )
iscsi --ipaddr=<ipaddr> [options]
Specifies additional iSCSI storage to be attached during installation. If you use the iscsi
parameter, you must also assign a name to the iSCSI node, using the iscsiname
parameter earlier in the kickstart file.
We recommend that wherever possible you configure iSCSI storage in the system BIOS or
firmware (iBFT for Intel systems) rather than use the iscsi parameter. Anaconda
automatically detects and uses disks configured in BIOS or firmware and no special
configuration is necessary in the kickstart file.
If you must use the iscsi parameter, ensure that networking is activated at the beginning
of the installation, and that the iscsi parameter appears in the kickstart file before you
refer to iSCSI disks with parameters such as clearpart or ignoredisk.
--port= (mandatory) the port number (typically, --port=3260)
--user= the username required to authenticate with the target
--password= the password that corresponds with the username specified for the
target
438
--reverse-user= the username required to authenticate with the initiator from a
target that uses reverse CHAP authentication
--reverse-password= the password that corresponds with the username specified
for the initiator
iscsiname ( opt i onal )
Assigns a name to an iSCSI node specified by the iscsi parameter. If you use the iscsi
parameter in your kickstart file, you must specify iscsiname earlier in the kickstart file.
keyboard ( requi red)
Sets the default keyboard type for the system. The available keyboard types are:
be-latin1 Belgian
bg_bds-utf8 Bulgarian
bg_pho-utf8 Bulgarian (Phonetic)
br-abnt2 Brazilian (ABNT2)
cf French Canadian
croat Croatian
cz-us-qwertz Czech
cz-lat2 Czech (qwerty)
de German
de-latin1 German (latin1)
de-latin1-nodeadkeys German (latin1 without dead keys)
dvorak Dvorak
dk Danish
dk-latin1 Danish (latin1)
es Spanish
et Estonian
fi Finnish
fi-latin1 Finnish (latin1)
fr French
fr-latin9 French (latin9)
fr-pc French (pc)
fr_CH Swiss French
fr_CH-latin1 Swiss French (latin1)
439
gr Greek
hu Hungarian
hu101 Hungarian (101 key)
is-latin1 Icelandic
it Italian
it-ibm Italian (IBM)
it2 Italian (it2)
jp106 Japanese
ko Korean
la-latin1 Latin American
mk-utf Macedonian
nl Dutch
no Norwegian
pl2 Polish
pt-latin1 Portuguese
ro Romanian
ru Russian
sr-cy Serbian
sr-latin Serbian (latin)
sv-latin1 Swedish
sg Swiss German
sg-latin1 Swiss German (latin1)
sk-qwerty Slovak (qwerty)
slovene Slovenian
trq Turkish
uk United Kingdom
ua-utf Ukrainian
us-acentos U.S. International
us U.S. English
The file /usr/lib/python2.6/site-
packages/system_config_keyboard/keyboard_models.py on 32-bit systems or
/usr/lib64/python2.6/site-
packages/system_config_keyboard/keyboard_models.py on 64-bit systems also
contains this list and is part of the system-config-keyboard package.
440
lang ( requi red)
Sets the language to use during installation and the default language to use on the
installed system. For example, to set the language to English, the kickstart file should
contain the following line:
lang en_US
The file /usr/share/system-config-language/locale-list provides a list of the
valid language codes in the first column of each line and is part of the system-config-
language package.
Certain languages (for example, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, and Indic languages) are not
supported during text-mode installation. If you specify one of these languages with the
lang command, the installation process continues in English, but the installed system
uses your selection as its default language.
langsupport ( deprecat ed)
The langsupport keyword is deprecated and its use will cause an error message to be
printed to the screen and installation to halt. Instead of using the langsupport keyword, you
should now list the support package groups for all languages you want supported in the
%packages section of your kickstart file. For instance, adding support for French means
you should add the following to %packages:
@french-support
logging ( opt i onal )
This command controls the error logging of anaconda during installation. It has no effect
on the installed system.
logging [--host=<host>] [--port=<port>] [--
level=debug|info|error|critical]
--host= Send logging information to the given remote host, which must be running
a syslogd process configured to accept remote logging.
--port= If the remote syslogd process uses a port other than the default, it may be
specified with this option.
--level= One of debug, info, warning, error, or critical.
Specify the minimum level of messages that appear on tty3. All messages will still be sent
to the log file regardless of this level, however.
logvol ( opt i onal )
Create a logical volume for Logical Volume Management (LVM) with the syntax:
logvol <mntpoint> --vgname=<name> --size=<size> --name=<name>
[options]
441
Important
Do not use the dash ("-") character in logical volume or volume group names when
installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux using Kickstart. If you do, the installation will
finish normally, but the character will be removed from all newly created volume and
volume group names. For example, if you create a volume group named volgrp-
01, its name will be changed to volgrp01.
This limitation only applies to new installations. If you are upgrading or reinstalling
an existing installation and use the --noformat option described below, dashes
used in volume and volume group names will be preserved.
The <mntpoint> is where the partition is mounted and must be of one of the following
forms:
/<path>
For example, /, /usr, /home
swap
The partition is used as swap space.
To determine the size of the swap partition automatically, use the --recommended
option:
swap --recommended
The size assigned will be effective but not precisely calibrated for your system.
To determine the size of the swap partition automatically but also allow extra space
for your system to hibernate, use the --hibernation option:
swap --hibernation
The size assigned will be equivalent to the swap space assigned by --
recommended plus the amount of RAM on your system.
For the swap sizes assigned by these commands, refer to Section 9.15.5,
Recommended Partitioning Scheme for x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Architecture and
Section 16.17.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme for IBM Power Systems
servers.
442
Important
Swap space recommendations were updated in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3.
Previously, systems with large amounts of RAM were assigned huge swap
spaces. This delayed the Out-of-Memory Killer (oom_ki l l ) in addressing
critical memory shortages, even if a process was malfunctioning.
Consequently, if you are using an earlier version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux
6, swap --recommended will generate larger swap spaces than those
described in the Recommended Partitioning Scheme, even on systems with
large amounts of RAM. This may negate the need to allow extra space for
hibernation.
However, these updated swap space values are nonetheless recommended for
earlier versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 and can be set manually using
the swap --size= option.
The options are as follows:
--noformat Use an existing logical volume and do not format it.
--useexisting Use an existing logical volume and reformat it.
--fstype= Sets the file system type for the logical volume. Valid values are xfs,
ext2, ext3, ext4, swap, vfat, hfs, and efi.
--fsoptions= Specifies a free form string of options to be used when mounting the
filesystem. This string will be copied into the /etc/fstab file of the installed system and
should be enclosed in quotes.
--fsprofile Specifies a usage type to be passed to the program that makes a
filesystem on this partition. A usage type defines a variety of tuning parameters to be
used when making a filesystem. For this option to work, the filesystem must support the
concept of usage types and there must be a configuration file that lists valid types. For
ext2, ext3, and ext4, this configuration file is /etc/mke2fs.conf.
--grow= Tells the logical volume to grow to fill available space (if any), or up to the
maximum size setting.
--maxsize= The maximum size in megabytes when the logical volume is set to grow.
Specify an integer value here such as 500 (do not include the unit).
--recommended= Determine the size of the logical volume automatically.
--percent= Specify the amount by which to grow the logical volume, as a
percentage of the free space in the volume group after any statically-sized logical
volumes are taken into account. This option must be used in conjunction with the --
size and --grow options for logvol.
--encrypted Specifies that this logical volume should be encrypted, using the
passphrase provided in the --passphrase option. If you do not specify a passphrase,
anaconda uses the default, system-wide passphrase set with the autopart --
passphrase command, or stops the installation and prompts you to provide a
passphrase if no default is set.
443
--passphrase= Specifies the passphrase to use when encrypting this logical
volume. You must use this option together with the --encrypted option; by itself it has
no effect.
encrypted volumes as files in /root, encrypted using the X.509 certificate from the URL
encrypted volume. This option is only meaningful if --encrypted is specified.
volume. Store these passphrases in separate files in /root, encrypted using the X.509
Create the partition first, create the logical volume group, and then create the logical
volume. For example:
part pv.01 --size 3000
volgroup myvg pv.01
logvol / --vgname=myvg --size=2000 --name=rootvol
Create the partition first, create the logical volume group, and then create the logical volume
to occupy 90% of the remaining space in the volume group. For example:
part pv.01 --size 1 --grow
volgroup myvg pv.01
logvol / --vgname=myvg --size=1 --name=rootvol --grow --
percent=90
mediacheck ( opt i onal )
If given, this will force anaconda to run mediacheck on the installation media. This
command requires that installs be attended, so it is disabled by default.
monitor ( opt i onal )
If the monitor command is not given, anaconda will use X to automatically detect your
monitor settings. Please try this before manually configuring your monitor.
monitor --monitor=<monitorname>|--hsync|vsync=<frequency> [--
noprobe]
--hsync= Specifies the horizontal sync frequency of the monitor.
--monitor= Use specified monitor; monitor name should be from the list of monitors
in /usr/share/hwdata/MonitorsDB from the hwdata package. The list of monitors can
also be found on the X Configuration screen of the Kickstart Configurator. This is
ignored if --hsync or --vsync is provided. If no monitor information is provided, the
installation program tries to probe for it automatically.
--noprobe= Do not try to probe the monitor.
444
--vsync= Specifies the vertical sync frequency of the monitor.
mouse ( deprecat ed)
The mouse keyword is deprecated.
network ( opt i onal )
Configures network information for the target system and activates network devices in the
installer environment. The device specified in the first network command is activated
automatically if network access is required during installation, for example, during a
network installation or installation over VNC. From Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1 onwards,
you can also explicitly require device to activate in the installer environment with the --
activate option.
Important
If you need to manually specify network settings during an otherwise-automated
kickstart installation, do not use network. Instead, boot the system with the
asknetwork option (refer to Section 32.10, Starting a Kickstart Installation ), which
will prompt anaconda to ask you for network settings rather than use the default
settings. anaconda will ask this before fetching the kickstart file.
Once the network connection is established, you can only reconfigure network
settings with those specified in your kickstart file.
Note
You will only be prompted for information about your network:
before fetching the kickstart file if you are using the asknetwork boot option
when the network is first accessed once the kickstart file has been fetched, if the
network was not used to fetch it and you have provided no kickstart network
commands
--activate activate this device in the installer environment.
If you use the --activate option on a device that has already been activated (for
example, an interface you configured with boot options so that the system could retrieve
the kickstart file) the device is reactivated to use the details specified in the kickstart file.
Use the --nodefroute option to prevent the device from using the default route.
The activate option is new in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1.
--bootproto= One of dhcp, bootp, ibft, or static.
The ibft option is new in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1.
The bootproto option defaults to dhcp. bootp and dhcp are treated the same.
445
The DHCP method uses a DHCP server system to obtain its networking configuration.
As you might guess, the BOOTP method is similar, requiring a BOOTP server to supply
the networking configuration. To direct a system to use DHCP:
network --bootproto=dhcp
To direct a machine to use BOOTP to obtain its networking configuration, use the
following line in the kickstart file:
network --bootproto=bootp
To direct a machine to use the configuration specified in iBFT, use:
network --bootproto=ibft
The static method requires that you specify the IP address, netmask, gateway, and
nameserver in the kickstart file. As the name implies, this information is static and is used
during and after the installation.
All static networking configuration information must be specified on one line; you cannot
wrap lines using a backslash as you can on a command line. A line that specifies static
networking in a kickstart file is therefore more complex than lines that specify DHCP,
BOOTP, or iBFT. Note that the examples on this page have line breaks in them for
presentation reasons; they would not work in an actual kickstart file.
network --bootproto=static --ip=10.0.2.15 --
netmask=255.255.255.0
--gateway=10.0.2.254 --nameserver=10.0.2.1
You can also configure multiple nameservers here. To do so, specify them as a comma-
delimited list in the command line.
network --bootproto=static --ip=10.0.2.15 --
netmask=255.255.255.0
--gateway=10.0.2.254 --nameserver 192.168.2.1,192.168.3.1
--device= specifies the device to be configured (and eventually activated) with the
network command. For the first network command, --device= defaults (in order of
preference) to one of:
the device specified by the ksdevice boot option
the device activated automatically to fetch the kickstart file
the device selected in the Networking Devices dialog
The behavior of any subsequent network command is unspecified if its --device
option is missing. Take care to specify a --device option for any network command
beyond the first.
You can specify a device in one of five ways:
the device name of the interface, for example, eth0
the MAC address of the interface, for example, 00:12:34:56:78:9a
446
the keyword link, which specifies the first interface with its link in the up state
the keyword bootif, which uses the MAC address that pxel i nux set in the BOOTIF
variable. Set IPAPPEND 2 in your pxelinux.cfg file to have pxel i nux set the
BOOTIF variable.
the keyword ibft, which uses the MAC address of the interface specified by iBFT
network --bootproto=dhcp --device=eth0
--ip= IP address of the device.
--ipv6= IPv6 address of the device. Use auto for automatic configuration, or dhcp
for DHCPv6 only configuration (no router advertisements).
--gateway= Default gateway as a single IPv4 address.
--ipv6gateway= Default gateway as a single IPv6 address.
--nameserver= Primary nameserver, as an IP address. Multiple nameservers must
each be separated by a comma.
--nodefroute Prevents the interface being set as the default route. Use this option
when you activate additional devices with the --activate= option, for example, a NIC
on a separate subnet for an iSCSI target.
The nodefroute option is new in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.1.
--nodns Do not configure any DNS server.
--netmask= Network mask of the device.
--hostname= Hostname for the installed system.
--ethtool= Specifies additional low-level settings for the network device which will
be passed to the ethtool program.
--onboot= Whether or not to enable the device at boot time.
--dhcpclass= The DHCP class.
--mtu= The MTU of the device.
--noipv4 Disable IPv4 on this device.
--noipv6 Disable IPv6 on this device.
--vlanid= Specifies virtual LAN ID number (802.1q tag).
--bondslaves= Specifies which network interfaces will be bonded as a comma-
separated list.
--bondopts= a list of optional parameters for a bonded interface, which is specified
using the --bondslaves= and --device= options. Options in this list must be
separated by commas (",") or semicolons (";"). If an option itself contains a comma,
use a semicolon to separate the options. For example:
network --bondopts=mode=active-backup,balance-rr;primary=eth1
447
Available optional parameters are listed in the Working with Kernel Modules chapter of the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide.
Important
The --bondopts=mode= parameter only supports full mode names such as
balance-rr or broadcast, not their numerical representations such as 0 or 3.
part or partition ( requi red f or i nst al l s, i gnored f or upgrades)
Creates a partition on the system.
If more than one Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation exists on the system on different
partitions, the installation program prompts the user and asks which installation to
upgrade.
Warning
All partitions created are formatted as part of the installation process unless --
noformat and --onpart are used.
Important
process.
For a detailed example of part in action, refer to Section 32.4.1, Advanced Partitioning
Example .
part|partition <mntpoint> --name=<name> --device=<device> --
rule=<rule> [options]
<mntpoint> Where the partition is mounted. The value must be of one of the following
forms:
/<path>
For example, /, /usr, /home
swap
The partition is used as swap space.
To determine the size of the swap partition automatically, use the --recommended
option:
swap --recommended
448
The size assigned will be effective but not precisely calibrated for your system.
To determine the size of the swap partition automatically but also allow extra space
for your system to hibernate, use the --hibernation option:
swap --hibernation
The size assigned will be equivalent to the swap space assigned by --
recommended plus the amount of RAM on your system.
For the swap sizes assigned by these commands, refer to Section 9.15.5,
Recommended Partitioning Scheme for x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Architecture and
Section 16.17.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme for IBM Power Systems
servers.
Important
Swap space recommendations were updated in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.3.
Previously, systems with large amounts of RAM were assigned huge swap
spaces. This delayed the Out-of-Memory Killer (oom_ki l l ) in addressing
critical memory shortages, even if a process was malfunctioning.
Consequently, if you are using an earlier version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux
6, swap --recommended will generate larger swap spaces than those
described in the Recommended Partitioning Scheme, even on systems with
large amounts of RAM. This may negate the need to allow extra space for
hibernation.
However, these updated swap space values are nonetheless recommended for
earlier versions of Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 and can be set manually using
the swap --size= option.
raid.<id>
The partition is used for software RAID (refer to raid).
pv.<id>
The partition is used for LVM (refer to logvol).
--size= The minimum partition size in megabytes. Specify an integer value here
such as 500 (do not include the unit).
Important
If the --size value is too small, the installation will fail. Set the --size value as
the minimum amount of space you require. For size recommendations, refer to
Section 9.15.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme .
--grow Tells the partition to grow to fill available space (if any), or up to the
maximum size setting.
449
Note
If you use --grow= without setting --maxsize= on a swap partition,
Anaconda will limit the maximum size of the swap partition. For systems that
have less than 2GB of physical memory, the imposed limit is twice the amount of
physical memory. For systems with more than 2GB, the imposed limit is the size of
physical memory plus 2GB.
--maxsize= The maximum partition size in megabytes when the partition is set to
grow. Specify an integer value here such as 500 (do not include the unit).
--noformat Specifies that the partition should not be formatted, for use with the --
onpart command.
--onpart= or --usepart= Specifies the device on which to place the partition. For
example:
partition /home --onpart=hda1
puts /home on /dev/hda1.
These options can also add a partition to a logical volume. For example:
partition pv.1 --onpart=hda2
The device must already exist on the system; the --onpart option will not create it.
--ondisk= or --ondrive= Forces the partition to be created on a particular disk.
For example, --ondisk=sdb puts the partition on the second SCSI disk on the system.
To specify a multipath device that does not use logical volume management (LVM), use the
format disk/by-id/dm-uuid-mpath-WWID, where WWID is the world-wide identifier for
the device. For example, to specify a disk with WWID
2416CD96995134CA5D787F00A5AA11017, use:
part / --fstype=ext3 --grow --asprimary --size=100 --
ondisk=disk/by-id/dm-uuid-mpath-
2416CD96995134CA5D787F00A5AA11017
Multipath devices that use LVM are not assembled until after anaconda has parsed the
kickstart file. Therefore, you cannot specify these devices in the format dm-uuid-
mpath. Instead, to specify a multipath device that uses LVM, use the format disk/by-
id/scsi-WWID, where WWID is the world-wide identifier for the device. For example, to
specify a disk with WWID 58095BEC5510947BE8C0360F604351918, use:
part / --fstype=ext3 --grow --asprimary --size=100 --
ondisk=disk/by-id/scsi-58095BEC5510947BE8C0360F604351918
450
Warning
mpatha are not specific to a particular disk. The disk named /dev/mpatha
during installation might not be the one that you expect it to be. Therefore, the
clearpart command could target the wrong disk.
--asprimary Forces automatic allocation of the partition as a primary partition, or
the partitioning fails.
--type= (replaced by fstype) This option is no longer available. Use fstype.
--fsoptions Specifies a free form string of options to be used when mounting the
--fstype= Sets the file system type for the partition. Valid values are xfs, ext2,
ext3, ext4, swap, vfat, hfs, and efi.
--recommended Determine the size of the partition automatically.
--onbiosdisk Forces the partition to be created on a particular disk as discovered
by the BIOS.
--encrypted Specifies that this partition should be encrypted, using the
--passphrase= Specifies the passphrase to use when encrypting this partition. You
must use this option together with the --encrypted option; by itself it has no effect.
encrypted partitions as files in /root, encrypted using the X.509 certificate from the URL
encrypted partition. This option is only meaningful if --encrypted is specified.
partition. Store these passphrases in separate files in /root, encrypted using the X.509
--label= assign a label to an individual partition.
451
Note
If partitioning fails for any reason, diagnostic messages appear on virtual console 3.
poweroff ( opt i onal )
Shut down and power off the system after the installation has successfully completed.
Normally during a manual installation, anaconda displays a message and waits for the
user to press a key before rebooting. During a kickstart installation, if no completion
method is specified, the halt option is used as default.
The poweroff option is equivalent to the shutdown -p command.
Note
The poweroff option is highly dependent on the system hardware in use.
Specifically, certain hardware components such as the BIOS, APM (advanced power
management), and ACPI (advanced configuration and power interface) must be able
to interact with the system kernel. Contact your manufacturer for more information on
you system' s APM/ACPI abilities.
For other completion methods, refer to the halt, reboot, and shutdown kickstart options.
raid ( opt i onal )
Assembles a software RAID device. This command is of the form:
raid <mntpoint> --level=<level> --device=<mddevice> <partitions*>
<mntpoint> Location where the RAID file system is mounted. If it is /, the RAID level
must be 1 unless a boot partition (/boot) is present. If a boot partition is present, the
/boot partition must be level 1 and the root (/) partition can be any of the available
types. The <partitions*> (which denotes that multiple partitions can be listed) lists the
RAID identifiers to add to the RAID array.
Important RAID metadata version on POWER
If a RAID device has been prepared and has not been reformatted during
installation, ensure that the RAID metadata version is 0.90 if you intend to put
the /boot and PReP partitions on the RAID device.
The default Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 mdadm metadata version is not
supported for the boot device.
--level= RAID level to use (0, 1, or 5).
--device= Name of the RAID device to use (such as md0 or md1). RAID devices
range from md0 to md15, and each may only be used once.
452
--spares= Specifies the number of spare drives allocated for the RAID array. Spare
drives are used to rebuild the array in case of drive failure.
--fstype= Sets the file system type for the RAID array. Valid values are xfs, ext2,
ext3, ext4, swap, vfat, and hfs.
--fsoptions= Specifies a free form string of options to be used when mounting the
--noformat Use an existing RAID device and do not format the RAID array.
--useexisting Use an existing RAID device and reformat it.
--encrypted Specifies that this RAID device should be encrypted, using the
--passphrase= Specifies the passphrase to use when encrypting this RAID device.
You must use this option together with the --encrypted option; by itself it has no effect.
--escrowcert=URL_of_X.509_certificate Store the data encryption key for
this device in a file in /root, encrypted using the X.509 certificate from the URL
specified with URL_of_X.509_certificate. This option is only meaningful if --encrypted is
specified.
--backuppassphrase= Add a randomly-generated passphrase to this device. Store
the passphrase in a file in /root, encrypted using the X.509 certificate specified with --
escrowcert. This option is only meaningful if --escrowcert is specified.
The following example shows how to create a RAID level 1 partition for /, and a RAID level
5 for /usr, assuming there are three SCSI disks on the system. It also creates three swap
partitions, one on each drive.
part raid.01 --size=60 --ondisk=sda
part raid.02 --size=60 --ondisk=sdb
part raid.03 --size=60 --ondisk=sdc
part swap --size=128 --ondisk=sda
part swap --size=128 --ondisk=sdb
part swap --size=128 --ondisk=sdc
453
part raid.11 --size=1 --grow --ondisk=sda
part raid.12 --size=1 --grow --ondisk=sdb
part raid.13 --size=1 --grow --ondisk=sdc
raid / --level=1 --device=md0 raid.01 raid.02 raid.03
raid /usr --level=5 --device=md1 raid.11 raid.12 raid.13
For a detailed example of raid in action, refer to Section 32.4.1, Advanced Partitioning
Example .
reboot ( opt i onal )
Reboot after the installation is successfully completed (no arguments). Normally, kickstart
displays a message and waits for the user to press a key before rebooting.
The reboot option is equivalent to the shutdown -r command.
Specify reboot to automate installation fully when installing in cmdline mode on System z.
For other completion methods, refer to the halt, poweroff, and shutdown kickstart
options.
The halt option is the default completion method if no other methods are explicitly
specified in the kickstart file.
Note
Use of the reboot option may result in an endless installation loop, depending on
the installation media and method.
repo ( opt i onal )
Configures additional yum repositories that may be used as sources for package
installation. Multiple repo lines may be specified.
repo --name=<repoid> [--baseurl=<url>| --mirrorlist=<url>]
--name= The repo id. This option is required.
--baseurl= The URL for the repository. The variables that may be used in yum repo
config files are not supported here. You may use one of either this option or --mirrorlist,
not both.
--mirrorlist= The URL pointing at a list of mirrors for the repository. The
variables that may be used in yum repo config files are not supported here. You may use
one of either this option or --baseurl, not both.
Important
Repositories used for installation must be stable. The installation may fail if a
repository is modified before the installation concludes.
454
rootpw ( requi red)
Sets the system' s root password to the <password> argument.
rootpw [--iscrypted] <password>
--iscrypted If this is present, the password argument is assumed to already be
encrypted.
selinux ( opt i onal )
Sets the state of SELinux on the installed system. SELinux defaults to enforcing in
anaconda.
selinux [--disabled|--enforcing|--permissive]
--enforcing Enables SELinux with the default targeted policy being enforced.
Note
If the selinux option is not present in the kickstart file, SELinux is enabled and
set to --enforcing by default.
--permissive Outputs warnings based on the SELinux policy, but does not
actually enforce the policy.
--disabled Disables SELinux completely on the system.
For more information regarding SELinux for Red Hat Enterprise Linux, refer to the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6.6 Deployment Guide.
services ( opt i onal )
Modifies the default set of services that will run under the default runlevel. The list of
disabled services is processed before the list of enabled services. Therefore, if a service
appears on both lists, it is enabled.
--disabled Disable the services given in the comma separated list.
--enabled Enable the services given in the comma separated list.
Important
Do not include spaces in the list of services. If you do, kickstart will enable or disable
only the services up to the first space. For example:
services --disabled auditd, cups,smartd, nfslock
will disable only the audi t d service. To disable all four services, this entry should
include no spaces between services:
services --disabled auditd,cups,smartd,nfslock
455
shutdown ( opt i onal )
Shut down the system after the installation has successfully completed. During a kickstart
installation, if no completion method is specified, the halt option is used as default.
The shutdown option is equivalent to the shutdown command.
For other completion methods, refer to the halt, poweroff, and reboot kickstart options.
skipx ( opt i onal )
If present, X is not configured on the installed system.
Important
If you install a display manager among your package selection options, this
package will create an X configuration, and the installed system will default to run
level 5. The effect of the skipx option will be overridden.
sshpw ( opt i onal )
During installation, you can interact with anaconda and monitor its progress over an SSH
connection. Use the sshpw command to create temporary accounts through which to log
on. Each instance of the command creates a separate account that exists only in the
installation environment. These accounts are not transferred to the installed system.
sshpw --username=<name> <password> [--iscrypted|--plaintext] [--
lock]
--username Provides the name of the user. This option is required.
--iscrypted Specifies that the password is already encrypted.
--plaintext Specifies that the password is in plain text and not encrypted.
--lock If this is present, the new user account is locked by default. That is, the user
will not be able to login from the console.
Important
By default, the ssh server is not started during installation. To make ssh available
during installation, boot the system with the kernel boot option sshd=1. Refer to
Section 28.2.3, Enabling Remote Access with ssh for details of how to specify this
kernel option at boot time.
456
Note
If you want to disable root ssh access to your hardware during installation, run:
sshpw --username=root --lock
text ( opt i onal )
Perform the kickstart installation in text mode. Kickstart installations are performed in
graphical mode by default.
Important
process.
timezone ( requi red)
Sets the system time zone to <timezone> which may be any of the time zones listed by
timeconfig.
timezone [--utc] <timezone>
--utc If present, the system assumes the hardware clock is set to UTC (Greenwich
Mean) time.
unsupported_hardware ( opt i onal )
Tells the installer to suppress the Unsupported Hardware Detected alert. If this
command is not included and unsupported hardware is detected, the installation will stall
at this alert.
upgrade ( opt i onal )
Tells the system to upgrade an existing system rather than install a fresh system. You must
specify one of cdrom, harddrive, nfs, or url (for FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS) as the
location of the installation tree. Refer to install for details.
user ( opt i onal )
Creates a new user on the system.
user --name=<username> [--groups=<list>] [--homedir=<homedir>] [--
password=<password>] [--iscrypted] [--shell=<shell>] [--uid=<uid>]
--name= Provides the name of the user. This option is required.
--groups= In addition to the default group, a comma separated list of group names
the user should belong to. The groups must exist before the user account is created.
457
--homedir= The home directory for the user. If not provided, this defaults to
/home/<username>.
--password= The new user' s password. If not provided, the account will be locked
by default.
--iscrypted= Is the password provided by --password already encrypted or not?
--shell= The user' s login shell. If not provided, this defaults to the system default.
--uid= The user' s UID. If not provided, this defaults to the next available non-
system UID.
vnc ( opt i onal )
Allows the graphical installation to be viewed remotely via VNC. This method is usually
preferred over text mode, as there are some size and language limitations in text installs.
With no options, this command will start a VNC server on the machine with no password
and will print out the command that needs to be run to connect a remote machine.
vnc [--host=<hostname>] [--port=<port>] [--password=<password>]
--host= Instead of starting a VNC server on the install machine, connect to the VNC
viewer process listening on the given hostname.
--port= Provide a port that the remote VNC viewer process is listening on. If not
provided, anaconda will use the VNC default.
--password= Set a password which must be provided to connect to the VNC
session. This is optional, but recommended.
volgroup ( opt i onal )
Use to create a Logical Volume Management (LVM) group with the syntax:
volgroup <name> <partition> [options]
Important
Do not use the dash ("-") character in logical volume or volume group names when
installing Red Hat Enterprise Linux using Kickstart. If you do, the installation will
finish normally, but the character will be removed from all newly created volume and
volume group names. For example, if you create a volume group named volgrp-
01, its name will be changed to volgrp01.
This limitation only applies to new installations. If you are upgrading or reinstalling
an existing installation and use the --noformat option described below, dashes
used in volume and volume group names will be preserved.
Create the partition first, create the logical volume group, and then create the logical
volume. For example:
458
part pv.01 --size 3000
volgroup myvg pv.01
logvol / --vgname=myvg --size=2000 --name=rootvol
For a detailed example of volgroup in action, refer to Section 32.4.1, Advanced
Partitioning Example .
The options are as follows:
--noformat Use an existing volume group and do not format it.
--useexisting Use an existing volume group and reformat it.
--pesize= Set the size of the physical extents. The default size for Kickstart
installations is 4 MiB.
--reserved-space= Specify an amount of space to leave unused in a volume
group, in megabytes. Only usable when creating a new volume group.
--reserved-percent= Specify a percentage of total volume group space to leave
unused. Only usable when creating a new volume group.
Note
The --reserved-space= and --reserved-percent= options allow you to leave
a part of the total volume group space unused by any volumes. This allows you to
reserve space for LVM snapshots, even if the logvol --grow command is used
during partitioning.
winbind ( opt i onal )
Configures the system to connect to a Windows Active Directory or a Windows domain
controller. User information from the specified directory or domain controller can then be
accessed and server authentication options can be configured.
--enablewinbind Enable winbind for user account configuration.
--disablewinbind Disable winbind for user account configuration.
--enablewinbindauth Enable windbindauth for authentication.
--disablewinbindauth Disable windbindauth for authentication.
--enablewinbindoffline Configures winbind to allow offline login.
--disablewinbindoffline Configures winbind to prevent offline login.
--enablewinbindusedefaultdomain Configures winbind to assume that users
with no domain in their usernames are domain users.
--disablewinbindusedefaultdomain Configures winbind to assume that
users with no domain in their usernames are not domain users.
xconfig ( opt i onal )
Configures the X Wi ndow Syst em. If you install the X Wi ndow Syst em with a kickstart file
that does not include the xconfig command, you must provide the X configuration
manually during installation.
459
manually during installation.
Do not use this command in a kickstart file that does not install the X Wi ndow Syst em.
--driver Specify the X driver to use for the video hardware.
--videoram= Specifies the amount of video RAM the video card has.
--defaultdesktop= Specify either GNOME or KDE to set the default desktop
(assumes that GNOME Desktop Environment and/or KDE Desktop Environment has
been installed through %packages).
--startxonboot Use a graphical login on the installed system.
zerombr ( opt i onal )
If zerombr is specified any invalid partition tables found on disks are initialized. This
destroys all of the contents of disks with invalid partition tables. This command is required
when performing an unattended installation on a system with previously initialized disks.
Specific to System z: If zerombr is specified, any DASD visible to the installer which is not
already low-level formatted gets automatically low-level formatted with dasdf mt . The
command also prevents user choice during interactive installations. If zerombr is not
specified and there is at least one unformatted DASD visible to the installer, a non-
interactive kickstart installation will exit unsuccessfully. If zerombr is not specified and
there is at least one unformatted DASD visible to the installer, an interactive installation
exits if the user does not agree to format all visible and unformatted DASDs. To circumvent
this, only activate those DASDs that you will use during installation. You can always add
more DASDs after installation is complete.
Note
That this command was previously specified as zerombr yes. This form is now
deprecated; you should now simply specify zerombr in your kickstart file instead.
zfcp ( opt i onal )
Define a Fiber channel device (IBM System z).
zfcp [--devnum=<devnum>] [--wwpn=<wwpn>] [--fcplun=<fcplun>]
%include ( opt i onal )
Use the %include /path/to/file command to include the contents of another file in
the kickstart file as though the contents were at the location of the %include command in
the kickstart file.
32.4.1. Advanced Part it ioning Example
The following is a single, integrated example showing the clearpart, raid, part, volgroup, and
logvol kickstart options in action:
clearpart --drives=hda,hdc
zerombr
# Raid 1 IDE config
part raid.11 --size 1000 --asprimary --ondrive=hda
460
part raid.14 --size 8000 --ondrive=hda
part raid.15 --size 16384 --grow --ondrive=hda
part raid.21 --size 1000 --asprimary --ondrive=hdc
part raid.24 --size 8000 --ondrive=hdc
part raid.25 --size 16384 --grow --ondrive=hdc
# You can add --spares=x
raid / --fstype ext3 --device md0 --level=RAID1 raid.11 raid.21
raid /safe --fstype ext3 --device md1 --level=RAID1 raid.12 raid.22
raid swap --fstype swap --device md2 --level=RAID1 raid.13 raid.23
raid /usr --fstype ext3 --device md3 --level=RAID1 raid.14 raid.24
raid pv.01 --fstype ext3 --device md4 --level=RAID1 raid.15 raid.25
# LVM configuration so that we can resize /var and /usr/local later
volgroup sysvg pv.01
logvol /var --vgname=sysvg --size=8000 --name=var
logvol /var/freespace --vgname=sysvg --size=8000 --
name=freespacetouse
logvol /usr/local --vgname=sysvg --size=1 --grow --name=usrlocal
This advanced example implements LVM over RAID, as well as the ability to resize various directories
for future growth.
32.5. Package Select ion
Warning
You can use a kickstart file to install every available package by specifying * in the
%packages section. Red Hat does not support this type of installation.
In previous releases of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, this functionality was provided by
@Everything, but this option is not included in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.
Use the %packages command to begin a kickstart file section that lists the packages you would like
to install (this is for installations only, as package selection during upgrades is not supported).
You can specify packages by group or by their package names. The installation program defines
several groups that contain related packages. Refer to the variant/repodata/comps-*.xml file
on the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 Installation DVD for a list of groups. Each group has an id, user
visibility value, name, description, and package list. If the group is selected for installation, the
packages marked mandatory in the package list are always installed, the packages marked
default are installed if they are not specifically excluded elsewhere, and the packages marked
optional must be specifically included elsewhere even when the group is selected.
Specify groups, one entry to a line, starting with an @ symbol, a space, and then the full group name
or group id as given in the comps.xml file. For example:
461
%packages
@ X Window System
@ Desktop
@ Sound and Video
Note that the Core and Base groups are always selected by default, so it is not necessary to specify
them in the %packages section.
Specify individual packages by name, one entry to a line. You can use asterisks as wildcards to glob
package names in entries. For example:
sqlite
curl
aspell
docbook*
The docbook* entry includes the packages docbook-dtds, docbook-simple, docbook-slides and others
that match the pattern represented with the wildcard.
Use a leading dash to specify packages or groups to exclude from the installation. For example:
-@ Graphical Internet
-autofs
-ipa*fonts
Important
To install a 32-bit package on a 64-bit system, you will need to append the package name
with the 32-bit architecture the package was built for. For example:
glibc.i686
Using a kickstart file to install every available package by specifying * will introduce package and
file conflicts onto the installed system. Packages known to cause such problems are assigned to the
@Conflicts (variant) group, where variant is Client, ComputeNode, Server or
Workstation. If you specify * in a kickstart file, be sure to exclude @Conflicts (variant) or
the installation will fail:
*
-@Conflicts (Server)
Note that Red Hat does not support the use of * in a kickstart file, even if you exclude @Conflicts
(variant).
The section must end with the %end command.
The following options are available for the %packages option:
--nobase
Do not install the @Base group. Use this option to perform a minimal installation, for
example, for a single-purpose server or desktop appliance.
462
--resolvedeps
The --resolvedeps option has been deprecated. Dependencies are now always resolved
automatically.
--ignoredeps
The --ignoredeps option has been deprecated. Dependencies are resolved automatically
every time now.
--ignoremissing
Ignore the missing packages and groups instead of halting the installation to ask if the
installation should be aborted or continued. For example:
%packages --ignoremissing
32.6. Pre-inst allat ion Script
You can add commands to run on the system immediately after the ks.cfg has been parsed. This
section must be placed towards the end of the kickstart file, after the kickstart commands described in
Section 32.4, Kickstart Options , and must start with the %pre command and end with the %end
command. If your kickstart file also includes a %post section, the order of the %pre and %post
sections does not matter.
You can access the network in the %pre section; however, name service has not been configured at
this point, so only IP addresses work.
Note
The pre-install script is not run in the change root environment.
--interpreter /usr/bin/python
Allows you to specify a different scripting language, such as Python. Replace /usr/bin/python
with the scripting language of your choice.
32.6.1. Example Pre-inst allat ion Script
The following is an example %pre section:
%pre
#!/bin/sh
hds=""
mymedia=""
for file in /proc/ide/h* do
mymedia=`cat $file/media`
if [ $mymedia == "disk" ] ; then
hds="$hds `basename $file`"
fi
done
set $hds
numhd=ècho $#`
463
drive1=ècho $hds | cut -d' ' -f1`
drive2=ècho $hds | cut -d' ' -f2`
#Write out partition scheme based on whether there are 1 or 2 hard drives
if [ $numhd == "2" ] ; then
#2 drives
echo "#partitioning scheme generated in %pre for 2 drives" > /tmp/part-
include
echo "clearpart --all" >> /tmp/part-include
echo "zerombr" >> /tmp/part-include
echo "part /boot --fstype ext3 --size 75 --ondisk hda" >> /tmp/part-
include
echo "part / --fstype ext3 --size 1 --grow --ondisk hda" >> /tmp/part-
include
echo "part swap --recommended --ondisk $drive1" >> /tmp/part-include
echo "part /home --fstype ext3 --size 1 --grow --ondisk hdb" >>
/tmp/part-include
else
#1 drive
echo "#partitioning scheme generated in %pre for 1 drive" > /tmp/part-
include
echo "clearpart --all" >> /tmp/part-include
echo "part /boot --fstype ext3 --size 75" >> /tmp/part-include
echo "part swap --recommended" >> /tmp/part-include
echo "part / --fstype ext3 --size 2048" >> /tmp/part-include
echo "part /home --fstype ext3 --size 2048 --grow" >> /tmp/part-include
fi
%end
This script determines the number of hard drives in the system and writes a text file with a different
partitioning scheme depending on whether it has one or two drives. Instead of having a set of
partitioning commands in the kickstart file, include the following line:
%include /tmp/part-include
The partitioning commands selected in the script are used.
Note
The pre-installation script section of kickstart cannot manage multiple install trees or source
media. This information must be included for each created ks.cfg file, as the pre-installation
script occurs during the second stage of the installation process.
32.7. Post -inst allat ion Script
You have the option of adding commands to run on the system once the installation is complete. This
section must be placed towards the end of the kickstart file, after the kickstart commands described in
Section 32.4, Kickstart Options , and must start with the %post command and end with the %end
command. If your kickstart file also includes a %pre section, the order of the %pre and %post
sections does not matter.
This section is useful for functions such as installing additional software and configuring an
additional nameserver.
464
Note
If you configured the network with static IP information, including a nameserver, you can
access the network and resolve IP addresses in the %post section. If you configured the
network for DHCP, the /etc/resolv.conf file has not been completed when the installation
executes the %post section. You can access the network, but you can not resolve IP
addresses. Thus, if you are using DHCP, you must specify IP addresses in the %post section.
Note
The post-install script is run in a chroot environment; therefore, performing tasks such as
copying scripts or RPMs from the installation media do not work.
--nochroot
Allows you to specify commands that you would like to run outside of the chroot
environment.
The following example copies the file /etc/resolv.conf to the file system that was just
installed.
%post --nochroot
cp /etc/resolv.conf /mnt/sysimage/etc/resolv.conf
--interpreter /usr/bin/python
Allows you to specify a different scripting language, such as Python. Replace /usr/bin/python
with the scripting language of your choice.
--log /path/to/logfile
Logs the output of the post-install script. Note that the path of the log file must take into
account whether or not you use the --nochroot option. For example, without --
nochroot:
%post --log=/root/ks-post.log
with --nochroot:
%post --nochroot --log=/mnt/sysimage/root/ks-post.log
32.7.1. Examples
32.7.1.1. Regist ering and Then Mount ing an NFS Share
Register the system to a Red Hat Subscription Management server (in this example, a local
Subscription Asset Manager server):
/usr/sbin/subscription-manager register [email protected] --
password=secret --serverurl=sam-server.example.com --org="Admin Group" --
465
environment="Dev"
%end
Run a script named runme from an NFS share:
mkdir /mnt/temp
mount -o nolock 10.10.0.2:/usr/new-machines /mnt/temp
openvt -s -w -- /mnt/temp/runme
umount /mnt/temp
NFS file locking is not supported while in kickstart mode, therefore -o nolock is required when
mounting an NFS mount.
32.7.1.2. Regist ering a Syst em in RHN Classic
The rhnreg_ks command is a utility for registering a system with the Red Hat Network. It is designed
to be used in a non-interactive environment (a Kickstart style install, for example). All the information
can be specified on the command line or standard input (stdin). This command should be used when
you have created an activation key and you want to register a system using a key.
For details about using rhnreg_ks to automatically register your system, see the Knowledgebase
article at https://access.redhat.com/solutions/876433.
32.7.1.3. Running subscript ion-manager as a Post -Inst all Script
The subscri pt i on- manager command-line script registers a system to a Red Hat Subscription
Management server (Customer Portal Subscription Management, Subscription Asset Manager, or
CloudForms System Engine). This script can also be used to assign or attach subscriptions
automatically to the system that best-match that system.
When registering to the Customer Portal, use the Red Hat network login credentials. When registering
to Subscription Asset Manager or CloudForms System Engine, use whatever user account was
created by the local administrator.
Additional options can be used with the registration command to set a preferred service level for the
system and to restrict updates and errata to a specific operating system version.
/usr/sbin/subscription-manager register [email protected] --
password=secret --serverurl=sam-server.example.com --org="Admin Group" --
environment="Dev" --servicelevel=standard --release="6.6"
%end
For additional information about using subscri pt i on- manager, see the Knowledgebase article at
32.8. Making t he Kickst art File Available
A kickstart file must be placed in one of the following locations:
On removable media, such as a floppy disk, optical disk, or USB flash drive
On a hard drive
On a network
466
Normally a kickstart file is copied to the removable media or hard drive, or made available on the
network. The network-based approach is most commonly used, as most kickstart installations tend to
be performed on networked computers.
The following section provides a more in-depth look at where the kickstart file may be placed.
32.8.1. Creat ing Kickst art Boot Media
To perform a kickstart installation using removable media, the kickstart file must be named ks.cfg
and must be located in the top-level directory of the disc.
Diskette-based booting is no longer supported in Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Installations must use
CD-ROM or flash memory products for booting. However, the kickstart file may still reside on a
diskette' s top-level directory, and must be named ks.cfg. Separate boot media will be required.
Refer to Section 2.2, Making Minimal Boot Media for instructions on creating boot media.
To perform a pen-based flash memory kickstart installation, the kickstart file must be named ks.cfg
and must be located in the flash memory' s top-level directory. The kickstart file should be on a
separate flash memory drive to the boot media.
To start the Kickstart installation, boot the system using the boot media you created, and use the ks=
boot option to specify which device contains the USB drive. See Section 28.4, Automating the
Installation with Kickstart for details about the ks= boot option.
See Section 2.2, Making Minimal Boot Media for instructions on creating boot USB media using the
rhel-variant-version-architecture-boot.iso image file that you can download from the
Software & Download Center of the Red Hat customer portal.
Note
Creation of USB flashdrives for booting is possible, but is heavily dependent on system
hardware BIOS settings. Refer to your hardware manufacturer to see if your system supports
booting to alternate devices.
32.8.2. Making t he Kickst art File Available on t he Net work
Network installations using kickstart are quite common, because system administrators can quickly
and easily automate the installation on many networked computers. In general, the approach most
commonly used is for the administrator to have both a BOOTP/DHCP server and an NFS server on
the local network. The BOOTP/DHCP server is used to give the client system its networking
information, while the actual files used during the installation are served by the NFS server. Often,
these two servers run on the same physical machine, but they are not required to.
Include the ks kernel boot option in the append line of a target in your pxelinux.cfg/default
file to specify the location of a kickstart file on your network. The syntax of the ks option in a
pxelinux.cfg/default file is identical to its syntax when used at the boot prompt. Refer to
Section 32.10, Starting a Kickstart Installation for a description of the syntax and refer to
Example 32.1, Using the ks option in the pxelinux.cfg/default file for an example of an
append line.
If the dhcpd.conf file on the DHCP server is configured to point to
/var/lib/tftpboot/pxelinux.0 on the BOOTP server (whether on the same physical machine
or not), systems configured to boot over the network can load the kickstart file and commence
installation.
467
Exampl e 32. 1. Usi ng t he ks opt i on i n t he pxelinux.cfg/default f i l e
For example, if foo.ks is a kickstart file available on an NFS share at
192.168.0.200:/export/kickstart/, part of your pxelinux.cfg/default file might
include:
label 1
kernel RHEL6/vmlinuz
append initrd=RHEL6/initrd.img ramdisk_size=10000
ks=nfs:192.168.0.200:/export/kickstart/foo.ks
32.9. Making t he Inst allat ion Tree Available
The kickstart installation must access an installation tree. An installation tree is a copy of the binary
Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD with the same directory structure.
If you are performing a DVD-based installation, insert the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD
into the computer before starting the kickstart installation.
If you are performing a hard drive installation, make sure the ISO images of the binary Red Hat
Enterprise Linux DVD are on a hard drive in the computer.
If you are performing a network-based (NFS, FTP or HTTP) installation, you must make the
installation tree or ISO image available over the network. Refer to Section 4.1, Preparing for a
Network Installation for details.
32.10. St art ing a Kickst art Inst allat ion
Important
Fi rst boot does not run after a system is installed from a Kickstart file unless a desktop and
the X Window System were included in the installation and graphical login was enabled. Either
specify a user with the user option in the Kickstart file before installing additional systems
from it (refer to Section 32.4, Kickstart Options for details) or log into the installed system with
a virtual console as root and add users with the adduser command.
To begin a kickstart installation, you must boot the system from boot media you have made or the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD, and enter a special boot command at the boot prompt. The
installation program looks for a kickstart file if the ks command line argument is passed to the kernel.
DVD and l ocal st orage
The linux ks= command also works if the ks.cfg file is located on a vfat or ext2 file
system on local storage and you boot from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD.
Wi t h Dri ver Di sk
If you need to use a driver disk with kickstart, specify the dd option as well. For example, if
installation requires a kickstart file on a local hard drive and also requires a driver disk,
boot the system with:
468
linux ks=hd:partition:/path/ks.cfg dd
Boot CD- ROM
If the kickstart file is on a boot CD-ROM as described in Section 32.8.1, Creating Kickstart
Boot Media , insert the CD-ROM into the system, boot the system, and enter the following
command at the boot: prompt (where ks.cfg is the name of the kickstart file):
linux ks=cdrom:/ks.cfg
Other options to start a kickstart installation are as follows:
askmethod
Prompt the user to select an installation source, even if a Red Hat Enterprise Linux
installation DVD is detected on the system.
asknetwork
Prompt for network configuration in the first stage of installation regardless of installation
method.
autostep
Make kickstart non-interactive. Used for debugging and to generate screenshots. This
option should not be used when deploying a system because it may disrupt package
installation.
debug
Start up pdb immediately.
dd
Use a driver disk.
dhcpclass=<class>
Sends a custom DHCP vendor class identifier. ISC' s dhcpcd can inspect this value using
"option vendor-class-identifier".
dns=<dns>
Comma separated list of nameservers to use for a network installation.
driverdisk
Same as ' dd' .
expert
Turns on special features:
allows partitioning of removable media
prompts for a driver disk
gateway=<gw>
Gateway to use for a network installation.
469
graphical
Force graphical install. Required to have ftp/http use GUI.
isa
Prompt user for ISA devices configuration.
ip=<ip>
IP to use for a network installation, use ' dhcp' for DHCP.
ipv6=auto, ipv6=dhcp
IPv6 configuration for the device. Use auto for automatic configuration (SLAAC, SLAAC
with DHCPv6), or dhcp for DHCPv6 only configuration (no router advertisements).
keymap=<keymap>
Keyboard layout to use. Valid layouts include:
be-latin1 Belgian
bg_bds-utf8 Bulgarian
bg_pho-utf8 Bulgarian (Phonetic)
br-abnt2 Brazilian (ABNT2)
cf French Canadian
croat Croatian
cz-us-qwertz Czech
cz-lat2 Czech (qwerty)
de German
de-latin1 German (latin1)
de-latin1-nodeadkeys German (latin1 without dead keys)
dvorak Dvorak
dk Danish
dk-latin1 Danish (latin1)
es Spanish
et Estonian
fi Finnish
fi-latin1 Finnish (latin1)
fr French
470
fr-pc French (pc)
fr_CH Swiss French
fr_CH-latin1 Swiss French (latin1)
gr Greek
hu Hungarian
hu101 Hungarian (101 key)
is-latin1 Icelandic
it Italian
it-ibm Italian (IBM)
it2 Italian (it2)
jp106 Japanese
ko Korean
la-latin1 Latin American
mk-utf Macedonian
nl Dutch
no Norwegian
pl2 Polish
pt-latin1 Portuguese
ro Romanian
ru Russian
sr-cy Serbian
sr-latin Serbian (latin)
sv-latin1 Swedish
sg Swiss German
sg-latin1 Swiss German (latin1)
sk-qwerty Slovak (qwerty)
slovene Slovenian
trq Turkish
uk United Kingdom
ua-utf Ukrainian
us-acentos U.S. International
us U.S. English
471
The file /usr/lib/python2.6/site-
packages/system_config_keyboard/keyboard_models.py on 32-bit systems or
/usr/lib64/python2.6/site-
packages/system_config_keyboard/keyboard_models.py on 64-bit systems also
contains this list and is part of the system-config-keyboard package.
ks=nfs:<server>:/<path>
The installation program looks for the kickstart file on the NFS server <server>, as file
<path>. The installation program uses DHCP to configure the Ethernet card. For example, if
your NFS server is server.example.com and the kickstart file is in the NFS share
/mydir/ks.cfg, the correct boot command would be
ks=nfs:server.example.com:/mydir/ks.cfg.
ks={http|https}://<server>/<path>
The installation program looks for the kickstart file on the HTTP or HTTPS server <server>,
as file <path>. The installation program uses DHCP to configure the Ethernet card. For
example, if your HTTP server is server.example.com and the kickstart file is in the HTTP
directory /mydir/ks.cfg, the correct boot command would be
ks=http://server.example.com/mydir/ks.cfg.
ks=hd:<device>:/<file>
The installation program mounts the file system on <device> (which must be vfat or ext2),
and looks for the kickstart configuration file as <file> in that file system (for example,
ks=hd:sda3:/mydir/ks.cfg).
ks=bd:<biosdev>:/<path>
The installation program mounts the file system on the specified partition on the specified
BIOS device <biosdev>, and looks for the kickstart configuration file specified in <path> (for
example, ks=bd:80p3:/mydir/ks.cfg). Note this does not work for BIOS RAID sets.
ks=file:/<file>
The installation program tries to read the file <file> from the file system; no mounts are done.
This is normally used if the kickstart file is already on the initrd image.
ks=cdrom:/<path>
The installation program looks for the kickstart file on CD-ROM, as file <path>.
ks
If ks is used alone, the installation program configures the Ethernet card to use DHCP. The
kickstart file is read from NFS server specified by DHCP option server-name. The name of
the kickstart file is one of the following:
If DHCP is specified and the boot file begins with a /, the boot file provided by DHCP is
looked for on the NFS server.
If DHCP is specified and the boot file begins with something other than a /, the boot file
provided by DHCP is looked for in the /kickstart directory on the NFS server.
If DHCP did not specify a boot file, then the installation program tries to read the file
/kickstart/1.2.3.4-kickstart, where 1.2.3.4 is the numeric IP address of the
machine being installed.
ksdevice=<device>
472
The installation program uses this network device to connect to the network. You can
specify the device in one of five ways:
the device name of the interface, for example, eth0
the MAC address of the interface, for example, 00:12:34:56:78:9a
the keyword link, which specifies the first interface with its link in the up state
the keyword bootif, which uses the MAC address that pxel i nux set in the BOOTIF
variable. Set IPAPPEND 2 in your pxelinux.cfg file to have pxel i nux set the
BOOTIF variable.
the keyword ibft, which uses the MAC address of the interface specified by iBFT
For example, consider a system connected to an NFS server through the eth1 device. To
perform a kickstart installation on this system using a kickstart file from the NFS server, you
would use the command ks=nfs:<server>:/<path> ksdevice=eth1 at the boot:
prompt.
kssendmac
Adds HTTP headers to ks=http:// request that can be helpful for provisioning systems.
Includes MAC address of all nics in CGI environment variables of the form: "X-RHN-
Provisioning-MAC-0: eth0 01:23:45:67:89:ab".
lang=<lang>
Language to use for the installation. This should be a language which is valid to be used
with the ' lang' kickstart command.
loglevel=<level>
Set the minimum level required for messages to be logged. Values for <level> are debug,
info, warning, error, and critical. The default value is info.
mediacheck
Activates loader code to give user option of testing integrity of install source (if an ISO-
based method).
netmask=<nm>
Netmask to use for a network installation.
nofallback
If GUI fails, exit.
nofb
Do not load the VGA16 framebuffer required for doing text-mode installation in some
languages.
nofirewire
Do not load support for firewire devices.
noipv6
Disable IPv6 networking during installation.
473
This option is not available during PXE installations
During installations from a PXE server, IPv6 networking might become active before
anaconda processes the Kickstart file. If so, this option will have no effect during
installation.
nomount
Don' t automatically mount any installed Linux partitions in rescue mode.
nonet
Do not auto-probe network devices.
noparport
Do not attempt to load support for parallel ports.
nopass
Do not pass information about the keyboard and mouse from anaconda stage 1 (the
loader) to stage 2 (the installer).
nopcmcia
Ignore PCMCIA controllers in the system.
noprobe
Do not automatically probe for hardware; prompt the user to allow anaconda to probe for
particular categories of hardware.
noshell
Do not put a shell on tty2 during install.
repo=cdrom
Do a DVD based installation.
repo=ftp://<path>
Use <path> for an FTP installation.
repo=hd:<dev>:<path>
Use <path> on <dev> for a hard drive installation.
repo=http://<path>
Use <path> for an HTTP installation.
repo=https://<path>
Use <path> for an HTTPS installation.
repo=nfs:<path>
Use <path> for an NFS installation.
474
rescue
Run rescue environment.
resolution=<mode>
Run installer in mode specified, ' 1024x768' for example.
serial
Turns on serial console support.
skipddc
Do not probe the Data Display Channel (DDC) of the monitor. This option provides a
workaround if the DDC probe causes the system to stop responding.
syslog=<host>[:<port>]
Once installation is up and running, send log messages to the syslog process on <host>,
and optionally, on port <port>. Requires the remote syslog process to accept connections
(the -r option).
text
Force text mode install.
Important
automated in the text mode, and anaconda cannot prompt you for missing
information. If you do not provide choices for these options, anaconda will stop the
installation process.
updates
Prompt for storage device containing updates (bug fixes).
updates=ftp://<path>
Image containing updates over FTP.
updates=http://<path>
Image containing updates over HTTP.
updates=https://<path>
Image containing updates over HTTPS.
upgradeany
Offer to upgrade any Linux installation detected on the system, regardless of the contents or
the existence of the /etc/redhat-release file.
vnc
Enable vnc-based installation. You will need to connect to the machine using a vnc client
application.
475
application.
vncconnect=<host>[:<port>]
Connect to the vnc client named <host>, and optionally use port <port>.
Requires ' vnc' option to be specified as well.
vncpassword=<password>
Enable a password for the vnc connection. This will prevent someone from inadvertently
connecting to the vnc-based installation.
Requires ' vnc' option to be specified as well.
476
Chapter 33. Kickstart Configurator
Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or allows you to create or modify a kickstart file using a graphical user
interface, so that you do not have to remember the correct syntax of the file.
Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or is not installed by default on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6. Run su - yum
install system-config-kickstart or use your graphical package manager to install the
software.
To launch Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or, boot your system into a graphical environment, then run
system-config-kickstart, or click Appl i cat i ons Syst em Tool s Ki ckst art on the
GNOME desktop or Kickoff Application Launcher+Appl i cat i ons Syst em Ki ckst art
on the KDE desktop.
As you are creating a kickstart file, you can click Fi l e Previ ew at any time to review your current
selections.
To start with an existing kickstart file, select Fi l e Open and select the existing file.
33.1. Basic Configurat ion
Fi gure 33. 1. Basi c Conf i gurat i on
Choose the language to use during the installation and as the default language to be used after
installation from the Def aul t Language menu.
Select the system keyboard type from the Keyboard menu.
From the Ti me Zone menu, choose the time zone to use for the system. To configure the system to
use UTC, select Use UTC clock.
Enter the desired root password for the system in the Root Password text entry box. Type the same
password in the Confirm Password text box. The second field is to make sure you do not mistype
the password and then realize you do not know what it is after you have completed the installation.
To save the password as an encrypted password in the file, select Encrypt root password. If the
477
encryption option is selected, when the file is saved, the plain text password that you typed is
encrypted and written to the kickstart file. Do not type an already encrypted password and select to
encrypt it. Because a kickstart file is a plain text file that can be easily read, it is recommended that an
encrypted password be used.
Choosing Target Architecture specifies which specific hardware architecture distribution is
used during installation.
Choosing Target Architecture specifies which specific hardware architecture distribution is
used during installation.
Choosing Reboot system after installation reboots your system automatically after the
installation is finished.
Kickstart installations are performed in graphical mode by default. To override this default and use
text mode instead, select the Perform installation in text mode option.
You can perform a kickstart installation in interactive mode. This means that the installation program
uses all the options pre-configured in the kickstart file, but it allows you to preview the options in
each screen before continuing to the next screen. To continue to the next screen, click the Next
button after you have approved the settings or change them before continuing the installation. To
select this type of installation, select the Perform installation in interactive mode
option.
Fi gure 33. 2. I nst al l at i on Met hod
The Installation Method screen allows you to choose whether to perform a new installation or
an upgrade. If you choose upgrade, the Partition Information and Package Selection
options are disabled. They are not supported for kickstart upgrades.
Choose the type of kickstart installation or upgrade from the following options:
DVD Choose this option to install or upgrade from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD.
478
NFS Choose this option to install or upgrade from an NFS shared directory. In the text field for
the NFS server, enter a fully-qualified domain name or IP address. For the NFS directory, enter the
name of the NFS directory that contains the variant directory of the installation tree. For
example, if the NFS server contains the directory /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/, enter
/mirrors/redhat/i386/ for the NFS directory.
FTP Choose this option to install or upgrade from an FTP server. In the FTP server text field,
enter a fully-qualified domain name or IP address. For the FTP directory, enter the name of the
FTP directory that contains the variant directory. For example, if the FTP server contains the
directory /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/, enter /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/ for the
FTP directory. If the FTP server requires a username and password, specify them as well.
HTTP Choose this option to install or upgrade from an HTTP server. In the text field for the
HTTP server, enter the fully-qualified domain name or IP address. For the HTTP directory, enter
the name of the HTTP directory that contains the variant directory. For example, if the HTTP
server contains the directory /mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/, enter
/mirrors/redhat/i386/Server/ for the HTTP directory.
Hard Drive Choose this option to install or upgrade from a hard drive. Hard drive
installations require the use of ISO images. Be sure to verify that the ISO images are intact before
you start the installation. To verify them, use an md5sum program as well as the linux
mediacheck boot option as discussed in Section 28.6.1, Verifying Boot Media . Enter the hard
drive partition that contains the ISO images (for example, /dev/hda1) in the Hard Drive
Partition text box. Enter the directory that contains the ISO images in the Hard Drive
Directory text box.
33.3. Boot Loader Opt ions
Fi gure 33. 3. Boot Loader Opt i ons
Please note that this screen will be disabled if you have specified a target architecture other than x86
/ x86_64.
479
GRUB is the default boot loader for Red Hat Enterprise Linux on x86 / x86_64 architectures. If you do
not want to install a boot loader, select Do not install a boot loader. If you choose not to
install a boot loader, make sure you create a boot diskette or have another way to boot your system,
such as a third-party boot loader.
You must choose where to install the boot loader (the Master Boot Record or the first sector of the
/boot partition). Install the boot loader on the MBR if you plan to use it as your boot loader.
To pass any special parameters to the kernel to be used when the system boots, enter them in the
Kernel parameters text field. For example, if you have an IDE CD-ROM Writer, you can tell the
kernel to use the SCSI emulation driver that must be loaded before using cdrecord by configuring
hdd=ide-scsi as a kernel parameter (where hdd is the CD-ROM device).
You can password protect the GRUB boot loader by configuring a GRUB password. Select Use
GRUB password, and enter a password in the Password field. Type the same password in the
Confirm Password text field. To save the password as an encrypted password in the file, select
Encrypt GRUB password. If the encryption option is selected, when the file is saved, the plain text
password that you typed is encrypted and written to the kickstart file. If the password you typed was
already encrypted, uncheck the encryption option.
Important
It is highly recommended to set up a boot loader password on every machine. An unprotected
boot loader can allow a potential attacker to modify the system' s boot options and gain
access to the system. See the chapter titled Workstation Security in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
Security Guide for more information on boot loader passwords and password security in
general.
If Upgrade an existing installation is selected on the Installation Method page,
select Upgrade existing boot loader to upgrade the existing boot loader configuration, while
preserving the old entries.
33.4. Part it ion Informat ion
480
Fi gure 33. 4 . Part i t i on I nf ormat i on
Select whether or not to clear the Master Boot Record (MBR). Choose to remove all existing partitions,
remove all existing Linux partitions, or preserve existing partitions.
To initialize the disk label to the default for the architecture of the system (for example, msdos for
x86), select Initialize the disk label if you are installing on a brand new hard drive.
Note
Although anaconda and kickstart support Logical Volume Management (LVM), at present
there is no mechanism for configuring this using the Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or.
33.4.1. Creat ing Part it ions
To create a partition, click the Add button. The Partition Options window shown in Figure 33.5,
Creating Partitions appears. Choose the mount point, file system type, and partition size for the new
partition. Optionally, you can also choose from the following:
In the Additional Size Options section, choose to make the partition a fixed size, up to a
chosen size, or fill the remaining space on the hard drive. If you selected swap as the file system
type, you can select to have the installation program create the swap partition with the
recommended size instead of specifying a size.
Force the partition to be created as a primary partition.
Create the partition on a specific hard drive. For example, to make the partition on the first IDE
hard disk (/dev/hda), specify hda as the drive. Do not include /dev in the drive name.
Use an existing partition. For example, to make the partition on the first partition on the first IDE
hard disk (/dev/hda1), specify hda1 as the partition. Do not include /dev in the partition name.
Format the partition as the chosen file system type.
481
Fi gure 33. 5. Creat i ng Part i t i ons
To edit an existing partition, select the partition from the list and click the Edit button. The same
Partition Options window appears as when you chose to add a partition as shown in
Figure 33.5, Creating Partitions , except it reflects the values for the selected partition. Modify the
partition options and click OK.
To delete an existing partition, select the partition from the list and click the Delete button.
33.4.1.1. Creat ing Soft ware RAID Part it ions
To create a software RAID partition, use the following steps:
1. Click the RAID button.
2. Select Create a software RAID partition.
3. Configure the partitions as previously described, except select Software RAID as the file
system type. Also, you must specify a hard drive on which to make the partition or specify an
existing partition to use.
482
Fi gure 33. 6 . Creat i ng a Sof t ware RAI D Part i t i on
Repeat these steps to create as many partitions as needed for your RAID setup. All of your partitions
do not have to be RAID partitions.
After creating all the partitions needed to form a RAID device, follow these steps:
1. Click the RAID button.
2. Select Create a RAID device.
3. Select a mount point, file system type, RAID device name, RAID level, RAID members, number
of spares for the software RAID device, and whether to format the RAID device.
483
Fi gure 33. 7. Creat i ng a Sof t ware RAI D Devi ce
4. Click OK to add the device to the list.
33.5. Net work Configurat ion
Fi gure 33. 8. Net work Conf i gurat i on
484
If the system to be installed via kickstart does not have an Ethernet card, do not configure one on the
Network Configuration page.
Networking is only required if you choose a networking-based installation method (NFS, FTP, or
HTTP). Networking can always be configured after installation with the Net work Admi ni st rat i on
Tool (system-config-network). Refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide for
details.
For each Ethernet card on the system, click Add Network Device and select the network device
and network type for the device. Select eth0 to configure the first Ethernet card, eth1 for the second
Ethernet card, and so on.
33.6. Aut hent icat ion
Fi gure 33. 9 . Aut hent i cat i on
In the Authentication section, select whether to use shadow passwords and MD5 encryption for
user passwords. These options are highly recommended and chosen by default.
The Authentication Configuration options allow you to configure the following methods of
authentication:
NIS
LDAP
Kerberos 5
Hesiod
SMB
Name Switch Cache
485
These methods are not enabled by default. To enable one or more of these methods, click the
appropriate tab, click the checkbox next to Enable, and enter the appropriate information for the
authentication method. Refer to the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide for more information
about the options.
33.7. Firewall Configurat ion
The Firewall Configuration window is similar to the screen in the installation program and the
Securi t y Level Conf i gurat i on Tool .
Fi gure 33. 10. Fi rewal l Conf i gurat i on
If Disable firewall is selected, the system allows complete access to any active services and
ports. No connections to the system are refused or denied.
Selecting Enable firewall configures the system to reject incoming connections that are not in
response to outbound requests, such as DNS replies or DHCP requests. If access to services
running on this machine is required, you can choose to allow specific services through the firewall.
Only devices configured in the Network Configuration section are listed as available Trusted
devices. Connections from any devices selected in the list are accepted by the system. For example,
if eth1 only receives connections from internal system, you might want to allow connections from it.
If a service is selected in the Trusted services list, connections for the service are accepted and
processed by the system.
In the Other ports text field, list any additional ports that should be opened for remote access. Use
the following format: port:protocol. For example, to allow IMAP access through the firewall,
specify imap:tcp. Numeric ports can also be specified explicitly; to allow UDP packets on port 1234
through the firewall, enter 1234:udp. To specify multiple ports, separate them with commas.
33.7.1. SELinux Configurat ion
Kickstart can set SELinux to enforcing, permissive or disabled mode. Finer grained
configuration is not possible at this time.
486
33.8. Display Configurat ion
If you are installing the X Window System, you can configure it during the kickstart installation by
checking the Configure the X Window System option on the Display Configuration
window as shown in Figure 33.11, X Configuration . If this option is not chosen, the X configuration
options are disabled and the skipx option is written to the kickstart file.
Fi gure 33. 11. X Conf i gurat i on
Select whether to start the Setup Agent the first time the installed system boots. The Setup Agent is
disabled by default, but the setting can be changed to enabled or enabled in reconfiguration mode.
Reconfiguration mode enables the language, mouse, keyboard, root password, security level, time
zone, and networking configuration options in addition to the default ones.
33.9. Package Select ion
487
Fi gure 33. 12. Package Sel ect i on
The Package Selection window allows you to choose which package groups to install.
Package resolution is carried out automatically.
Currently, Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or does not allow you to select individual packages. To install
individual packages, modify the %packages section of the kickstart file after you save it. Refer to
Section 32.5, Package Selection for details.
33.10. Pre-Inst allat ion Script
Fi gure 33. 13. Pre- I nst al l at i on Scri pt
488
You can add commands to run on the system immediately after the kickstart file has been parsed and
before the installation begins. If you have configured the network in the kickstart file, the network is
enabled before this section is processed. To include a pre-installation script, type it in the text area.
Important anaconda no longer uses busybox
The version of anaconda in previous releases of Red Hat Enterprise Linux included a version
of busybox that provided shell commands in the pre-installation and post-installation
environments. The version of anaconda in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 no longer includes
busybox, and uses GNU bash commands instead.
Refer to Appendix G, Alternatives to busybox commands for more information.
To specify a scripting language to use to execute the script, select the Use an interpreter option
and enter the interpreter in the text box beside it. For example, /usr/bin/python2.6 can be
specified for a Python script. This option corresponds to using %pre --interpreter
/usr/bin/python2.6 in your kickstart file.
Only the most commonly used commands are available in the pre-installation environment:
arping, awk, basename, bash, bunzip2, bzcat, cat, chattr, chgrp, chmod, chown, chroot,
chvt, clear, cp, cpio, cut, date, dd, df, dirname, dmesg, du, e2fsck, e2label, echo, egrep,
eject, env, expr, false, fdisk, fgrep, find, fsck, fsck.ext2, fsck.ext3, ftp, grep,
gunzip, gzip, hdparm, head, hostname, hwclock, ifconfig, insmod, ip, ipcalc, kill,
killall, less, ln, load_policy, login, losetup, ls, lsattr, lsmod, lvm, md5sum,
mkdir, mke2fs, mkfs.ext2, mkfs.ext3, mknod, mkswap, mktemp, modprobe, more, mount, mt,
mv, nslookup, openvt, pidof, ping, ps, pwd, readlink, rm, rmdir, rmmod, route, rpm, sed,
sh, sha1sum, sleep, sort, swapoff, swapon, sync, tail, tar, tee, telnet, top, touch, true,
tune2fs, umount, uniq, vconfig, vi, wc, wget, xargs, zcat.
Important
Do not include the %pre command. It is added for you.
Note
The pre-installation script is run after the source media is mounted and stage 2 of the
bootloader has been loaded. For this reason it is not possible to change the source media in
the pre-installation script.
33.11. Post -Inst allat ion Script
489
Fi gure 33. 14 . Post - I nst al l at i on Scri pt
You can also add commands to execute on the system after the installation is completed. If the
network is properly configured in the kickstart file, the network is enabled, and the script can include
commands to access resources on the network. To include a post-installation script, type it in the text
area.
Important anaconda no longer uses busybox
The version of anaconda in previous releases of Red Hat Enterprise Linux included a version
of busybox that provided shell commands in the pre-installation and post-installation
environments. The version of anaconda in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 no longer includes
busybox, and uses GNU bash commands instead.
Refer to Appendix G, Alternatives to busybox commands for more information.
Important
Do not include the %post command. It is added for you.
For example, to change the message of the day for the newly installed system, add the following
command to the %post section:
echo "Hackers will be punished" > /etc/motd
Note
More examples can be found in Section 32.7.1, Examples .
490
33.11.1. Chroot Environment
To run the post-installation script outside of the chroot environment, click the checkbox next to this
option on the top of the Post-Installation window. This is equivalent to using the --nochroot
option in the %post section.
To make changes to the newly installed file system, within the post-installation section, but outside of
the chroot environment, you must prepend the directory name with /mnt/sysimage/.
For example, if you select Run outside of the chroot environment, the previous example
must be changed to the following:
echo "Hackers will be punished" > /mnt/sysimage/etc/motd
33.11.2. Use an Int erpret er
To specify a scripting language to use to execute the script, select the Use an interpreter option
and enter the interpreter in the text box beside it. For example, /usr/bin/python2.2 can be
specified for a Python script. This option corresponds to using %post --interpreter
/usr/bin/python2.2 in your kickstart file.
33.12. Saving t he File
To review the contents of the kickstart file after you have finished choosing your kickstart options,
select Fi l e => Previ ew from the pull-down menu.
491
Fi gure 33. 15. Previ ew
To save the kickstart file, click the Save to File button in the preview window. To save the file
without previewing it, select Fi l e => Save Fi l e or press Ctrl+S . A dialog box appears. Select where
to save the file.
After saving the file, refer to Section 32.10, Starting a Kickstart Installation for information on how to
start the kickstart installation.
492
Part V. After Installation
This part of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation Guide covers finalizing the installation, as well as
some installation-related tasks that you might perform at some time in the future. These include:
using a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation disc to rescue a damaged system.
upgrading to a new version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux from your computer.
Part V. Aft er Inst allat ion
493
Chapter 34. Firstboot
Important Firstboot is not available after text-mode installation
Fi rst boot is only available on systems after a graphical installation or after a kickstart
installation where a desktop and the X window system were installed and graphical login was
enabled. If you performed a text-mode installation or a kickstart installation that did not
include a desktop and the X window system, the f i rst boot configuration tool does not
appear.
Fi rst boot launches the first time that you start a new Red Hat Enterprise Linux system. Use
f i rst boot to configure the system for use before you log in.
Fi gure 34 . 1. Fi rst boot wel come screen
Click Forward to start f i rst boot .
34.1. License Informat ion
This screen displays the overall licensing terms for Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
494
Fi gure 34 . 2. Fi rst boot l i cense screen
If you agree to the terms of the license, select Yes, I agree to the License Agreement and
click Forward.
34.2. Configuring t he Subscript ion Service
The products installed on a system (including the operating system itself) are covered by
subscriptions. A subscription service is used to track registered systems, the products installed on
those systems, and the subscriptions attached to the system to cover those products.
The Subscription Management Registration screens identify which subscription service to
use and, by default, attach the best-matched subscriptions to the system.
34.2.1. Set Up Soft ware Updat es
The first step is to select whether to register the system immediately with a subscription service. To
register the system, select Yes, I'd like to register now, and click Forward.
495
Fi gure 34 . 3. Set Up Sof t ware Updat es
Note
Even if a system is not registered at firstboot, it can be registered with any of those three
subscription services later, using the Red Hat Subscription Manager tools .
More information about the Red Hat Subscription Manager tools can be found in the Red Hat
Subscription Management Guide.
34.2.2. Choose Service
Use the Choose Service screen to choose what kind of subscription service to register the system
with. Click Proxy Setup to configure a proxy server if necessary.
Red Hat Subscri pt i on Management
Any subscription service which uses the proper X.509 certificates to identify the system,
installed products, and attached subscriptions is part of Red Hat Subscription Management.
This includes Customer Portal Subscription Management (hosted services), Subscription
Asset Manager (on-premise subscription service and proxied content delivery), and
CloudForms System Engine (on-premise subscription and content delivery services).
[13]
496
This option is the default. Red Hat Subscription Management is strongly recommended for
organizations that do not run a local Satellite server.
Red Hat Net work ( RHN) Cl assi c
Select the Red Hat Network (RHN) Classic option to use the legacy systems-
management features of Red Hat Network. While RHN Classic can be used with Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 6.x systems, it is intended primarily for existing, legacy systems. It is
recommended that new installations use Red Hat Subscription Management.
An RHN Sat el l i t e or RHN Proxy
Use this option in environments with access to a local mirror of the Red Hat Network
content.
Fi gure 34 . 4 . Choose Servi ce
34.2.3. Subscript ion Management Regist rat ion
Red Hat uses X.509 certificates to identify installed products on a system, the subscriptions attached
to a system, and the system itself within the subscription service inventory. There are several different
subscription services which use and recognize certificate-base subscriptions, and a system can be
registered with any of them in firstboot:
Customer Portal Subscription Management, hosted services from Red Hat (the default)
Subscription Asset Manager, an on-premise subscription server which proxies content delivery
back to the Customer Portal' s services
CloudForms System Engine, an on-premise service which handles both subscription services and
content delivery
497
The specific type of subscription/content service does not need to be selected; all three server types
(Customer Portal Subscription Management, Subscription Asset Manager, and CloudForms System
Engine) are within Red Hat Subscription Management and use the same types of service APIs. The
only thing that needs to be identified is the hostname of the service to connect to and then the
appropriate user credentials for that service.
1. To identify which subscription server to use for registration, enter the hostname of the service.
The default service is Customer Portal Subscription Management, with the hostname
subscription.rhn.redhat.com. To use a different subscription service, such as
Subscription Asset Manager, enter the hostname of the local server.
Fi gure 34 . 5. Subscri pt i on Servi ce Sel ect i on
2. Click Forward.
3. Enter the user credentials f or t he gi ven subscri pt i on servi ce to log in.
498
Fi gure 34 . 6 . Subscri pt i on Management Regi st rat i on
IMPORTANT: Use the correct user credentials
The user credentials to use depend on the subscription service. When registering with
the Customer Portal, use the Red Hat Network credentials for the administrator or
company account.
However, for Subscription Asset Manager or CloudForms System engine, the user
account to use is created within the on-premise service and probably is not the same
as the Customer Portal user account.
If you have lost your login or password for the Customer Portal, recover them from
https://www.redhat.com/wapps/sso/lostPassword.html. For lost login or password information
for Subscription Asset Manager or CloudForms System Engine, contact your local
administrator.
4. Set the system name for the host. This is anything which uniquely and clearly identifies the
system within the subscription service inventory. This is usually the hostname or fully-
qualified domain name of the machine, but it can be any string.
5. Optional. Set whether subscriptions should be set manually after registration. By default, this
checkbox is unchecked so that the best-matched subscriptions are automatically applied to
the system. Selecting this checkbox means that subscriptions must be added to the system
manually after firstboot registration is complete. (Even if subscriptions are auto-attached,
additional subscriptions can be added to the system later using the local Subscription
Manager tools.)
6. When registration begins, firstboot scans for organizations and environments (sub-domains
within the organization) to which to register the system.
499
Fi gure 34 . 7. Organi zat i on Scan
IT environments that use Customer Portal Subscription Management have only a single
organization, so no further configuration is necessary. IT infrastructures that use a local
subscription service like Subscription Asset Manager might have multiple organizations
configured, and those organizations may have multiple environments configured within them.
If multiple organizations are detected, Subscription Manager prompts to select the one to join.
500
Fi gure 34 . 8. Organi zat i on Sel ect i on
7. If you decided to let Subscription Manager automatically attach subscriptions to the system
(the default), then the system scans for the subscriptions to attach as part of the registration
process.
Fi gure 34 . 9 . Aut o- Sel ect i ng Subscri pt i ons
When registration is complete, the Subscription Manager reports the applied service level for
the system based on the information in the selected subscription and the specific
subscription that has been attached to the new system. This subscription selection must be
confirmed to complete the registration process.
501
Fi gure 34 . 10. Conf i rm Subscri pt i on
If you selected to apply subscriptions later, then that part of the registration process is
skipped, and the Subscription Manager screen in firstboot simply instructs you to attach
subscriptions later.
Fi gure 34 . 11. Not e t o Sel ect Subscri pt i ons Lat er
8. Click Forward to move to the next configuration area for firstboot, user setup.
34.3. Creat e User
502
Create a user account for yourself with this screen. Always use this account to log in to your Red Hat
Enterprise Linux system, rather than using the root account.
Fi gure 34 . 12. Fi rst boot creat e user screen
Enter a user name and your full name, and then enter your chosen password. Type your password
once more in the Confirm Password box to ensure that it is correct.
To configure Red Hat Enterprise Linux to use network services for authentication of user information,
click Use Network Login. Refer to Section 34.3.1, Authentication Configuration for further
details.
Important Create at least one user account
If you do not create at least one user account in this step, you will not be able to log in to the
Red Hat Enterprise Linux graphical environment. If you skipped this step during installation,
refer to Section 10.4.2, Booting into a Graphical Environment .
503
Note Creating Extra User Accounts
To add additional user accounts to your system after the installation is complete, choose
Syst em Admi ni st rat i on Users & Groups.
34.3.1. Aut hent icat ion Configurat ion
If you clicked Use Network Login on the Create User screen, you must now specify how users
are to be authenticated on the system. Use the drop-down menu to select from the following types of
user database:
Local account s onl y (for use when the user database on the network is not accessible)
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
NI S (Network Information Service)
Wi nbi nd (for use with Microsoft Active Directory)
504
Fi gure 34 . 13. Fi rst boot Aut hent i cat i on Conf i gurat i on screen
When you select the type of user database appropriate for your network, you must provide additional
details relevant to that database type. For example, if you select LDAP, you must specify the base
distinguished name for LDAP searches, and the address of the LDAP server. You must also select an
Authentication Method relevant to the type of user database that you chose, for example, a
Kerberos password, LDAP password, or NIS password.
The Advanced Options tab lets you enable other authentication mechanisms, including
fingerprint readers, smart cards, and local access control in /etc/security/access.conf.
For more information, refer to Authentication Configuration in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment
Guide.
Fi gure 34 . 14 . Fi rst boot aut hent i cat i on Advanced Opt i ons screen
34.4. Dat e and Time
Use this screen to adjust the date and time of the system clock. To change these settings after
installation, click Syst em Admi ni st rat i on Dat e & Ti me.
505
Fi gure 34 . 15. Fi rst boot dat e and t i me screen
Click the Synchronize date and time over the network checkbox to configure your system
to use Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to maintain the accuracy of the clock. NTP provides time
synchronization service to computers on the same network. Many public NTP servers are available
on the Internet.
34.5. Kdump
Use this screen to select whether or not to use Kdump on this system. Kdump is a kernel crash
dumping mechanism. In the event of a system crash, Kdump will capture information from your
system that can be invaluable in determining the cause of the crash.
Note that if you select this option, you will need to reserve memory for Kdump and that this memory
will not be available for any other purpose.
506
Fi gure 34 . 16 . Kdump screen
If you do not want to use Kdump on this system, click Finish. If you want to use Kdump, select the
Enable kdump option, then select an amount of memory to reserve for Kdump and click Finish.
507
Fi gure 34 . 17. Kdump enabl ed
[13] Systems can al so be regi stered wi th Satel l i te or RHN Cl assi c. For Satel l i te i nformati on, see the
Satel l i te documentati on. For i nformati on on usi ng RHN Cl assi c, see the appendi x i n the Red Hat
Subscription Management Guide.
508
Chapter 35. Your Next Steps
35.1. Updat ing Your Syst em
Red Hat releases updated software packages for Red Hat Enterprise Linux throughout the support
period of each version. Updated packages add new features, improve reliability, resolve bugs, or
remove security vulnerabilities. To ensure the security of your system, update regularly, and as soon
as possible after Red Hat issues a security announcement.
35.1.1. Driver Updat e rpm Packages
Occasionally, when a new piece of hardware is not yet supported in the kernel that you have
installed, Red Hat or a hardware vendor might make a driver update available. Although you can
install driver updates during the installation process (refer to Chapter 6, Updating Drivers During
Installation on Intel and AMD Systems for Intel and AMD systems and Chapter 13, Updating Drivers During
Installation on IBM Power Systems Servers for IBM Power Systems servers) we recommend that you do
this only for devices that are essential to carry out the installation. In all other cases, complete the
installation first, and then add support for the device with a driver update rpm package as described
in this section.
Do not install a driver update rpm unless you are certain that your system requires it. Installing a
driver update on a system for which it was not intended can cause system difficulties.
To see a list of driver updates already installed on your system, click Syst em Admi ni st rat i on
Add/Remove Sof t ware on your desktop, and enter the root password if prompted for it. Click the
Search tab, enter the word kmod- (notice the final -) and click Search.
Fi gure 35. 1. Li st i ng I nst al l ed Dri ver Updat e RPM Packages
Alternatively, you can use the command line, as follows:
$ rpm -qa | egrep ^kmod-
509
Note the - on the end of kmod. This will list all installed packages that begin with kmod-, which
should include all driver updates that are currently installed on your system. Additional drivers
provided by third-party update software are not listed in this output. Contact the third-party vendor
for details.
To install a new driver update rpm package:
1. Download the driver update rpm package from the location specified by Red Hat or your
hardware vendor. The package file name will begin with kmod (short for kernel module) and
have a form similar to this example:
kmod-foo-1.05-2.el6.6.i686
In the example, the driver update rpm package supplies a driver update named f oo with
version number 1.05-2 for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6, on i686 systems.
Driver update rpm packages are signed packages, and like all other software packages, they
are automatically validated at install time. To perform this step manually, type the following at
a command line:
$ rpm --checksig -v filename.rpm
where filename.rpm is the driver update rpm package file name. This verifies the package
against using the standard Red Hat GPG package signing key that is already installed on
any Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 system. If you need this key for verification purposes on
another system, you can can obtain it from: https://access.redhat.com/security/team/key/
2. Locate and double-click the file that you downloaded. The system might prompt you for the
root password, after which it will present the following Installing Packages box:
Fi gure 35. 2. The i nst al l i ng packages box
Click Apply to complete the package installation.
Alternatively, you can install a driver update manually on the command line:
$ rpm -ivh kmod-foo-1.05-2.el6.6.i686
3. Whether you used a graphical install, or a command line install, reboot your system to ensure
your system is using the new driver.
If Red Hat ships a kernel errata update before the next release of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, your
system will continue to use the driver updates that you have installed. There is no need to re-install
driver updates following an errata update. Generally, when Red Hat releases a new version of Red
510
Hat Enterprise Linux, all driver updates for the previous version are incorporated in the new version.
However, if it was not possible to include a particular driver, you will need to perform another driver
update when you install the new version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux. In this case, Red Hat or your
hardware party vendor will inform you of the location of the update.
35.2. Finishing an Upgrade
System Updates Recommended
Once you have rebooted your system after performing an upgrade, you should also perform a
manual system update. Consult Section 35.1, Updating Your System for more information.
If you chose to upgrade your system from a previous release rather than perform a fresh installation,
you may want to examine the differences in the package set. Section 9.12.2, Upgrading Using the
Installer , Section 16.14.2, Upgrading Using the Installer , or Section 23.12.1, Upgrading Using
the Installer (depending on your system architecture) advised you to create a package listing for
your original system. You can now use that listing to determine how to bring your new system close
to the original system state.
Most software repository configurations are stored in packages that end with the term release.
Check the old package list for the repositories that were installed:
awk '{print $1}' ~/old-pkglist.txt | grep 'release$'
If necessary, retrieve and install these packages from their original sources on the Internet. Follow the
instructions at the originating site to install the repository configuration packages for use by yum and
other software management tools on your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system.
Then run the following commands to make a list of other missing software packages:
awk '{print $1}' ~/old-pkglist.txt | sort | uniq > ~/old-pkgnames.txt
rpm -qa --qf '%{NAME}\n' | sort | uniq > ~/new-pkgnames.txt
diff -u ~/old-pkgnames.txt ~/new-pkgnames.txt | grep '^-' | sed 's/^-
//' > /tmp/pkgs-to-install.txt
Now use the file /tmp/pkgs-to-install.txt with the yum command to restore most or all of your
old software:
su -c 'yum install `cat /tmp/pkgs-to-install.txt`'
Missing Software
Due to changes in package complements between Red Hat Enterprise Linux releases, it is
possible this method may not restore all the software on your system. You can use the routines
above to again compare the software on your system, and remedy any problems you find.
35.3. Swit ching t o a Graphical Login
511
Important Access to Software Repositories Might Be Required
To switch to a graphical environment, you might need to install extra software from a
repository. You can access Red Hat Enterprise Linux repositories with your Red Hat Network
subscription through the Internet or use a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD as a
repository. Refer to Section 35.3.1, Enabling Access to Software Repositories from the
Command Line .
Important This section does not apply to System z
To use a graphical user interface on System z, use vncserver instead.
If you installed using a text login and wish to switch to a graphical login, follow this procedure.
1. If you are not already root, switch users to the root account:
su -
Provide the administrator password when prompted.
2. If you have not already done so, install the X Wi ndow Syst em and a graphical desktop
environment. For example, to install the GNOME desktop environment, use this command:
yum groupinstall "X Window System" Desktop
To install the KDE desktop environment, use:
yum groupinstall "X Window System" "KDE Desktop"
This step may take some time as your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system downloads and
installs additional software. You may be asked to provide the installation media depending
on your original installation source.
3. Run the following command to edit the /etc/inittab file:
vi /etc/inittab
4. Press the I key to enter insert mode.
5. Find the line that includes the text initdefault. Change the numeral 3 to 5.
6. Type :wq and press the Enter key to save the file and exit the vi text editor.
Reboot the system using the reboot command. Your system will restart and present a graphical
login.
If you encounter any problems with the graphical login, refer to Chapter 10, Troubleshooting Installation
on an Intel or AMD System.
35.3.1. Enabling Access t o Soft ware Reposit ories from t he Command Line
512
The usual way to install new software on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system is through a software
repository. You can access Red Hat Enterprise Linux repositories through the Internet with your Red
Hat Network subscription, or use a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD as a repository. The
software that you access through online repositories is more up-to-date than what is available on an
installation DVD. Furthermore, configuring a Red Hat Enterprise Linux system to access online
repositories is generally easier than configuring the system to use an installation DVD as a
repository, as long as you have an existing, wired network connection available.
35.3.1.1. Enabling Access t o Soft ware Reposit ories Through t he Int ernet
If you supplied your Red Hat Network subscription number during the installation process, your
system is already configured to access Red Hat Enterprise Linux repositories through the Internet.
Therefore, all you must do is ensure that the system can access the Internet. If you have an existing,
wired network connection available, this process is straightforward:
su -
2. Ensure that the system is plugged into your network. Note that your network might be as small
as two devices a computer and an external modem/router.
3. Run system-config-network. The network configuration tool starts and displays the
Select Action screen.
4. Select Devi ce conf i gurat i on and press Enter. The network configuration tool displays the
Select A Device screen with a list of network interfaces present on your system. The first
interface is named eth0 by default.
5. Select a network interface to configure and press Enter. The network configuration tool takes
you to the Network Configuration screen.
6. You can manually configure a static IP, gateway, and DNS servers on this screen or leave
these fields blank to accept the default values. When you have chosen a configuration, select
OK, and press Enter. The network configuration tool takes you back to the Select A
Device screen.
7. Select Save and press Enter. The network configuration tool takes you back to the Select
Action screen.
8. Select Save&Quit and press Enter. The network configuration tool saves your settings and
exits.
9. Run ifup interface, where interface is the network interface that you configured with the
network configuration tool. For example, run ifup eth0 to start eth0.
Configuration of dial-up or wireless Internet connections is more complicated and beyond the scope
of this guide.
35.3.1.2. Using a Red Hat Ent erprise Linux Inst allat ion DVD as a Soft ware
Reposit ory
To use a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD as a software repository, either in the form of a
physical disc, or in the form of an ISO image file.
1. If you are using a physical DVD, insert the disc into your computer.
513
su -
3. Create a mount point for the repository:
mkdir -p /path/to/repo
where /path/to/repo is a location for the repository, for example, /mnt/repo
4. Mount the DVD on the mount point that you just created. If you are using a physical disc, you
need to know the device name of your DVD drive. You can find the names of any CD or DVD
drives on your system with the command cat /proc/sys/dev/cdrom/info. The first CD
or DVD drive on the system is typically named sr0. When you know the device name, mount
the DVD:
mount -r -t iso9660 /dev/device_name /path/to/repo
For example: mount -r -t iso9660 /dev/sr0 /mnt/repo
If you are using an ISO image file of a disc, mount the image file like this:
mount -r -t iso9660 -o loop /path/to/image/file.iso /path/to/repo
For example: mount -r -o loop /home/root/Downloads/RHEL6.6-Server-i386-
DVD.iso /mnt/repo
Note that you can only mount an image file if the storage device that holds the image file is
itself mounted. For example, if the image file is stored on a hard drive that is not mounted
automatically when the system boots, you must mount the hard drive before you mount an
image file stored on that hard drive. Consider a hard drive named /dev/sdb that is not
automatically mounted at boot time and which has an image file stored in a directory named
Downloads on its first partition:
mkdir /mnt/temp
mount /dev/sdb1 /mnt/temp
mkdir /mnt/repo
mount -r -t iso9660 -o loop mount -r -o loop
/mnt/temp/Downloads/RHEL6.6-Server-i386-DVD.iso /mnt/repo
If you are not sure whether a storage device is mounted, run the mount command to obtain a
list of current mounts. If you are not sure of the device name or partition number of a storage
device, run fdisk -l and try to identify it in the output.
5. Create a new repo file in the /etc/yum.repos.d/ directory. The name of the file is not
important, as long as it ends in .repo. For example, dvd.repo is an obvious choice.
a. Choose a name for the repo file and open it as a new file with the vi text editor. For
example:
vi /etc/yum.repos.d/dvd.repo
b. Press the I key to enter insert mode.
c. Supply the details of the repository. For example:
[dvd]
514
baseurl=file:///mnt/repo/Server
enabled=1
gpgcheck=1
gpgkey=file:///etc/pki/rpm-gpg/RPM-GPG-KEY-redhat-release
The name of the repository is specified in square brackets in this example, [dvd].
The name is not important, but you should choose something that is meaningful and
recognizable.
The line that specifies the baseurl should contain the path to the mount point that
you created previously, suffixed with /Server for a Red Hat Enterprise Linux server
installation DVD, or with /Client for a Red Hat Enterprise Linux client installation
DVD.
d. Press the Esc key to exit insert mode.
e. Type :wq and press the Enter key to save the file and exit the vi text editor.
f. After installing or upgrading software from the DVD, delete the repo file that you
created.
35.4. Inst alling Packages Wit h yum
The yum utility allows you to install packages on your system.
To install a single package and all of its non-installed dependencies, enter a command in the
following form:
yum install package_name
If you are installing packages on a multilib system, such as an AMD64 or Intel64 machine, you can
specify the architecture of the package (as long as it is available in an enabled repository) by
appending .arch to the package name. For example, to install the foobar package for i686, type:
~]# yum install foobar.i686
To install packages when your system cannot access a network or the Internet, consider enabling the
installation DVD or ISO image file as an installation repository (refer to Section 35.3.1.2, Using a
Red Hat Enterprise Linux Installation DVD as a Software Repository ). Choose the appropriate
installation media if you intend to install packages for a different architecture. For example, to install
a 32-bit package on a 64-bit system, enable the 32-bit media as an installation repository.
For more information on installing packages, refer to the Yum chapter in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
Deployment Guide.
515
Chapter 36. Basic System Recovery
When things go wrong, there are ways to fix problems. However, these methods require that you
understand the system well. This chapter describes how to boot into rescue mode, single-user mode,
and emergency mode, where you can use your own knowledge to repair the system.
36.1. Rescue Mode
36.1.1. Common Problems
You might need to boot into one of these recovery modes for any of the following reasons:
You are unable to boot normally into Red Hat Enterprise Linux (runlevel 3 or 5).
You are having hardware or software problems, and you want to get a few important files off of
your system' s hard drive.
You forgot the root password.
36.1.1.1. Unable t o Boot int o Red Hat Ent erprise Linux
This problem is often caused by the installation of another operating system after you have installed
Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Some other operating systems assume that you have no other operating
system(s) on your computer. They overwrite the Master Boot Record (MBR) that originally contained
the GRUB boot loader. If the boot loader is overwritten in this manner, you cannot boot Red Hat
Enterprise Linux unless you can get into rescue mode and reconfigure the boot loader.
Another common problem occurs when using a partitioning tool to resize a partition or create a new
partition from free space after installation, and it changes the order of your partitions. If the partition
number of your / partition changes, the boot loader might not be able to find it to mount the partition.
To fix this problem, boot in rescue mode and modify the /boot/grub/grub.conf file.
For instructions on how to reinstall the GRUB boot loader from a rescue environment, refer to
Section 36.1.2.1, Reinstalling the Boot Loader .
36.1.1.2. Hardware/Soft ware Problems
This category includes a wide variety of different situations. Two examples include failing hard drives
and specifying an invalid root device or kernel in the boot loader configuration file. If either of these
occur, you might not be able to reboot into Red Hat Enterprise Linux. However, if you boot into one of
the system recovery modes, you might be able to resolve the problem or at least get copies of your
most important files.
36.1.1.3. Root Password
What can you do if you forget your root password? To reset it to a different password, boot into
rescue mode or single-user mode, and use the passwd command to reset the root password.
36.1.2. Boot ing int o Rescue Mode
Rescue mode provides the ability to boot a small Red Hat Enterprise Linux environment entirely from
CD-ROM, or some other boot method, instead of the system' s hard drive.
516
As the name implies, rescue mode is provided to rescue you from something. During normal
operation, your Red Hat Enterprise Linux system uses files located on your system' s hard drive to do
everything run programs, store your files, and more.
However, there may be times when you are unable to get Red Hat Enterprise Linux running completely
enough to access files on your system' s hard drive. Using rescue mode, you can access the files
stored on your system' s hard drive, even if you cannot actually run Red Hat Enterprise Linux from
that hard drive.
To boot into rescue mode, you must be able to boot the system using one of the following methods
:
By booting the system from a boot CD-ROM or DVD.
By booting the system from other installation boot media, such as USB flash devices.
By booting the system from the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation DVD.
Once you have booted using one of the described methods, add the keyword rescue as a kernel
parameter. For example, for an x86 system, type the following command at the installation boot
prompt:
linux rescue
If your system requires a third-party driver provided on a driver disc to boot, load the driver with the
additional option dd:
linux rescue dd
For more information on using a driver disc at boot time, refer to Section 6.3.3, Use a Boot Option to
Specify a Driver Update Disk for x86 systems or Section 13.3.3, Use a Boot Option to Specify a
Driver Update Disk for Power Systems servers.
If a driver that is part of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 distribution prevents the system from
booting, blacklist that driver with the rdblacklist option. For example, to boot into rescue mode
without the foobar driver, run:
linux rescue rdblacklist=foobar
You are prompted to answer a few basic questions, including which language to use. It also prompts
you to select where a valid rescue image is located. Select from Local CD-ROM, Hard Drive, NFS
image, FTP, or HTTP. The location selected must contain a valid installation tree, and the
installation tree must be for the same version of Red Hat Enterprise Linux as the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux disk from which you booted. If you used a boot CD-ROM or other media to start rescue mode,
the installation tree must be from the same tree from which the media was created. For more
information about how to setup an installation tree on a hard drive, NFS server, FTP server, or HTTP
server, refer to the earlier section of this guide.
If you select a rescue image that does not require a network connection, you are asked whether or
not you want to establish a network connection. A network connection is useful if you need to backup
files to a different computer or install some RPM packages from a shared network location, for
example.
The following message is displayed:
The rescue environment will now attempt to find your Linux installation and mount it
under the directory /mnt/sysimage. You can then make any changes required to your
[14]
517
system. If you want to proceed with this step choose ' Continue' . You can also choose
to mount your file systems read-only instead of read-write by choosing ' Read-only' . If
for some reason this process fails you can choose ' Skip' and this step will be skipped
and you will go directly to a command shell.
If you select Continue, it attempts to mount your file system under the directory /mnt/sysimage/. If
it fails to mount a partition, it notifies you. If you select Read-Only, it attempts to mount your file
system under the directory /mnt/sysimage/, but in read-only mode. If you select Skip, your file
system is not mounted. Choose Skip if you think your file system is corrupted.
Once you have your system in rescue mode, a prompt appears on VC (virtual console) 1 and VC 2
(use the Ctrl-Alt-F1 key combination to access VC 1 and Ctrl-Alt-F2 to access VC 2):
sh-3.00b#
If you selected Continue to mount your partitions automatically and they were mounted
successfully, you are in single-user mode.
Even if your file system is mounted, the default root partition while in rescue mode is a temporary root
partition, not the root partition of the file system used during normal user mode (runlevel 3 or 5). If
you selected to mount your file system and it mounted successfully, you can change the root partition
of the rescue mode environment to the root partition of your file system by executing the following
command:
chroot /mnt/sysimage
This is useful if you need to run commands such as rpm that require your root partition to be
mounted as /. To exit the chroot environment, type exit to return to the prompt.
If you selected Skip, you can still try to mount a partition or LVM2 logical volume manually inside
rescue mode by creating a directory such as /foo, and typing the following command:
mount -t ext4 /dev/mapper/VolGroup00-LogVol02 /foo
In the above command, /foo is a directory that you have created and /dev/mapper/VolGroup00-
LogVol02 is the LVM2 logical volume you want to mount. If the partition is of type ext2 or ext3
replace ext4 with ext2 or ext3 respectively.
If you do not know the names of all physical partitions, use the following command to list them:
fdisk -l
If you do not know the names of all LVM2 physical volumes, volume groups, or logical volumes, use
the pvdisplay, vgdisplay or lvdisplay commands, respectively.
From the prompt, you can run many useful commands, such as:
ssh, scp, and ping if the network is started
dump and restore for users with tape drives
parted and fdisk for managing partitions
rpm for installing or upgrading software
vi for editing text files
518
36.1.2.1. Reinst alling t he Boot Loader
In many cases, the GRUB boot loader can mistakenly be deleted, corrupted, or replaced by other
operating systems.
The following steps detail the process on how GRUB is reinstalled on the master boot record:
Boot the system from an installation boot medium.
Type linux rescue at the installation boot prompt to enter the rescue environment.
Type chroot /mnt/sysimage to mount the root partition.
Type /sbin/grub-install bootpart to reinstall the GRUB boot loader, where bootpart is the
boot partition (typically, /dev/sda).
Review the /boot/grub/grub.conf file, as additional entries may be needed for GRUB to
control additional operating systems.
Reboot the system.
36.1.3. Boot ing int o Single-User Mode
One of the advantages of single-user mode is that you do not need a boot CD-ROM; however, it does
not give you the option to mount the file systems as read-only or not mount them at all.
If your system boots, but does not allow you to log in when it has completed booting, try single-user
mode.
In single-user mode, your computer boots to runlevel 1. Your local file systems are mounted, but your
network is not activated. You have a usable system maintenance shell. Unlike rescue mode, single-
user mode automatically tries to mount your file system. Do not use single-user mode if your file system
cannot be mounted successfully. You cannot use single-user mode if the runlevel 1 configuration on
your system is corrupted.
On an x86 system using GRUB, use the following steps to boot into single-user mode:
1. At the GRUB splash screen at boot time, press any key to enter the GRUB interactive menu.
2. Select Red Hat Enterprise Linux with the version of the kernel that you wish to boot
and type a to append the line.
3. Go to the end of the line and type single as a separate word (press the Spacebar and then
type single). Press Enter to exit edit mode.
36.1.4. Boot ing int o Emergency Mode
In emergency mode, you are booted into the most minimal environment possible. The root file system
is mounted read-only and almost nothing is set up. The main advantage of emergency mode over
single-user mode is that the init files are not loaded. If init is corrupted or not working, you can
still mount file systems to recover data that could be lost during a re-installation.
To boot into emergency mode, use the same method as described for single-user mode in
Section 36.1.3, Booting into Single-User Mode with one exception, replace the keyword single
with the keyword emergency.
36.2. Rescue Mode on Power Syst ems servers
519
You can use the installation disks in rescue mode, in case your system does not boot. Rescue mode
gives you access to the disk partitions on your system so you can make any changes necessary to
rescue your installation.
After the Language Selection screen (Section 15.2, Language Selection ), the installation program
attempts to mount the disk partitions on your system. It then presents you with a shell prompt where
you can make the changes you need. These changes may include storing the kernel and command
line into the IPL source, as described in the Installation Complete section (Section 16.21, Installation
Complete ).
When your changes are complete, you can exit the shell using exit 0. This causes a reboot from
the C side. To reboot from the A or B side or from *NWSSTG, you should vary off the system instead
of exiting the shell.
36.2.1. Special Considerat ions for Accessing t he SCSI Ut ilit ies from Rescue
Mode
If your system uses Native DASD disks, you may need access to the SCSI utilities from rescue mode.
These utilities are located on the driver disc CD. The driver disc CD cannot be mounted from rescue
mode unless special steps are taken. These steps are described below.
If you have a second CD-ROM drive assigned to your Linux system, you can mount the driver disc
CD in the second drive.
If you have only one CD-ROM drive, you must set up an NFS boot, using the following steps:
1. Boot from the CD-ROM with the linux rescue askmethod command. This allows you to
manually select NFS as the source of your rescue media instead of defaulting to the CD-ROM
drive.
2. Copy the first installation disc onto a file system of another Linux system.
3. Make this copy of the installation disc available through NFS or FTP.
4. Vary off or power down the system you need to rescue. Set its IPL parameters as instructed for
booting the Installation discs in rescue mode, except that the IPL source should point to the
copy of boot.img on your IFS (from step 1, above).
5. Make sure the installation disc is not in your DVD drive.
6. IPL the Linux system.
7. Follow the prompts as described in Section 36.2, Rescue Mode on Power Systems servers .
An additional prompt for the installation source appears. Select NFS or FTP (as appropriate)
and complete the following network configuration screen.
8. When the Linux system has booted into rescue mode, the CD-ROM drive is available for use
and you can mount the driver media to access the SCSI utilities.
36.3. Using Rescue Mode t o Fix or Work Around Driver Problems
A malfunctioning or missing driver can prevent a system from booting normally. Rescue mode
provides an environment in which you can add, remove, or replace a driver even when the system
fails to boot. Wherever possible, we recommend that you use the RPM package manager to remove
malfunctioning drivers or to add updated or missing drivers. If you cannot remove a malfunctioning
driver for some reason, you can instead blacklist the driver so that it does not load at boot time.
Note that when you install a driver from a driver disc, the driver disc updates all initramfs images on
520
the system to use this driver. If a problem with a driver prevents a system from booting, you cannot
rely on booting the system from another initramfs image.
36.3.1. Using RPM t o Add, Remove, or Replace a Driver
In rescue mode, you can use RPM to install, remove, or update packages from the installed system,
even though you did not boot the installed system. To remove a malfunctioning driver:
1. Boot the system into rescue mode with the linux rescue command at the boot prompt, or
the linux rescue dd command if you need to load a third-party driver from a driver disc.
Follow the instructions in Section 36.1.2, Booting into Rescue Mode and do not choose to
mount the installed system as read only.
2. Change the root directory to /mnt/sysimage/:
chroot /mnt/sysimage/
3. Use the rpm -e command to remove the driver package. For example, to remove the kmod-
foobar driver package, run:
rpm -e kmod-foobar
4. Exit the chroot environment:
exit
Installing a driver is a similar process, but the RPM package that contains the driver must be
available on the system.
1. Boot the system into rescue mode with the linux rescue command at the boot prompt, or
the linux rescue dd command if you need to load a third-party driver from a driver disc.
Follow the instructions in Section 36.1.2, Booting into Rescue Mode and do not choose to
mount the installed system as read only.
2. Make the RPM package that contains the driver available. For example, mount a CD or USB
flash drive and copy the RPM package to a location of your choice under /mnt/sysimage/,
for example: /mnt/sysimage/root/drivers/.
3. Change the root directory to /mnt/sysimage/:
chroot /mnt/sysimage/
4. Use the rpm -ivh command to install the driver package. For example, to install the kmod-
foobar driver package from /root/drivers/, run:
rpm -ivh /root/drivers/kmod-foobar-1.2.04.17.el6.i686
Note that /root/drivers/ in this chroot environment is
/mnt/sysimage/root/drivers/ in the original rescue environment.
When you have finished removing and installing drivers, reboot the system.
36.3.2. Blacklist ing a Driver
521
As described in Section 36.1.2, Booting into Rescue Mode , the rdblacklist kernel option
blacklists a driver at boot time. To continue to blacklist the driver on subsequent boots, add the
rdblacklist option to the line in /boot/grub/grub.conf that describes your kernel. To
blacklist the driver when the root device is mounted, add a blacklist entry in a file under
/etc/modprobe.d/.
1. Boot the system into rescue mode with the command linux rescue
rdblacklist=name_of_driver, where name_of_driver is the driver that you need to
blacklist. Follow the instructions in Section 36.1.2, Booting into Rescue Mode and do not
choose to mount the installed system as read only.
2. Open the /mnt/sysimage/boot/grub/grub.conf file with the vi text editor:
vi /mnt/sysimage/boot/grub/grub.conf
3. Identify the default kernel used to boot the system. Each kernel is specified in the grub.conf
file with a group of lines that begins title. The default kernel is specified by the default
parameter near the start of the file. A value of 0 refers to the kernel described in the first group
of lines, a value of 1 refers to the kernel described in the second group, and higher values
refer to subsequent kernels in turn.
4. Edit the kernel line of the group to include the option rdblacklist=name_of_driver,
where name_of_driver is the driver that you need to blacklist. For example, to blacklist the
driver named f oobar:
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.32-71.18-2.el6.i686 ro root=/dev/sda1 rhgb
quiet rdblacklist=foobar
5. Save the file and exit vi .
6. Create a new file under /etc/modprobe.d/ that contains the command blacklist
name_of_driver. Give the file a descriptive name that will help you find it in future, and use
the filename extension .conf. For example, to continue to blacklist the driver f oobar when
the root device is mounted, run:
echo "blacklist foobar" >>
/mnt/sysimage/etc/modprobe.d/blacklist-foobar.conf
7. Reboot the system. You no longer need to supply rdblacklist manually as a kernel option
until you next update the default kernel. If you update the default kernel before the problem
with the driver has been fixed, you must edit grub.conf again to ensure that the faulty driver
is not loaded at boot time.
[14] Refer to the earl i er secti ons of thi s gui de for more detai l s.
522
Chapter 37. Upgrading Your Current System
The procedure for performing an in-place upgrade on your current system is handled by the
following utilities:
The Preupgrade Assi st ant , which is a diagnostics utility that assesses your current system
and identifies potential problems you might encounter during and/or after the upgrade.
The Red Hat Upgrade Tool utility, which is used to upgrade a system from Red Hat Enterprise
Linux to version 7.
The current documentation for testing this procedure can be found in the following Red Hat
Knowledgebase article: https://access.redhat.com/site/solutions/637583
Chapt er 37. Upgrading Your Current Syst em
523
Chapter 38. Unregistering from Red Hat Subscription
Management Services
A system can only be registered with one subscription service. If you need to change which service
your system is registered with or need to delete the registration in general, then the method to
unregister depends on which type of subscription service the system was originally registered with.
38.1. Syst ems Regist ered wit h Red Hat Subscript ion Management
Several different subscription services use the same, certificate-based framework to identify systems,
installed products, and attached subscriptions. These services are Customer Portal Subscription
Management (hosted), Subscription Asset Manager (on-premise subscription service), and
CloudForms System Engine (on-premise subscription and content delivery services). These are all
part of Red Hat Subscription Management.
For all services within Red Hat Subscription Management, the systems are managed with the Red Hat
Subscription Manager client tools.
To unregister a system registered with a Red Hat Subscription Management server, use the
unregister command.
[root@server ~]# subscription-manager unregister --username=name
Note
This command must be run as root.
38.2. Syst ems Regist ered wit h RHN Classic
There is no command to specifically unregister a system which is registered with RHN Classic. To
delete the registration locally, remove the file with the system ID assigned to the system when it was
registered:
[root@server ~]# rm -rf /etc/sysconfig/rhn/systemid
TIP
If the system is being unregistered in order to register it with Red Hat Subscription
Management (Customer Portal Subscription Management, Subscription Asset Manager, or
CloudForms System Engine), then instead of unregistering the system, use the rhn-migrate-
classic-to-rhsm script to migrate the system and all its attached subscriptions to the
specified Red Hat Subscription Management server.
Using the migration scripts is covered in the Subscription Management Guide.
38.3. Syst ems Regist ered wit h Sat ellit e
524
For a Satellite registration on the server, locate the system in the Systems tab and delete the profile.
Chapt er 38. Unregist ering from Red Hat Subscript ion Management Services
525
Chapter 39. Removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux From x86-based
Systems
These instructions may destroy data!
If you have data from Red Hat Enterprise Linux that you want to keep, back it up before you
proceed. Write your data to CD, DVD, external hard disk, or other storage device.
As a precaution, also back up data from any other operating systems that are installed on the
same computer. Mistakes do happen and can result in the loss of all your data.
If you back up data from Red Hat Enterprise Linux to be used later in another operating
system, make sure that the storage medium or device is readable by that other operating
system. For example, without extra third-party software, Microsoft Windows cannot read an
external hard drive that you have formatted with Red Hat Enterprise Linux to use the ext2, ext3,
or ext4 file system.
To uninstall Red Hat Enterprise Linux from your x86-based system, you must remove the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux boot loader information from your master boot record (MBR) and remove any
partitions that contain the operating system. The method for removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux from
your computer varies, depending on whether Red Hat Enterprise Linux is the only operating system
installed on the computer, or whether the computer is configured to dual-boot Red Hat Enterprise
Linux and another operating system.
These instructions cannot cover every possible computer configuration. If your computer is
configured to boot three or more operating systems, or has a highly-customized partition scheme,
use the following sections as a general guide to partition removal with the various tools described. In
these situations, you will also need to learn to configure your chosen bootloader. See Appendix E,
The GRUB Boot Loader for a general introduction to the subject, but detailed instructions are beyond
the scope of this document.
Legacy versions of Microsoft operating systems
Fdi sk, the disk partitioning tool provided with MS-DOS and Microsoft Windows, is unable to
remove the file systems used by Red Hat Enterprise Linux. MS-DOS and versions of Windows
prior to Windows XP (except for Windows 2000) have no other means of removing or
modifying partitions. Refer to Section 39.3, Replacing Red Hat Enterprise Linux with MS-DOS
or Legacy Versions of Microsoft Windows for alternative removal methods for use with MS-
DOS and these versions of Windows.
39.1. Red Hat Ent erprise Linux is t he Only Operat ing Syst em on t he
Comput er
If Red Hat Enterprise Linux is the only operating system on your computer, use the installation media
for the replacement operating system to remove Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Examples of installation
media include the Windows XP installation CD, Windows Vista installation DVD, or the installation
CD, CDs, or DVD of another Linux distribution.
Note that some manufacturers of factory-built computers pre-installed with Microsoft Windows do not
526
supply the Windows installation CD or DVD with the computer. The manufacturer may instead have
supplied their own "system restore disc", or have included software with the computer that allowed
you to create your own "system restore disc" when you first started the computer. In some cases, the
system restore software is stored on a separate partition on the system' s hard drive. If you cannot
identify the installation media for an operating system that was pre-installed on your computer,
consult the documentation supplied with the machine, or contact the manufacturer.
When you have located the installation media for your chosen operating system:
1. Back up any data that you want to keep.
2. Shut down the computer.
3. Boot your computer with the installation disc for the replacement operating system.
4. Follow the prompts presented during the installation process. Windows, OS X, and most
Linux installation discs allow you to manually partition your hard drive during the installation
process, or will offer you the option to remove all partitions and start with a fresh partition
scheme. At this point, remove any existing partitions that the installation software detects or
allow the installer to remove the partitions automatically. "System restore" media for
computers pre-installed with Microsoft Windows might create a default partition layout
automatically without input from you.
Warning
If your computer has system restore software stored on a partition on a hard drive, take
care when removing partitions while installing an operating system from other media.
Under these circumstances, you could destroy the partition holding the system restore
software.
39.2. Your Comput er Dual-boot s Red Hat Ent erprise Linux and Anot her
Operat ing Syst em
If your computer is configured to dual-boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux and another operating system,
removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux without removing the partitions containing the other operating
system and its data is more complicated. Specific instructions for a number of operating systems are
set out below. To keep neither Red Hat Enterprise Linux nor the other operating system, follow the
steps described for a computer with only Red Hat Enterprise Linux installed: Section 39.1, Red Hat
Enterprise Linux is the Only Operating System on the Computer
39.2.1. Your Comput er Dual-boot s Red Hat Ent erprise Linux and a Microsoft
Windows Operat ing Syst em
39.2.1.1. Windows 2000, Windows Server 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server
2003
527
Warning
Once you commence this process, your computer may be left in an unbootable state until you
complete the entire set of instructions. Carefully read the steps below before beginning the
removal process. Consider opening these instructions on another computer or printing them
so that you have access to them at all times during the process.
This procedure relies on the Wi ndows Recovery Consol e that loads from the Windows
installation disk, so you will not be able to complete the procedure without access to this disk.
If you start this procedure and do not complete it, you could leave your computer in a
condition where you cannot boot it. The "system restore disk" supplied with some factory-built
computers that are sold with Windows pre-installed on them might not include the Wi ndows
Recovery Consol e.
During the process outlined in these instructions, the Wi ndows Recovery Consol e will
prompt you for the Administrator password for your Windows system. Do not follow these
instructions unless you know the Administrator password for your system or are certain that
an Administrator password has never been created, even by the computer manufacturer.
1. Remove the Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions
a. Boot your computer into your Microsoft Windows environment.
b. Click Start>Run..., type diskmgmt.msc and press Enter. The Di sk
Management tool opens.
The tool displays a graphical representation of your disk, with bars representing each
partition. The first partition is usually labeled NTFS and corresponds to your C:
drive. At least two Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions will be visible. Windows will not
display a file system type for these partitions, but may allocate drive letters to some of
them.
c. Right-click on one of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions, then click Delete
Partition and click Yes to confirm the deletion. Repeat this process for the other
Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions on your system. As you delete partitions, Windows
labels the space on the hard drive previously occupied by those partitions as
unallocated.
2. Enable Windows to use the space on your hard drive vacated by Red Hat Enterprise Linux
(optional)
Note
This step is not required to remove Red Hat Enterprise Linux from your computer.
However, if you skip this step, you will leave part of your hard drive' s storage capacity
unusable by Windows. Depending on your configuration, this might be a significant
portion of the storage capacity of the drive.
Decide whether to extend an existing Windows partition to use the extra space, or create a
new Windows partition in that space. If you create new a Windows partition, Windows will
allocate a new drive letter to it and will interact with it as if it is a separate hard drive.
Ext endi ng an Exi st i ng Wi ndows Part i t i on
528
Note
The di skpart tool used in this step is installed as part of the Windows XP and
Windows 2003 operating systems. If you are performing this step on a computer
running Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2000, you can download a version of
di skpart for your operating system from the Microsoft website.
a. Click Start>Run..., type diskpart and press Enter. A command window
appears.
b. Type list volume and press Enter. Di skpart displays a list of the partitions on
your system with a volume number, its drive letter, volume label, filesystem type, and
size. Identify the Windows partition that you would like to use to occupy the space
vacated on your hard drive by Red Hat Enterprise Linux and take note of its volume
number (for example, your Windows C: drive might be "Volume 0").
c. Type select volume N (where N is the volume number for the Windows partition
that you want to extend) and press Enter. Now type extend and press Enter.
Di skpart now extends your chosen partition to fill the remaining space on your hard
drive. It will notify you when the operation is complete.
Addi ng a New Wi ndows Part i t i on
a. In the Disk Management window, right-click on disk space that Windows labels as
unallocated and select New Partition from the menu. The New Part i t i on
Wi zard starts.
b. Follow the prompts presented by the New Part i t i on Wi zard. If you accept the default
options, the tool will create a new partition that fills all available space on the hard
drive, assigns it the next available drive letter, and formats it with the NTFS file system.
3. Restore the Windows bootloader
a. Insert the Windows installation disk and restart your computer. As your computer
starts, the following message will appear on the screen for a few seconds:
Press any key to boot from CD
Press any key while the message is still showing and the Windows installation
software will load.
b. When the Welcome to Setup screen appears, you can start the Wi ndows
Recovery Consol e. The procedure is slightly different on different versions of
Windows:
On Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2000, press the R key, then the C key.
On Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, press the R key.
c. The Wi ndows Recovery Consol e scans your hard drives for Windows
installations, and assigns a number to each one. It displays a list of Windows
installations and prompts you to select one. Type the number corresponding to the
Windows installation that you want to restore.
529
d. The Wi ndows Recovery Consol e prompts you for the Administrator password for
your Windows installation. Type the Administrator password and press the Enter key.
If there is no administrator password for this system, press only the Enter key.
e. At the prompt, type the command fixmbr and press the Enter. The f i xmbr tool now
restores the Master Boot Record for the system.
f. When the prompt reappears, type exit and press the Enter key.
g. Your computer will restart and boot your Windows operating system.
39.2.1.2. Windows Vist a and Windows Server 2008
Warning
Once you commence this process, your computer may be left in an unbootable state until you
complete the entire set of instructions. Carefully read the steps below before beginning the
removal process. Consider opening these instructions on another computer or printing them
so that you have access to them at all times during the process.
This procedure relies on the Wi ndows Recovery Envi ronment that loads from the Windows
installation disk and you will not be able to complete the procedure without access to this disk.
If you start this procedure and do not complete it, you could leave your computer in a
condition where you cannot boot it. The "system restore disk" supplied with some factory-built
computers that are sold with Windows pre-installed on them might not include the Wi ndows
Recovery Envi ronment .
1. Remove the Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions
a. Boot your computer into your Microsoft Windows environment.
b. Click Start then type diskmgmt.msc into the Start Search box and press Enter.
The Di sk Management tool opens.
The tool displays a graphical representation of your disk, with bars representing each
partition. The first partition is usually labeled NTFS and corresponds to your C:
drive. At least two Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions will be visible. Windows will not
display a file system type for these partitions, but may allocate drive letters to some of
them.
c. Right-click on one of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions, then click Delete
Partition and click Yes to confirm the deletion. Repeat this process for the other
Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions on your system. As you delete partitions, Windows
labels the space on the hard drive previously occupied by those partitions as
unallocated.
2. Enable Windows to use the space on your hard drive vacated by Red Hat Enterprise Linux
(optional)
530
Note
unusable by Windows. Depending on your configuration, this might be a significant
portion of the storage capacity of the drive.
Decide whether to extend an existing Windows partition to use the extra space, or create a
new Windows partition in that space. If you create new a Windows partition, Windows will
allocate a new drive letter to it and will interact with it as if it is a separate hard drive.
Ext endi ng an Exi st i ng Wi ndows Part i t i on
a. In the Di sk Management window, right-click on the Windows partition that you want
to extend and select Extend Volume from the menu. The Ext end Vol ume Wi zard
opens.
b. Follow the prompts presented by the Ext end Vol ume Wi zard. If you accept the
defaults that it offers you, the tool will extend the selected volume to fill all available
space on the hard drive.
Addi ng a New Wi ndows Part i t i on
a. In the Disk Management window, right-click on disk space that Windows labels as
unallocated and select New Simple Volume from the menu. The New Si mpl e
Vol ume Wi zard starts.
b. Follow the prompts presented by the New Si mpl e Vol ume Wi zard. If you accept the
default options, the tool will create a new partition that fills all available space on the
hard drive, assigns it the next available drive letter, and formats it with the NTFS file
system.
3. Restore the Windows bootloader
a. Insert the Windows installation disk and restart your computer. As your computer
starts, the following message will appear on the screen for a few seconds:
Press any key to boot from CD or DVD
Press any key while the message is still showing and the Windows installation
software will load.
b. In the Install Windows dialog, select a language, time and currency format, and
keyboard type. Click Next
c. Click Repair your computer.
d. The Wi ndows Recovery Envi ronment (WRE) shows you the Windows installations
that it can detect on your system. Select the installation that you want to restore, then
click Next.
e. Click Command prompt. A command window will open.
f. Type bootrec /fixmbr and press Enter.
g. When the prompt reappears, close the command window, then click Restart.
531
h. Your computer will restart and boot your Windows operating system.
39.2.2. Your comput er dual-boot s Red Hat Ent erprise Linux and a different
Linux dist ribut ion
Because of the differences between the many different Linux distributions, these instructions are a
general guide only. Specific details vary according to the configuration of your particular system and
the Linux distribution that dual-boots with Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
1. Remove Red Hat Ent erpri se Li nux part i t i ons
a. Boot your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.
b. As root or with sudo, run mount . Note the partitions that are mounted. In particular,
note the partition that is mounted as the root of the filesystem. The output of mount on
a system where the root of the filesystem is on a standard partition such as
/dev/sda2 might resemble:
/dev/sda2 on / type ext4 (rw)
proc on /proc type proc (rw)
sysfs on /sys type sysfs (rw)
devpts on /dev/pts type devpts (rw,gid=5,mode=620)
tmpfs on /dev/shm type tmpfs
(rw,rootcontext="system_u:object_r:tmpfs_t:s0")
/dev/sda1 on /boot type ext4 (rw)
none on /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc type binfmt_misc (rw)
sunrpc on /var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs type rpc_pipefs (rw)
The output of mount on a system where the root of the filesystem is on a logical
volume might resemble:
/dev/mapper/VolGroup00-LogVol00 on / type ext4 (rw)
proc on /proc type proc (rw)
sysfs on /sys type sysfs (rw)
devpts on /dev/pts type devpts (rw,gid=5,mode=620)
tmpfs on /dev/shm type tmpfs
(rw,rootcontext="system_u:object_r:tmpfs_t:s0")
/dev/sda1 on /boot type ext4 (rw)
none on /proc/sys/fs/binfmt_misc type binfmt_misc (rw)
sunrpc on /var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs type rpc_pipefs (rw)
c. Ensure that any data on this system that you still require is backed up to another
system or storage location.
d. Shut down the system and boot the Linux distribution that you want to keep on the
system.
e. As root or with sudo, run mount . If any of the partitions that you previously noted as
used for Red Hat Enterprise Linux are mounted, review the contents of these partitions.
If you no longer require the contents of these partitions, unmount them with the
umount command.
f. Remove any unwanted and unnecessary partitions, for example, with f di sk for
standard partitions, or l vremove and vgremove to remove logical volumes and
volume groups.
532
2. Remove Red Hat Ent erpri se Li nux ent ri es f rom your boot l oader
Example only
These instructions assume that your system uses the GRUB bootloader. If you use a
different bootloader (such as LI LO) consult the documentation for that software to
identify and remove Red Hat Enterprise Linux entries from its list of boot targets and to
ensure that your default operating system is correctly specified.
a. At the command line, type su - and press Enter. When the system prompts you for
the root password, type the password and press Enter.
b. Type gedit /boot/grub/grub.conf and press Enter. This opens the
grub.conf file in the gedi t text editor.
c. A typical Red Hat Enterprise Linux entry in the grub.conf file consists of four lines:
Exampl e 39 . 1. Exampl e Red Hat Ent erpri se Li nux ent ry i n grub.conf
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux (2.6.32.130.el6.i686)
root (hd0,1)
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.32.130.el6.i686 ro root=UUID=04a07c13-e6bf-6d5a-b207-
002689545705 rhgb quiet
initrd /initrd-2.6.32.130.el6.i686.img
Depending on the configuration of your system, there may be multiple Red Hat
Enterprise Linux entries in grub.conf, each corresponding to a different version of
the Linux kernel. Delete each of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux entries from the file.
d. Grub.conf contains a line that specifies the default operating system to boot, in the
format default=N where N is a number equal to or greater than 0. If N is set to 0,
GRUB will boot the first operating system in the list. If N is set to 1, it will boot the
second operating system, and so forth.
Identify the entry for the operating system that you want GRUB to boot by default and
note its place in the order within the list.
Make sure that the default= line contains the number one below the number of your
chosen default operating system in the list.
Save the updated grub.conf file and close gedi t
3. Make space avai l abl e t o your operat i ng syst em
Note
unusable by your other Linux operating system. Depending on your configuration, this
might be a significant portion of the storage capacity of the drive.
533
Note
To carry out this step, you require live media for a Linux distribution, for example, the
Fedora Live CD or the Knoppix DVD.
The method to make the space freed by removing the Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions
available to your other Linux operating system differs, depending on whether your chosen
operating system is installed on disk partitions configured to use Logical Volume
Management (LVM) or not.
I f you do not use LVM
Boot your computer from Linux live media, and install part ed if it is not already
present.
As root or with sudo, run part ed disk, where disk is the device name of the disk
that contains a partition that you want to resize, for example, /dev/sda.
At the (parted) prompt, enter print. The part ed tool displays information
about the partitions on your system, including their partition numbers, their sizes,
and their positions on the disk.
At the (parted) prompt, enter resize number start end, where number is
the partition number, start is the location on the disk at which the partition begins,
and end is the location on the disk at which you want the partition to end. Use the
start position that you previously obtained with the print command, and refer to
the part ed documentation for different ways to specify the end parameter.
When part ed finishes resizing the partition, enter quit at the (parted) prompt.
Run e2fsck partition, where partition is the partition that you just resized. For
example, if you just resized /dev/sda3, enter e2fsck /dev/sda3.
Linux now checks the file system of the newly-resized partition.
When the file system check finishes, type resize2fs partition at a command
line and press Enter, where partition is the partition that you just resized. For
example, if you just resized /dev/sda3, type resize2fs /dev/sda3.
Linux now resizes your file system to fill the newly-resized partition.
Restart your computer. The extra space is now available to your Linux installation.
I f you use LVM
Boot your computer from Linux live media and install f di sk and l vm2 if they are
not already present.
Creat e a new part i t i on i n t he f ree space on t he di sk
As root or with sudo, run f di sk disk, where disk is the device name of the
disk where you want to create new space, for example, /dev/sda.
At the prompt Command (m for help): , enter n to create a new
partition. Refer to the f di sk documentation for options.
Change t he part i t i on t ype i dent i f i er
534
At the prompt Command (m for help): , enter t to change a partition
type.
At the prompt Partition number (1-4): , type the number of the
partition that you just created. For example, if you just created partition
/dev/sda3, type the number 3 and press Enter. This identifies the
partition whose type f di sk will change.
At the prompt Hex code (type L to list codes): , enter 8e to
create a Linux LVM partition.
At the prompt Command (m for help): , enter w to write the changes to
disk and exit f di sk.
Expand t he vol ume group
At the command prompt, type lvm and press Enter to start the l vm2 tool.
At the lvm> prompt, type pvcreate partition and press Enter, where
partition is the partition that you recently created. For example, pvcreate
/dev/sda3. This creates /dev/sda3 as a physical volume in LVM.
At the lvm> prompt, type vgextend VolumeGroup partition and
press Enter, where VolumeGroup is the LVM volume group on which Linux
is installed and partition is the partition that you recently created. For
example, if Linux is installed on /dev/VolumeGroup00, you would type
vgextend /dev/VolumeGroup00 /dev/sda3 to extend that volume
group to include the physical volume at /dev/sda3.
At the lvm> prompt, type lvextend -l +100%FREE LogVol and
press Enter, where LogVol is the logical volume that contains your Linux
filesystem. For example, to extend LogVol00 to fill the newly-available
space in its volume group, VolGroup00, type lvextend -l
+100%FREE /dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00.
At the lvm> prompt, type exit and press Enter to exit l vm2
Type e2fsck LogVol at the command line and press Enter, where LogVol is the
logical volume that you just resized. For example, if you just resized
/dev/VolumeGroup00/LogVol00, you would type
e2fsck /dev/VolumeGroup00/LogVol00.
Linux now checks the file system of the newly-resized logical volume.
When the file system check finishes, type resize2fs LogVol at a command line
and press Enter, where LogVol is the partition that you just resized. For example, if
you just resized /dev/VolumeGroup00/LogVol00, you would type
resize2fs /dev/VolumeGroup00/LogVol00.
Linux now resizes your file system to fill the newly-resized logical volume.
Restart your computer. The extra space is now available to your Linux installation.
39.3. Replacing Red Hat Ent erprise Linux wit h MS-DOS or Legacy
Versions of Microsoft Windows
535
In DOS and Windows, use the Windows fdisk utility to create a new MBR with the undocumented flag
/mbr. This ONLY rewrites the MBR to boot the primary DOS partition. The command should look like
the following:
fdisk /mbr
If you need to remove Linux from a hard drive and have attempted to do this with the default DOS
(Windows) fdisk, you will experience the Partitions exist but they do not exist problem. The best way to
remove non-DOS partitions is with a tool that understands partitions other than DOS.
To begin, insert the Red Hat Enterprise Linux DVD and boot your system. When the boot prompt
appears, type: linux rescue. This starts the rescue mode program.
You are prompted for your keyboard and language requirements. Enter these values as you would
during the installation of Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
Next, a screen appears telling you that the program attempts to find a Red Hat Enterprise Linux install
to rescue. Select Skip on this screen.
After selecting Skip, you are given a command prompt where you can access the partitions you
would like to remove.
First, type the command list-harddrives. This command lists all hard drives on your system that
are recognizable by the installation program, as well as their sizes in megabytes.
Warning
Be careful to remove only the necessary Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions. Removing other
partitions could result in data loss or a corrupted system environment.
To remove partitions, use the partitioning utility parted. Start parted, where /dev/hda is the device
on which to remove the partition:
parted /dev/hda
Using the print command, view the current partition table to determine the minor number of the
partition to remove:
print
The print command also displays the partition' s type (such as linux-swap, ext2, ext3, ext4 and so
on). Knowing the type of the partition helps you in determining whether to remove the partition.
Remove the partition with the command rm. For example, to remove the partition with minor number 3:
rm 3
Important
The changes start taking place as soon as you press [Enter], so review the command before
committing to it.
536
After removing the partition, use the print command to confirm that it is removed from the partition
table.
Once you have removed the Linux partitions and made all of the changes you need to make, type
quit to quit parted.
After quitting parted, type exit at the boot prompt to exit rescue mode and reboot your system,
instead of continuing with the installation. The system should reboot automatically. If it does not, you
can reboot your computer using Control+Alt+Delete .
537
Chapter 40. Removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux from IBM
System z
If you want to delete the existing operating system data, first, if any Linux disks contain sensitive
data, ensure that you destroy the data according to your security policy. To proceed you can
consider these options:
Overwrite the disks with a new installation.
Start a new installation and use the partitioning dialog (refer to Section 23.13, Disk Partitioning
Setup ) to format the partitions where Linux was installed. After the Write changes to disk
dialog described in Section 23.16, Write Changes to Disk , exit the installer.
Make the DASD or SCSI disk where Linux was installed visible from another system, then delete
the data. However, this might require special privileges. Ask your system administrator for advice.
You can use Linux commands such as dasdfmt (DASD only), parted, mke2fs or dd. For more
details about the commands, refer to the respective man pages.
40.1. Running a Different Operat ing Syst em on your z/VM Guest or
LPAR
If you want to boot from a DASD or SCSI disk different from where the currently installed system
resides under a z/VM guest virtual machine or an LPAR, shut down the Red Hat Enterprise Linux
installed and use the desired disk, where another Linux instance is installed, to boot from. This
leaves the contents of the installed system unchanged.
538
Part VI. Technical Appendices
The appendices in this section do not contain instructions that tell you how to install Red Hat
Enterprise Linux. Instead, they provide technical background that you might find helpful to
understand the options that Red Hat Enterprise Linux offers you at various points in the installation
process.
Part VI. T echnical Appendices
539
An Introduction to Disk Partitions
Note
This appendix is not necessarily applicable to non-x86-based architectures. However, the
general concepts mentioned here may apply.
This appendix is not necessarily applicable to non-x86-based architectures. However, the general
concepts mentioned here may apply.
If you are reasonably comfortable with disk partitions, you could skip ahead to Section A.1.5,
Making Room For Red Hat Enterprise Linux , for more information on the process of freeing up disk
space to prepare for a Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation. This section also discusses the partition
naming scheme used by Linux systems, sharing disk space with other operating systems, and related
topics.
A.1. Hard Disk Basic Concept s
Hard disks perform a very simple function they store data and reliably retrieve it on command.
When discussing issues such as disk partitioning, it is important to know a bit about the underlying
hardware. Unfortunately, it is easy to become bogged down in details. Therefore, this appendix uses
a simplified diagram of a disk drive to help explain what is really happening when a disk drive is
partitioned. Figure A.1, An Unused Disk Drive , shows a brand-new, unused disk drive.
Fi gure A. 1. An Unused Di sk Dri ve
Not much to look at, is it? But if we are talking about disk drives on a basic level, it is adequate. Say
that we would like to store some data on this drive. As things stand now, it will not work. There is
something we need to do first.
A.1.1. It is Not What You Writ e, it is How You Writ e It
Experienced computer users probably got this one on the first try. We need to format the drive.
Formatting (usually known as "making a file system") writes information to the drive, creating order
out of the empty space in an unformatted drive.
540
Fi gure A. 2. Di sk Dri ve wi t h a Fi l e Syst em
As Figure A.2, Disk Drive with a File System , implies, the order imposed by a file system involves
some trade-offs:
A small percentage of the drive' s available space is used to store file system-related data and can
be considered as overhead.
A file system splits the remaining space into small, consistently-sized segments. For Linux, these
segments are known as blocks.
Given that file systems make things like directories and files possible, these trade-offs are usually
seen as a small price to pay.
It is also worth noting that there is no single, universal file system. As Figure A.3, Disk Drive with a
Different File System , shows, a disk drive may have one of many different file systems written on it. As
you might guess, different file systems tend to be incompatible; that is, an operating system that
supports one file system (or a handful of related file system types) may not support another. This last
statement is not a hard-and-fast rule, however. For example, Red Hat Enterprise Linux supports a
wide variety of file systems (including many commonly used by other operating systems), making
data interchange between different file systems easy.
Fi gure A. 3. Di sk Dri ve wi t h a Di f f erent Fi l e Syst em
Of course, writing a file system to disk is only the beginning. The goal of this process is to actually
store and retrieve data. Let us take a look at our drive after some files have been written to it.
Fi gure A. 4 . Di sk Dri ve wi t h Dat a Wri t t en t o I t
As Figure A.4, Disk Drive with Data Written to It , shows, some of the previously-empty blocks are
now holding data. However, by just looking at this picture, we cannot determine exactly how many
files reside on this drive. There may only be one file or many, as all files use at least one block and
some files use multiple blocks. Another important point to note is that the used blocks do not have to
form a contiguous region; used and unused blocks may be interspersed. This is known as
fragmentation. Fragmentation can play a part when attempting to resize an existing partition.
[15]
541
As with most computer-related technologies, disk drives changed over time after their introduction. In
particular, they got bigger. Not larger in physical size, but bigger in their capacity to store
information. And, this additional capacity drove a fundamental change in the way disk drives were
used.
A.1.2. Part it ions: Turning One Drive Int o Many
Disk drives can be divided into partitions. Each partition can be accessed as if it was a separate disk.
This is done through the addition of a partition table.
There are several reasons for allocating disk space into separate disk partitions, for example:
Logical separation of the operating system data from the user data
Ability to use different file systems
Ability to run multiple operating systems on one machine
There are currently two partitioning layout standards for physical hard disks: Master Boot Record
(MBR) and GUID Partition Table (GPT). MBR is an older method of disk partitioning used with BIOS-
based computers. GPT is a newer partitioning layout that is a part of the Unified Extensible Firmware
Interface (UEFI). This section and Section A.1.3, Partitions Within Partitions An Overview of
Extended Partitions mainly describe the Master Boot Record (MBR) disk partitioning scheme. For
information about the GUID Partition Table (GPT) partitioning layout, see Section A.1.4, GUID
Partition Table (GPT) .
Note
While the diagrams in this chapter show the partition table as being separate from the actual
disk drive, this is not entirely accurate. In reality, the partition table is stored at the very start of
the disk, before any file system or user data. But for clarity, they are separate in our diagrams.
Fi gure A. 5. Di sk Dri ve wi t h Part i t i on Tabl e
As Figure A.5, Disk Drive with Partition Table shows, the partition table is divided into four sections
or four primary partitions. A primary partition is a partition on a hard drive that can contain only one
logical drive (or section). Each section can hold the information necessary to define a single
partition, meaning that the partition table can define no more than four partitions.
Each partition table entry contains several important characteristics of the partition:
The points on the disk where the partition starts and ends
Whether the partition is "active"
The partition' s type
Let us take a closer look at each of these characteristics. The starting and ending points actually
542
define the partition' s size and location on the disk. The "active" flag is used by some operating
systems' boot loaders. In other words, the operating system in the partition that is marked "active" is
booted.
The partition' s type can be a bit confusing. The type is a number that identifies the partition' s
anticipated usage. If that statement sounds a bit vague, that is because the meaning of the partition
type is a bit vague. Some operating systems use the partition type to denote a specific file system
type, to flag the partition as being associated with a particular operating system, to indicate that the
partition contains a bootable operating system, or some combination of the three.
By this point, you might be wondering how all this additional complexity is normally used. Refer to
Figure A.6, Disk Drive With Single Partition , for an example.
Fi gure A. 6 . Di sk Dri ve Wi t h Si ngl e Part i t i on
In many cases, there is only a single partition spanning the entire disk, essentially duplicating the
method used before partitions. The partition table has only one entry used, and it points to the start
of the partition.
We have labeled this partition as being of the "DOS" type. Although it is only one of several possible
partition types listed in Table A.1, Partition Types , it is adequate for the purposes of this
discussion.
Table A.1, Partition Types , contains a listing of some popular (and obscure) partition types, along
with their hexadecimal numeric values.
Tabl e A. 1. Part i t i on Types
Part i t i on Type Val ue Part i t i on Type Val ue
Empty 00 Novell Netware 386 65
DOS 12-bit FAT 01 PIC/IX 75
XENIX root 02 Old MINIX 80
XENIX usr 03 Linux/MINUX 81
DOS 16-bit <=32M 04 Linux swap 82
Extended 05 Linux native 83
DOS 16-bit >=32 06 Linux extended 85
OS/2 HPFS 07 Amoeba 93
AIX 08 Amoeba BBT 94
AIX bootable 09 BSD/386 a5
OS/2 Boot Manager 0a OpenBSD a6
Win95 FAT32 0b NEXTSTEP a7
Win95 FAT32 (LBA) 0c BSDI fs b7
Win95 FAT16 (LBA) 0e BSDI swap b8
Win95 Extended (LBA) 0f Syrinx c7
Venix 80286 40 CP/M db
Novell 51 DOS access e1
543
PReP Boot 41 DOS R/O e3
GNU HURD 63 DOS secondary f2
Novell Netware 286 64 BBT ff
Part i t i on Type Val ue Part i t i on Type Val ue
A.1.3. Part it ions Wit hin Part it ions An Overview of Ext ended Part it ions
Of course, over time it became obvious that four partitions would not be enough. As disk drives
continued to grow, it became more and more likely that a person could configure four reasonably-
sized partitions and still have disk space left over. There needed to be some way of creating more
partitions.
Enter the extended partition. As you may have noticed in Table A.1, Partition Types , there is an
"Extended" partition type. It is this partition type that is at the heart of extended partitions.
When a partition is created and its type is set to "Extended," an extended partition table is created. In
essence, the extended partition is like a disk drive in its own right it has a partition table that points
to one or more partitions (now called logical partitions, as opposed to the four primary partitions)
contained entirely within the extended partition itself. Figure A.7, Disk Drive With Extended Partition ,
shows a disk drive with one primary partition and one extended partition containing two logical
partitions (along with some unpartitioned free space).
Fi gure A. 7. Di sk Dri ve Wi t h Ext ended Part i t i on
As this figure implies, there is a difference between primary and logical partitions there can only be
four primary partitions, but there is no fixed limit to the number of logical partitions that can exist.
However, due to the way in which partitions are accessed in Linux, you should avoid defining more
than 12 logical partitions on a single disk drive.
Now that we have discussed partitions in general, let us review how to use this knowledge to install
A.1.4. GUID Part it ion Table (GPT)
GUID Partition Table (GPT) is a newer partitioning scheme based on using Globally Unique
Identifiers (GUID). GPT was developed to cope with limitations of the MBR partition table, especially
with the limited maximum addressable storage space of a disk. Unlike MBR, which is unable to
address storage space larger than 2.2 terabytes, GPT can be used with hard disks larger than this;
the maximum addressable disk size is 2.2 zettabytes. In addition, GPT by default supports creating
up to 128 primary partitions. This number could be extended by allocating more space to the
partition table.
GPT disks use logical block addressing (LBA) and the partition layout is as follows:
544
To preserve backward compatibility with MBR disks, the first sector (LBA 0) of GPT is reserved for
MBR data and it is called protective MBR .
The primary GPT header begins on the second logical block (LBA 1) of the device. The header
contains the disk GUID, the location of the primary partition table, the location of the secondary
GPT header, and CRC32 checksums of itself and the primary partition table. It also specifies the
number of partition entries of the table.
The primary GPT table includes, by default, 128 partition entries, each with an entry size 128 bytes,
its partition type GUID and unique partition GUID.
The secondary GPT table is identical to the primary GPT table. It is used mainly as a backup table
for recovery in case the primary partition table is corrupted.
The secondary GPT header is located on the last logical sector of the disk and it can be used to
recover GPT information in case the primary header is corrupted. It contains the disk GUID, the
location of the secondary partition table and the primary GPT header, CRC32 checksums of itself
and the secondary partition table, and the number of possible partition entries.
Important
There must be a BIOS boot partition for the boot loader to be installed successfully onto a disk
that contains a GPT (GUID Partition Table). This includes disks initialized by Anaconda. If
the disk already contains a BIOS boot partition, it can be reused.
A.1.5. Making Room For Red Hat Ent erprise Linux
The following list presents some possible scenarios you may face when attempting to repartition your
hard disk:
Unpartitioned free space is available
An unused partition is available
Free space in an actively used partition is available
Let us look at each scenario in order.
Note
Keep in mind that the following illustrations are simplified in the interest of clarity and do not
reflect the exact partition layout that you encounter when actually installing Red Hat Enterprise
Linux.
A.1.5.1. Using Unpart it ioned Free Space
In this situation, the partitions already defined do not span the entire hard disk, leaving unallocated
space that is not part of any defined partition. Figure A.8, Disk Drive with Unpartitioned Free
Space , shows what this might look like.
545
Fi gure A. 8. Di sk Dri ve wi t h Unpart i t i oned Free Space
In Figure A.8, Disk Drive with Unpartitioned Free Space , 1 represents an undefined partition with
unallocated space and 2 represents a defined partition with allocated space.
If you think about it, an unused hard disk also falls into this category. The only difference is that all
the space is not part of any defined partition.
In any case, you can create the necessary partitions from the unused space. Unfortunately, this
scenario, although very simple, is not very likely (unless you have just purchased a new disk just for
Red Hat Enterprise Linux). Most pre-installed operating systems are configured to take up all
available space on a disk drive (refer to Section A.1.5.3, Using Free Space from an Active
Partition ).
Next, we will discuss a slightly more common situation.
A.1.5.2. Using Space from an Unused Part it ion
In this case, maybe you have one or more partitions that you do not use any longer. Perhaps you
have dabbled with another operating system in the past, and the partition(s) you dedicated to it never
seem to be used anymore. Figure A.9, Disk Drive With an Unused Partition , illustrates such a
situation.
Fi gure A. 9 . Di sk Dri ve Wi t h an Unused Part i t i on
In Figure A.9, Disk Drive With an Unused Partition , 1 represents an unused partition and 2
represents reallocating an unused partition for Linux.
If you find yourself in this situation, you can use the space allocated to the unused partition. You first
must delete the partition and then create the appropriate Linux partition(s) in its place. You can delete
the unused partition and manually create new partitions during the installation process.
A.1.5.3. Using Free Space from an Act ive Part it ion
This is the most common situation. It is also, unfortunately, the hardest to handle. The main problem
is that, even if you have enough free space, it is presently allocated to a partition that is already in
use. If you purchased a computer with pre-installed software, the hard disk most likely has one
massive partition holding the operating system and data.
546
Aside from adding a new hard drive to your system, you have two choices:
Destructive Repartitioning
Basically, you delete the single large partition and create several smaller ones. As you
might imagine, any data you had in the original partition is destroyed. This means that
making a complete backup is necessary. For your own sake, make two backups, use
verification (if available in your backup software), and try to read data from your backup
before you delete the partition.
Warning
If there was an operating system of some type installed on that partition, it needs to
be reinstalled as well. Be aware that some computers sold with pre-installed
operating systems may not include the CD-ROM media to reinstall the original
operating system. The best time to notice if this applies to your system is before you
destroy your original partition and its operating system installation.
After creating a smaller partition for your existing operating system, you can reinstall any
software, restore your data, and start your Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation.
Figure A.10, Disk Drive Being Destructively Repartitioned shows this being done.
Fi gure A. 10. Di sk Dri ve Bei ng Dest ruct i vel y Repart i t i oned
In Figure A.10, Disk Drive Being Destructively Repartitioned , 1 represents before and 2
represents after.
Warning
As Figure A.10, Disk Drive Being Destructively Repartitioned , shows, any data
present in the original partition is lost without proper backup!
Non-Destructive Repartitioning
Here, you run a program that does the seemingly impossible: it makes a big partition
smaller without losing any of the files stored in that partition. Many people have found this
method to be reliable and trouble-free. What software should you use to perform this feat?
There are several disk management software products on the market. Do some research to
find the one that is best for your situation.
While the process of non-destructive repartitioning is rather straightforward, there are a
number of steps involved:
Compress and backup existing data
547
Resize the existing partition
Create new partition(s)
Next we will look at each step in a bit more detail.
A. 1. 5. 3. 1. Compress exi st i ng dat a
As Figure A.11, Disk Drive Being Compressed , shows, the first step is to compress the data in your
existing partition. The reason for doing this is to rearrange the data such that it maximizes the
available free space at the "end" of the partition.
Fi gure A. 11. Di sk Dri ve Bei ng Compressed
In Figure A.11, Disk Drive Being Compressed , 1 represents before and 2 represents after.
This step is crucial. Without it, the location of your data could prevent the partition from being resized
to the extent desired. Note also that, for one reason or another, some data cannot be moved. If this is
the case (and it severely restricts the size of your new partition(s)), you may be forced to destructively
repartition your disk.
A. 1. 5. 3. 2. Resi ze t he exi st i ng part i t i on
Figure A.12, Disk Drive with Partition Resized , shows the actual resizing process. While the actual
result of the resizing operation varies depending on the software used, in most cases the newly freed
space is used to create an unformatted partition of the same type as the original partition.
Fi gure A. 12. Di sk Dri ve wi t h Part i t i on Resi zed
In Figure A.12, Disk Drive with Partition Resized , 1 represents before and 2 represents after.
It is important to understand what the resizing software you use does with the newly freed space, so
that you can take the appropriate steps. In the case we have illustrated, it would be best to delete the
new DOS partition and create the appropriate Linux partition(s).
A. 1. 5. 3. 3. Creat e new part i t i on( s)
548
As the previous step implied, it may or may not be necessary to create new partitions. However,
unless your resizing software is Linux-aware, it is likely that you must delete the partition that was
created during the resizing process. Figure A.13, Disk Drive with Final Partition Configuration ,
shows this being done.
Fi gure A. 13. Di sk Dri ve wi t h Fi nal Part i t i on Conf i gurat i on
In Figure A.13, Disk Drive with Final Partition Configuration , 1 represents before and 2 represents
after.
Note
The following information is specific to x86-based computers only.
As a convenience to our customers, we provide the parted utility. This is a freely available program
that can resize partitions.
If you decide to repartition your hard drive with parted, it is important that you be familiar with disk
storage and that you perform a backup of your computer data. You should make two copies of all the
important data on your computer. These copies should be to removable media (such as tape, CD-
ROM, or diskettes), and you should make sure they are readable before proceeding.
Should you decide to use parted, be aware that after parted runs you are left with two partitions:
the one you resized, and the one parted created out of the newly freed space. If your goal is to use
that space to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you should delete the newly created partition, either by
using the partitioning utility under your current operating system or while setting up partitions during
installation.
A.1.6. Part it ion Naming Scheme
Linux refers to disk partitions using a combination of letters and numbers which may be confusing,
particularly if you are used to the "C drive" way of referring to hard disks and their partitions. In the
DOS/Windows world, partitions are named using the following method:
Each partition' s type is checked to determine if it can be read by DOS/Windows.
If the partition' s type is compatible, it is assigned a "drive letter." The drive letters start with a "C"
and move on to the following letters, depending on the number of partitions to be labeled.
The drive letter can then be used to refer to that partition as well as the file system contained on
that partition.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses a naming scheme that is more flexible and conveys more information
than the approach used by other operating systems. The naming scheme is file-based, with file
names in the form of /dev/xxyN.
549
Here is how to decipher the partition naming scheme:
/dev/
This is the name of the directory in which all device files reside. Since partitions reside on
hard disks, and hard disks are devices, the files representing all possible partitions reside
in /dev/.
xx
The first two letters of the partition name indicate the type of device on which the partition
resides, usually either hd (for IDE disks) or sd (for SCSI disks).
y
This letter indicates which device the partition is on. For example, /dev/hda (the first IDE
hard disk) or /dev/sdb (the second SCSI disk).
N
The final number denotes the partition. The first four (primary or extended) partitions are
numbered 1 through 4. Logical partitions start at 5. So, for example, /dev/hda3 is the
third primary or extended partition on the first IDE hard disk, and /dev/sdb6 is the second
logical partition on the second SCSI hard disk.
Note
There is no part of this naming convention that is based on partition type; unlike
DOS/Windows, all partitions can be identified under Red Hat Enterprise Linux. Of course, this
does not mean that Red Hat Enterprise Linux can access data on every type of partition, but in
many cases it is possible to access data on a partition dedicated to another operating system.
Keep this information in mind; it makes things easier to understand when you are setting up the
partitions Red Hat Enterprise Linux requires.
A.1.7. Disk Part it ions and Ot her Operat ing Syst ems
If your Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions are sharing a hard disk with partitions used by other
operating systems, most of the time you will have no problems. However, there are certain
combinations of Linux and other operating systems that require extra care.
A.1.8. Disk Part it ions and Mount Point s
One area that many people new to Linux find confusing is the matter of how partitions are used and
accessed by the Linux operating system. In DOS/Windows, it is relatively simple: Each partition gets
a "drive letter." You then use the correct drive letter to refer to files and directories on its
corresponding partition.
This is entirely different from how Linux deals with partitions and, for that matter, with disk storage in
general. The main difference is that each partition is used to form part of the storage necessary to
support a single set of files and directories. This is done by associating a partition with a directory
through a process known as mounting. Mounting a partition makes its storage available starting at
the specified directory (known as a mount point).
550
For example, if partition /dev/hda5 is mounted on /usr/, that would mean that all files and
directories under /usr/ physically reside on /dev/hda5. So the file
/usr/share/doc/FAQ/txt/Linux-FAQ would be stored on /dev/hda5, while the file
/etc/gdm/custom.conf would not.
Continuing our example, it is also possible that one or more directories below /usr/ would be mount
points for other partitions. For instance, a partition (say, /dev/hda7) could be mounted on
/usr/local/, meaning that /usr/local/man/whatis would then reside on /dev/hda7 rather
than /dev/hda5.
A.1.9. How Many Part it ions?
At this point in the process of preparing to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux, you must give some
consideration to the number and size of the partitions to be used by your new operating system. The
question of "how many partitions" continues to spark debate within the Linux community and,
without any end to the debate in sight, it is safe to say that there are probably as many partition
layouts as there are people debating the issue.
Keeping this in mind, we recommend that, unless you have a reason for doing otherwise, you should
at least create the following partitions: swap, /boot/, and / (root).
For more information, refer to Section 9.15.5, Recommended Partitioning Scheme .
[15] Bl ocks real l y are consi stentl y si zed, unl i ke our i l l ustrati ons. Keep i n mi nd, al so, that an average di sk
dri ve contai ns thousands of bl ocks. But for the purposes of thi s di scussi on, pl ease i gnore these mi nor
di screpanci es.
551
iSCSI Disks
Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) is a protocol that allows computers to communicate
with storage devices by SCSI requests and responses carried over TCP/IP. Because iSCSI is based
on the standard SCSI protocols, it uses some terminology from SCSI. The device on the SCSI bus to
which requests get sent (and which answers these requests) is known as the target and the device
issuing requests is known as the initiator. In other words, an iSCSI disk is a target and the iSCSI
software equivalent of a SCSI controller or SCSI Host Bus Adapter (HBA) is called an initiator. This
appendix only covers Linux as an iSCSI initiator: how Linux uses iSCSI disks, but not how Linux
hosts iSCSI disks.
Linux has a software iSCSI initiator in the kernel that takes the place and form of a SCSI HBA driver
and therefore allows Linux to use iSCSI disks. However, as iSCSI is a fully network-based protocol,
iSCSI initiator support needs more than just the ability to send SCSI packets over the network. Before
Linux can use an iSCSI target, Linux must find the target on the network and make a connection to it.
In some cases, Linux must send authentication information to gain access to the target. Linux must
also detect any failure of the network connection and must establish a new connection, including
logging in again if necessary.
The discovery, connection, and logging in is handled in userspace by the i scsi adm utility, and the
error handling is also handled in userspace by i scsi d.
Both i scsi adm and i scsi d are part of the i scsi - i ni t i at or- ut i l s package under Red Hat Enterprise
Linux.
B.1. iSCSI Disks in anaconda
Anaconda can discover (and then log in to) iSCSI disks in two ways:
1. When anaconda starts, it checks if the BIOS or add-on boot ROMs of the system support
iSCSI Boot Firmware Table (iBFT), a BIOS extension for systems which can boot from iSCSI. If
the BIOS supports iBFT, anaconda will read the iSCSI target information for the configured
boot disk from the BIOS and log in to this target, making it available as an installation target.
2. If you select the Specialized Storage Devices option during installation, the storage
device selection screen presents you with an Add Advanced Target button. If you click
this button, you can add iSCSI target information like the discovery IP address. Anaconda
probes the given IP address and logs in to any targets that it finds. See Section 9.6.1.1,
Advanced Storage Options for the details that you can specify for iSCSI targets.
While anaconda uses i scsi adm to find and log into iSCSI targets, i scsi adm automatically stores
any information about these targets in the iscsiadm iSCSI database. Anaconda then copies this
database to the installed system and marks any iSCSI targets not used for / so that the system will
automatically log in to them when it starts. If / is placed on an iSCSI target, i ni t rd will log into this
target and anaconda does not include this target in start up scripts to avoid multiple attempts to log
into the same target.
If / is placed on an iSCSI target, anaconda sets Net workManager to ignore any network
interfaces that were active during the installation process. These interfaces will also be configured by
i ni t rd when the system starts. If Net workManager were to reconfigure these interfaces, the system
would lose its connection to /.
B.2. iSCSI Disks During St art Up
ISCSI-related events might occur at a number of points while the system starts:
552
1. The init script in the i ni t rd will log in to iSCSI targets used for / (if any). This is done using
the i scsi st art utility (which can do this without requiring i scsi d to run).
2. When the root filesystem has been mounted and the various service initscripts get run, the
i scsi d initscript will get called. This script will then start i scsi d if any iSCSI targets are used
for /, or if any targets in the iSCSI database are marked to be logged in to automatically.
3. After the classic network service script has been run (or would have been run if enabled) the
iscsi initscript will run. If the network is accessible, this will log in to any targets in the iSCSI
database which are marked to be logged in to automatically. If the network is not accessible,
this script will exit quietly.
4. When using Net workManager to access the network (instead of the classic network service
script), Net workManager will call the iscsi initscript. See:
/etc/NetworkManager/dispatcher.d/04-iscsi
Important
Because Net workManager is installed in /usr, you cannot use it to configure
network access if /usr is on network-attached storage such as an iSCSI target.
If i scsi d is not needed as the system starts, it will not start automatically. If you start i scsi adm,
i scsi adm will start i scsi d in turn.
iSCSI Disks
553
Disk Encryption
C.1. What is Block Device Encrypt ion?
Block device encryption protects the data on a block device by encrypting it. To access the device' s
decrypted contents, a user must provide a passphrase or key as authentication. This provides
additional security beyond existing OS security mechanisms in that it protects the device' s contents
even if it has been physically removed from the system.
C.2. Encrypt ing Block Devices Using dm-crypt /LUKS6t it
Linux Unified Key Setup (LUKS) is a specification for block device encryption. It establishes an on-disk
format for the data, as well as a passphrase/key management policy.
LUKS uses the kernel device mapper subsystem via the dm-crypt module. This arrangement
provides a low-level mapping that handles encryption and decryption of the device' s data. User-level
operations, such as creating and accessing encrypted devices, are accomplished through the use of
the cryptsetup utility.
C.2.1. Overview of LUKS
What LUKS does:
LUKS encrypts entire block devices
LUKS is thereby well-suited for protecting the contents of mobile devices such as:
Removable storage media
Laptop disk drives
The underlying contents of the encrypted block device are arbitrary.
This makes it useful for encrypting swap devices.
This can also be useful with certain databases that use specially formatted block devices
for data storage.
LUKS uses the existing device mapper kernel subsystem.
This is the same subsystem used by LVM, so it is well tested.
LUKS provides passphrase strengthening.
This protects against dictionary attacks.
LUKS devices contain multiple key slots.
This allows users to add backup keys/passphrases.
What LUKS does not do:
LUKS is not well-suited for applications requiring many (more than eight) users to have distinct
access keys to the same device.
LUKS is not well-suited for applications requiring file-level encryption.
554
More detailed information about LUKS is available from the project website at
http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/.
C.2.2. How Will I Access t he Encrypt ed Devices Aft er Inst allat ion? (Syst em
St art up)
During system startup you will be presented with a passphrase prompt. After the correct passphrase
has been provided the system will continue to boot normally. If you used different passphrases for
multiple encrypted devices you may need to enter more than one passphrase during the startup.
Note
Consider using the same passphrase for all encrypted block devices in a given system. This
will simplify system startup and you will have fewer passphrases to remember. Just make sure
you choose a good passphrase!
C.2.3. Choosing a Good Passphrase
While dm-crypt/LUKS supports both keys and passphrases, the anaconda installer only supports the
use of passphrases for creating and accessing encrypted block devices during installation.
LUKS does provide passphrase strengthening but it is still a good idea to choose a good (meaning
"difficult to guess") passphrase. Note the use of the term "passphrase", as opposed to the term
"password". This is intentional. Providing a phrase containing multiple words to increase the
security of your data is important.
C.3. Creat ing Encrypt ed Block Devices in Anaconda
You can create encrypted devices during system installation. This allows you to easily configure a
system with encrypted partitions.
To enable block device encryption, check the "Encrypt System" checkbox when selecting automatic
partitioning or the "Encrypt" checkbox when creating an individual partition, software RAID array, or
logical volume. After you finish partitioning, you will be prompted for an encryption passphrase. This
passphrase will be required to access the encrypted devices. If you have pre-existing LUKS devices
and provided correct passphrases for them earlier in the install process the passphrase entry dialog
will also contain a checkbox. Checking this checkbox indicates that you would like the new
passphrase to be added to an available slot in each of the pre-existing encrypted block devices.
Note
Checking the "Encrypt System" checkbox on the "Automatic Partitioning" screen and then
choosing "Create custom layout" does not cause any block devices to be encrypted
automatically.
Note
You can use kickstart to set a separate passphrase for each new encrypted block device.
Disk Encrypt ion
555
C.3.1. What Kinds of Block Devices Can Be Encrypt ed?
Most types of block devices can be encrypted using LUKS. From anaconda you can encrypt
partitions, LVM physical volumes, LVM logical volumes, and software RAID arrays.
C.3.2. Saving Passphrases
If you use a kickstart file during installation, you can automatically save the passphrases used
during installation to an encrypted file (an escrow packet) on the local file system. To use this feature,
you must have an X.509 certificate available at a location that anaconda can access. To specify the
URL of this certificate, add the --escrowcert parameter to any of the autopart, logvol, part or
raid commands. During installation, the encryption keys for the specified devices are saved in files
in /root, encrypted with the certificate.
You can save escrow packets during installation only with the use of a kickstart file refer to
Chapter 32, Kickstart Installations for more detail. You cannot save an escrow packet during an
interactive installation, although you can create one on an installed system with the vol ume_key
tool. The vol ume_key tool also allows you to use the information stored in an escrow packet to
restore access to an encrypted volume. Refer to the vol ume_key manpage for more information.
C.3.3. Creat ing and Saving Backup Passphrases
If you use a kickstart file during installation, anaconda can add a randomly generated backup
passphrase to each block device on the system and save each passphrase to an encrypted file on
the local file system. Specify the URL of this certificate with the --escrowcert parameter as
described in Section C.3.2, Saving Passphrases , followed by the --backuppassphrase
parameter for each of the kickstart commands that relate to the devices for which you want to create
backup passphrases.
Note that this feature is available only while performing a kickstart installation. Refer to Chapter 32,
Kickstart Installations for more detail.
C.4. Creat ing Encrypt ed Block Devices on t he Inst alled Syst em Aft er
Inst allat ion
Encrypted block devices can be created and configured after installation.
C.4.1. Creat e t he Block Devices
Create the block devices you want to encrypt by using parted, pvcreate, lvcreate and mdadm.
C.4.2. Opt ional: Fill t he Device wit h Random Dat a
Filling <device> (eg: /dev/sda3) with random data before encrypting it greatly increases the
strength of the encryption. The downside is that it can take a very long time.
Warning
The commands below will destroy any existing data on the device.
556
The best way, which provides high quality random data but takes a long time (several minutes per
gigabyte on most systems):
dd if=/dev/urandom of=<device>
Fastest way, which provides lower quality random data:
badblocks -c 10240 -s -w -t random -v <device>
C.4.3. Format t he Device as a dm-crypt /LUKS Encrypt ed Device
Warning
The command below will destroy any existing data on the device.
cryptsetup luksFormat <device>
Note
For more information, read the cryptsetup(8) man page.
After supplying the passphrase twice the device will be formatted for use. To verify, use the following
command:
cryptsetup isLuks <device> && echo Success
To see a summary of the encryption information for the device, use the following command:
cryptsetup luksDump <device>
C.4.4. Creat e a Mapping t o Allow Access t o t he Device's Decrypt ed Cont ent s
To access the device' s decrypted contents, a mapping must be established using the kernel
device-mapper.
It is useful to choose a meaningful name for this mapping. LUKS provides a UUID (Universally
Unique Identifier) for each device. This, unlike the device name (eg: /dev/sda3), is guaranteed to
remain constant as long as the LUKS header remains intact. To find a LUKS device' s UUID, run the
following command:
cryptsetup luksUUID <device>
An example of a reliable, informative and unique mapping name would be luks-<uuid>, where
<uuid> is replaced with the device' s LUKS UUID (eg: luks-50ec957a-5b5a-47ee-85e6-
f8085bbc97a8). This naming convention might seem unwieldy but is it not necessary to type it
often.
cryptsetup luksOpen <device> <name>
Disk Encrypt ion
557
There should now be a device node, /dev/mapper/<name>, which represents the decrypted device.
This block device can be read from and written to like any other unencrypted block device.
To see some information about the mapped device, use the following command:
dmsetup info <name>
Note
For more information, read the dmsetup(8) man page.
C.4.5. Creat e File Syst ems on t he Mapped Device or Cont inue t o Build
Complex St orage St ruct ures Using t he Mapped Device
Use the mapped device node (/dev/mapper/<name>) as any other block device. To create an ext2
filesystem on the mapped device, use the following command:
mke2fs /dev/mapper/<name>
To mount this filesystem on /mnt/test, use the following command:
Important
The directory /mnt/test must exist before executing this command.
mount /dev/mapper/<name> /mnt/test
C.4.6. Add t he Mapping Informat ion t o /etc/crypttab
In order for the system to set up a mapping for the device, an entry must be present in the
/etc/crypttab file. If the file doesn' t exist, create it and change the owner and group to root
(root:root) and change the mode to 0744. Add a line to the file with the following format:
<name> <device> none
The <device> field should be given in the form "UUID=<luks_uuid>", where <luks_uuid> is the LUKS
uuid as given by the command cryptsetup luksUUID <device>. This ensures the correct device
will be identified and used even if the device node (eg: /dev/sda5) changes.
Note
For details on the format of the /etc/crypttab file, read the crypttab(5) man page.
C.4.7. Add an Ent ry t o /etc/fstab
558
Add an entry to /etc/fstab. This is only necessary if you want to establish a persistent association
between the device and a mountpoint. Use the decrypted device, /dev/mapper/<name> in the
/etc/fstab file.
In many cases it is desirable to list devices in /etc/fstab by UUID or by a filesystem label. The
main purpose of this is to provide a constant identifier in the event that the device name (eg:
/dev/sda4) changes. LUKS device names in the form of /dev/mapper/luks-<luks_uuid> are
based only on the device' s LUKS UUID, and are therefore guaranteed to remain constant. This fact
makes them suitable for use in /etc/fstab.
Note
For details on the format of the /etc/fstab file, read the fstab(5) man page.
C.5. Common Post -Inst allat ion Tasks
The following sections are about common post-installation tasks.
C.5.1. Set a Randomly Generat ed Key as an Addit ional Way t o Access an
Encrypt ed Block Device
The following sections are about generating keys and adding keys.
C.5.1.1. Generat e a Key
This will generate a 256-bit key in the file $HOME/keyfile.
dd if=/dev/urandom of=$HOME/keyfile bs=32 count=1
chmod 600 $HOME/keyfile
C.5.1.2. Add t he Key t o an Available Keyslot on t he Encrypt ed Device
cryptsetup luksAddKey <device> ~/keyfile
C.5.2. Add a New Passphrase t o an Exist ing Device
cryptsetup luksAddKey <device>
After being prompted for any one of the existing passphrases for authentication, you will be prompted
to enter the new passphrase.
C.5.3. Remove a Passphrase or Key from a Device
cryptsetup luksRemoveKey <device>
You will be prompted for the passphrase you wish to remove and then for any one of the remaining
passphrases for authentication.
Disk Encrypt ion
559
Understanding LVM
LVM (Logical Volume Management) partitions provide a number of advantages over standard
partitions. LVM partitions are formatted as physical volumes. One or more physical volumes are
combined to form a volume group. Each volume group' s total storage is then divided into one or more
logical volumes. The logical volumes function much like standard partitions. They have a file system
type, such as ext4, and a mount point.
The /boot Partition and LVM
On most architectures, the boot loader cannot read LVM volumes. You must make a standard,
non-LVM disk partition for your /boot partition.
However, on System z, the zi pl boot loader supports /boot on LVM logical volumes with
linear mapping.
To understand LVM better, imagine the physical volume as a pile of blocks. A block is simply a
storage unit used to store data. Several piles of blocks can be combined to make a much larger pile,
just as physical volumes are combined to make a volume group. The resulting pile can be
subdivided into several smaller piles of arbitrary size, just as a volume group is allocated to several
logical volumes.
An administrator may grow or shrink logical volumes without destroying data, unlike standard disk
partitions. If the physical volumes in a volume group are on separate drives or RAID arrays then
administrators may also spread a logical volume across the storage devices.
You may lose data if you shrink a logical volume to a smaller capacity than the data on the volume
requires. To ensure maximum flexibility, create logical volumes to meet your current needs, and leave
excess storage capacity unallocated. You may safely grow logical volumes to use unallocated
space, as your needs dictate.
LVM and the Default Partition Layout
By default, the installation process creates / and swap partitions within LVM volumes, with a
separate /boot partition.
560
The GRUB Boot Loader
When a computer running Linux is turned on, the operating system is loaded into memory by a
special program called a boot loader. A boot loader usually exists on the system' s primary hard drive
(or other media device) and has the sole responsibility of loading the Linux kernel with its required
files or (in some cases) other operating systems into memory.
E.1. Boot Loaders and Syst em Archit ect ure
Each architecture capable of running Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses a different boot loader. The
following table lists the boot loaders available for each architecture:
Tabl e E. 1. Boot Loaders by Archi t ect ure
Archi t ect ure Boot Loaders
AMD AMD64 GRUB
IBM Power Systems yaboot
IBM System z z/IPL
x86 GRUB
This appendix discusses commands and configuration options for the GRUB boot loader included
with Red Hat Enterprise Linux for the x86 architecture.
The /boot and / (root) partition in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 can only use the ext2, ext3,
and ext4 (recommended) file systems. You cannot use any other file system for this partition,
such as Btrfs, XFS, or VFAT. Other partitions, such as /home, can use any supported file
system, including Btrfs and XFS (if available). See the following article on the Red Hat
Customer Portal for additional information: https://access.redhat.com/solutions/667273.
E.2. GRUB
The GNU GRand Unified Boot loader (GRUB) is a program which enables the selection of the installed
operating system or kernel to be loaded at system boot time. It also allows the user to pass
arguments to the kernel.
E.2.1. GRUB and t he Boot Process on BIOS-based x86 Syst ems
This section describes the specific role GRUB plays when booting a BIOS-based x86 system. For a
look at the overall boot process, refer to Section F.2, A Detailed Look at the Boot Process .
GRUB loads itself into memory in the following stages:
1. The Stage 1 or primary boot loader is read into memory by the BIOS from the MBR . The
primary boot loader exists on less than 512 bytes of disk space within the MBR and is
capable of loading either the Stage 1.5 or Stage 2 boot loader.
BIOS cannot read partition tables or file systems. It initializes the hardware, reads the MBR,
then depends entirely on the stage 1 bootloader to continue the boot process.
[16]
561
2. The Stage 1.5 boot loader is read into memory by the Stage 1 boot loader, if necessary. Some
hardware requires an intermediate step to get to the Stage 2 boot loader. This is sometimes
true when the /boot/ partition is above the 1024 cylinder head of the hard drive or when
using LBA mode. The Stage 1.5 boot loader is found either on the /boot/ partition or on a
small part of the MBR and the /boot/ partition.
3. The Stage 2 or secondary boot loader is read into memory. The secondary boot loader displays
the GRUB menu and command environment. This interface allows the user to select which
kernel or operating system to boot, pass arguments to the kernel, or look at system
parameters.
4. The secondary boot loader reads the operating system or kernel as well as the contents of
/boot/sysroot/ into memory. Once GRUB determines which operating system or kernel to
start, it loads it into memory and transfers control of the machine to that operating system.
The method used to boot Linux is called direct loading because the boot loader loads the operating
system directly. There is no intermediary between the boot loader and the kernel.
The boot process used by other operating systems may differ. For example, the Microsoft Windows
operating system, as well as other operating systems, are loaded using chain loading. Under this
method, the MBR points to the first sector of the partition holding the operating system, where it finds
the files necessary to actually boot that operating system.
GRUB supports both direct and chain loading boot methods, allowing it to boot almost any
operating system.
Warning
During installation, Microsoft' s DOS and Windows installation programs completely overwrite
the MBR, destroying any existing boot loaders. If creating a dual-boot system, it is best to
install the Microsoft operating system first.
E.2.2. GRUB and t he Boot Process on UEFI-based x86 Syst ems
This section describes the specific role GRUB plays when booting a UEFI-based x86 system. For a
look at the overall boot process, refer to Section F.2, A Detailed Look at the Boot Process .
GRUB loads itself into memory in the following stages:
1. The UEFI-based platform reads the partition table on the system storage and mounts the EFI
System Partition (ESP), a VFAT partition labeled with a particular globally unique identifier
(GUID). The ESP contains EFI applications such as bootloaders and utility software, stored
in directories specific to software vendors. Viewed from within the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux 6.6 file system, the ESP is /boot/efi/, and EFI software provided by Red Hat is
stored in /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/.
2. The /boot/efi/EFI/redhat/ directory contains grub. ef i , a version of GRUB compiled
for the EFI firmware architecture as an EFI application. In the simplest case, the EFI boot
manager selects grub.efi as the default bootloader and reads it into memory.
If the ESP contains other EFI applications, the EFI boot manager might prompt you to select
an application to run, rather than load grub. ef i automatically.
3. GRUB determines which operating system or kernel to start, loads it into memory, and
transfers control of the machine to that operating system.
562
Because each vendor maintains its own directory of applications in the ESP, chain loading is not
normally necessary on UEFI-based systems. The EFI boot manager can load any of the operating
system bootloaders that are present in the ESP.
E.2.3. Feat ures of GRUB
GRUB contains several features that make it preferable to other boot loaders available for the x86
architecture. Below is a partial list of some of the more important features:
GRUB provides a true command-based, pre-OS environment on x86 machines. This feature affords the
user maximum flexibility in loading operating systems with specified options or gathering
information about the system. For years, many non-x86 architectures have employed pre-OS
environments that allow system booting from a command line.
GRUB supports Logical Block Addressing (LBA) mode. LBA places the addressing conversion used
to find files in the hard drive' s firmware, and is used on many IDE and all SCSI hard devices.
Before LBA, boot loaders could encounter the 1024-cylinder BIOS limitation, where the BIOS
could not find a file after the 1024 cylinder head of the disk. LBA support allows GRUB to boot
operating systems from partitions beyond the 1024-cylinder limit, so long as the system BIOS
supports LBA mode. Most modern BIOS revisions support LBA mode.
GRUB can read ext2 partitions. This functionality allows GRUB to access its configuration file,
/boot/grub/grub.conf, every time the system boots, eliminating the need for the user to write
a new version of the first stage boot loader to the MBR when configuration changes are made.
The only time a user needs to reinstall GRUB on the MBR is if the physical location of the /boot/
partition is moved on the disk. For details on installing GRUB to the MBR, refer to Section E.3,
Installing GRUB .
E.3. Inst alling GRUB
If GRUB was not installed during the installation process, it can be installed afterward. Once
installed, it automatically becomes the default boot loader.
Before installing GRUB, make sure to use the latest GRUB package available or use the GRUB
package from the installation DVD. For instructions on installing packages, refer to the chapter titled
Package Management with RPM in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide.
563
Important
GRUB cannot construct a software RAID. Therefore, the /boot directory must reside on a
single, specific disk partition. The /boot directory cannot be striped across multiple disks, as
in a level 0 RAID. To use a level 0 RAID on your system, place /boot on a separate partition
outside the RAID.
Similarly, because the /boot directory must reside on a single, specific disk partition, GRUB
cannot boot the system if the disk holding that partition fails or is removed from the system.
This is true even if the disk is mirrored in a level 1 RAID. The following Red Hat Knowledgebase
article describes how to make the system bootable from another disk in the mirrored set:
https://access.redhat.com/site/articles/7094
Note that these issues apply only to RAID that is implemented in software, where the individual
disks that make up the array are still visible as individual disks on the system. These issues
do not apply to hardware RAID where multiple disks are represented as a single device.
E.3.1. Inst alling GRUB on BIOS Syst ems
To install (or reinstall) GRUB on a BIOS system, follow the procedure below.
Procedure E. 1. I nst al l i ng GRUB on BI OS- based Syst ems
1. Log in as root:
$ su -
2. Execute the grub-install command to install GRUB:
# grub2-install location
Replace location with the name of the drive or partition where you want to install the first stage
of GRUB - for example, /dev/hda for the first hard drive on the system.
3. Optionally, you can open the /etc/default/grub configuration file, and edit existing boot
options on the line starting with GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX= to suit your needs. Note that this
requires advanced knowledge of boot options, and is not necessary in most cases.
4. Generate the grub.conf configuration file, which will be used to construct the boot menu:
# grub-mkconfig -o /boot/grub/grub.conf
5. Log out from root:
# exit
The next time the system boots, the GRUB boot loader menu will appear before the kernel loads into
memory.
E.3.2. Inst alling GRUB on UEFI Syst ems
564
The following procedure explains how to install or reinstall GRUB on a system using UEFI firmware.
Procedure E. 2. I nst al l i ng GRUB on UEFI - based Syst ems
1. Log in as root:
$ su -
2. Log out from root:
# exit
The next time the system boots, the GRUB boot loader menu will appear before the kernel loads into
memory.
E.4. GRUB Terminology
One of the most important things to understand before using GRUB is how the program refers to
devices, such as hard drives and partitions. This information is particularly important when
configuring GRUB to boot multiple operating systems.
E.4.1. Device Names
When referring to a specific device with GRUB, do so using the following format (note that the
parentheses and comma are very important syntactically):
(<type-of-device><bios-device-number>,<partition-number>)
The <type-of-device> specifies the type of device from which GRUB boots. The two most common
options are hd for a hard disk or fd for a 3.5 diskette. A lesser used device type is also available
called nd for a network disk. Instructions on configuring GRUB to boot over the network are
available online at http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/manual/.
The <bios-device-number> is the BIOS device number. The primary IDE hard drive is numbered 0 and
a secondary IDE hard drive is numbered 1. This syntax is roughly equivalent to that used for devices
by the kernel. For example, the a in hda for the kernel is analogous to the 0 in hd0 for GRUB, the b
in hdb is analogous to the 1 in hd1, and so on.
The <partition-number> specifies the number of a partition on a device. Like the <bios-device-number>,
most types of partitions are numbered starting at 0. However, BSD partitions are specified using
letters, with a corresponding to 0, b corresponding to 1, and so on.
Note
The numbering system for devices under GRUB always begins with 0, not 1. Failing to make
this distinction is one of the most common mistakes made by new users.
To give an example, if a system has more than one hard drive, GRUB refers to the first hard drive as
(hd0) and the second as (hd1). Likewise, GRUB refers to the first partition on the first drive as
(hd0,0) and the third partition on the second hard drive as (hd1,2).
In general the following rules apply when naming devices and partitions under GRUB:
565
It does not matter if system hard drives are IDE or SCSI, all hard drives begin with the letters hd.
The letters fd are used to specify 3.5 diskettes.
To specify an entire device without respect to partitions, leave off the comma and the partition
number. This is important when telling GRUB to configure the MBR for a particular disk. For
example, (hd0) specifies the MBR on the first device and (hd3) specifies the MBR on the fourth
device.
If a system has multiple drive devices, it is very important to know how the drive boot order is set in
the BIOS. This is a simple task if a system has only IDE or SCSI drives, but if there is a mix of
devices, it becomes critical that the type of drive with the boot partition be accessed first.
E.4.2. File Names and Blocklist s
When typing commands to GRUB that reference a file, such as a menu list, it is necessary to specify
an absolute file path immediately after the device and partition numbers.
The following illustrates the structure of such a command:
(<device-type><device-number>,<partition-number>)</path/to/file>
In this example, replace <device-type> with hd, fd, or nd. Replace <device-number> with the integer for
the device. Replace </path/to/file> with an absolute path relative to the top-level of the device.
It is also possible to specify files to GRUB that do not actually appear in the file system, such as a
chain loader that appears in the first few blocks of a partition. To load such files, provide a blocklist
that specifies block by block where the file is located in the partition. Since a file is often comprised of
several different sets of blocks, blocklists use a special syntax. Each block containing the file is
specified by an offset number of blocks, followed by the number of blocks from that offset point. Block
offsets are listed sequentially in a comma-delimited list.
The following is a sample blocklist:
0+50,100+25,200+1
This sample blocklist specifies a file that starts at the first block on the partition and uses blocks 0
through 49, 100 through 124, and 200.
Knowing how to write blocklists is useful when using GRUB to load operating systems which require
chain loading. It is possible to leave off the offset number of blocks if starting at block 0. As an
example, the chain loading file in the first partition of the first hard drive would have the following
name:
(hd0,0)+1
The following shows the chainloader command with a similar blocklist designation at the GRUB
command line after setting the correct device and partition as root:
chainloader +1
E.4.3. The Root File Syst em and GRUB
The use of the term root file system has a different meaning in regard to GRUB. It is important to
remember that GRUB' s root file system has nothing to do with the Linux root file system.
566
The GRUB root file system is the top level of the specified device. For example, the image file
(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz is located within the /grub/ directory at the top-level (or root) of
the (hd0,0) partition (which is actually the /boot/ partition for the system).
Next, the kernel command is executed with the location of the kernel file as an option. Once the
Linux kernel boots, it sets up the root file system that Linux users are familiar with. The original GRUB
root file system and its mounts are forgotten; they only existed to boot the kernel file.
Refer to the root and kernel commands in Section E.6, GRUB Commands for more information.
E.5. GRUB Int erfaces
GRUB features three interfaces which provide different levels of functionality. Each of these interfaces
allows users to boot the Linux kernel or another operating system.
The interfaces are as follows:
Note
The following GRUB interfaces can only be accessed by pressing any key within the three
seconds of the GRUB menu bypass screen.
Menu Interface
This is the default interface shown when GRUB is configured by the installation program. A
menu of operating systems or preconfigured kernels are displayed as a list, ordered by
name. Use the arrow keys to select an operating system or kernel version and press the
Enter key to boot it. If you do nothing on this screen, then after the time out period expires
GRUB will load the default option.
Press the e key to enter the entry editor interface or the c key to load a command line
interface.
Refer to Section E.7, GRUB Menu Configuration File for more information on configuring
this interface.
Menu Entry Editor Interface
To access the menu entry editor, press the e key from the boot loader menu. The GRUB
commands for that entry are displayed here, and users may alter these command lines
before booting the operating system by adding a command line (o inserts a new line after
the current line and O inserts a new line before it), editing one (e), or deleting one (d).
After all changes are made, the b key executes the commands and boots the operating
system. The Esc key discards any changes and reloads the standard menu interface. The c
key loads the command line interface.
Note
For information about changing runlevels using the GRUB menu entry editor, refer to
Section E.8, Changing Runlevels at Boot Time .
Command Line Interface
567
The command line interface is the most basic GRUB interface, but it is also the one that
grants the most control. The command line makes it possible to type any relevant GRUB
commands followed by the Enter key to execute them. This interface features some
advanced shell-like features, including Tab key completion based on context, and Ctrl
key combinations when typing commands, such as Ctrl+a to move to the beginning of a
line and Ctrl+e to move to the end of a line. In addition, the arrow, Home, End, and
Delete keys work as they do in the bash shell.
Refer to Section E.6, GRUB Commands for a list of common commands.
E.5.1. Int erfaces Load Order
When GRUB loads its second stage boot loader, it first searches for its configuration file. Once
found, the menu interface bypass screen is displayed. If a key is pressed within three seconds, GRUB
builds a menu list and displays the menu interface. If no key is pressed, the default kernel entry in the
GRUB menu is used.
If the configuration file cannot be found, or if the configuration file is unreadable, GRUB loads the
command line interface, allowing the user to type commands to complete the boot process.
If the configuration file is not valid, GRUB prints out the error and asks for input. This helps the user
see precisely where the problem occurred. Pressing any key reloads the menu interface, where it is
then possible to edit the menu option and correct the problem based on the error reported by GRUB.
If the correction fails, GRUB reports an error and reloads the menu interface.
E.6. GRUB Commands
GRUB allows a number of useful commands in its command line interface. Some of the commands
accept options after their name; these options should be separated from the command and other
options on that line by space characters.
The following is a list of useful commands:
boot Boots the operating system or chain loader that was last loaded.
chainloader </path/to/file> Loads the specified file as a chain loader. If the file is
located on the first sector of the specified partition, use the blocklist notation, +1, instead of the
file name.
The following is an example chainloader command:
chainloader +1
displaymem Displays the current use of memory, based on information from the BIOS. This is
useful to determine how much RAM a system has prior to booting it.
initrd </path/to/initrd> Enables users to specify an initial RAM disk to use when
booting. An initrd is necessary when the kernel needs certain modules in order to boot
properly, such as when the root partition is formatted with the ext3 or ext4 file system.
The following is an example initrd command:
initrd /initrd-2.6.8-1.523.img
install <stage-1> <install-disk> <stage-2> p config-file Installs GRUB to
the system MBR.
568
<stage-1> Signifies a device, partition, and file where the first boot loader image can be
found, such as (hd0,0)/grub/stage1.
<install-disk> Specifies the disk where the stage 1 boot loader should be installed,
such as (hd0).
<stage-2> Passes the stage 2 boot loader location to the stage 1 boot loader, such as
(hd0,0)/grub/stage2.
p <config-file> This option tells the install command to look for the menu
configuration file specified by <config-file>, such as (hd0,0)/grub/grub.conf.
Warning
The install command overwrites any information already located on the MBR.
kernel </path/to/kernel> <option-1> <option-N> ... Specifies the kernel file to load
when booting the operating system. Replace </path/to/kernel> with an absolute path from the
partition specified by the root command. Replace <option-1> with options for the Linux kernel, such
as root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00 to specify the device on which the root partition for
the system is located. Multiple options can be passed to the kernel in a space separated list.
The following is an example kernel command:
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.8-1.523 ro root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00
The option in the previous example specifies that the root file system for Linux is located on the
hda5 partition.
root (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) Configures the root partition for
GRUB, such as (hd0,0), and mounts the partition.
The following is an example root command:
root (hd0,0)
rootnoverify (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) Configures the root
partition for GRUB, just like the root command, but does not mount the partition.
Other commands are also available; type help --all for a full list of commands. For a description
of all GRUB commands, refer to the documentation available online at
http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/manual/.
E.7. GRUB Menu Configurat ion File
The configuration file (/boot/grub/grub.conf on BIOS systems and
/boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.conf on UEFI systems), which is used to create the list of
operating systems to boot in GRUB' s menu interface, essentially allows the user to select a pre-set
group of commands to execute. The commands given in Section E.6, GRUB Commands can be
used, as well as some special commands that are only available in the configuration file.
E.7.1. Configurat ion File St ruct ure
569
The commands to set the global preferences for the menu interface are placed at the top of the GRUB
configuration file, followed by stanzas for each operating kernel or operating system listed in the
menu.
The following is a very basic GRUB menu configuration file designed to boot either Red Hat
Enterprise Linux or Microsoft Windows:
default=0
timeout=10
splashimage=(hd0,0)/grub/splash.xpm.gz
hiddenmenu
title Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (2.6.32.130.el6.i686)
root (hd0,0)
kernel /boot/vmlinuz-2.6.32.130.el6.i686 ro root=LABEL=/1 rhgb quiet
initrd /boot/initrd-2.6.32.130.el6.i686.img
# section to load Windows
title Windows
rootnoverify (hd0,0)
chainloader +1
This file configures GRUB to build a menu with Red Hat Enterprise Linux as the default operating
system and sets it to autoboot after 10 seconds. Two sections are given, one for each operating
system entry, with commands specific to the system disk partition table.
Note
Note that the default is specified as an integer. This refers to the first title line in the GRUB
configuration file. For the Windows section to be set as the default in the previous example,
change the default=0 to default=1.
Configuring a GRUB menu configuration file to boot multiple operating systems is beyond the scope
of this chapter. Consult Section E.9, Additional Resources for a list of additional resources.
E.7.2. Configurat ion File Direct ives
The following are directives commonly used in the GRUB menu configuration file:
chainloader </path/to/file> Loads the specified file as a chain loader. Replace
</path/to/file> with the absolute path to the chain loader. If the file is located on the first sector of the
specified partition, use the blocklist notation, +1.
color <normal-color> <selected-color> Allows specific colors to be used in the
menu, where two colors are configured as the foreground and background. Use simple color
names such as red/black. For example:
color red/black green/blue
default=<integer> Replace <integer> with the default entry title number to be loaded if the
menu interface times out.
fallback=<integer> Replace <integer> with the entry title number to try if the first attempt
fails.
570
hiddenmenu Prevents the GRUB menu interface from being displayed, loading the default
entry when the timeout period expires. The user can see the standard GRUB menu by pressing
the Esc key.
initrd </path/to/initrd> Enables users to specify an initial RAM disk to use when
booting. Replace </path/to/initrd> with the absolute path to the initial RAM disk.
kernel </path/to/kernel> <option-1> <option-N> Specifies the kernel file to load
when booting the operating system. Replace </path/to/kernel> with an absolute path from the
partition specified by the root directive. Multiple options can be passed to the kernel when it is
loaded.
These options include:
rhgb (Red Hat graphical boot) displays an animation during the boot process, rather than
lines of text.
quiet suppresses all but the most important messages in the part of the boot sequence
before the Red Hat graphical boot animation begins.
password=<password> Prevents a user who does not know the password from editing the
entries for this menu option.
Optionally, it is possible to specify an alternate menu configuration file after the
password=<password> directive. In this case, GRUB restarts the second stage boot loader and
uses the specified alternate configuration file to build the menu. If an alternate menu configuration
file is left out of the command, a user who knows the password is allowed to edit the current
configuration file.
Important
It is highly recommended to set up a boot loader password on every machine. An
unprotected boot loader can allow a potential attacker to modify the system' s boot options
and gain access to the system. See the chapter titled Workstation Security in the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux Security Guide for more information on boot loader passwords and
password security in general.
map Swaps the numbers assigned to two hard drives. For example:
map (hd0) (hd3)
map (hd3) (hd0)
assigns the number 0 to the fourth hard drive, and the number 3 to the first hard drive. This option
is especially useful if you configure your system with an option to boot a Windows operating
system, because the Windows boot loader must find the Windows installation on the first hard
drive.
For example, if your Windows installation is on the fourth hard drive, the following entry in
grub.conf will allow the Windows boot loader to load Windows correctly:
title Windows
map (hd0) (hd3)
map (hd3) (hd0)
rootnoverify (hd3,0)
chainloader +1
571
root (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) Configures the root partition for
GRUB, such as (hd0,0), and mounts the partition. To specify the boot drive selected by the EFI
boot manager, the syntax is <device-type>,<partition>, such as (bd,1).
rootnoverify (<device-type><device-number>,<partition>) Configures the root
partition for GRUB, just like the root command, but does not mount the partition.
timeout=<integer> Specifies the interval, in seconds, that GRUB waits before loading the
entry designated in the default command.
splashimage=<path-to-image> Specifies the location of the splash screen image to be
used when GRUB boots.
title group-title Specifies a title to be used with a particular group of commands used to
load a kernel or operating system.
To add human-readable comments to the menu configuration file, begin the line with the hash mark
character (#).
E.8. Changing Runlevels at Boot Time
Under Red Hat Enterprise Linux, it is possible to change the default runlevel at boot time.
To change the runlevel of a single boot session, use the following instructions:
When the GRUB menu bypass screen appears at boot time, press any key to enter the GRUB
menu (within the first three seconds).
Press the a key to append to the kernel command.
Add <space><runlevel> at the end of the boot options line to boot to the desired runlevel. For
example, the following entry would initiate a boot process into runlevel 3:
grub append> ro root=/dev/VolGroup00/LogVol00 rhgb quiet 3
E.9. Addit ional Resources
This chapter is only intended as an introduction to GRUB. Consult the following resources to
discover more about how GRUB works.
E.9.1. Inst alled Document at ion
/usr/share/doc/grub-<version-number>/ This directory contains good information
about using and configuring GRUB, where <version-number> corresponds to the version of the
GRUB package installed.
info grub The GRUB info page contains a tutorial, a user reference manual, a programmer
reference manual, and a FAQ document about GRUB and its usage.
E.9.2. Useful Websit es
http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/ The home page of the GNU GRUB project. This site contains
information concerning the state of GRUB development and an FAQ.
572
https://access.redhat.com/site/solutions/6863 Details booting operating systems other than
Linux.
[16] For more on the system BIOS and the MBR, refer to Secti on F.2.1.1, BIOS-based x86 Systems .
573
Boot Process, Init, and Shutdown
An important and powerful aspect of Red Hat Enterprise Linux is the open, user-configurable method
it uses for starting the operating system. Users are free to configure many aspects of the boot
process, including specifying the programs launched at boot-time. Similarly, system shutdown
gracefully terminates processes in an organized and configurable way, although customization of
this process is rarely required.
Understanding how the boot and shutdown processes work not only allows customization, but also
makes it easier to troubleshoot problems related to starting or shutting down the system.
F.1. The Boot Process
Below are the basic stages of the boot process:
1. The system loads and runs a boot loader. The specifics of this process depend on the system
architecture. For example:
BIOS-based x86 systems run a first-stage boot loader from the MBR of the primary hard
disk that, in turn, loads an additional boot loader, GRUB.
UEFI-based x86 systems mount an EFI System Partition that contains a version of the
GRUB boot loader. The EFI boot manager loads and runs GRUB as an EFI application.
Power Systems servers mount a PPC PReP partition that contains the Yaboot boot
loader. The System Management Services (SMS) boot manager loads and runs yaboot .
IBM System z runs the z/I PL boot loader from a DASD or FCP-connected device that you
specify when you IPL the partition that contains Red Hat Enterprise Linux.
2. The boot loader loads the kernel into memory, which in turn loads any necessary modules
and mounts the root partition read-only.
3. The kernel transfers control of the boot process to the /sbin/init program.
4. The /sbin/init program loads all services and user-space tools, and mounts all partitions
listed in /etc/fstab.
5. The user is presented with a login screen for the freshly booted Linux system.
Because configuration of the boot process is more common than the customization of the shutdown
process, the remainder of this chapter discusses in detail how the boot process works and how it can
be customized to suite specific needs.
F.2. A Det ailed Look at t he Boot Process
The beginning of the boot process varies depending on the hardware platform being used. However,
once the kernel is found and loaded by the boot loader, the default boot process is identical across
all architectures. This chapter focuses primarily on the x86 architecture.
F.2.1. The Firmware Int erface
F.2.1.1. BIOS-based x86 Syst ems
The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) is a firmware interface that controls not only the first step of the
574
boot process, but also provides the lowest level interface to peripheral devices. On x86 systems
equipped with BIOS, the program is written into read-only, permanent memory and is always
available for use. When the system boots, the processor looks at the end of system memory for the
BIOS program, and runs it.
Once loaded, the BIOS tests the system, looks for and checks peripherals, and then locates a valid
device with which to boot the system. Usually, it checks any optical drives or USB storage devices
present for bootable media, then, failing that, looks to the system' s hard drives. In most cases, the
order of the drives searched while booting is controlled with a setting in the BIOS, and it looks on the
master IDE on the primary IDE bus or for a SATA device with a boot flag set. The BIOS then loads
into memory whatever program is residing in the first sector of this device, called the Master Boot
Record (MBR). The MBR is only 512 bytes in size and contains machine code instructions for booting
the machine, called a boot loader, along with the partition table. Once the BIOS finds and loads the
boot loader program into memory, it yields control of the boot process to it.
This first-stage boot loader is a small machine code binary on the MBR. Its sole job is to locate the
second stage boot loader (GRUB) and load the first part of it into memory.
F.2.1.2. UEFI-based x86 Syst ems
The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) is designed, like BIOS, to control the boot process
(through boot services) and to provide an interface between system firmware and an operating system
(through runtime services). Unlike BIOS, it features its own architecture, independent of the CPU, and
its own device drivers. UEFI can mount partitions and read certain file systems.
When an x86 computer equipped with UEFI boots, the interface searches the system storage for a
partition labeled with a specific globally unique identifier (GUID) that marks it as the EFI System Partition
(ESP). This partition contains applications compiled for the EFI architecture, which might include
bootloaders for operating systems and utility software. UEFI systems include an EFI boot manager that
can boot the system from a default configuration, or prompt a user to choose an operating system to
boot. When a bootloader is selected, manually or automatically, UEFI reads it into memory and yields
control of the boot process to it.
F.2.2. The Boot Loader
F.2.2.1. The GRUB boot loader for x86 syst ems
The system loads GRUB into memory, as directed by either a first-stage bootloader in the case of
systems equipped with BIOS, or read directly from an EFI System Partition in the case of systems
equipped with UEFI.
GRUB has the advantage of being able to read ext2, ext3, and ext4 partitions and load its
configuration file /boot/grub/grub.conf (for BIOS) or
/boot/efi/EFI/redhat/grub.conf (for UEFI) at boot time. Refer to Section E.7, GRUB Menu
Configuration File for information on how to edit this file.
Important
The GRUB bootloader in Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 supports ext2, ext3, and ext4 file
systems. It does not support other file systems such as VFAT, Btrfs or XFS. Furthermore,
GRUB does not support LVM.
Once the second stage boot loader is in memory, it presents the user with a graphical screen
showing the different operating systems or kernels it has been configured to boot (when you update
[17]
575
the kernel, the boot loader configuration file is updated automatically). On this screen a user can use
the arrow keys to choose which operating system or kernel they wish to boot and press Enter. If no
key is pressed, the boot loader loads the default selection after a configurable period of time has
passed.
Once the second stage boot loader has determined which kernel to boot, it locates the corresponding
kernel binary in the /boot/ directory. The kernel binary is named using the following format
/boot/vmlinuz-<kernel-version> file (where <kernel-version> corresponds to the kernel
version specified in the boot loader' s settings).
For instructions on using the boot loader to supply command line arguments to the kernel, refer to
Appendix E, The GRUB Boot Loader. For information on changing the runlevel at the boot loader
prompt, refer Section E.8, Changing Runlevels at Boot Time .
The boot loader then places one or more appropriate initramfs images into memory. The initramfs
is used by the kernel to load drivers and modules necessary to boot the system. This is particularly
important if SCSI hard drives are present or if the systems use the ext3 or ext4 file system.
Once the kernel and the initramfs image(s) are loaded into memory, the boot loader hands control
of the boot process to the kernel.
For a more detailed overview of the GRUB boot loader, refer to Appendix E, The GRUB Boot Loader.
F.2.2.2. Boot Loaders for Ot her Archit ect ures
Once the kernel loads and hands off the boot process to the init command, the same sequence of
events occurs on every architecture. So the main difference between each architecture' s boot process
is in the application used to find and load the kernel.
For example, the IBM eServer pSeries architecture uses yaboot , and the IBM System z systems use
the z/IPL boot loader.
Consult the sections of this guide specific to these platforms for information on configuring their boot
loaders.
F.2.3. The Kernel
When the kernel is loaded, it immediately initializes and configures the computer' s memory and
configures the various hardware attached to the system, including all processors, I/O subsystems,
and storage devices. It then looks for the compressed initramfs image(s) in a predetermined
location in memory, decompresses it directly to /sysroot/, and loads all necessary drivers. Next, it
initializes virtual devices related to the file system, such as LVM or software RAID, before completing
the initramfs processes and freeing up all the memory the disk image once occupied.
The kernel then creates a root device, mounts the root partition read-only, and frees any unused
memory.
At this point, the kernel is loaded into memory and operational. However, since there are no user
applications that allow meaningful input to the system, not much can be done with the system.
To set up the user environment, the kernel executes the /sbin/init program.
F.2.4. The /sbin/init Program
The /sbin/init program (also called init) coordinates the rest of the boot process and
configures the environment for the user.
576
When the init command starts, it becomes the parent or grandparent of all of the processes that
start up automatically on the system. First, it runs the /etc/rc.d/rc.sysinit script, which sets
the environment path, starts swap, checks the file systems, and executes all other steps required for
system initialization. For example, most systems use a clock, so rc.sysinit reads the
/etc/sysconfig/clock configuration file to initialize the hardware clock. Another example is if
there are special serial port processes which must be initialized, rc.sysinit executes the
/etc/rc.serial file.
The init command then processes the jobs in the /etc/event.d directory, which describe how
the system should be set up in each SysV init runlevel. Runlevels are a state, or mode, defined by the
services listed in the SysV /etc/rc.d/rc<x>.d/ directory, where <x> is the number of the runlevel.
For more information on SysV init runlevels, refer to Section F.4, SysV Init Runlevels .
Next, the init command sets the source function library, /etc/rc.d/init.d/functions, for the
system, which configures how to start, kill, and determine the PID of a program.
The init program starts all of the background processes by looking in the appropriate rc directory
for the runlevel specified as the default in /etc/inittab. The rc directories are numbered to
correspond to the runlevel they represent. For instance, /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ is the directory for
runlevel 5.
When booting to runlevel 5, the init program looks in the /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ directory to
determine which processes to start and stop.
Below is an example listing of the /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ directory:
K05innd -> ../init.d/innd
K05saslauthd -> ../init.d/saslauthd
K10dc_server -> ../init.d/dc_server
K10psacct -> ../init.d/psacct
K10radiusd -> ../init.d/radiusd
K12dc_client -> ../init.d/dc_client
K12FreeWnn -> ../init.d/FreeWnn
K12mailman -> ../init.d/mailman
K12mysqld -> ../init.d/mysqld
K15httpd -> ../init.d/httpd
K20netdump-server -> ../init.d/netdump-server
K20rstatd -> ../init.d/rstatd
K20rusersd -> ../init.d/rusersd
K20rwhod -> ../init.d/rwhod
K24irda -> ../init.d/irda
K25squid -> ../init.d/squid
K28amd -> ../init.d/amd
K30spamassassin -> ../init.d/spamassassin
K34dhcrelay -> ../init.d/dhcrelay
K34yppasswdd -> ../init.d/yppasswdd
K35dhcpd -> ../init.d/dhcpd
K35smb -> ../init.d/smb
K35vncserver -> ../init.d/vncserver
K36lisa -> ../init.d/lisa
K45arpwatch -> ../init.d/arpwatch
K45named -> ../init.d/named
K46radvd -> ../init.d/radvd
K50netdump -> ../init.d/netdump
K50snmpd -> ../init.d/snmpd
K50snmptrapd -> ../init.d/snmptrapd
K50tux -> ../init.d/tux
577
K50vsftpd -> ../init.d/vsftpd
K54dovecot -> ../init.d/dovecot
K61ldap -> ../init.d/ldap
K65kadmin -> ../init.d/kadmin
K65kprop -> ../init.d/kprop
K65krb524 -> ../init.d/krb524
K65krb5kdc -> ../init.d/krb5kdc
K70aep1000 -> ../init.d/aep1000
K70bcm5820 -> ../init.d/bcm5820
K74ypserv -> ../init.d/ypserv
K74ypxfrd -> ../init.d/ypxfrd
K85mdmpd -> ../init.d/mdmpd
K89netplugd -> ../init.d/netplugd
K99microcode_ctl -> ../init.d/microcode_ctl
S04readahead_early -> ../init.d/readahead_early
S05kudzu -> ../init.d/kudzu
S06cpuspeed -> ../init.d/cpuspeed
S08ip6tables -> ../init.d/ip6tables
S08iptables -> ../init.d/iptables
S09isdn -> ../init.d/isdn
S10network -> ../init.d/network
S12syslog -> ../init.d/syslog
S13irqbalance -> ../init.d/irqbalance
S13portmap -> ../init.d/portmap
S15mdmonitor -> ../init.d/mdmonitor
S15zebra -> ../init.d/zebra
S16bgpd -> ../init.d/bgpd
S16ospf6d -> ../init.d/ospf6d
S16ospfd -> ../init.d/ospfd
S16ripd -> ../init.d/ripd
S16ripngd -> ../init.d/ripngd
S20random -> ../init.d/random
S24pcmcia -> ../init.d/pcmcia
S25netfs -> ../init.d/netfs
S26apmd -> ../init.d/apmd
S27ypbind -> ../init.d/ypbind
S28autofs -> ../init.d/autofs
S40smartd -> ../init.d/smartd
S44acpid -> ../init.d/acpid
S54hpoj -> ../init.d/hpoj
S55cups -> ../init.d/cups
S55sshd -> ../init.d/sshd
S56rawdevices -> ../init.d/rawdevices
S56xinetd -> ../init.d/xinetd
S58ntpd -> ../init.d/ntpd
S75postgresql -> ../init.d/postgresql
S80sendmail -> ../init.d/sendmail
S85gpm -> ../init.d/gpm
S87iiim -> ../init.d/iiim
S90canna -> ../init.d/canna
S90crond -> ../init.d/crond
S90xfs -> ../init.d/xfs
S95atd -> ../init.d/atd
578
S96readahead -> ../init.d/readahead
S97messagebus -> ../init.d/messagebus
S97rhnsd -> ../init.d/rhnsd
S99local -> ../rc.local
As illustrated in this listing, none of the scripts that actually start and stop the services are located in
the /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ directory. Rather, all of the files in /etc/rc.d/rc5.d/ are symbolic links
pointing to scripts located in the /etc/rc.d/init.d/ directory. Symbolic links are used in each of
the rc directories so that the runlevels can be reconfigured by creating, modifying, and deleting the
symbolic links without affecting the actual scripts they reference.
The name of each symbolic link begins with either a K or an S. The K links are processes that are
killed on that runlevel, while those beginning with an S are started.
The init command first stops all of the K symbolic links in the directory by issuing the
/etc/rc.d/init.d/<command> stop command, where <command> is the process to be killed. It
then starts all of the S symbolic links by issuing /etc/rc.d/init.d/<command> start.
Note
After the system is finished booting, it is possible to log in as root and execute these same
scripts to start and stop services. For instance, the command /etc/rc.d/init.d/httpd
stop stops the Apache HTTP Server.
Each of the symbolic links are numbered to dictate start order. The order in which the services are
started or stopped can be altered by changing this number. The lower the number, the earlier it is
started. Symbolic links with the same number are started alphabetically.
Note
One of the last things the init program executes is the /etc/rc.d/rc.local file. This file
is useful for system customization. Refer to Section F.3, Running Additional Programs at Boot
Time for more information about using the rc.local file.
After the init command has progressed through the appropriate rc directory for the runlevel,
Upst art forks an /sbin/mingetty process for each virtual console (login prompt) allocated to the
runlevel by the job definition in the /etc/event.d directory. Runlevels 2 through 5 have all six
virtual consoles, while runlevel 1 (single user mode) has one, and runlevels 0 and 6 have none. The
/sbin/mingetty process opens communication pathways to tty devices , sets their modes,
prints the login prompt, accepts the user' s username and password, and initiates the login process.
In runlevel 5, Upst art runs a script called /etc/X11/prefdm. The prefdm script executes the
preferred X display manager gdm, kdm, or xdm, depending on the contents of the
/etc/sysconfig/desktop file.
Once finished, the system operates on runlevel 5 and displays a login screen.
F.2.5. Job Definit ions
Previously, the sysvinit package provided the i ni t daemon for the default configuration. When the
system started, this i ni t daemon ran the /etc/inittab script to start system processes defined for
each runlevel. The default configuration now uses an event-driven i ni t daemon provided by the
[18]
[19]
579
upstart package. Whenever particular events occur, the i ni t daemon processes jobs stored in the
/etc/event.d directory. The i ni t daemon recognizes the start of the system as such an event.
Each job typically specifies a program, and the events that trigger i ni t to run or to stop the program.
Some jobs are constructed as tasks, which perform actions and then terminate until another event
triggers the job again. Other jobs are constructed as services, which i ni t keeps running until another
event (or the user) stops it.
For example, the /etc/events.d/tty2 job is a service to maintain a virtual terminal on t t y2 from
the time that the system starts until the system shuts down, or another event (such as a change in
runlevel) stops the job. The job is constructed so that i ni t will restart the virtual terminal if it stops
unexpectedly during that time:
# tty2 - getty
#
# This service maintains a getty on tty2 from the point the system is
# started until it is shut down again.
start on stopped rc2
start on started prefdm
stop on runlevel 0
stop on runlevel 1
stop on runlevel 6
respawn
exec /sbin/mingetty tty2
F.3. Running Addit ional Programs at Boot Time
The /etc/rc.d/rc.local script is executed by the init command at boot time or when changing
runlevels. Adding commands to the bottom of this script is an easy way to perform necessary tasks
like starting special services or initialize devices without writing complex initialization scripts in the
/etc/rc.d/init.d/ directory and creating symbolic links.
The /etc/rc.serial script is used if serial ports must be setup at boot time. This script runs
setserial commands to configure the system' s serial ports. Refer to the setserial man page for
more information.
F.4. SysV Init Runlevels
The SysV init runlevel system provides a standard process for controlling which programs init
launches or halts when initializing a runlevel. SysV init was chosen because it is easier to use and
more flexible than the traditional BSD-style init process.
The configuration files for SysV init are located in the /etc/rc.d/ directory. Within this directory,
are the rc, rc.local, rc.sysinit, and, optionally, the rc.serial scripts as well as the
following directories:
init.d/ rc0.d/ rc1.d/ rc2.d/ rc3.d/ rc4.d/ rc5.d/ rc6.d/
580
The init.d/ directory contains the scripts used by the /sbin/init command when controlling
services. Each of the numbered directories represent the six runlevels configured by default under
F.4.1. Runlevels
The idea behind SysV init runlevels revolves around the idea that different systems can be used in
different ways. For example, a server runs more efficiently without the drag on system resources
created by the X Window System. Or there may be times when a system administrator may need to
operate the system at a lower runlevel to perform diagnostic tasks, like fixing disk corruption in
runlevel 1.
The characteristics of a given runlevel determine which services are halted and started by init. For
instance, runlevel 1 (single user mode) halts any network services, while runlevel 3 starts these
services. By assigning specific services to be halted or started on a given runlevel, init can quickly
change the mode of the machine without the user manually stopping and starting services.
The following runlevels are defined by default under Red Hat Enterprise Linux:
0 Halt
1 Single-user text mode
2 Not used (user-definable)
3 Full multi-user text mode
4 Not used (user-definable)
5 Full multi-user graphical mode (with an X-based login screen)
6 Reboot
In general, users operate Red Hat Enterprise Linux at runlevel 3 or runlevel 5 both full multi-user
modes. Users sometimes customize runlevels 2 and 4 to meet specific needs, since they are not used.
The default runlevel for the system is listed in /etc/inittab. To find out the default runlevel for a
system, look for the line similar to the following near the bottom of /etc/inittab:
id:5:initdefault:
The default runlevel listed in this example is five, as the number after the first colon indicates. To
change it, edit /etc/inittab as root.
Warning
Be very careful when editing /etc/inittab. Simple typos can cause the system to become
unbootable. If this happens, either use a boot CD or DVD, enter single-user mode, or enter
rescue mode to boot the computer and repair the file.
For more information on single-user and rescue mode, refer to Chapter 36, Basic System
Recovery.
581
It is possible to change the default runlevel at boot time by modifying the arguments passed by the
boot loader to the kernel. For information on changing the runlevel at boot time, refer to Section E.8,
Changing Runlevels at Boot Time .
F.4.2. Runlevel Ut ilit ies
One of the best ways to configure runlevels is to use an initscript utility. These tools are designed to
simplify the task of maintaining files in the SysV init directory hierarchy and relieves system
administrators from having to directly manipulate the numerous symbolic links in the subdirectories
of /etc/rc.d/.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux provides three such utilities:
/sbin/chkconfig The /sbin/chkconfig utility is a simple command line tool for
maintaining the /etc/rc.d/init.d/ directory hierarchy.
/usr/sbi n/nt sysv The ncurses-based /sbi n/nt sysv utility provides an interactive text-based
interface, which some find easier to use than chkconfig.
Servi ces Conf i gurat i on Tool The graphical Servi ces Conf i gurat i on Tool (system-
config-services) program is a flexible utility for configuring runlevels.
Refer to the chapter titled Services and Daemons in the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Deployment Guide for
more information regarding these tools.
F.5. Shut t ing Down
To shut down Red Hat Enterprise Linux, the root user may issue the /sbin/shutdown command.
The shutdown man page has a complete list of options, but the two most common uses are:
/sbin/shutdown -h now
and
/sbin/shutdown -r now
After shutting everything down, the -h option halts the machine, and the -r option reboots.
PAM console users can use the reboot and halt commands to shut down the system while in
runlevels 1 through 5. For more information about PAM console users, refer to the Red Hat Enterprise
Linux Deployment Guide.
If the computer does not power itself down, be careful not to turn off the computer until a message
appears indicating that the system is halted.
Failure to wait for this message can mean that not all the hard drive partitions are unmounted, which
can lead to file system corruption.
[17] GRUB reads ext3 and ext4 fi l e systems as ext2, di sregardi ng the j ournal fi l e.
[18] Refer to the Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux Depl oyment Gui de for more i nformati on about tty devi ces.
[19] Refer to the Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux Depl oyment Gui de for more i nformati on about di spl ay
managers.
582
Alternatives to busybox commands
Unlike previous releases of Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 does not include a
version of busybox to provide shell commands in the pre-installation and post-installation
environments. Table G.1, Alternatives to busybox commands contains a list of busybox
commands, equivalent ways to implement the same functionality in bash, and the availability of
these alternatives in the %pre and %post environments. The table also indicates the exact path to the
command, although you do not generally need to specify the path because the PATH environment
variable is set in the installation environment.
If a command is only available in %post, the command is running on the target system and its
availability therefore depends on whether the package that provides the command is installed. Every
command that appears in the "New command or alternative" column of Table G.1, Alternatives to
busybox commands is available for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6, although not every command is
available on every installed system.
Where a command is listed as unavailable, you might be able to create equivalent functionality with a
Python script. The Python language is available to %pre and %post script authors, complete with a
set of Python modules ready for use. Therefore, if a particular command is not available to you in the
installation environment, we recommend that you use Python as the script language.
Tabl e G. 1. Al t ernat i ves t o busybox commands
Busybox command %pre %post New command or
al t ernat i ve
addgroup no yes /usr/sbin/groupad
d
adduser no yes /usr/sbin/useradd
adjtimex no no none
ar no yes /usr/bin/ar
arping yes yes /sbin/arping or
/usr/sbin/arping
ash yes yes /bin/bash
awk yes yes /sbin/awk,
/sbin/gawk, or
/usr/bin/gawk
basename yes yes
/bin/bash ,
/usr/bin/basename
bbconfig no no none this command
is a specific to
Busybox
bunzip2 yes yes /usr/bin/bunzip2,
/usr/bin/bzip2 -d
busybox no no none
bzcat yes yes /usr/bin/bzcat,
/usr/bin/bzip2 -
dc
cal no yes /usr/bin/cal
cat yes yes /usr/bin/cat
catv no no cat -vET or cat -A
chattr yes yes /usr/bin/chattr
chgrp yes yes /usr/bin/chgrp
[a]
[b]
583
chmod yes yes /usr/bin/chmod
chown yes yes /usr/bin/chown
chroot yes yes /usr/sbin/chroot
chvt yes yes /usr/bin/chvt
cksum no yes /usr/bin/cksum
clear yes yes /usr/bin/clear
cmp no yes /usr/bin/cmp
comm no yes /usr/bin/comm
cp yes yes /usr/bin/cp
cpio yes yes /usr/bin/cpio
crond no no none no daemons
available to scriptlets
crontab no yes /usr/bin/crontab
cut yes yes /usr/bin/cut
date yes yes /usr/bin/date
dc no yes /usr/bin/dc
dd yes yes /usr/bin/dd
deallocvt no yes /usr/bin/deallocv
t
delgroup no yes /usr/sbin/groupde
l
deluser no yes /usr/sbin/userdel
devfsd no no none Red Hat
Enterprise Linux does
not use devf s
df yes yes /usr/bin/df
diff no yes /usr/bin/diff
dirname yes yes
/bin/bash ,
/usr/bin/dirname
dmesg yes yes /usr/bin/dmesg
dnsd no no none no daemons
dos2unix no no sed 's/.$//'
dpkg no no none no support for
Debian packages
dpkg-deb no no none no support for
Debian packages
du yes yes /usr/bin/du
dumpkmap no no none
dumpleases no no none
e2fsck yes yes /usr/sbin/e2fsck
e2label yes yes /usr/sbin/e2label
echo yes yes /usr/bin/echo
ed no no /sbin/sed,
/usr/bin/sed
egrep yes yes /sbin/egrep,
/usr/bin/egrep
eject yes yes /usr/bin/eject
al t ernat i ve
[c]
584
env yes yes /usr/bin/env
ether-wake no no none
expr yes yes /usr/bin/expr
fakeidentd no no none no daemons
false yes yes /usr/bin/false
fbset no yes /usr/sbin/fbset
fdflush no no none
fdformat no yes /usr/bin/fdformat
fdisk yes yes /usr/sbin/fdisk
fgrep yes yes /sbin/fgrep,
/usr/bin/fgrep
find yes yes /usr/bin/find
findfs no no none
fold no yes /usr/bin/fold
free no yes /usr/bin/free
freeramdisk no no none
fsck yes yes /usr/sbin/fsck
fsck.ext2 yes yes /usr/sbin/fsck.ex
t2,
/usr/sbin/e2fsck
fsck.ext3 yes yes /usr/sbin/fsck.ex
t3,
/usr/sbin/e2fsck
fsck.minix no no none no support for
the Minix file system
ftpget yes yes /usr/bin/ftp or
Python f t pl i b module
ftpput yes yes /usr/bin/ftp or
Python f t pl i b module
fuser no yes /sbin/fuser
getopt no yes /usr/bin/getopt
getty no no none
grep yes yes /sbin/grep,
/usr/bin/grep
gunzip yes yes /usr/bin/gunzip,
/usr/bin/gzip -d
gzip yes yes /usr/bin/gzip
hdparm yes yes /usr/sbin/hdparm
head yes yes /usr/bin/head
hexdump no yes /usr/bin/hexdump
hostid no yes /usr/bin/hostid
or Python
hostname yes yes /sbin/hostname,
/usr/bin/hostname
httpd no no none no daemons
hush no no none
hwclock yes yes /usr/sbin/hwclock
al t ernat i ve
585
id no yes /usr/bin/id or
Python
ifconfig yes yes /sbin/ifconfig,
/usr/sbin/ifconfi
g
ifdown no no ifconfig device
down
ifup no no ifconfig device
up
inetd no no none no daemons
insmod yes yes /sbin/insmod,
/usr/sbin/insmod
install no yes /usr/bin/install
or
mkdir/cp/chmod/ch
own/chgrp
ip yes yes /sbin/ip,
/usr/sbin/ip
ipaddr no no ifconfig or ip
ipcalc yes yes /sbin/ipcalc,
/usr/bin/ipcalc
ipcrm no yes /usr/bin/ipcrm
ipcs no yes /usr/bin/ipcs
iplink no no ip
iproute no no ip
iptunnel no yes /sbin/iptunnel
kill yes yes /sbin/kill,
/usr/bin/kill
killall yes yes /usr/bin/killall
lash no no none
last no yes /usr/bin/last
length no no Python or bash
less yes yes /usr/bin/less
linux32 no no none
linux64 no no none
ln yes yes /sbin/ln,
/usr/bin/ln
load_policy yes yes /sbin/load_polic
y,
/usr/sbin/load_po
licy
loadfont no no none
loadkmap no no none
login yes yes /usr/bin/login
logname no yes /usr/bin/logname
losetup yes yes /usr/bin/losetup
ls yes yes /usr/bin/ls
lsattr yes yes /usr/bin/lsattr
al t ernat i ve
586
lsmod yes yes /usr/bin/lsmod
lzmacat no yes /usr/bin/lzmadec
makedevs no no /usr/bin/mknod
md5sum yes yes /usr/bin/md5sum
mdev no no none
mesg no yes /usr/bin/mesg
mkdir yes yes /sbin/mkdir,
/usr/bin/mkdir
mke2fs yes yes /usr/sbin/mke2fs
mkfifo no yes /usr/bin/mkfifo
mkfs.ext2 yes yes /usr/sbin/mkfs.ex
t2
mkfs.ext3 yes yes /usr/sbin/mkfs.ex
t3
mkfs.minix no no none no support for
Minix filesystem
mknod yes yes /usr/bin/mknod
mkswap yes yes /usr/sbin/mkswap
mktemp yes yes /usr/bin/mktemp
modprobe yes yes /sbin/modprobe,
/usr/sbin/modprob
e
more yes yes /usr/bin/more
mount yes yes /sbin/mount,
/usr/bin/mount
mountpoint no no Look at the output of
the mount command
msh no no none
mt yes yes /usr/bin/mt
mv yes yes /usr/bin/mv
nameif no no none
nc no yes /usr/bin/nc
netstat no yes /bin/netstat
nice no yes /bin/nice
nohup no yes /usr/bin/nohup
nslookup yes yes /usr/bin/nslookup
od no yes /usr/bin/od
openvt yes yes /usr/bin/openvt
passwd no yes /usr/bin/passwd
patch no yes /usr/bin/patch
pidof yes yes /usr/sbin/pidof
ping yes yes /usr/bin/ping
ping6 no yes /bin/ping6
pipe_progress no no none
pivot_root no yes /sbin/pivot_root
printenv no yes /usr/bin/printenv
printf no yes /usr/bin/printf
ps yes yes /usr/bin/ps
al t ernat i ve
587
pwd yes yes /usr/bin/pwd
rdate no yes /usr/bin/rdate
readlink yes yes /sbin/readlink,
/usr/bin/readlink
readprofile no yes /usr/sbin/readpro
file
realpath no no Python
os.path.realpath(
)
renice no yes /usr/bin/renice
reset no yes /usr/bin/reset
rm yes yes /sbin/rm,
/usr/bin/rm
rmdir yes yes /sbin/rmdir,
/usr/bin/rmdir
rmmod yes yes /sbin/rmmod,
/usr/bin/rmmod
route yes yes /sbin/route,
/usr/sbin/route
rpm yes yes /usr/bin/rpm
rpm2cpio no yes /usr/bin/rpm2cpio
run-parts no no none
runlevel no no none
rx no no none
sed yes yes /sbin/sed,
/usr/bin/sed
seq no yes /usr/bin/seq
setarch no yes /usr/bin/setarch
setconsole no no none
setkeycodes no yes /usr/bin/setkeyco
des
setlogcons no no none
setsid no yes /usr/bin/setsid
sh yes yes /sbin/sh,
/usr/bin/sh
sha1sum yes yes /usr/bin/sha1sum
sleep yes yes /sbin/sleep,
/usr/bin/sleep
sort yes yes /usr/bin/sort
start-stop-daemon no no none
stat no yes /usr/bin/stat or
Python os.stat()
strings no yes /usr/bin/strings
stty no yes /bin/stty
su no yes /bin/su
sulogin no yes /sbin/sulogin
sum no yes /usr/bin/sum
swapoff yes yes /usr/sbin/swapoff
swapon yes yes /usr/sbin/swapon
al t ernat i ve
588
switch_root no yes /sbin/switch_root
sync yes yes /usr/bin/sync
sysctl no yes /sbin/sysctl
tail yes yes /usr/bin/tail
tar yes yes /usr/bin/tar
tee yes yes /usr/bin/tee
telnet yes yes /usr/bin/telnet
telnetd no no none no daemons
test no yes /usr/bin/test or [
in bash
tftp no yes /usr/bin/tftp
time no yes /usr/bin/time or
Python
top yes yes /usr/bin/top
touch yes yes /sbin/touch,
/usr/bin/touch
tr no yes /usr/bin/tr or
Python
traceroute no yes /bin/traceroute
true yes yes /usr/bin/true
tty no yes /usr/bin/tty
tune2fs yes yes /usr/sbin/tune2fs
udhcpc no no /sbin/dhclient
udhcpd no no none no daemons
umount yes yes /sbin/umount,
/usr/bin/umount
uname no yes /bin/uname or
Python os.uname()
uncompress no no none
uniq yes yes /usr/bin/uniq
unix2dos no no sed 's/$//'
unlzma no yes /usr/bin/unlzma
unzip no yes /usr/bin/unzip
uptime no yes /usr/bin/uptime or
Python reading
/proc/uptime
usleep no yes /bin/usleep or
Python
uudecode no yes /usr/bin/uudecode
or Python
uuencode no yes /usr/bin/uuencode
or Python
vconfig yes yes /usr/sbin/vconfig
vi yes yes /usr/bin/vi
vlock no no none
watch no yes /usr/bin/watch
watchdog no no none
al t ernat i ve
589
wc yes yes /usr/bin/wc
wget yes yes /sbin/wget,
/usr/bin/wget
which no yes /usr/bin/which
who no yes /usr/bin/who
whoami no yes /usr/bin/whoami
xargs yes yes /usr/bin/xargs
yes no yes /usr/bin/yes
zcat yes yes /usr/bin/zcat
zcip no no Net workManager
should take care of this
al t ernat i ve
[a] Red Hat Enterpri se Li nux 6 shi ps wi th GNU awk rather than the busybox awk i n the i nstal l ati on
envi ronment.
[b] GNU bash can provi de basename functi onal i ty usi ng stri ng mani pul ati on. If
var="/usr/bin/command", then echo ${var##*/} gi ves command.
[c] GNU bash can provi de di rname functi onal i ty usi ng stri ng mani pul ati on. If
var="/usr/bin/command", then echo ${var%/*} gi ves /usr/bin.
590
Other Technical Documentation
To learn more about anaconda, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation program, visit the project
Web page: http://www.fedoraproject.org/wiki/Anaconda.
Both anaconda and Red Hat Enterprise Linux systems use a common set of software components.
For detailed information on key technologies, refer to the Web sites listed below:
Boot Loader
Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses the GRUB boot loader. Refer to
http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/ for more information.
Di sk Part i t i oni ng
Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses parted to partition disks. Refer to
http://www.gnu.org/software/parted/ for more information.
St orage Management
Logical Volume Management (LVM) provides administrators with a range of facilities to
manage storage. By default, the Red Hat Enterprise Linux installation process formats
drives as LVM volumes. Refer to http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/LVM-HOWTO/ for more
information.
Audi o Support
The Linux kernel used by Red Hat Enterprise Linux incorporates PulseAudio audio server.
For more information about PulseAudio, refer to the project documentation:
http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/PulseAudio/Documentation/User/.
Graphi cs Syst em
Both the installation system and Red Hat Enterprise Linux use the Xorg suite to provide
graphical capabilities. Components of Xorg manage the display, keyboard and mouse for
the desktop environments that users interact with. Refer to http://www.x.org/ for more
information.
Remot e Di spl ays
Red Hat Enterprise Linux and anaconda include VNC (Virtual Network Computing) software
to enable remote access to graphical displays. For more information about VNC, refer to the
documentation on the RealVNC Web site:
http://www.realvnc.com/support/documentation.html.
Command- l i ne I nt erf ace
By default, Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses the GNU bash shell to provide a command-line
interface. The GNU Core Utilities complete the command-line environment. Refer to
http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/bash.html for more information on bash. To learn more
about the GNU Core Utilities, refer to http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/.
Remot e Syst em Access
Red Hat Enterprise Linux incorporates the OpenSSH suite to provide remote access to the
system. The SSH service enables a number of functions, which include access to the
command-line from other systems, remote command execution, and network file transfers.
During the installation process anaconda may use the scp feature of OpenSSH to transfer
Ot her T echnical Document at ion
591
crash reports to remote systems. Refer to the OpenSSH Web site for more information:
http://www.openssh.com/.
Access Cont rol
SELinux provides Mandatory Access Control (MAC) capabilities that supplement the
standard Linux security features. Refer to the SELinux Project Pages for more information:
http://www.nsa.gov/research/selinux/index.shtml.
Fi rewal l
The Linux kernel used by Red Hat Enterprise Linux incorporates the netfilter framework
to provide firewall features. The Netfilter project website provides documentation for both
netfilter, and the iptables administration facilities:
http://netfilter.org/documentation/index.html.
Sof t ware I nst al l at i on
Red Hat Enterprise Linux uses yum to manage the RPM packages that make up the system.
Refer to http://yum.baseurl.org/ for more information.
Vi rt ual i zat i on
Virtualization provides the capability to simultaneously run multiple operating systems on
the same computer. Red Hat Enterprise Linux also includes tools to install and manage the
secondary systems on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux host. You may select virtualization
support during the installation process, or at any time thereafter. Refer to the Red Hat
Enterprise Linux Virtualization Guide available from
https://access.redhat.com/site/documentation/Red_Hat_Enterprise_Linux/ for more
information.
592
Revision History
Note that revision numbers relate to the edition of this manual, not to version numbers of Red Hat
Enterprise Linux.
Revi si on 1. 0- 112 Wed Oct 08 2014 Pet r Boko
Final build for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 GA release
Revi si on 1. 0- 111 Mon Sep 22 2014 Pet r Boko
Adding information about GPT-labeled disks and AMD and Intel systems with UEFI firmware -
BZ#1016473
Revi si on 1. 0- 110 Thu Aug 07 2014 Pet r Boko
Final build for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.6 Beta release
Revi si on 1. 0- 108 Mon Aug 04 2014 Pet r Boko
Adding the group command into Kickstart Options - BZ#1123377
Updating information about minimal USB boot media on UEFI systems - BZ#1108158
Revi si on 1. 0- 107 Wed Jul 30 2014 Pet r Boko
The --pesize option of the volgroup Kickstart command now mentions the default value -
BZ#1064584
A new section in Planning for Installation (x86_64) explains that UEFI 2.1 is fully supported, and
subsequent revisions are partially supported - BZ#1080070
Removed an extra command from PXE server setup instructions - BZ#1047047
Revi si on 1. 0- 106 Mon Jul 21 2014 Pet r Boko
Rewrote the DASD part of the Configuring an Installer Linux on System z Instance chapter with more
recent information - BZ#1120711
Revi si on 1. 0- 105 Fri Jul 04 2014 Pet r Boko
Updated the description of the --bondopts= option of the network Kickstart command to note the
correct syntax - BZ#1095321
Updated documentation about performing a system upgrade to mention the new Preupgrade
Assistant and Red Hat Upgrade Tool - BZ#1095317
Revi si on 1. 0- 104 Thu Jul 03 2014 Pet r Boko
Clarified that Anaconda uses shadow passwords by default - BZ#996426
Recommended Partitioning Scheme now points out that the file system selection for / and /boot is
limited - BZ#1051478
Added the --reserved-space= and --reserved-percent= options to the Kickstart volgroup command -
BZ#873441
Added a note to the clearpart Kickstart command about zerombr being necessary for unattended
installations - BZ#1101532
Revi si on 1. 0- 103 Thu Jul 03 2014 Pet r Boko
Added a note about dmeventd monitoring of LVM not being available during installation -
BZ#1073494
Added an admonition pointing out that the best way to specify a Kickstart local device is by UUID -
BZ#804785
Revi si on 1. 0- 102 Thu Nov 07 2013 Pet r Boko
Revision Hist ory
593
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.5 GA release
Revi si on 1. 0- 100 Mon Sept 16 2013 Pet r Boko
Added an admonition warning users not to use dashes for logical volume and volume group names -
BZ#990828
Added an admonition stressing the importance of boot loader passwords - BZ#988382
Added an admonition explaining that only full mode names work when configuring channel bonding
during installation - BZ#920622
Added awarning message about a mandatory /boot partition - BZ#968839
Added Anaconda' s maximum size limit of 100 TB for XFS partitions - BZ#969241
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 9 Mon Sept 09 2013 Pet r Boko
Added the --ipv6gateway option into Kickstart network configuration - BZ#969234
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 8 Thu Jun 13 2013 Jack Reed
Updated additional kickstart example with %end - BZ#892818
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 7 Tue Jun 11 2013 Jack Reed
Corrected proofreading errors - BZ#909023
Replaced instances of ' clearpart --initlabel' with ' zerombr' command - BZ#907416
Clarified necessity for %end in kickstart sections - BZ#892818
Added ' Installing Packages using yum' section - BZ#890591
Clarified purpose of ' autostep' kickstart command - BZ#906136
Updated --passalgo example command - BZ#876391
Explained /boot/efi partitioning - BZ#871515
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 6 Tue Feb 19 2013 Jack Reed
Second version for 6.4 GA release
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 5 Sun Feb 17 2013 Jack Reed
Version for 6.4 GA release
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 4 Tue Jan 15 2013 Jack Reed
Added autovlan checkbox to Configure FCoE Parameters section
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 3 Tue Dec 18 2012 Jack Reed
Minor edit to kickstart swap space admonition
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 2 Mon Dec 17 2012 Jack Reed
Added and edited admonitions about swap space recommendations - BZ#846489
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 1 Wed Oct 31 2012 Jack Reed
Further updates to subscription process - BZ#871509
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 0 Fri Oct 19 2012 Jack Reed
Further edits to firstboot subscription process
Revi si on 1. 0- 89 Fri Oct 19 2012 Jack Reed
594
Corrected and added BNF notation to some kickstart commands -- BZ#746095, BZ#770195
Preferenced the scsi version of clearpart --drives -- BZ#817213
Restored network installation sections for Power Systems, replacing PXE with yaboot, and added
section on configuring an installation server for Power Systems -- BZ#824246
Updated subscription stages of firstboot process, adding and replacing screens and documenting
new steps -- BZ#835661
Added kickstart and boot options for configuring a bonded interface -- BZ#845881
Added VLAN kickstart and boot options -- BZ#845897
Clarified that swap --recommended won' t assign values stated in the Recommended Partitioning
Scheme for pre-6.3 installations -- BZ#846189
Added fcoe kickstart command -- BZ#846494
Added --cipher option to autopart, logvol, part or partition, and raid kickstart commands --
BZ#846861
Added how boot drive specified in EFI boot manager can be specified in a device name in grub.conf -
- BZ#847561
Updated section on obtaining RHEL to reflect current release options and appearance of Customer
Portal -- BZ#849073
Clarified that kickstart file should be on separate USB drive to boot image -- BZ#850710
Changed refs to eServer and System p to Power Systems servers in Power preparation section --
BZ#852514
Updated NetworkManager screenshot and added additional available connection types --
BZ#856859
Added unsupported_hardware kickstart command -- BZ#862113
Revi si on 1. 0- 88 Mon Oct 8 2012 Jack Reed
Removed unnecessary trademark symbols - BZ#852515
More edits to IBM Power Systems and publication terminology - BZ#852507, 852483, 862435
Clarified admonition regarding /usr on a separate partition - BZ#737789
Updated naming of IPv6 configuration options - BZ#845867
Revi si on 1. 0- 87 Wed Sep 26 2012 Jack Reed
Added missing parts of procedure to enable remote login - BZ#804466
Added ' swap --hibernation' to logvol kickstart directive - BZ#860502
Removed --https from firewall kickstart directive - BZ#860356
Added section on IBM Installation Toolkit - BZ#852499
Changed ' POWER' branding to ' Power Systems' , plus other Power Systems edits - BZ#852483,
852507, 852515
Added ' ifname' parameter to network settings boot config instructions - BZ#848890
Revi si on 1. 0- 86 Mon Aug 27 2012 Jack Reed
Updated Choose Server firstboot screen and re-arranged explanatory text - BZ#806928
Clarified recommended swap space table - BZ#836361
Added fsprofile parameter to logvol kickstart option- BZ#838642
Clarified role of ' Connect automatically' in network config - BZ#846163
Added size limits for ext3 and ext4 - BZ#848617
Revi si on 1. 0- 83 Thu Jul 26 2012 Jack Reed
Revision Hist ory
595
Edited description of stage2=URL - BZ#795526
Fixed incorrect instances of ' disk' - BZ#801068
Replaced SSSD with IPA in description of Enterprise Identity Server Base- BZ#807497
Added admonition to repo kickstart option - BZ#814099
Edited description of location argument for bootloader kickstart option - BZ#820680
Added admonition regarding device nodes to Kickstart Options - BZ#821101
Added admonition to Updating Anaconda section regarding rhupdates directory- BZ#822937
Revi si on 1. 0- 81 Wed May 23 2012 Jack Reed
Removed PXE driver and booting sections for POWER - BZ#822752
Revi si on 1. 0- 79 Fri May 11 2012 Jack Reed
Clarified instructions for driver update installation - BZ#820482
Revi si on 1. 0- 75 Tue Mar 27 2012 Jack Reed
Modified Choose Server figure in Setting up software updates - BZ#806928
Revi si on 1. 0- 74 Thu Mar 22 2012 Jack Reed
Clarified minimal boot media procedure for BIOS - BZ#804476
Revi si on 1. 0- 73 Tue Mar 20 2012 Jack Reed
Moved USB installation source via dd procedure into minimal boot media section - BZ#804476
Revi si on 1. 0- 71 Mon Mar 12 2012 Jack Reed
Added BIOS instructions to PXE boot configuration - BZ#759982
Revi si on 1. 0- 6 9 Tue Mar 06 2012 Jack Reed
Added references to HTTPS support throughout - BZ#732402
Documented new procedure for saving traceback messages - BZ#759488
Revi si on 1. 0- 6 8 Thu Feb 16 2012 Jack Reed
Updated kdump screenshots, corrected checkbox terminology - BZ#757986
Updated IBM resource links - BZ#752679
Clarified minimum x86 processor requirements - BZ#657975
Corrected Language Selection placement for POWER installation - BZ#757976
Revi si on 1. 0- 6 7 Mon Feb 13 2012 Jack Reed
Clarified activation of xinetd service - BZ#786500
Added Language Selection section - BZ#757976
Corrected option for device kickstart directive - BZ#755972
Corrected cio_ignore formatting - BZ#752680
Revi si on 1. 0- 6 6 Wed Feb 01 2012 Jack Reed
Updated Contract Selection image - BZ#724032
Corrected Real VNC URL - BZ#752682
Linked to Recommended Partitioning Scheme in Partitioning Problems sections - BZ#752678
Improved command formatting - BZ#752678
Added Deployment Guide reference to RHN section - BZ#752683
Added references to HTTPS as installation source - BZ#732402
Updated commands in USB installation source section - BZ#757979
Revi si on 1. 0- 6 4 Thu Dec 08 2011 Jack Reed
596
Corrected references to Deployment Guide chapters - BZ#759476, BZ#759463
Deleted reference to network config in firstboot kickstart option - BZ#743307
Re-alphabetised kickstart options - BZ#755951
Clarified lack of support for third-party bootloaders - BZ#752677
Added links to firstboot at end of Installation Complete sections - BZ#752677
Clarified 32-bit package installation for kickstart file - BZ#742405
Corrected formatting of firewall kickstart option - BZ#745285
Revi si on 1. 0- 6 0 Tue Nov 29 2011 Jack Reed
Updated PXE Boot Configuration section - BZ#734609
Revi si on 1. 0- 59 Thu Nov 17 2011 Jack Reed
Upgraded repository metadata admonition to warning - BZ#752677
Corrected minor typing errors - BZ#752675, BZ#752676
Corrected command line directory name in USB creation procedure - BZ#752673
Updated network config and firstboot screenshots - BZ#752675, BZ#752677, BZ#752681
Revi si on 1. 0- 58 Thu Nov 10 2011 Jack Reed
Corrected output formatting in DHCP server config - BZ#747222
Added information on non-Red Hat repositories after upgrading - BZ#748678
Added --label to part or partition kickstart option - BZ#752277
Added reference to network boot options in text mode - BZ#749067
Removed redundant reference to sysroot in appendix F.2.2 - BZ#750700
Added home partition to Recommended Partitioning Scheme - BZ#747049
Winbind - added kickstart option and reference to Deployment Guide chapter in firstboot
authentication config section - BZ#738237
Explained how to install 32-bit packages on 64-bit systems during kickstart - BZ#742405
Revi si on 1. 0- 57 Tue Oct 25 2011 Jack Reed
Corrected root ssh access note - BZ#741535
Revi si on 1. 0- 55 Tue Oct 18 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Updated how to specify multipath devices in kickstart files - BZ#638471
Revi si on 1. 0- 54 Wed Oct 5 2011 Jack Reed
Added missing admonition regarding images/ folder for NFS installations to section 4.1.2-
BZ#677331
Added admonition that automatic partitions cannot be encrypted in System z - BZ#742820
Revi si on 1. 0- 53 Wed Oct 5 2011 Jack Reed
Added admonition about root account to sshpw kickstart option - BZ#741535
Updated name of initial RAM disk folder for POWER booting - BZ#742819
Changed ignoredisk kickstart commands for multipath devices - BZ#638471
Revi si on 1. 0- 51 Fri Sep 23 2011 Jack Reed
Corrected typo in opening line of Chapter 38
Revi si on 1. 0- 50 Thur Sep 22 2011 Jack Reed
Further edits to network kickstart option - BZ#721210
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 9 Mon Sep 19 2011 Jack Reed
Moved admonitions regarding images/ folder for NFS installations. plus other edits - BZ#677331
Revision Hist ory
597
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 8 Thu Sep 15 2011 Jack Reed
Corrected minor errors in 9.14.3, 10.1.2, 17.1.1, 24.1.1, 25.2.2.2
Added lvm to list of pre-installation environment commands - BZ#737691
Updated kickstart media information - BZ#661135
Added admonitions about manual network settings to kickstart options - BZ#721210
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 7 Fri Sep 2 2011 Jack Reed
Clarified reason /usr should not be on a separate file system - BZ#679302, BZ#735156
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 6 Fri Sep 2 2011 Jack Reed
Added remaining quotation marks to values in 26.3 - BZ#729961
Revised filenames and other details in Chapter 1 - BZ#661135
Omitted obsolete @Everything function from 32.5 - BZ#679440
Clarified auto versus manual swap file configuration - BZ#718235
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 5 Mon Aug 29 2011 Jack Reed
Changes and additions to auth or auth-config - BZ#708848
Added admonition regarding minimum --size value for partition directories - BZ#702292
Expanded rhel6 acronym in RAID kickstart option- BZ#704147
Added warnings about partitioning 64-bit x86 systems automatically - BZ#702299
Single quoted all CMSCONFFILE examples in 26.3 and 26.8 - BZ#729691
Moved admonitions regarding images/ folder to previous step - BZ#677331
Added chapter 38 on deregistering from RHN entitlement platforms - BZ#604872
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 4 Tue Aug 23 2011 Jack Reed
Added admonition to RAID kickstart option - BZ#704147
Added admonition regarding images/ folder to installation prep - BZ#677331
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 3 Mon Aug 15 2011 Jack Reed
Changed starting sizes for growable partitions BZ#680812
Edited server source for ks kickstart option BZ#653655
Corrected subscription-manager name BZ#711691
Corrected nss-pam-ldapd name and described disableldaptls switch BZ#682862, BZ#729248
Single quoted CMSCONFFILE example BZ#729691
Removed ext4 warning for adding partitions-s390 BZ#680433
Added asknetwork option to beginning Kickstart installation options BZ#727612
Added admonition to skipx in kickstart guide BZ#723832
Broadened GNOME reference to Desktop overall BZ#692967
Unchecked RHN update box in firstboot BZ#729167
Removed wrong default value for network layer mode BZ#664024
Added step to USB flash drive installation procedure BZ#702382
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 2 Fri Aug 12 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Updated Entitlements information per [email protected]
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 1 Thu May 19 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Build for 6.1 GA
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 0 Mon May 16 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Typos and general language fixes BZ#696868
Revi si on 1. 0- 39 Tue May 10 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
598
Generalise boot process in appendix F BZ#580356
Revi si on 1. 0- 38 Tue May 10 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Include greater detail about UEFI BZ#580356
Revi si on 1. 0- 37 Mon May 9 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Major updates and clarifications to networking during installation BZ#679104
Revi si on 1. 0- 36 Fri May 6 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Update iSCSI procedures BZ#681838
Clarify blacklisting BZ#659795
Revi si on 1. 0- 35 Wed Apr 20 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Clarify NFS installation instructions BZ#682729
Revi si on 1. 0- 34 Tue Apr 19 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Remove Xen reference, update driver update RPM screenshots BZ#659795
Revi si on 1. 0- 33 Mon Apr 18 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correct outdated URL BZ#696861
Replace references to joe with vi BZ#696863
Rewrite instructions for removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux partitions BZ#696865
Remove references to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 BZ#696866
Remove references to Fedora BZ#696867
Revi si on 1. 0- 32 Fri Apr 15 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Remove redundant note about Release Notes document BZ#682683
Remove more references to installation keys BZ#682711
Revi si on 1. 0- 31 Fri Apr 15 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correct sshd option BZ#681861
Fix some typos BZ#681905
Update message during SSH login for System z installation BZ#682208
Correct list of variants BZ#682683
Correct name of efidisk.img BZ#682683
Remove reference to installation key BZ#682711
Remove reference to Release Notes button BZ#682750
Document that /tmp/syslog is now available on System z BZ#683067
Revi si on 1. 0- 30 Tue Apr 12 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Update screenshot to show current default BZ#659795
Revi si on 1. 0- 29 Thu Apr 7 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Small textual improvements BZ#659795
Revi si on 1. 0- 28 Thu Apr 7 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Generalize example drivers BZ#659795
Revi si on 1. 0- 27 Wed Apr 6 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Adding, removing, or replacing drivers in rescue mode BZ#659795
Revi si on 1. 0- 26 Mon Apr 4 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Revision Hist ory
599
Typos and missing textobject tag in entitlements section BZ#629637
Revi si on 1. 0- 25 Thu Mar 31 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Clarify location of images/ directory for NFS and hard drive installations BZ#653568
Revi si on 1. 0- 24 Tue Mar 22 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correct repo options for PPC64 and System z BZ#639196
Update package selection and repo options BZ#639196
Update crash reporting BZ#639197
Changes in wording to firstboot chapter
Revi si on 1. 0- 21 Mon Mar 21 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Changes in wording to firstboot chapter
Revi si on 1. 0- 20 Mon Mar 21 2011 Deon Lackey
Update entitlements BZ#629637
Revi si on 1. 0- 19 Mon Mar 21 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correction about setting up RAID on IPR on POWER BZ#683624
Correction about using a kickstart file in a PXE environment BZ#680178
Revi si on 1. 0- 16 Mon Mar 7 2011 Deon Lackey
Include example in Kickstart instructions to set up entitlements BZ#629637
Revi si on 1. 0- 14 Fri Feb 11 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correction about boot.iso and UEFI BZ#661135
Revi si on 1. 0- 13 Fri Feb 11 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correct RHN update and update screenshot BZ#661135
Revi si on 1. 0- 12 Mon Feb 7 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correct location of backup block device passphrases BZ#657249
Remove multipath command from Kickstart BZ#642918
Revi si on 1. 0- 11 Mon Feb 7 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Remove warning about a false error that was caused a bug which is now fixed BZ#614540
Add warning about serial numbers of multipath devices to Kickstart chapter BZ#612177
Correct desktop installation instructions BZ#657249
Revi si on 1. 0- 10 Mon Jan 10 2011 Rdi ger Landmann
Correct boot screen description BZ#654320
Correct IBM System p boot screen BZ#644289
Correct description of DVD boot sequence BZ#654320
Revi si on 1. 0- 9 Fri Dec 24 2010 Rdi ger Landmann
600
Describe sshd=1 boot option BZ#661261
Correct and expand description of logvol --percent option BZ#661531
Fixed various typos BZ#640167
Revi si on 1. 0- 8 Thu Dec 23 2010 Rdi ger Landmann
Include RAID screenshots more specific to System z BZ#639193
Note that anaconda can only shrink partitions, not enlarge them BZ#642881
Note System z cannot use ext4 for /boot BZ#642881
Expand documentation of multipath kickstart command BZ#642918
Add -H newc argument to find in instructions to prepare an initial RAM disk driver update
BZ#644285
Document that POWER systems should boot over the network with yaboot , not the PPC64.img file
BZ#644288
Remove deprecated RAID Clone option BZ#644290
Correct name of anaconda dump file BZ#644294
Remove deprecated --depth option BZ#652329
Fix various typos BZ#653143, BZ#657013, BZ#662874
Remove deprecated nousb and nousbstorage options BZ#653143, BZ#657013
Revi si on 1. 0- 7 Wed Dec 22 2010 Rdi ger Landmann
Add warning about serial numbers of multipath devices BZ#612177
Add warning about mixing multipath and non-multipath devices BZ#628405
Clarify information about escrow packets BZ#638332
Remove obsolete --bytes-per-inode option BZ#638347
Document ignoring multipath disks in kickstart BZ#638471
FCoE not available for System z BZ#639190
Updated image for Unformatted DASD Devices Found BZ#639191
Fixed various typos BZ#640167
Revi si on 1. 0- 4 Wed Oct 27 2010 Rdi ger Landmann
remove inaccurate information about PXE installations BZ#643669
Revi si on 1. 0- 2 Wed Oct 27 2010 Rdi ger Landmann
remove inaccurate information about PXE installations BZ#643669
Revi si on 1. 0- 1 Thu Oct 7 2010 Rdi ger Landmann
remove "nostorage" option
Revi si on 1. 0- 0 Wed Aug 25 2010 Rdi ger Landmann
Version for GA release
Index
Symbols
/boot / part i t i on
- recommended partitioning, Recommended Partitioning Scheme, Recommended
Partitioning Scheme
/root /i nst al l . l og
- install log file location, Installing Packages
Index
601
/var/ part i t i on
Partitioning Scheme
A
addi ng part i t i ons, Addi ng Part i t i ons, Addi ng Part i t i ons, Addi ng Part i t i ons
- file system type, File System Types, File System Types, File System Types
anacdump. t xt , Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em,
Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I BM Power Syst ems server, Troubl eshoot i ng
I nst al l at i on on I BM Syst em z
Anaconda, Ot her Techni cal Document at i on
anaconda. l og, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em,
array ( see RAI D)
aut omat i c part i t i oni ng, Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up, Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up, Di sk
Part i t i oni ng Set up
B
Basi c I nput /Out put Syst em ( see BI OS)
BI OS
- definition of, BIOS-based x86 Systems
- (see also boot process)
BI OS ( Basi c I nput /Out put Syst em) , Boot i ng t he I nst al l er
boot l oader, Updat i ng t he Boot Loader Conf i gurat i on, x86 , AMD6 4 , and I nt el 6 4
Boot Loader Conf i gurat i on
- (see also GRUB)
- configuration, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Configuration
- GRUB, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Configuration
- installing on boot partition, Advanced Boot Loader Configuration
- MBR, Advanced Boot Loader Configuration
- password, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Configuration
- upgrading, Updating the Boot Loader Configuration
boot l oader password, x86 , AMD6 4 , and I nt el 6 4 Boot Loader Conf i gurat i on
boot l oaders, GRUB
- (see also GRUB)
- definition of, The GRUB Boot Loader
- types of
- GRUB, Boot Loaders and System Architecture
- yaboot, Boot Loaders and System Architecture
- z/IPL, Boot Loaders and System Architecture
boot opt i ons, Addi t i onal Boot Opt i ons
- from network, Additional Boot Options
- mediacheck, Additional Boot Options
- serial mode, Additional Boot Options
- UTF-8, Additional Boot Options
- text mode, Additional Boot Options
602
boot process, Boot Process, I ni t , and Shut down, A Det ai l ed Look at t he Boot
Process
- (see also boot loaders)
- chain loading, GRUB and the Boot Process on BIOS-based x86 Systems, GRUB
and the Boot Process on UEFI-based x86 Systems
- direct loading, GRUB and the Boot Process on BIOS-based x86 Systems, GRUB
and the Boot Process on UEFI-based x86 Systems
- for x86, A Detailed Look at the Boot Process
- stages of, The Boot Process, A Detailed Look at the Boot Process
- /sbin/init command, The /sbin/init Program
- boot loader, The GRUB boot loader for x86 systems
- EFI shell, UEFI-based x86 Systems
- kernel, The Kernel
boot i ng
- emergency mode, Booting into Emergency Mode
- installation program
- x86, AMD64 and Intel 64, Booting the Installation Program on x86, AMD64,
and Intel 64 Systems
- rescue mode, Booting into Rescue Mode
- single-user mode, Booting into Single-User Mode
boot i ng t he i nst al l at i on program
- IBM System p , Booting the Installer
C
cancel i ng t he i nst al l at i on, I nst al l i ng f rom a DVD, I nst al l i ng f rom a DVD
CD/DVD medi a
- booting, Booting the Installer, Booting the Installer
- making, Making Media
- (see also ISO images)
Chai n l oadi ng, The St orage Devi ces Sel ect i on Screen , Assi gn St orage Devi ces ,
Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up, Advanced Boot Loader Conf i gurat i on, The St orage
Devi ces Sel ect i on Screen , Assi gn St orage Devi ces , Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up
chkconf i g , Runl evel Ut i l i t i es
- (see also services)
cl ock, Ti me Zone Conf i gurat i on, Ti me Zone Conf i gurat i on, Ti me Zone
Conf i gurat i on
CMS conf i gurat i on f i l es, Paramet er and Conf i gurat i on Fi l es
- sample CMS configuration file, Sample Parameter File and CMS Configuration File
conf i gurat i on
- clock, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone Configuration
- GRUB, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Configuration
- hardware, System Specifications List
- time, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone Configuration
- time zone, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone
Configuration
conf i gurat i on f i l es
- CMS configuration files, Parameter and Configuration Files
Index
603
- the z/VM configuration file, The z/VM Configuration File
consol es, vi rt ual , A Not e About Vi rt ual Consol es, A Not e About Li nux Vi rt ual
Consol es
cont ent servi ce, Choose Servi ce
D
DASD i nst al l at i on, I nst al l i ng f rom a Hard Dri ve
DHCP ( Dynami c Host Conf i gurat i on Prot ocol ) , Set t i ng t he Host name, Set t i ng t he
Host name, Set t i ng t he Host name
Di sk Part i t i oner
- adding partitions, Adding Partitions, Adding Partitions, Adding Partitions
di sk part i t i oni ng, Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up, Di sk Part i t i oni ng Set up, Di sk
Part i t i oni ng Set up
di sk space, Do You Have Enough Di sk Space?, Do You Have Enough Di sk Space?
dri ver di sket t e, St art i ng t he I nst al l at i on Program
dri vers
- adding
- rescue mode, Using Rescue Mode to Fix or Work Around Driver Problems
- removing
- replacing
DVD
- ATAPI, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD
- IDE, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD
- installation from, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD
- SCSI, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD
DVD medi a
- downloading, Obtaining Red Hat Enterprise Linux
- (see also ISO images)
E
EFI shel l , UEFI - based x86 Syst ems
emergency mode, Boot i ng i nt o Emergency Mode
Encrypt i on
- Backup passphrases
- Creating backup passphrases, Creating and Saving Backup Passphrases
- Saving backup passphrases, Creating and Saving Backup Passphrases
- Passphrases
- Saving passphrases, Saving Passphrases
ext 2 ( see f i l e syst ems)
604
ext ended part i t i ons, Part i t i ons Wi t hi n Part i t i ons An Overvi ew of Ext ended
Part i t i ons
Ext ensi bl e Fi rmware I nt erf ace shel l ( see EFI shel l )
F
FCoE
- installation, Advanced Storage Options , Advanced Storage Options , Advanced
Storage Options
f coe
- via Kickstart, Kickstart Options
FCP devi ces, FCP Devi ces
f i l e syst em
- formats, overview of, It is Not What You Write, it is How You Write It
f i l e syst em t ypes, Fi l e Syst em Types, Fi l e Syst em Types, Fi l e Syst em Types
f i l e syst ems
- ext2, Installing from a Hard Drive, Installing from a Hard Drive, Installing from a Hard
Drive
Drive
Drive
- vfat, Installing from a Hard Drive, Installing from a Hard Drive, Installing from a Hard
Drive
f i rewal l
- documentation, Other Technical Documentation
Fi rst boot , Fi rst boot
- content service, Choose Service
- RHN setup, Subscription Management Registration
- subscriptions, Configuring the Subscription Service
- users, Create User
- via Kickstart, Kickstart Options
FTP
- installation, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or
HTTPS, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS,
Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
G
GRUB, x86 , AMD6 4 , and I nt el 6 4 Boot Loader Conf i gurat i on, Boot Loaders and
Syst em Archi t ect ure, The GRUB boot l oader f or x86 syst ems
- additional resources, Additional Resources
- installed documentation, Installed Documentation
- useful websites, Useful Websites
- alternatives to, Alternative Boot Loaders
Index
605
- boot process, GRUB and the Boot Process on BIOS-based x86 Systems, GRUB and
the Boot Process on UEFI-based x86 Systems
- Changing Runlevels at Boot Time, Changing Runlevels at Boot Time
- changing runlevels with, GRUB Interfaces
- commands, GRUB Commands
- configuration, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Configuration
- configuration file
- /boot/grub/grub.conf , Configuration File Structure
- structure, Configuration File Structure
- definition of, GRUB
- features, Features of GRUB
- installing, Installing GRUB
- interfaces, GRUB Interfaces
- command line, GRUB Interfaces
- menu, GRUB Interfaces
- menu entry editor, GRUB Interfaces
- order of, Interfaces Load Order
- menu configuration file, GRUB Menu Configuration File
- directives, Configuration File Directives
- role in boot process, The GRUB boot loader for x86 systems
- terminology, GRUB Terminology
- devices, Device Names
- files, File Names and Blocklists
- root file system, The Root File System and GRUB
grub. conf , Conf i gurat i on Fi l e St ruct ure
- (see also GRUB)
H
hal t , Shut t i ng Down
- (see also shutdown)
Hard di sk
- initializing, Initializing the Hard Disk, Initializing the Hard Disk, Initializing the Hard
Disk
hard di sk
- basic concepts, Hard Disk Basic Concepts
- extended partitions, Partitions Within Partitions An Overview of Extended
Partitions
- file system formats, It is Not What You Write, it is How You Write It
- partition introduction, Partitions: Turning One Drive Into Many
- partition types, Partitions: Turning One Drive Into Many
- partitioning of, An Introduction to Disk Partitions
hard dri ve i nst al l at i on, I nst al l i ng f rom a Hard Dri ve, I nst al l i ng f rom a Hard Dri ve,
I nst al l i ng f rom a Hard Dri ve
- preparing for, Preparing for a Hard Drive Installation, Preparing for a Hard Drive
Installation, Preparing for a Hard Drive Installation
hardware
- compatibility, Is Your Hardware Compatible?
606
- configuration, System Specifications List
- support, Supported Installation Hardware, Supported Installation Hardware
hardware preparat i on, I BM Power Syst ems servers, Preparat i on f or I BM
Power Syst ems servers
HMC vt erm, Usi ng t he HMC vt erm
host name, Set t i ng t he Host name, Set t i ng t he Host name, Set t i ng t he Host name
HTTP
- installation, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or
HTTPS, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS,
Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
I
i ni t command, The /sbi n/i ni t Program
- configuration files
- /etc/inittab , SysV Init Runlevels
- role in boot process, The /sbin/init Program
- runlevels
- directories for, SysV Init Runlevels
- runlevels accessed by, Runlevels
- SysV init
- definition of, SysV Init Runlevels
i nst al l l og f i l e
- /root/install.log , Installing Packages
i nst al l at i on
- aborting, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD
- disk space, Do You Have Enough Disk Space?, Do You Have Enough Disk Space?
- DVD, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD
- from network, Additional Boot Options
- FTP, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS,
Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS, Preparing
for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
- GUI, Installing Using Anaconda, Installing Using Anaconda, Installation Phase 3:
Installing Using Anaconda
- hard drive, Preparing for a Hard Drive Installation, Installing from a Hard Drive,
Preparing for a Hard Drive Installation, Installing from a Hard Drive, Preparing for a
Hard Drive Installation, Installing from a Hard Drive
- HTTP, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS,
Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS, Preparing
for a Network Installation, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
- keyboard navigation, Using the Keyboard to Navigate, Using the Keyboard to
Navigate, Using the Keyboard to Navigate
- kickstart (see kickstart installations)
- mediacheck, Additional Boot Options
- method
- DVD, Selecting an Installation Method
- hard drive, Selecting an Installation Method
- NFS image, Selecting an Installation Method
Index
607
- selecting, Selecting an Installation Method
- URL, Selecting an Installation Method
- network, Preparing for a Network Installation, Preparing for a Network Installation,
Preparing for a Network Installation
- NFS, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via NFS, Preparing for a
Network Installation, Installing via NFS, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing
via NFS
- server information, Installing via NFS, Installing via NFS, Installing via NFS
- partitioning, Creating a Custom Layout or Modifying the Default Layout , Creating a
Custom Layout or Modifying the Default Layout , Creating a Custom Layout or
Modifying the Default Layout
- program
- graphical user interface, The Graphical Installation Program User Interface,
The Graphical Installation Program User Interface, The Graphical
Installation Program User Interface
- starting, Starting the Installation Program
- text mode user interface, The Text Mode Installation Program User Interface,
The Text Mode Installation Program User Interface, The Text Mode
Installation Program User Interface
- virtual consoles, A Note About Virtual Consoles, A Note About Linux Virtual
Consoles
- serial mode, Additional Boot Options
- UTF-8, Additional Boot Options
- starting, Installing from a DVD, Installing from a DVD
- text mode, Additional Boot Options
i nst al l at i on met hod
- selecting, Installation Method, Installation Method, Installation Method
i nst al l at i on program
- x86, AMD64 and Intel 64
- booting, Booting the Installation Program on x86, AMD64, and Intel 64
Systems
i nst al l i ng packages, Package Group Sel ect i on, Package Group Sel ect i on, Package
Group Sel ect i on
I PL NWSSTG, Unabl e t o I PL f rom *NWSSTG
I Pv4 , Set t i ng t he Host name, Set t i ng t he Host name, Set t i ng t he Host name
i scsi
- installation, Advanced Storage Options , Advanced Storage Options , Advanced
Storage Options
I SO i mages
K
kdump, Kdump
kernel
- role in boot process, The Kernel
kernel opt i ons, Kernel Opt i ons
608
keyboard
- configuration, Keyboard Configuration, Keyboard Configuration
- navigating the installation program using, Using the Keyboard to Navigate, Using
the Keyboard to Navigate, Using the Keyboard to Navigate
keymap
- selecting language, Language Selection, Language Selection
- selecting type of keyboard, Keyboard Configuration, Keyboard Configuration
Ki ckst art , Aut omat i ng t he I nst al l at i on wi t h Ki ckst art , Aut omat i ng t he I nst al l at i on
wi t h Ki ckst art
ki ckst art
- how the file is found, Starting a Kickstart Installation
- parameters for System z parameter files, Parameters for Kickstart Installations
- subscriptions, Running subscription-manager as a Post-Install Script
Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or , Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or
- %post script, Post-Installation Script
- %pre script, Pre-Installation Script
- authentication options, Authentication
- basic options, Basic Configuration
- boot loader, Boot Loader Options
- boot loader options, Boot Loader Options
- Display configuration, Display Configuration
- firewall configuration, Firewall Configuration
- installation method selection, Installation Method
- interactive, Basic Configuration
- keyboard, Basic Configuration
- language, Basic Configuration
- network configuration, Network Configuration
- package selection, Package Selection
- partitioning, Partition Information
- software RAID, Creating Software RAID Partitions
- preview, Kickstart Configurator
- reboot, Basic Configuration
- root password, Basic Configuration
- encrypt, Basic Configuration
- saving, Saving the File
- SELinux configuration, SELinux Configuration
- text mode installation, Basic Configuration
- time zone, Basic Configuration
ki ckst art f i l e
- %include, Kickstart Options
- %post, Post-installation Script
- %pre, Pre-installation Script
- auth, Kickstart Options
- authconfig, Kickstart Options
- autopart, Kickstart Options
- autostep, Kickstart Options
- bootloader, Kickstart Options
- CD-ROM-based, Creating Kickstart Boot Media
- clearpart, Kickstart Options
- cmdline, Kickstart Options
Index
609
- creating, Kickstart Options
- device, Kickstart Options
- diskette-based, Creating Kickstart Boot Media
- driverdisk, Kickstart Options
- fcoe, Kickstart Options
- firewall, Kickstart Options
- firstboot, Kickstart Options
- flash-based, Creating Kickstart Boot Media
- format of, Creating the Kickstart File
- graphical, Kickstart Options
- halt, Kickstart Options
- ignoredisk, Kickstart Options
- include contents of another file, Kickstart Options
- install, Kickstart Options
- installation methods, Kickstart Options
- interactive, Kickstart Options
- iscsi, Kickstart Options
- iscsiname, Kickstart Options
- keyboard, Kickstart Options
- lang, Kickstart Options
- langsupport, Kickstart Options
- logging, Kickstart Options
- logvol, Kickstart Options
- mediacheck, Kickstart Options
- mouse, Kickstart Options
- network, Kickstart Options
- network-based, Making the Kickstart File Available on the Network, Making the
Installation Tree Available
- options, Kickstart Options
- partitioning examples, Advanced Partitioning Example
- package selection specification, Package Selection
- part, Kickstart Options
- partition, Kickstart Options
- post-installation configuration, Post-installation Script
- poweroff, Kickstart Options
- pre-installation configuration, Pre-installation Script
- raid , Kickstart Options
- reboot, Kickstart Options
- rootpw, Kickstart Options
- selinux, Kickstart Options
- services , Kickstart Options
- shutdown, Kickstart Options
- skipx, Kickstart Options
- sshpw, Kickstart Options
- text, Kickstart Options
- timezone, Kickstart Options
- unsupported_hardware, Kickstart Options
- upgrade, Kickstart Options
- user, Kickstart Options
- vnc, Kickstart Options
- volgroup, Kickstart Options
- what it looks like, Creating the Kickstart File
- winbind, Kickstart Options
- xconfig, Kickstart Options
- zerombr, Kickstart Options
610
- zfcp, Kickstart Options
Ki ckst art f i l e
- group, Kickstart Options
ki ckst art i nst al l at i ons, Ki ckst art I nst al l at i ons
- CD-ROM-based, Creating Kickstart Boot Media
- diskette-based, Creating Kickstart Boot Media
- file format, Creating the Kickstart File
- file locations, Making the Kickstart File Available
- flash-based, Creating Kickstart Boot Media
- installation tree, Making the Installation Tree Available
- LVM, Kickstart Options
- network-based, Making the Kickstart File Available on the Network, Making the
Installation Tree Available
- starting, Starting a Kickstart Installation
- from a boot CD-ROM, Starting a Kickstart Installation
L
l anguage
- configuration, Language Selection, Language Selection
- selecting, Language Selection, Language Selection, Language Selection
l og f i l es, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em,
- kickstart installations, What are Kickstart Installations?
LVM
- logical volume, Understanding LVM
- physical volume, Understanding LVM
- understanding, Understanding LVM
- volume group, Understanding LVM
- with kickstart, Kickstart Options
M
mast er boot record, x86 , AMD6 4 , and I nt el 6 4 Boot Loader Conf i gurat i on
Mast er Boot Record, Unabl e t o Boot i nt o Red Hat Ent erpri se Li nux ( see MBR)
- reinstalling, Reinstalling the Boot Loader
MBR
- definition of, A Detailed Look at the Boot Process, BIOS-based x86 Systems
- installing boot loader on, Advanced Boot Loader Configuration
modem, Set t i ng t he Host name, Set t i ng t he Host name, Set t i ng t he Host name
mount poi nt s
- partitions and, Disk Partitions and Mount Points
Mul t i pat h devi ces
Index
611
- Mixing with non-multipath devices, Disk Partitioning Setup, Disk Partitioning Setup,
Disk Partitioning Setup
N
net work
- installations
- FTP, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or
HTTPS, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
- HTTP, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or
HTTPS, Installing via FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS
- NFS, Installing via NFS, Installing via NFS, Installing via NFS
Net work bondi ng, Conf i guri ng a Bonded I nt erf ace
Net work boot i nst al l at i ons
- boot message, custom, Adding a Custom Boot Message
- configuration, Network Boot Configuration
- overview, Setting Up an Installation Server
- performing, Performing the Installation
- setting up the network server, Setting Up the Network Server
net work i nst al l at i on
- performing, Performing a Network Installation, Performing a Network Installation,
Performing a Network Installation
- preparing for, Preparing for a Network Installation, Preparing for a Network
Installation, Preparing for a Network Installation
NFS
- installation, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing via NFS, Preparing for a
Network Installation, Installing via NFS, Preparing for a Network Installation, Installing
via NFS
NFS ( Net work Fi l e Syst em)
- install from, Performing a Network Installation, Performing a Network Installation
NTP ( Net work Ti me Prot ocol ) , Ti me Zone Conf i gurat i on, Ti me Zone Conf i gurat i on,
Dat e and Ti me
nt sysv , Runl evel Ut i l i t i es
O
OpenSSH, Ot her Techni cal Document at i on
- (see also SSH)
OS/4 00, Boot Loaders and Syst em Archi t ect ure
P
package groups, Cust omi zi ng t he Sof t ware Sel ect i on , Cust omi zi ng t he Sof t ware
Sel ect i on , Cust omi zi ng t he Sof t ware Sel ect i on
packages
- groups, Package Group Selection, Package Group Selection, Package Group
Selection
612
- selecting, Package Group Selection, Package Group Selection, Package
Group Selection
- installing, Package Group Selection, Package Group Selection, Package Group
Selection
- installing with yum, Installing Packages With yum
- selecting, Package Group Selection, Package Group Selection, Package Group
Selection
paramet er f i l es, Paramet er and Conf i gurat i on Fi l es
- installation network parameters, Installation Network Parameters
- kickstart parameters, Parameters for Kickstart Installations
- loader parameters, Loader Parameters
- required parameters, Required Parameters
- sample parameter file, Sample Parameter File and CMS Configuration File
- VNC parameters, VNC and X11 Parameters
- X11 parameters, VNC and X11 Parameters
parm f i l es ( see paramet er f i l es)
part ed part i t i oni ng ut i l i t y, Creat e new part i t i on( s)
part i t i on
- extended, Partitions Within Partitions An Overview of Extended Partitions
part i t i oni ng, Creat i ng a Cust om Layout or Modi f yi ng t he Def aul t Layout , Creat i ng
a Cust om Layout or Modi f yi ng t he Def aul t Layout , Creat i ng a Cust om Layout or
Modi f yi ng t he Def aul t Layout
- automatic, Disk Partitioning Setup, Disk Partitioning Setup, Disk Partitioning Setup
- basic concepts, An Introduction to Disk Partitions
- creating new, Adding Partitions, Adding Partitions, Adding Partitions
- destructive, Using Free Space from an Active Partition
- extended partitions, Partitions Within Partitions An Overview of Extended
Partitions
- how many partitions, Partitions: Turning One Drive Into Many, How Many Partitions?
- introduction to, Partitions: Turning One Drive Into Many
- making room for partitions, Making Room For Red Hat Enterprise Linux
- mount points and, Disk Partitions and Mount Points
- naming partitions, Partition Naming Scheme
- non-destructive, Using Free Space from an Active Partition
- numbering partitions, Partition Naming Scheme
- other operating systems, Disk Partitions and Other Operating Systems
- primary partitions, Partitions: Turning One Drive Into Many
- recommended, Recommended Partitioning Scheme, Recommended Partitioning
Scheme
- types of partitions, Partitions: Turning One Drive Into Many
- using free space, Using Unpartitioned Free Space
- using in-use partition, Using Free Space from an Active Partition
- using unused partition, Using Space from an Unused Partition
Part i t i oni ng , Creat i ng a Cust om Layout or Modi f yi ng t he Def aul t Layout , Creat i ng
a Cust om Layout or Modi f yi ng t he Def aul t Layout , Creat i ng a Cust om Layout or
Modi f yi ng t he Def aul t Layout
- adding partitions
Index
613
Passphrases
- Block device encryption passphrases
- Creating backup block device encryption passphrases, Creating and
Saving Backup Passphrases
- Saving backup block device encryption passphrases, Creating and
Saving Backup Passphrases
- Saving block device encryption passphrases, Saving Passphrases
password
- boot loader, x86, AMD64, and Intel 64 Boot Loader Configuration
- setting root, Set the Root Password, Set the Root Password, Set the Root Password
Pl anni ng f or I nst al l at i on
- System z, Pre-Installation
Power Syst ems rescue mode, Rescue Mode on Power Syst ems servers
- accessing SCSI utilities, Special Considerations for Accessing the SCSI Utilities from
Rescue Mode
program. l og, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em,
programs
- running at boot time, Running Additional Programs at Boot Time
Pul seAudi o, Ot her Techni cal Document at i on
PXE ( Pre- boot eXecut i on Envi ronment ) , Boot i ng f rom t he Net work Usi ng PXE
R
RAI D
- hardware, RAID and Other Disk Devices , RAID and Other Disk Devices
- kickstart installations, Kickstart Options
- Kickstart Configurator, Creating Software RAID Partitions
- software, RAID and Other Disk Devices , RAID and Other Disk Devices
- system unbootable after disk failure, Installing GRUB
- trouble booting from drive attached to RAID card, Are You Unable to Boot With Your
RAID Card?
rc. l ocal
- modifying, Running Additional Programs at Boot Time
rc. seri al , Runni ng Addi t i onal Programs at Boot Ti me
- (see also setserial command)
Red Hat Subscri pt i on Management , Subscri pt i on Management Regi st rat i on
regi st rat i on
- with Firstboot, Set Up Software Updates
- with kickstart, Running subscription-manager as a Post-Install Script
removi ng
- Red Hat Enterprise Linux
- from IBM System z, Removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux from IBM System z
- from x86-based systems, Removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux From x86-
614
based Systems
rescue di scs, Boot i ng Your Comput er wi t h t he Rescue Mode
rescue mode, Rescue Mode, Boot i ng Your Comput er wi t h t he Rescue Mode
- definition of, Booting into Rescue Mode
- utilities available, Booting into Rescue Mode
rescue mode, Power Syst ems, Rescue Mode on Power Syst ems servers
- accessing SCSI utilities, Special Considerations for Accessing the SCSI Utilities from
Rescue Mode
RHN set up
- selecting the subscription service, Subscription Management Registration
root / part i t i on
Partitioning Scheme
root password, Set t he Root Password, Set t he Root Password, Set t he Root
Password
runl evel 1, Boot i ng i nt o Si ngl e- User Mode
runl evel s ( see i ni t command)
- changing with GRUB, GRUB Interfaces
- configuration of, Runlevel Utilities
S
scp, Ot her Techni cal Document at i on
- (see also SSH)
screenshot s
- during installation, Screenshots During Installation
sel ect i ng
- packages, Package Group Selection, Package Group Selection, Package Group
Selection
SELi nux
seri al consol e, Conf i guri ng t he I nt erf ace
seri al port s ( see set seri al command)
servi ces
- configuring with chkconfig , Runlevel Utilities
- configuring with ntsysv , Runlevel Utilities
- configuring with Services Configuration Tool , Runlevel Utilities
Servi ces Conf i gurat i on Tool , Runl evel Ut i l i t i es
set seri al command
- configuring, Running Additional Programs at Boot Time
Index
615
shut down, Shut t i ng Down
- (see also halt)
si ngl e- user mode, Boot i ng i nt o Si ngl e- User Mode
ssh
- starting ssh at boot time, Enabling Remote Access with ssh
SSH ( Secure SHel l )
st art i ng
- installation, Starting the Installation Program, Installing from a DVD, Installing from
a DVD
st eps
- booting with CD-ROM or DVD, Choose a Boot Method
- disk space, Do You Have Enough Disk Space?, Do You Have Enough Disk Space?
- hardware compatibility, Is Your Hardware Compatible?
- IBM Power Systems servers hardware preparation, Preparation for IBM
Power Systems servers
- installing from DVD, Choose a Boot Method
- supported hardware, Supported Installation Hardware, Supported Installation
Hardware
st orage devi ces
- basic storage devices, Storage Devices, Storage Devices, Storage Devices
- specialized storage devices, Storage Devices, Storage Devices, Storage Devices
st orage. l og, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em,
subscri pt i on
- with kickstart, Running subscription-manager as a Post-Install Script
subscri pt i on servi ce, Unregi st eri ng f rom Red Hat Subscri pt i on Management
Servi ces
subscri pt i ons
- with firstboot, Configuring the Subscription Service
swap part i t i on
Partitioning Scheme
sysl og, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em, Troubl eshoot i ng
I nst al l at i on on an I BM Power Syst ems server, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on I BM
Syst em z, Loggi ng t o a Remot e Syst em Duri ng t he I nst al l at i on
syst em recovery, Basi c Syst em Recovery
- adding drivers, Using Rescue Mode to Fix or Work Around Driver Problems
- common problems, Common Problems
- forgetting the root password, Root Password
- hardware/software problems, Hardware/Software Problems
- reinstalling the boot loader, Reinstalling the Boot Loader
616
- unable to boot into Red Hat Enterprise Linux, Unable to Boot into Red Hat
Enterprise Linux
- removing drivers, Using Rescue Mode to Fix or Work Around Driver Problems
- replacing drivers, Using Rescue Mode to Fix or Work Around Driver Problems
syst em- conf i g- ki ckst art ( see Ki ckst art Conf i gurat or )
SysV i ni t ( see i ni t command)
T
TCP/I P conf i gurat i on, Perf ormi ng a Net work I nst al l at i on, Perf ormi ng a Net work
I nst al l at i on, Perf ormi ng a Net work I nst al l at i on
Tel net , Enabl i ng Remot e Access wi t h Tel net
t ext i nt erf ace, Conf i guri ng t he I nt erf ace
t f t p , St art i ng t he t f t p Server
t i me zone
- configuration, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone Configuration, Time Zone
Configuration
t raceback messages
- saving traceback messages without removable media, Saving Traceback Messages,
Saving Traceback Messages, Saving Traceback Messages
t roubl eshoot i ng, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em,
- after the installation, Problems After Installation, Problems After Installation,
Problems After Installation
- Apache HTTP Server stops responding during startup, Apache HTTP
Server or Sendmail Stops Responding During Startup, Apache HTTP Server
or Sendmail Stops Responding During Startup, Apache HTTP Server or
Sendmail Stops Responding During Startup
- booting into a graphical environment, Booting into a Graphical
Environment, Booting into a Graphical Environment
- booting into GNOME or KDE, Booting into a Graphical Environment,
Booting into a Graphical Environment
- booting into the X Window System, Booting into a Graphical Environment,
Booting into a Graphical Environment
- graphical GRUB screen, Trouble With the Graphical GRUB Screen on an
x86-based System?
- graphical login, Remote Graphical Desktops and XDMCP
- logging in, Problems When You Try to Log In, Problems When You Try to
Log In, Problems When You Try to Log In
- printers, Your Printer Does Not Work, Your Printer Does Not Work, Your
Printer Does Not Work
- RAM not recognized, Is Your RAM Not Being Recognized?
- Sendmail stops responding during startup, Apache HTTP Server or
Sendmail Stops Responding During Startup, Apache HTTP Server or
Sendmail Stops Responding During Startup, Apache HTTP Server or
Sendmail Stops Responding During Startup
- X (X Window System), Problems with the X Window System (GUI), Problems
with the X Window System (GUI)
- X server crashes, Problems with the X Server Crashing and Non-Root
Users, Problems with the X Server Crashing and Non-Root Users
Index
617
- beginning the installation, Trouble Beginning the Installation, Trouble Beginning the
Installation
- frame buffer, disabling, Problems with Booting into the Graphical
Installation, Problems with Booting into the Graphical Installation
- GUI installation method unavailable, Problems with Booting into the
Graphical Installation, Problems with Booting into the Graphical Installation
- booting, You Are Unable to Boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux, You Are Unable to Boot
Red Hat Enterprise Linux, You Are Unable to Boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux
- RAID cards, Are You Unable to Boot With Your RAID Card?
- signal 11 error, Is Your System Displaying Signal 11 Errors?, Is Your
System Displaying Signal 11 Errors?, Is Your System Displaying Signal 11
Errors?
- during the installation, Trouble During the Installation, Trouble During the
Installation, Trouble During the Installation
- completing partitions, Other Partitioning Problems, Other Partitioning
Problems for IBM Power Systems Users , Other Partitioning Problems
- drive must have gpt disk label, The "drive must have a GPT disk label"
Error Message
- No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux error message, The
"No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux" Error Message, The
"No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux" Error Message, The
"No devices found to install Red Hat Enterprise Linux" Error Message
- partition tables, Trouble with Partition Tables, Trouble with Partition Tables
- saving traceback messages without removable media, Saving Traceback
Messages, Saving Traceback Messages, Saving Traceback Messages
- using remaining hard drive space, Using Remaining Space
- DVD failure
- DVD verification, Additional Boot Options
U
UEFI ( Uni f i ed Ext ensi bl e Fi rmware I nt erf ace) , Boot i ng t he I nst al l er
uni nst al l i ng
- from IBM System z, Removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux from IBM System z
- from x86-based systems, Removing Red Hat Enterprise Linux From x86-based
Systems
unregi st er, Unregi st eri ng f rom Red Hat Subscri pt i on Management Servi ces
upgrade
- to Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7, Upgrading Your Current System
- using Preupgrade Assistant, Upgrading Your Current System
- using Red Hat Upgrade, Upgrading Your Current System
USB f l ash medi a
- making, Making Media
USB medi a
- booting, Booting the Installer, Booting the Installer
user i nt erf ace, graphi cal
618
- installation program, The Graphical Installation Program User Interface, The
Graphical Installation Program User Interface, The Graphical Installation Program
User Interface
user i nt erf ace, t ext mode
- installation program, The Text Mode Installation Program User Interface, The Text
Mode Installation Program User Interface, The Text Mode Installation Program User
Interface
users
- creating, Create User
V
vf at ( see f i l e syst ems)
vi rt ual consol es, A Not e About Vi rt ual Consol es, A Not e About Li nux Vi rt ual
Consol es
Vi rt ual i zat i on
VNC ( Vi rt ual Net work Comput i ng) , Enabl i ng Remot e Access t o t he I nst al l at i on
Syst em
- enabling, Enabling Remote Access with VNC
- installing client, Enabling Remote Access to the Installation System
- listening mode, Connecting the Installation System to a VNC Listener
X
XDMCP, Remot e Graphi cal Deskt ops and XDMCP
Xorg, Ot her Techni cal Document at i on
Y
yaboot , Boot Loaders and Syst em Archi t ect ure
yaboot i nst al l at i on server, Boot i ng f rom t he Net work Usi ng a yaboot I nst al l at i on
Server
yum
- installing with yum, Installing Packages With yum
yum. l og, Troubl eshoot i ng I nst al l at i on on an I nt el or AMD Syst em,
Z
z/I PL, Boot Loaders and Syst em Archi t ect ure
Index
619

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Installation Guide en US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Installation Guide en US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Installation Guide en US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Red Hat Engineering Cont ent ServicesRdiger Landmann

Jack Reed Pet r Boko Tom apek

You might also like